RSS

Blog

Schlage Key Systems Guide: Master Keying, Everest 29, Primus XP, SFIC, FSIC and SL Cylinders

A Schlage key system is not just a set of keys and locks. It is an access management architecture that determines who can open which doors, how easily keys can be duplicated or controlled, whether a building can be rekeyed without disassembling every lock, and what happens when a key is lost. Understanding the options before specifying cylinders prevents the two most common and most expensive mistakes: ordering SFIC cores when Grade 1 Security is required, and specifying open keyways when restricted key control is the actual need.

SecurityParts.com carries Schlage cylinders and cylinder-related parts for the full range of Schlage commercial hardware including ND Series and ALX Series cylindrical lock cylinders, L Series mortise lock cylinders, B Series deadbolt cylinders, rim cylinders for Von Duprin exit devices, and all related SFIC and FSIC tailpiece components. Contact the team at 845-935-0301 or the SecurityParts.com contact page for cylinder format and keyway identification support.

 

How Master Keying Works

The Key Hierarchy: Change Key Through Grand Master Key

A Schlage master key system assigns each cylinder at least two levels of operation. The change key opens only that specific cylinder and no other. The master key opens every cylinder within a defined group. In a building with multiple groups, a grand master key opens all cylinders across all groups. Buildings with multiple buildings or campuses may add a great grand master key above the grand master level.

The pinning of each cylinder accommodates both the change key and the master key by using master pins between the driver pins and the plug pins. The master pin creates a second shear line inside the cylinder at a different position than the standard shear line created by the change key cuts. When the master key is inserted, the master pins align the second shear line with the shear point, allowing the plug to rotate. Each cylinder has a unique change key but shares the master pin arrangement with every other cylinder in its group.

 

Security Trade-Off: Master Keying Reduces Key Change Combinations

Every level of master keying added to a key system reduces the total number of available key combinations. This is because master pins occupy space in the pin chamber that would otherwise be used for change key pins. The more levels of master keying in the system, the fewer unique change key combinations are available. On a large campus with many master key levels, the number of usable change key combinations can be significantly reduced compared to a non-master-keyed system.

Schlage's Maximum Adjacent Cut Specification (MACS) limits how different adjacent cuts on a key can be, preventing keys that are mechanically difficult to cut or that would allow picking by progressive picking. A properly designed master key system stays within MACS across all key levels. On large systems, a qualified locksmith or key system consultant should design the key system to ensure enough unique combinations are available for the number of openings and key levels needed.

 

Construction master keying: what it is and why it matters at project completion. Construction keying is a temporary arrangement where all cylinders share a common construction master key during the building phase, allowing contractors, inspectors, and trades to access the building with a single key. At project completion, the construction cylinders are removed and replaced with the permanent key system. Schlage offers disposable plastic construction cores (discarded at turnover) and refundable construction cores (returned for credit). Construction keying is not available for Primus XP cylinders because the factory-milled Primus side bitting is a unique permanent feature that cannot be used as a shared construction key.
 

The Everest 29 Keyway Family: Open vs Restricted

What Everest 29 Is and Why It Replaced Classic Keyways

Everest 29 is Schlage's current standard keyway family for commercial mechanical cylinders, introduced in August 2012 and patent-protected until 2029. It uses an undercut key design and includes a check pin in the cylinder plug that must align with a notch in the key undercut during key insertion. This check pin provides a level of physical security above the classic Schlage C keyway by making it harder to pick and impossible to use an unmodified legacy key blank in an Everest 29 cylinder.

The Everest 29 family has three sub-families: S, T, and R. All three are backward compatible with the legacy Everest B, C, and D families respectively, meaning a newer Everest 29 key will operate an older legacy cylinder, but an older legacy key will not operate an Everest 29 cylinder.

 

S Family: Open Keyways for Standard Commercial Applications

Everest 29 S family keyways are open, meaning no authorization is required to purchase key blanks or cylinders. They are available through all Schlage commercial distributors. Key blanks can be cut at any locksmith counter that stocks them. The S family provides the standard Everest 29 security level with the check pin, and all Everest 29 cylinders ship with S123 as the default keyway for stocked products.

Open S keyways are appropriate for building interiors where key control is managed through administrative procedures rather than blank restriction, and for large systems where the volume of keys required makes restricted blanks impractical for daily operations. S family cylinders can be upgraded to Primus XP security at any time by replacing cylinders without replacing keys on the remaining conventional locks.

 

T Family: Restricted Keyways for Enhanced Key Control

Everest 29 T family keyways are restricted. The end user must sign a letter of authorization, and key blanks and cylinders are drop-shipped directly to the authorized user or an authorized location. T keyways are not stocked at locksmith counters or distribution points. This makes unauthorized key duplication significantly harder than with S keyways, because a person who obtains a T keyway key cannot walk into a locksmith and have it duplicated. T family cylinders provide the same Everest 29 check pin security as S family and can also be upgraded to Primus XP.

 

R Family: Restricted Keyways for SFIC and SL Systems

Everest 29 R family keyways are used exclusively with SFIC cores and SL cylinders. The R keyway is restricted and is the foundation of a unified three-format key system when SL cylinders are used alongside SFIC cores. The R keyway has the same restriction requirements as the T family but is specifically designed for the A2 pinning style used in 7-pin SFIC cylinders and in the SL conventional and FSIC cylinders that unify the system.

 

Primus XP: High Security Cylinders and Geographic Exclusivity

How Primus XP Works

Primus XP adds a secondary, independent sidebar mechanism to the standard Everest 29 cylinder. The sidebar requires a factory-milled side bitting on the Primus key to engage a set of finger pins inside the cylinder. The plug can only rotate when both the standard pin tumbler mechanism (operated by the key cuts) and the sidebar mechanism (operated by the side bitting) are satisfied simultaneously. A pick set that defeats the pin tumbler mechanism does not defeat the sidebar, making Primus XP cylinders highly resistant to standard picking and bumping attacks.

Primus keys are factory-milled at the Schlage factory. They are never cut in the field. This means unauthorized key duplication through field cutting is not possible: a locksmith cannot cut a Primus key from a code or from a key impression without the factory authorization for that specific side bitting.

 

The Five Geographic Exclusivity Levels

The administrative security of the Primus XP system is the geographic exclusivity of the side bitting. Each Primus XP milling is assigned to a user at one of five exclusivity levels:

 

  • Zip code exclusivity: The user owns the only Primus XP milling in their zip code. No other institution or locksmith in that zip code can legally obtain that milling.
  • Area code exclusivity: The milling is exclusive within the user's telephone area code region.
  • Time zone exclusivity: The milling is exclusive across the user's time zone.
  • State exclusivity: The milling is exclusive across the entire state.
  • National exclusivity: The milling is owned exclusively at the national level by a single organization. No other user in the country can obtain this milling.

 

Higher exclusivity levels require a larger investment and are typically specified by healthcare systems, university campuses, government agencies, and financial institutions where key system integrity is a regulatory or liability requirement.

 

Primus keys are downward compatible with conventional cylinders. A Primus key will operate a conventional Everest 29 cylinder of the same keyway family. This means a building can be upgraded incrementally: install Primus XP cylinders at the highest-security openings while leaving conventional cylinders elsewhere, and the Primus key opens all of them. This eliminates the need for key system staff to carry separate keys during a phased upgrade, and it means the Primus investment protects the most critical openings without requiring a complete re-keying of the entire facility.
 

UL 437 Listed Primus XP Cylinders

The highest-security Primus XP cylinders carry a UL 437 listing, meaning they have been independently tested and certified as both pick-resistant and drill-resistant. UL 437 cylinders include hardened steel anti-drill pins in the pin chambers and are specifically tested to resist attack with common picking tools and power drill intrusion. UL 437 is specified by government agencies and high-security facilities where mechanical cylinder resistance to attack is a requirement rather than a preference. Browse Schlage Primus XP cylinder parts at SecurityParts.com.

 

Cylinder Formats: Conventional, FSIC, SFIC, and SL

Conventional Cylinders

A conventional cylinder is installed permanently in the lock body and can only be rekeyed by removing it from the lock and repinning the plug. This requires disassembling the lock or at least removing the cylinder from the lock case, which takes a few minutes per opening. Conventional cylinders maintain the full ANSI security grade of the lock, including Grade 1 Security when used with Schlage ND Series or L Series hardware. They are available in Everest 29 S and T open and restricted keyways and can be upgraded to Primus XP at any time.

 

FSIC: Full Size Interchangeable Core

FSIC (Full Size Interchangeable Core) cylinders use a control key to remove the entire cylinder core from the lock body in seconds without any disassembly. A new core with a different key combination can be inserted in the same motion. This makes rekeying an FSIC system dramatically faster than a conventional system on large facilities. The Schlage FSIC format is Schlage-proprietary: it is not cross-manufacturer interchangeable. With FSIC cylinders, the Schlage ND or L Series lock is ANSI Grade 1 Operational and Grade 2 Security. Browse Schlage FSIC tailpiece and cylinder parts at SecurityParts.com.

 

SFIC: Small Format Interchangeable Core

SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) uses the Best/Arrow standard plug format that originated in the mid-twentieth century as an industry-standard format adopted across many manufacturers. A control key removes the SFIC core from the lock in seconds, the same as FSIC, but the SFIC core is interchangeable across brands. This means an SFIC-based facility can change lock brands without replacing cylinders, and service shops with SFIC tooling can service any brand's SFIC hardware with the same equipment.

 

The SFIC security grade reduction that most specifiers miss. When SFIC cylinders are installed in a Schlage ND Series or L Series lock, the complete assembly is ANSI Grade 1 Operational but only Grade 3 Security. The SFIC format's cross-manufacturer interchangeability comes at a security cost that is published in Schlage's ANSI/BHMA certification data but is almost never explained at the point of sale. A facility that specifies SFIC for rekeying convenience on a Grade 1 specified project may be delivering a Grade 3 Security installation without knowing it. Specifiers who need Grade 1 Security across the complete assembly must use conventional, FSIC, or SL cylinders, not SFIC.
 

SL: The Three-Format Unifier

The Schlage SL cylinder is the solution to the most common key system problem on large campuses: a mix of lock brands and cylinder formats that cannot share a single key system. SL cylinders are available in conventional and FSIC formats but are keyed with the 7-pin A2 pinning style used in Schlage SFIC cylinders. This means SL conventional and FSIC cylinders share the same Everest 29 R keyway family as SFIC cores.

The practical result: an SFIC-based campus can add SL conventional cylinders in locks that require a non-SFIC format (mortise locks, certain hardware configurations, rim applications) without creating a second separate key system. Every opening on the campus operates on the same key. SL cylinders also support Primus XP geographic exclusivity and maintain Grade 1 Security, resolving the SFIC security grade problem for mixed-format campuses. This is the specification detail that makes the difference between a unified campus key system and a fragmented one with multiple key sets.

SL cylinder backward compatibility note: Everest 29 R restricted keyway SL cylinders in both conventional and FSIC formats are upgradeable to Primus XP. Legacy Everest B keyways can also be upgraded to Primus XP through SL cylinders in 7-pin conventional and FSIC formats. The upgrade path preserves key system continuity without requiring a complete facility re-key.
 

Choosing the Right Key System for Your Building

Small Building or Single Tenant: Conventional Open Keyway

A single-tenant office building, small retail location, or single-floor facility typically does not need restricted keyways or interchangeable cores. A conventional Everest 29 S family cylinder provides the check pin security of the Everest 29 family and the full Grade 1 Security of the Schlage ND or L Series lock. Rekeying requires removing cylinders, which is infrequent in a stable single-tenant environment. This is the lowest-cost configuration with the highest ANSI security grade.

 

Medium Building with Tenant Turnover: FSIC or Restricted Conventional

A mid-size office building with multiple tenants, a multifamily residential property with regular unit turnover, or a healthcare clinic with staff changes benefits from either FSIC cylinders (for fast rekeying without disassembly) or restricted conventional cylinders in T family keyways (for key control without the investment in interchangeable core infrastructure). FSIC allows a facilities manager to rekey an entire floor in an afternoon without a locksmith. Restricted T family keyways prevent former tenants or staff from duplicating their keys.

 

Large Campus or High Security: Primus XP with FSIC or SL

A university campus, hospital system, government building, or any facility where key system integrity is a regulatory or liability requirement should specify Primus XP cylinders at critical openings with FSIC or SL cylinders at standard openings. The Primus side bitting provides factory-controlled key duplication and geographic exclusivity at critical points. The FSIC or SL format allows fast rekeying across the standard openings. SL cylinders unify the key system if the campus has a mix of SFIC and non-SFIC hardware.

 

SFIC Campus with Mixed Hardware: SL as the Unifier

An SFIC-based campus that adds locks requiring conventional or FSIC format cylinders should specify SL cylinders for those openings rather than creating a second key system. SL cylinders share the Everest 29 R restricted keyway with SFIC cores, maintain Grade 1 Security, and support Primus XP upgrade paths. The entire campus operates on a single key, which simplifies key management, reduces key ring size, and eliminates the access issues that arise when staff carry multiple keys for different areas of the same facility.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage Cylinder Parts

SecurityParts.com documents the SFIC security grade reduction from Grade 1 to Grade 3 that most parts suppliers never explain, the SL cylinder as the three-format unifier for mixed campuses, the Primus XP five geographic exclusivity levels, and the construction keying options available for each cylinder format. This level of cylinder specification knowledge means you can call 845-935-0301 and get the right cylinder format and keyway confirmed before the order is placed, not after a wrong-part return.

Browse Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock cylinder and tailpiece parts, Schlage L Series mortise lock cylinder parts, Schlage rim cylinders for Von Duprin exit devices, and Schlage B Series deadbolt cylinder parts. Contact the team at 845-935-0301 or the SecurityParts.com contact page for key system and cylinder specification support.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage Key Systems

 

How does a Schlage master key system work?

Each cylinder is pinned with master pins that create a second shear line in addition to the standard shear line. The change key aligns the standard shear line and opens only that cylinder. The master key aligns the second shear line created by the master pins and opens every cylinder in the group. A grand master key adds a third level that opens all cylinders across all groups. Each additional master key level reduces the total number of available unique change key combinations because master pins occupy space in the pin chambers.

 

What is the difference between Everest 29 S, T, and R keyways?

S family: open keyways, no authorization required, available at all distributors. T family: restricted keyways, authorization required, key blanks drop-shipped directly to the authorized user, not available at locksmith counters. R family: restricted keyways used exclusively with SFIC cores and SL cylinders, sharing the Everest 29 R keyway across all three cylinder formats when SL unification is used. All three are backward compatible with the corresponding legacy Everest B, C, and D families respectively.

 

What is the Schlage Primus XP cylinder and what does geographic exclusivity mean?

Primus XP adds a secondary independent sidebar mechanism that requires a factory-milled side bitting on the key in addition to the standard key cuts. Both mechanisms must be satisfied simultaneously for the plug to rotate. Geographic exclusivity means each Primus milling is assigned to one user at one of five levels (zip code, area code, time zone, state, or national). At zip code exclusivity, no other institution or locksmith in that zip code can obtain the same milling. Primus keys are factory-milled only, never cut in the field.

 

What is the difference between SFIC and FSIC cylinders and which should I specify?

SFIC uses the cross-manufacturer Best/Arrow standard plug format. FSIC uses the Schlage-proprietary larger plug format. Both remove with a control key in seconds for fast rekeying. The critical difference: SFIC reduces the complete assembly to ANSI Grade 3 Security even though the lock body is Grade 1. FSIC reduces to Grade 2 Security. Conventional and SL cylinders maintain Grade 1 Security. Specify SFIC only where fast rekeying speed across multiple brands is required and Grade 3 Security is acceptable. Specify FSIC or SL where fast rekeying is needed and Grade 1 or Grade 2 Security must be maintained.

 

What is the Schlage SL cylinder and how does it unify a mixed key system?

The SL cylinder is available in conventional and FSIC formats but uses the 7-pin A2 pinning style of SFIC cylinders, sharing the Everest 29 R keyway family across all three formats. An SFIC-based campus can add SL conventional or FSIC cylinders where non-SFIC format is required without creating a second key system. All openings operate on the same key. SL maintains Grade 1 Security and supports Primus XP geographic exclusivity, resolving both the mixed-format and the SFIC security grade problems simultaneously.

 

What is construction keying and how does it work on a Schlage system?

Construction keying assigns all cylinders a temporary common construction master key during the building phase so contractors can access all openings with one key. At project completion the construction cylinders are replaced with the permanent key system. Schlage offers disposable plastic construction cores and refundable construction cores. Construction keying is not available for Primus XP cylinders because the factory-milled Primus side bitting is a unique permanent feature that cannot serve as a shared construction key.

 

Are Everest 29 keyways backward compatible with older Everest keyways?

Yes, but only in one direction. Everest 29 S, T, and R keys operate the corresponding legacy Everest C, D, and B cylinders respectively. However, legacy Everest C, D, and B keys will not operate Everest 29 cylinders. The check pin in the Everest 29 cylinder plug prevents legacy keys from rotating the plug. This one-directional compatibility means an upgrade from legacy to Everest 29 requires replacing cylinders, but existing keys for the remaining legacy cylinders continue to work until those cylinders are also upgraded.

 

What cylinders does SecurityParts.com carry for Schlage locks?

SecurityParts.com carries Schlage cylinders and cylinder-related parts for ND Series cylindrical locks, L Series mortise locks, B Series deadbolts, AD Series and CO Series electronic locks, padlocks, and cabinet locks. This includes conventional Everest 29 S and T cylinders, SFIC cores, FSIC cores, and tailpieces for interchangeable core configurations. Rim cylinders for Von Duprin exit devices in straight cam applications are also available. Contact SecurityParts.com at 845-935-0301 for cylinder format and keyway specification support.

Schlage CS210 Interconnected Lock, HL6 Hospital Latch and THP Tubular Lock Parts: Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the Schlage CS210 Series interconnected lock (lever kit 06-242, Plymouth rose 08-029-PLY, Saturn rose 08-029-SAT, strike combinations 10-109 and 10-121, deadbolt strike 10-116), the Schlage HL6 Series hospital push-pull latch (mortise and tubular paddle assemblies, engraved and non-engraved, bent tab mortise strike kit), and the Schlage THP/LT Series tubular lock latches (THP-8201 spring latch, THP-8219 privacy latch, fire-rated versions with -F suffix). The CS210 B500 supports SFIC; the B60 does not. The HL6 key override anti-barricade function is available on three functions and is the critical safety feature for behavioral health environments.

Three Schlage product lines cover the doors that standard cylindrical and mortise locks do not. The CS210 interconnected lock addresses the NFPA 101 single-motion egress requirement on multifamily apartment entries where both a deadbolt and latch are required. The HL6 hospital latch addresses healthcare corridor doors where staff need hands-free operation and 50 percent quieter paddle action. The THP and PT Series tubular latches provide the latch assemblies that keep interior residential and light commercial doors functioning correctly. Each line has specific parts requirements and ordering decisions that differ from standard cylindrical lock parts.

Browse the complete CS210 interconnected lock parts catalog, HL6 hospital latch lock parts catalog, and tubular lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For the full Schlage commercial hardware range, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog.

Grade 2 ANSI/BHMA certification on CS210, exceeding Grade 2 for cycle, security, and finish
50% quieter HL6 redesigned paddle operation vs previous HL Series hospital latch
3-hour UL fire door rating on CS210 and HL6 mortise versions
SFIC CS210 B500 only supports SFIC cylinders: B60 residential housing does not
 
 

Schlage CS210 Interconnected Lock: What It Is and Why It Exists

The Schlage CS210 is a Grade 2 interconnected lock designed exclusively in the CS210 entrance function (B500 commercial or B60 residential deadbolt housing with single-cylinder entry). The interconnected design solves a specific code problem on multifamily residential doors: building codes and NFPA 101 require that doors on means of egress can be opened in a single motion from the inside. When a door has both a separate deadbolt and a separate latch lock, the occupant must turn the deadbolt and then the latch lever separately to exit. That is two motions, which does not comply with single-motion egress requirements.

The CS210's mechanical link between the deadbolt and latch bolt resolves this: turning the inside lever once retracts both simultaneously. The exterior side maintains normal security: the deadbolt requires a key, the latch requires a lever. But from the inside, one motion provides immediate egress regardless of whether the deadbolt is locked.

 

Why interconnected locks are required in some jurisdictions and optional in others: NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.5 requires that locks on doors on egress paths not require more than one releasing operation. Some local jurisdictions apply this requirement specifically to apartment and dwelling unit entry doors in addition to primary egress stairwells and corridors. This is why some municipalities require interconnected locks on apartment entry doors while neighboring municipalities allow separate deadbolts and latches. When interconnected locks are required by local code or AHJ interpretation on a multifamily project, the CS210 is the correct Schlage specification. Substituting separate deadbolt and latch hardware on these applications creates a code-non-compliant installation regardless of the hardware quality.
 

CS210 Specifications and Key Technical Details

Deadbolt and Latch Dimensions

The CS210 deadbolt is a 1-inch throw with a 1-inch diameter housing. The faceplate is dual option (square corner standard, round corner included in the package), 1 inch by 2-1/4 inches. The deadbolt requires a 1-inch edge bore.

The latch bolt is 1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch with a dual option faceplate. The backset is adjustable and fits both 2-3/8-inch and 2-3/4-inch door preparations, eliminating the need to specify backset at order time for most standard door configurations.

 

Adjustable Escutcheon for 4-Inch and 5-1/2-Inch Door Preps

The CS210 includes an adjustable escutcheon that supports either 4-inch or 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door preparations from the same unit. This is an underappreciated practical specification advantage on multifamily renovation projects where existing doors may have been prepared for different center-to-center dimensions by different manufacturers over decades of construction. The single adjustable escutcheon eliminates the need to specify the exact existing door prep at the time of order, reducing re-order rates on renovation projects where the existing door prep has not been documented.

 

Door Thickness Range

The CS210 accommodates standard door thicknesses of 1-3/4 inches to 2 inches. The 1-3/8-inch door thickness version is available but must be specifically noted at the time of ordering. Most commercial and multifamily doors are 1-3/4 inches, so the standard version covers the majority of applications. When the CS210 is specified for older wood-frame residential construction where 1-3/8-inch doors remain common, the thinner door specification must be confirmed before ordering.

 

Cylinder Options and the SFIC Limitation

The CS210 is available with conventional 6-pin cylinders (standard S123 keyway, keyed different), Full Size Interchangeable Core (FSIC) cylinders, and Small Format Interchangeable Core (SFIC) cylinders. The choice matters for key system management.

SFIC cylinders allow the core (the inner cylinder with the keyway and pins) to be exchanged in the field in seconds without any tools or disassembly of the lock. This rapid core exchange makes SFIC the preferred choice for high-security institutional applications where rekeying must be completed quickly after a key loss event.

 

The SFIC limitation on the CS210 B60 that creates a key system conflict: SFIC cylinders are not available with the B60 residential cylinder housing assembly on the CS210. Only the B500 commercial cylinder housing supports SFIC. This creates a specification conflict when a multifamily project uses Schlage SFIC throughout the building (common in healthcare, student housing, and government multifamily projects) and the specifier orders the B60 version of the CS210 to save cost. The B60 doors cannot be incorporated into the SFIC key schedule, producing a two-key-system building where the same facility master key cannot open apartment doors. Confirm the cylinder type requirement before specifying B60 versus B500 on any SFIC key system project.
 

CS210 Parts Reference

 

06-242 CS210 Series Lever Kit

Lever Replacement | All CS210 Levers

Replacement lever kit for the CS210 interconnected lock. Used when replacing or updating lever trim on an existing CS210 installation. Required when lever is damaged, finish is mismatched, or lever style is being changed on a renovation project. Compatible with all CS210 chassis assemblies manufactured after December 2010.

 

08-029-PLY | 08-029-SAT Rose

Plymouth and Saturn Rose Designs

Decorative rose plate for the CS210 interconnected lock in PLY (Plymouth) and SAT (Saturn) designs. Mounts between the lever and door face. When rose is damaged or finish does not match the lever, the 08-029 in the correct style and finish is the replacement. Confirm the outside chassis assembly compatibility before ordering rose only.

 

10-109 CS210 Strike Combination

Deadbolt + Deadlatch Strike Set

Strike combination set for the CS210 including both the deadbolt strike and the deadlatch strike required for a complete CS210 installation. The CS210 uses two strikes (one for the deadbolt, one for the latch) at specific center-to-center dimensions. Never substitute with a single strike for either bolt: the interconnected mechanism requires both strikes to be correctly positioned for reliable deadbolt and latch engagement on every door closure.

 

10-121 CS210 Strike Combination

Alternate Strike Combination

Alternate CS210 strike combination for door preps that use the 5-inch backset configuration. Not all CS210 installations use the standard strike combination. When ordering a CS210 strike replacement, confirm which door prep configuration is installed before selecting between 10-109 and 10-121.

 

10-116 Deadbolt Strike

1-1/8" x 2-3/4" Round Corner | No Lip

Round corner deadbolt strike, 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch, no lip. Individual deadbolt strike for CS210 installations where only the deadbolt strike requires replacement. Used when the deadbolt strike is damaged or missing but the latch strike is intact. Always confirm corner style (square vs round) before ordering any individual strike replacement.

 

The two-strike alignment fact that generates most CS210 latch complaints: The CS210 uses two separate strikes mounted at specific center-to-center spacing on the door frame. When one strike is replaced without confirming the other strike's position, the center-to-center relationship between the two strikes changes. The CS210's interconnected mechanism requires both the deadbolt bolt and the latch bolt to engage their respective strikes simultaneously on door closure. If the strikes are misaligned relative to each other, the lock can appear functional (both bolts extend) but the door does not latch or deadlock correctly because one bolt engages before the other does. When replacing any CS210 strike, verify the center-to-center dimension of the strike pair matches the CS210 parts manual specification.
 

Schlage HL6 Hospital Latch: Parts and Critical Design Features

The Schlage HL6 is not a cylindrical lock or mortise lock in the conventional sense. It is a push-pull latch designed specifically for healthcare environments where the operating format of standard levers is inadequate. A lever requires a gripping and rotating motion. A paddle requires only a push or pull with any part of the body including elbow, forearm, hip, or foot. This hand-free operation capability is not optional on many healthcare door applications: infection control protocols in ICU, surgical, and isolation environments prohibit hand contact with door hardware except through gloves.

 

HL6 Versions: Mortise vs Tubular

The HL6 Series comes in both mortise and tubular body versions. The mortise version uses the Schlage L Series chassis and mortise door preparation, providing superior strength and the full range of function options. The tubular version uses a standard tubular bore preparation, making it retrofittable to existing hollow-core residential-style doors in renovation applications without requiring a mortise pocket.

Parts at SecurityParts.com for the HL6 include cover assemblies (the decorative cover over the latch body), mortise paddle assemblies (engraved and non-engraved), tubular paddle assemblies (engraved and non-engraved), and the bent tab mortise strike kit for the mortise version.

 

Engraved vs Non-Engraved Paddle Assemblies

The HL6 paddle assembly is available in two surface finishes: non-engraved (smooth paddle face) and engraved (textured or marked paddle face). The engraved version provides a tactile surface and is required by some healthcare facility infection control standards that specify textured surfaces on frequently touched hardware to reduce smooth-surface pathogen transfer. The non-engraved version is appropriate for facilities that prefer a smooth aesthetic surface or where the engraved texture is not specified.

When replacing a paddle assembly on an existing HL6 installation, confirm whether the existing paddle is engraved or non-engraved before ordering, since both types are available in the parts catalog at the same product positions but are distinct assemblies.

 

The 50 Percent Quieter Redesign

Schlage redesigned the HL Series to achieve 50 percent quieter paddle operation compared to the previous product. This noise reduction is a documented clinical benefit: hospital noise levels directly correlate with patient recovery outcomes and staff performance accuracy in multiple clinical studies. Door hardware noise in patient corridors is a contributor to the ambient noise environment that regulatory standards (specifically ANSI/ASA S12.60 and Joint Commission environment of care standards) measure and regulate.

When replacing a paddle on an existing HL6 installation, the replacement paddle assembly from the current parts catalog carries the quieter design. If the facility is replacing older pre-redesign HL Series hardware with current HL6 parts, the noise level reduction is a verifiable improvement that can be documented for Joint Commission environmental surveys.

 

The lead-lining option that most specification writers miss: The Schlage HL6 mortise version is available with a 1/8-inch thick lead-lined lock case for use in X-ray rooms and other areas with radiation concern. Radiation-controlled environments in hospital imaging departments, radiotherapy suites, and diagnostic imaging rooms require that all wall penetrations and door hardware maintain the required radiation shielding of the surrounding wall construction. A standard latch body in a radiation-controlled door creates an unshielded penetration. The HL6 with lead-lined lock case maintains the door's radiation shielding continuity at the latch location. This option is not described in any general-purpose hardware specification guide and is absent from all competitor parts supplier content. Facilities specifying hardware for radiation-controlled environments should verify this option is available and specify it explicitly.
 

Key Override Anti-Barricade Function

The HL6 optional key override allows an outside key to retract the latch or deadbolt even when the inside thumbturn is actively held in the locked position. This function exists specifically for behavioral health and psychiatric care environments where a patient may use the inside thumbturn to prevent staff from entering during a self-harm event or mental health crisis.

Standard locks (including standard mortise and cylindrical locks) cannot be opened from the outside when the inside thumbturn is being held. A patient who turns the thumbturn and holds it effectively barricades the room. The HL6 key override breaks this barricade without requiring staff to force the door. Available on three HL6 functions. This is a joint healthcare design requirement that involves input from clinical staff, risk management, and facility management on any behavioral health project.

 

HL6 Parts Reference

 

PartDescriptionWhen to Order
HL6 Series Cover AssemblyDecorative cover over latch bodyCover damage, finish mismatch, or renovation update
HL6 Mortise Engraved Paddle AssemblyTextured surface paddle for mortise HL6Paddle replacement on mortise HL6 where engraved surface is specified
HL6 Mortise Paddle Assembly (Non-Engraved)Smooth surface paddle for mortise HL6Paddle replacement on mortise HL6 where smooth surface is preferred
HL6 Tubular Engraved Paddle AssemblyTextured surface paddle for tubular HL6Paddle replacement on tubular HL6 where engraved surface is specified
HL6 Tubular Paddle Assembly (Non-Engraved)Smooth surface paddle for tubular HL6Paddle replacement on tubular HL6 where smooth surface is preferred
Bent Tab Mortise Strike KitStrike kit for HL6 mortise versionStrike replacement on HL6 mortise installations; door frame rework

 

Schlage THP and PT Series Tubular Lock Latches

The Schlage THP (Tubular Hardware Product) and PT Series latches are the latch assemblies used in the Schlage LT Series decorative tubular locks and related families. These are not complete locks: they are the latch component that installs in the edge bore and provides the spring-loaded bolt that holds a door closed. When the lever or knob is turned, it activates the latch to retract the bolt.

 

THP-8201 Spring Latch: Standard Passage Latch

The THP-8201 is a spring latch (passage function) for tubular lock installations. It is the most commonly replaced tubular latch component because the latch bolt is subject to direct physical stress on every door cycle: the bolt must retract on lever operation and spring back to extended position when the lever is released. Over years of high-cycle use, the spring loses tension and the bolt may not fully extend, causing the door to not latch reliably.

The THP-8201-CH uses a 2-3/8-inch backset (standard for interior residential and light commercial doors). The fire-rated version is THP-8201-CH-F. The THP-8301-CH uses a 2-3/4-inch backset (standard for commercial doors). Ordering the wrong backset produces a latch that extends to the wrong position for the strike, causing either the door not latching or the latch hitting the strike face rather than engaging the strike pocket.

 

THP-8219 Privacy Latch: Anti-Lockout Design

The THP-8219 is a privacy latch with a restoring function that prevents accidental lockouts. In standard privacy sets (bathroom and bedroom locks), the inside push button or thumbturn locks the outside lever. If the inside button is accidentally pressed and the door closes, the occupant is locked out. The privacy latch restoring function means the privacy mechanism automatically releases when the door is opened from the inside, requiring the privacy lock to be deliberately re-engaged on each use.

The THP-8219-CH uses a 2-3/8-inch backset. The fire-rated version is THP-8219-CH-F. The 2-3/4-inch backset version is THP-8319-CH. When ordering any THP-8219 replacement, measure the backset of the existing latch before ordering. The same door that uses THP-8201-CH for passage will use THP-8219-CH for privacy, matching backsets throughout a project.

 

Backset Selection: The Only Critical Measurement

The backset is the single measurement that determines which THP latch to order. It is measured from the edge of the door (where the latch bolt projects) to the center of the cylindrical bore hole in the door face. Two standard backsets exist:

2-3/8 inch (THP-8201-CH, THP-8219-CH): Standard for interior residential and light commercial doors. Interior hollow-core doors in apartments, hotel rooms, offices, and classrooms typically use 2-3/8-inch backset.

 

2-3/4 inch (THP-8301-CH, THP-8319-CH): Standard for heavier commercial doors including hollow metal and solid wood commercial doors. Most commercial lever lock installations on 1-3/4-inch hollow metal doors use 2-3/4-inch backset.

 

The backset measurement that prevents a return on every THP latch order: Measure the backset before removing the existing latch. With the door in the closed position, measure from the face of the door edge (the narrow edge) to the center of the bolt. Do not remove the latch first and then try to measure the empty bore hole: the hole center is harder to locate accurately without the latch body present. Two minutes with a tape measure before starting the replacement eliminates the most common THP latch wrong-size return.
 

Fire-Rated THP Latches

Fire-rated versions of THP latches add the -F suffix: THP-8201-CH-F and THP-8219-CH-F. Fire-rated latches are required on doors with UL-listed fire door assemblies. The fire-rated latch uses materials and construction that maintain the latch function under the elevated temperature conditions of a fire event, preventing the latch from failing prematurely and allowing the door to remain latched (providing the fire separation) longer than a standard latch would under fire conditions. Installing a standard non-fire-rated latch in a fire-rated door assembly invalidates the UL listing of the assembly.

 

LT Series Tubular Locks: Coordinated Appearance with L Series

The Schlage LT Series tubular lock is designed specifically to match the appearance and lever family of the Schlage L Series mortise lock. This is a significant specification detail for projects where some doors use L Series mortise locks (high-security entries, stairwells, main corridors) and other doors use lighter-duty tubular hardware (utility rooms, storage, interior corridors). Matching the lever design, finish, and rose style across both series creates visual consistency throughout the building that is otherwise impossible when mixing hardware families.

The LT Series uses the same lever designs as the L Series, manufactured from solid brass or solid stainless steel for the same weight and feel as the mortise hardware. Levers move both up and down (not just down as on many tubular locks), matching the bidirectional lever operation of the L Series. The inside lever operates independently from the outside lever, providing a higher-end operation where inside lever movement does not affect the outside lever position.

When the LT Series is specified as part of an L Series project, THP latch parts ordered for the LT Series should match the backset, latch function, and fire-rating requirements of the door the LT Series lock is installed on. The THP latch is the only replacement component needed for most LT Series service calls because the LT Series chassis and lever are robust enough to outlast the latch spring in most commercial applications.

Browse the complete CS210 interconnected lock parts, HL6 hospital latch parts, and tubular lock parts at SecurityParts.com. For the broader Schlage hardware range including ND Series cylindrical lock parts, L Series mortise lock parts, B Series deadbolt parts, and CL Series cabinet lock parts, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is at 845-935-0301 or the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for CS210, HL6 and THP Parts

Single-motion egress code context, SFIC B60 limitation warning, HL6 lead-lining option, key override anti-barricade, backset measurement guidance, and same-day shipping.

 

Single-Motion Egress Code

We document why CS210 interconnected locks are required by some jurisdictions and the specific NFPA 101 section that creates this requirement. No other parts supplier explains the code driver for interconnected locks.

 

HL6 Lead-Lining Option

We document the HL6 lead-lined lock case option for radiation-controlled environments. This specification detail is absent from all buyer-facing hardware content and from every competitor parts supplier page.

 

Key Override Safety

We document the HL6 key override anti-barricade function and the behavioral health design requirement it addresses. This feature prevents patient-initiated barricade events in psychiatric and behavioral health facilities.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most CS210, HL6, and THP parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for backset, function, and cylinder type support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for These Schlage Parts

  • We document the CS210 SFIC cylinder limitation: SFIC is not available with the B60 residential housing, only B500 commercial. This prevents the key system conflict on SFIC multifamily projects where B60 is ordered to save cost and then cannot be incorporated into the building SFIC schedule.
  • We document the CS210 two-strike alignment requirement and why misaligned strikes generate latch complaints even when both strikes are replaced. Center-to-center positioning of the two CS210 strikes is a specification detail absent from all parts supplier content.
  • We document the HL6 lead-lined lock case option for radiation-controlled environments. No other parts supplier documents this at the product level. Radiation-controlled hospital rooms without lead-lined hardware have unshielded penetrations through the door at the latch location.
  • We document the HL6 key override anti-barricade function and the behavioral health design requirement it addresses. This is the most important HL6 function specification for psychiatric and behavioral health projects and is not documented in any competitor parts page.
  • We carry CS210, HL6, and THP parts alongside ND Series cylindrical lock parts, L Series mortise lock parts, B Series deadbolt parts, and LCN door closer parts for complete door hardware service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

CS210, HL6, and THP locks appear alongside standard cylindrical locks, deadbolts, and door closers throughout commercial and healthcare facilities. Most building service calls cover multiple lock product lines simultaneously.

For Schlage ND Series and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on secured corridor doors in the same building, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on main entries and high-security doors, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on secondary exits in the same facility, browse the deadbolts catalog. For Schlage CL Series cabinet lock parts on medication storage and filing cabinets in the same key system, browse the cabinet locks catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated corridor doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage CS210, HL6 and THP Parts

 

What is the Schlage CS210 interconnected lock and how does single motion egress work?

The CS210 is a Grade 2 interconnected entrance lock where the deadbolt and latch bolt are mechanically linked. Turning the inside lever once simultaneously retracts both the deadbolt and latch, providing single-motion egress as required by NFPA 101. From the outside, the deadbolt requires a key and the latch requires a lever. Available in B500 commercial and B60 residential cylinder housings, with SFIC available only on the B500 version.

 

What are the CS210 lever kit 06-242 and rose 08-029 used for?

The 06-242 is the lever replacement kit for the CS210 chassis. The 08-029 is the rose plate in Plymouth (PLY) or Saturn (SAT) design. Both are used when replacing or updating lever trim on an existing CS210 installation. If the outside chassis is not compatible with the current rose, the F206-496 outside chassis assembly may also need updating alongside the 06-242 lever and 08-029 rose.

 

What is the SFIC cylinder limitation on the Schlage CS210 B60 version?

The CS210 B60 residential cylinder housing does not support SFIC cylinders. Only the B500 commercial housing supports SFIC. When a facility uses Schlage SFIC throughout the building (common in healthcare, education, and government), apartment entry doors must use the B500 commercial CS210 rather than the B60 to allow incorporation into the SFIC key schedule.

 

What is the Schlage HL6 hospital latch and why does it use a paddle instead of a lever?

The HL6 is a hospital push-pull latch for healthcare environments requiring hands-free door operation. The paddle can be operated with a hand, elbow, forearm, or hip without gripping, supporting infection control protocols where hand contact with door hardware is restricted. Available in mortise (L Series chassis) and tubular versions, both 50 percent quieter than the previous HL Series. Available with optional key override anti-barricade function and optional lead-lined lock case for radiation-controlled rooms.

 

What is the HL6 key override anti-barricade feature and when is it specified?

The key override on the HL6 allows an outside key to retract the latch or deadbolt even when the inside thumbturn is being actively held in the locked position. This anti-barricade feature is specified in behavioral health and psychiatric environments where a patient may use the thumbturn to prevent staff entry during a self-harm event. Available on three HL6 functions. Without this feature, a patient holding the thumbturn creates a barricade that cannot be opened without forcing the door.

 

What is the difference between THP-8201 and THP-8219 and how do I select the correct backset?

THP-8201 is a spring latch (passage function). THP-8219 is a privacy latch with a restoring function that prevents accidental lockouts. The backset is the distance from the door edge to the center of the bore hole: THP-8201-CH and THP-8219-CH use 2-3/8-inch backset; THP-8301-CH and THP-8319-CH use 2-3/4-inch backset. Measure the existing backset before removal to confirm the correct size before ordering. Fire-rated versions add the -F suffix.

Commercial Door Hardware Maintenance Checklist: Monthly, Quarterly, and Annual Tasks Every Facility Manager Needs

Every commercial building has a maintenance schedule for HVAC, plumbing, and electrical systems. Door hardware almost never makes that list until something goes wrong. A door that will not latch during a fire drill, a closer that slams hard enough to break the door frame, or an electric strike that stops responding to the access panel at 6 AM are all symptoms of the same problem: deferred maintenance on hardware that is used hundreds of times every single day.

This guide gives facility managers, property owners, and maintenance teams a structured, code-informed checklist for every piece of commercial door hardware. It covers monthly visual tasks, quarterly mechanical checks, and the annual NFPA 80 inspection that is legally required for every fire-rated door assembly in the building.

 

What This Guide Covers

This checklist applies to the most common categories of commercial door hardware:

  • Exit devices and panic bars
  • Door closers
  • Electric strikes and access control hardware
  • Mortise locks and cylindrical locks
  • Deadbolts
  • Door frames, hinges, and clearances

Each section connects the inspection task to the specific failure mode it prevents and to the replacement components that resolve it when they are needed.

 

Why Door Hardware Maintenance Is a Legal Requirement, Not Just Good Practice

NFPA 80 and the Annual Inspection Mandate

NFPA 80, the Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, requires annual inspection of every fire door assembly in a commercial building. That requirement has been in the code since the 2007 edition. The 2022 edition is currently the most widely adopted, and the 2025 edition is the latest published version.

"Annual" under NFPA 80 means a minimum of 9 months and a maximum of 15 months between inspections. That window does not mean inspections are flexible indefinitely. It means the scheduling tolerance is 15 months, not 12. Any facility that goes beyond 15 months without a documented inspection is in violation.

The inspection must be performed by a qualified person, meaning someone with the knowledge, training, and experience to evaluate the assembly correctly. NFPA 80 Section 5.2.3.3 classifies conditions that prevent a fire door from closing or latching as immediate hazards requiring correction before the inspector leaves the site.

 

Documentation Requirements That Protect the Building Owner

Inspection records must be signed by the inspector and retained for at least 3 years. Healthcare facilities under CMS oversight follow a stricter enforcement path. CMS K-tag K0223 specifically covers fire door deficiencies in Life Safety Code surveys and is consistently among the most-cited compliance tags in hospital inspections.

If an AHJ or insurer audits the building and there are no signed inspection records, the legal exposure falls on the building owner. The documentation is not bureaucratic paperwork. It is the only evidence that compliance happened.

 

The Real Cost of Non-Compliance

A fire marshal has the authority to revoke a building's certificate of occupancy for non-compliant fire doors. Studies on fire door inspections consistently find that the majority of doors inspected in commercial facilities have at least one deficiency. Common reasons include closer adjustment drift, excessive door clearance gaps, worn latching hardware, and unauthorized modifications to the door assembly that void the listing.

 

The Monthly Visual Inspection Checklist

Monthly inspections take 2 to 3 minutes per door. They do not require tools, disassembly, or formal documentation. Their purpose is catching problems early so that repairs happen during normal maintenance cycles rather than emergency service calls.

 

Exit Devices and Panic Bars

Check that the push bar or push pad moves freely and returns to the neutral position without sticking. Confirm that the latch bolt retracts fully when the bar is pressed. Inspect the end caps for cracking or separation. Look for any visible damage to the device body or push bar that would suggest forced entry or misuse.

If the push bar is stiff or the device is not latching reliably, the dogging assembly or the latch return spring is likely worn. Both are model-specific replacement parts. The Von Duprin 98/99 Series parts catalog at Security Parts is organized by model and configuration so the correct component can be identified before the order is placed.

Confirm that fire-rated exit devices showing the "-F" suffix in the model number are not being held open by wedges, blocks, or zip ties. A mechanically dogged fire door is an NFPA 80 violation and an immediate hazard under Section 5.2.3.3.

 

Door Closers

Observe the closing cycle from the fully open position. The door should move smoothly from open to closed, with the latch bolt engaging the strike without assistance. A door that slams in the final 12 degrees has an incorrectly adjusted latch speed valve. A door that drifts open before fully closing has a weakened spring or a parallel arm connection that has loosened.

Check the closer body and arm connection for visible fluid leaks. A door closer that is leaking hydraulic fluid will develop inconsistent closing behavior as the fluid level drops. LCN closers are sealed at the factory and are not field-refillable. A leaking unit requires replacement or a cylinder assembly swap. See the LCN door closer parts catalog for series-specific components.

Inspect the arm casting at the pivot points for cracking. A cracked arm is one of the most common closer failures in high-traffic corridors and is almost always caused by someone propping the door against the arm or forcing the door open past the backcheck position. The arm is a replaceable component on every LCN series without replacing the entire closer body.

 

Electric Strikes and Access Control Hardware

Test each electric strike by presenting a valid credential and pulling the door. The release should be immediate with no hesitation or partial engagement. If the keeper re-latches before the door fully opens, the access control system's unlock duration may be too short for the speed at which the door is being used. This is a timing mismatch, not a hardware failure, but it causes keeper plate wear over time if not corrected.

Inspect the strike body face for visible damage, misalignment, or debris in the latch pocket. Check the wiring connection at the strike body for any signs of strain or corrosion on the terminals. The electric strike parts at Security Parts cover Von Duprin 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 Series components including solenoid replacement kits for all standard voltages.

 

Mortise Locks and Cylindrical Locks

Operate the lever handle and confirm that the latch bolt retracts fully and returns smoothly. If the lever is loose at the rose or the latch requires multiple attempts to engage the strike, the lever return spring is likely fatigued.

Check the strike alignment. A strike that has shifted from door sag or frame movement produces inconsistent latch engagement and accelerates latch bolt wear. Re-aligning the strike before it causes bolt damage is a 15-minute task compared to the service call that comes after the bolt wears out.

Commercial mortise lock parts and cylindrical lock parts at Security Parts are organized by model number so that the correct lever return spring, spindle assembly, or strike can be confirmed against the installed hardware before ordering.

 

Deadbolts

Extend and retract the deadbolt manually to confirm smooth operation. A deadbolt that sticks in the extended position or requires excessive key force to retract typically indicates cylinder wear or a misaligned strike pocket.

On double-cylinder applications, test both sides independently. Check that the throw bolt extends fully to the rated 1-inch depth on Grade 1 models. Partial throw engagement reduces both the security and the resistance to forced entry that the Grade 1 rating was designed to provide. Replacement deadbolt parts including cylinders, strikes, and throw assemblies are available at Security Parts for Schlage B Series and compatible models.

 

The Quarterly Mechanical Inspection Checklist

Lubrication Schedule and Lubricant Selection

This is the most frequently mishandled maintenance task in commercial door hardware. Petroleum-based lubricants including WD-40 and similar aerosol products are not appropriate for lock cylinders or mechanical latch mechanisms. These products provide short-term lubrication but attract and hold dust and metal particles. Over weeks and months, the lubricant becomes a fine abrasive paste inside the mechanism. Key operation stiffens, spring performance degrades, and components that would otherwise last years wear out prematurely.

The correct lubricant for commercial lock cylinders and mechanical door hardware is a dry lubricant. Dry graphite powder or a dry PTFE (Teflon) spray provides lubrication without collecting debris. A properly maintained cylinder and latch mechanism under commercial use needs lubrication approximately every two to three years, not every quarter.

For door closer arms and track assemblies, a light machine oil or a synthetic grease applied at the pivot points is appropriate. The closer hydraulic system is sealed and is not lubricated externally.

 

Fastener and Torque Check

All mounting hardware for exit devices, door closers, and lock sets should be checked and tightened quarterly. Mounting screws on door closers and exit devices loosen gradually from the vibration of each door cycle. A closer arm mounting screw that has backed out half a turn is not visible to a casual inspection but creates enough play in the installation to accelerate wear on the arm casting and the closer body spindle connection.

Tighten to the manufacturer's specified torque where published. Do not over-torque, particularly in wood door applications where stripping the screw hole creates a more serious problem than a loose fastener. If a screw hole is stripped, replace with the appropriate repair plug before reinstalling the fastener.

 

Alignment and Door Geometry Check

A sagging door puts stress on every piece of hardware attached to it. The latch bolt works harder to engage a strike that is no longer in the correct position. The closer arm works harder because the door's center of gravity has shifted. The exit device latch bolt wears faster because the strike alignment has changed.

Door sag is visible at the top latch edge of the door: a sagging door widens the gap at the top of the latch edge and narrows at the bottom. The fix is hinge adjustment or hinge replacement. Catching door sag at the quarterly check prevents it from progressing to a point where the hardware damage is more expensive than the hinge work.

 

The Annual NFPA 80 Compliance Inspection

What the 13-Point Fire Door Assembly Inspection Covers

NFPA 80 Section 5.2.4 requires that every swinging fire door assembly be inspected using a comprehensive checklist that evaluates the door as a complete system. The 13 critical inspection points cover:

  1. Fire door label present, legible, and not painted over
  2. Door leaf condition, no holes, cracks, or broken components
  3. Frame condition, securely anchored with no damage
  4. Intumescent seals intact where required by the listing
  5. Door clearances within NFPA 80 tolerances
  6. Hinges correct in number and type, no broken or missing fasteners
  7. Latching hardware actively engaging the strike plate
  8. Door closer present and door closes fully from any open position
  9. Door latches positively without manual assistance
  10. Coordinator present if required on double-leaf doors, inactive leaf closes first
  11. Glazing intact with no cracks, glazing beads and clips secure
  12. No hold-open devices unless connected to the fire alarm system
  13. No field modifications that void the UL listing

 

Door Clearance Tolerances Under NFPA 80

The maximum clearance at the bottom of a fire door is 3/4 inch (19mm) under NFPA 80. The maximum clearance at the head and jambs is 1/8 inch. For meeting edges on double door pairs, the maximum is 1/8 inch plus 1/16 inch. These tolerances are measured, not estimated visually.

Excessive bottom clearance is among the most commonly cited deficiencies. It allows smoke and flame to pass through the opening before the door's full fire resistance period has elapsed. The correction is typically a new door sweep or bottom seal replacement.

 

After-Maintenance Re-Inspection Requirement

Any fire door assembly that has had hardware replaced, glazing changed, or other listed-hardware work performed must be re-inspected after the work is complete. This is a requirement most facility maintenance teams are not aware of. It means that replacing a door closer on a fire door is not complete until the assembly has been re-checked against the inspection criteria.

 

Keeping Records That Protect the Building Owner

Inspection records must include the facility information, the inspector's credentials, the inspection date, each door's location and identification number, the results of every inspection point, and any deficiencies found along with corrective actions taken. These records must be signed and retained for a minimum of 3 years. Healthcare facilities may have additional documentation requirements under Joint Commission standards beyond the NFPA 80 baseline.

Records should be kept in a format that can be presented to an AHJ on request, whether paper or electronic. The critical requirement is that the record be traceable to a specific door, a specific inspector, and a specific date.

 

How to Identify When to Repair vs Replace a Component

The Repair-vs-Replace Decision for Exit Devices

A complete Von Duprin exit device costs significantly more than the component that actually failed. The center case, which contains the rack-and-pawl latch mechanism, is the most common failure point on heavy-traffic installations. Replacing just the center case restores full device function at a fraction of the cost of a new unit.

The same logic applies to dogging assemblies, latch bolts, and push bar end guides. These components wear independently of the rest of the device. Identifying which part failed, and having it in stock, is the difference between a 20-minute repair and a full device replacement.

 

The Repair-vs-Replace Decision for Door Closers

A door closer body that is leaking hydraulic fluid has exceeded its service life and requires full replacement. Hydraulic door closers are factory-sealed and cannot be refilled in the field. A body that is not leaking but producing inconsistent closing behavior can almost always be corrected by adjusting the sweep speed, latch speed, and backcheck valves.

Arm replacements are appropriate when the casting is cracked at a pivot point. A cracked arm that is not replaced will fail completely under the next significant door-opening force. The arm is a model-specific component on LCN closers: a 4040XP arm is different from a 3130 concealed closer arm, and neither crosses to the other series.

 

The Repair-vs-Replace Decision for Electric Strikes

A solenoid failure is the most common reason an electric strike stops responding to the access control signal. The solenoid kit on Von Duprin 6000 Series electric strikes (050240 for 24VDC, 050237 for 12VDC) fits every model in the series, and replacing only the solenoid restores full function. A strike body that is physically damaged or misaligned may require full replacement.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Commercial Door Hardware Replacement Components

Security Parts has been serving the commercial door hardware industry for more than 30 years. The catalog covers Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, and Falcon hardware with model-specific pages for every series we carry.

The interactive parts diagram on every model page is what separates Security Parts from general hardware distributors. You can navigate to the exact device model installed in the building, see the full assembly in a diagram, click on the component that failed, and confirm the correct part number before the order is placed. That one step prevents the majority of wrong-part orders.

Our warehouses are distributed across the United States. Common components ship same-day. Expedited options are available when a door-down situation needs a fast turnaround. Compatibility questions are handled by trained hardware specialists at 845-935-0301 and by live chat before the order ships, not after.

For ongoing maintenance programs, the commercial exit devices catalog, the commercial door closers parts, and the complete Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, and Falcon inventories are organized to make parts identification fast and accurate for every device in the building.

 

Conclusion

Commercial door hardware maintenance is one of the most overlooked responsibilities in facility management, and one of the most consequential. A door closer that drifts open, a panic bar that will not latch, or an electric strike that stops responding costs far less to fix before it fails than after. The NFPA 80 annual inspection is a legal requirement, not an optional safety measure, and the documentation it generates protects building owners when a fire marshal, insurer, or CMS surveyor reviews compliance.

The monthly visual checklist takes minutes. The quarterly mechanical checks take an hour across a typical floor. The annual inspection is the formal compliance layer that requires a qualified person and signed documentation. Together, these three tiers keep hardware performing to its rated specifications, keep the building out of compliance violations, and keep replacement costs controlled by catching component failures before they become full device replacements.

Security Parts carries the replacement components for every hardware category in this guide. With more than 30 years in commercial door hardware, model-specific parts pages with interactive diagrams, same-day shipping from US warehouses, and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301, we make accurate parts sourcing as straightforward as the maintenance schedule itself.

 

Frequently Asked Questions

 

How often does commercial door hardware need to be inspected?

Monthly visual checks, quarterly mechanical checks for lubrication and fasteners, and annual NFPA 80 inspections for every fire-rated door assembly. Non-fire-rated hardware should follow monthly and quarterly schedules but does not carry the mandatory annual inspection requirement.

 

What does "annually" mean under NFPA 80?

NFPA 80 defines the annual inspection window as a minimum of 9 months and a maximum of 15 months between inspections. This is not a suggestion that inspections can be skipped in any given year. It is a scheduling tolerance to accommodate facility logistics. Going beyond 15 months without a documented inspection is a code violation.

 

What lubricant should be used on commercial door hardware?

Dry graphite powder or dry PTFE spray for lock cylinders, latch mechanisms, and dogging assemblies. Light machine oil or synthetic grease at closer arm pivot points. Never use petroleum-based aerosol lubricants on lock cylinders. They attract debris, form an abrasive paste, and accelerate component wear rather than preventing it.

 

What are the maximum clearance tolerances for fire doors under NFPA 80?

Maximum 3/4 inch at the bottom of the door, maximum 1/8 inch at the head and side jambs, and maximum 1/8 inch plus 1/16 inch at meeting edges for double door pairs. These are measured tolerances, not visual estimates. Exceeding them is a deficiency that must be corrected before the inspection record can be signed off.

 

Is re-inspection required after replacing door hardware on a fire door?

Yes. NFPA 80 requires that any fire door assembly that has had hardware replaced or modified be re-inspected after the work is complete. This applies to door closer replacement, exit device replacement, and any other listed hardware change. The re-inspection confirms that the assembly still meets its rated requirements after the work.

 

What is the ADA requirement for door opening force on commercial doors?

The Americans with Disabilities Act requires a maximum opening force of 5 pounds for interior doors on accessible egress routes. The door must also take a minimum of 5 seconds to travel from 90 degrees open to 12 degrees open. Both requirements apply to the door as a system, meaning closer adjustment that reduces force may need to compensate for speed as well.

 

How long must NFPA 80 inspection records be kept?

A minimum of 3 years. Records must be signed by the inspector and available for review by the authority having jurisdiction. Healthcare facilities may have additional documentation requirements under CMS and Joint Commission standards beyond the NFPA 80 minimum retention period.

 

What triggers an immediate hazard classification under NFPA 80?

NFPA 80 Section 5.2.3.3 classifies any condition that prevents a fire door from closing or latching automatically as an immediate hazard. This includes a missing latch bolt, broken hinges preventing door movement, and obstructions that cannot be removed during the inspection. Immediate hazards require correction before the inspection record is completed or within a 24-hour window as directed by the AHJ.

 

 

LCN 4000 Series Surface Mounted and 2210 High-Security Concealed Door Closer Parts: Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the full LCN 4000 Series surface-mounted closers: 4010 (pull side regular arm), 4020 (top jamb), 4030 (universal moderate traffic), 4040/4040XP (heavy institutional), 4050A (cast aluminum heavy duty), 4110 (parallel arm with EDA), and 4000T (pocket door). Also covered: the 2210 Series high-security overhead concealed closer for correctional and vandal-prone environments. The 4010, 4020, and 4110 are application-specific: mounting and handing must be specified at order time. The 4040XP and 4050A are non-handed. All big-body 4000 Series use the Fast Power Adjust indicator system. The 4010/4020/4110 use a flat-sided oval spindle; the 4040/4040XP use a six-sided hex spindle. Arms are not cross-compatible between these spindle types.

The LCN 4000 Series is the heaviest-duty surface-mounted closer line in the LCN catalog. Where the 1000 Series (1260 and 1460) serves light-to-medium commercial applications, the 4000 Series covers everything from moderate-traffic institutional interiors through the most demanding high-abuse applications in government, healthcare, and correctional environments. Each model in the series is engineered for a specific mounting position, and this specificity is the most important part of understanding how to order correct replacement parts.

Browse the complete LCN parts catalog at Security Parts. For the full LCN door closer and automatic operator catalog, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog.

30-year Warranty on LCN 4040XP Series, LCN's most durable surface closer
25-year Warranty on LCN 4050A cast aluminum Series
3 spindle types Hex (4040XP), oval (4010/4020/4110), star (1260/1460): arms not cross-compatible
TORX Tamper-resistant fasteners on LCN 2210 high-security concealed closer
 

Application-Specific vs Universal: The Core 4000 Series Decision

The LCN 4000 Series divides into two categories that determine the ordering process. Application-specific closers require the installer to specify mounting position and door handing at order time. Universal closers can be installed in any mounting configuration after they arrive in the field.

 

Application-specific 4000 Series: The 4010, 4020, and 4110 are each engineered for one mounting position and one only. The 4010 for regular arm pull side, the 4020 for top jamb, the 4110 for parallel arm push side. Ordering a 4010 and trying to mount it top jamb produces a door that cannot close correctly because the arm geometry and cylinder orientation are specific to the pull-side mounting template.

 

Universal 4000 Series: The 4040XP, 4050A, and 4030 are universal or near-universal, meaning they support multiple mounting configurations from the same unit. The 4040XP and 4050A can be installed hinge pull side, top jamb push side, and parallel arm push side from the same closer. The 4041P (4040XP equivalent) and 4031P are the fully universal options within the 4000 family.

 

The ordering error that generates the most 4000 Series returns: Ordering a 4010 or 4110 when a universal closer was needed, or ordering the wrong hand on an application-specific model. Every 4010, 4020, and 4110 must be ordered with the correct handing specified (right hand or left hand) because the cylinder orientation and arm geometry are set at the factory. A 4010 right-hand closer installed on a left-hand door produces a device that works mechanically but closes the door incorrectly or requires the arm to be forced into a non-design position. Confirm the door handing from the hinge side before ordering any application-specific 4000 Series closer.
 

LCN 4000 Series: Every Model Explained

 

LCN 4010 Series

Pull Side | Regular Arm | Application-Specific | Handed

Specifically designed for regular arm (hinge pull side) installations only. Heavy-duty big-body closer. Fast Power Adjust indicator. Flat-sided oval spindle. 4010-72 plastic or 4010-72MC metal cover. Interior and exterior doors in offices, schools, government buildings. Must specify handing at order time.

 

LCN 4020 Series

Top Jamb | Application-Specific | Handed

Specifically designed for top jamb applications where the closer mounts on the head frame above the door. Common on glass storefronts, hospitals, and environments requiring frame-mounted hardware. 1-1/2 inch clearance behind door for 90 or 180 degree installation. Head frame less than 3-7/8 inches requires plate 4020T-18. Flat-sided oval spindle. Must specify handing.

 

LCN 4030 Series

Universal | Moderate Traffic | 30-Year Warranty

Universal closer for moderate traffic conditions supporting hinge pull side, top jamb push side, and parallel arm push side mountings. Non-sized adjustable 1 to 4, interior doors to 4 feet, exterior to 3 feet. Metal cover standard. Forged steel main arm. 30-year limited warranty. Grade 1.

 

LCN 4040 / 4040XP Series

Universal | Heavy Institutional | Non-Handed | 30-Year

LCN's most durable heavy-duty surface closer. Cast iron body, 1-1/2 inch piston, double heat-treated pinion, all-weather Liquid X fluid. Six-sided hex spindle. Green Dial spring adjustment 1 to 6. Non-handed. Pull side, top jamb, parallel arm capable. 4040XP is the current generation; the 4040 was the predecessor. Buy American Act compliant. 30-year warranty.

 

LCN 4050A Series

Universal | Cast Aluminum | Non-Handed | 25-Year

Cast aluminum body (lighter than cast iron) with full-complement bearing, 1-1/2 inch piston, 11/16 inch double heat-treated pinion. Green Dial 1 to 6 spring adjustment, ships set to size 3. 2-3/8 inch by 6-3/4 inch mounting hole pattern (most common commercial footprint). Non-handed. Pull side, top jamb, parallel arm. 25-year limited warranty. Liquid X all-weather fluid eliminates seasonal adjustment.

 

LCN 4110 Series

Parallel Arm Push Side | EDA Standard | Application-Specific

Purpose-built for parallel arm push side installations. Ships with Extra Duty Arm (EDA) as standard. Ideal for classroom doors, auditorium doors, healthcare environments where closer must be on push side and aesthetics or security require parallel arm concealment. Flat-sided oval spindle. Must specify handing. Fast Power Adjust. 4110-72 cover part number.

 

LCN 4000T: Pocket Door Closer

The LCN 4000T is the specialty member of the 4000 Series family, designed specifically for pocket doors that slide into a wall cavity rather than swinging on hinges. It is the only LCN surface-mounted closer in the 4000 Series built for this application. Arms, cylinders, and cover parts from other 4000 Series closers are not compatible with the 4000T because the mechanical interface for a sliding door is fundamentally different from a swinging door configuration.

 

The Spindle Geometry Problem: Why Arms Fail to Fit Across 4000 Series Models

The most expensive and most avoidable parts ordering mistake in the entire LCN 4000 Series catalog happens because of the spindle geometry difference that is never documented in buyer-facing parts content. Three distinct spindle shapes exist in the LCN lineup, and arms are machined specifically to one spindle shape.

 

SeriesSpindle ShapeArms That FitCross-Compatible With
4040 / 4040XPSix-sided hex4040XP-specific arm familyNot compatible with 4010, 4020, 4110, or 1000 Series
4010 / 4020 / 4110Flat-sided oval3077 regular arm, 4010/4020/4110 arm familyCompatible with each other and with 4040 (non-XP); NOT with 4040XP or 1000 Series
1260 / 1460 (1000 Series)Eight-sided star1260/1460 arm familyNot compatible with any 4000 Series model

 

The practical consequence of this table: a technician who replaces a 4040XP on a door with a 4010 cannot use the existing 4040XP arm. The 4040XP hex spindle arm will not engage the 4010 oval spindle. The technician must order a new arm for the 4010. And conversely, if a 4010 is replaced with a 4040XP, the 4010 oval spindle arm cannot be reused on the XP's hex spindle. A new XP-specific arm is required.

 

The arm that fits correctly but creates a safety problem: A 4040 (non-XP, older generation) arm fits the 4040XP hex spindle because they share the same spindle shape. However, the 4040XP was redesigned with updated arm geometry that provides better backcheck cushioning and improved opening control. Installing a 4040 (non-XP) arm on a 4040XP cylinder produces a closer that functions but does not provide the full backcheck protection that the XP arm delivers. On high-abuse institutional doors where backcheck prevents door slams, the undersized backcheck cushion from a non-XP arm on an XP cylinder results in repeated hard door stops that damage the door, frame, and hinge system. Always order XP-specific arm parts for any 4040XP installation.
 

LCN 4000 Series Parts Reference

Cylinder Assemblies

Every 4000 Series closer cylinder assembly part number follows the series naming convention. The 4010 Series cylinder is 4011-3071 (with the 6 suffix for size 6: 4011(6)-3071). The 4010 also supports a delayed-action version (4011-3071DEL) and a TEL (time-elapsed latch) version (4011(6)-3071TEL).

Key cylinder assembly variants available across the 4000 Series include standard, delayed action (DEL), temperature-equalized latch (TEL), and fire-rated versions. When ordering any cylinder assembly replacement, always confirm whether the existing installation uses a standard or specialty variant before placing the order. A standard cylinder replacement on a door that had delayed-action will produce a door that latches immediately rather than after the delay the occupants expect.

 

Cover Part Numbers: The -72 Convention

LCN door closer cover part numbers follow the convention of series number followed by -72 for the standard plastic cover. The 4010 plastic cover is 4010-72. The 4010 metal cover is 4010-72MC. The 4020 metal cover is 4020-742 (note the slightly different numbering on the 4020 metal cover). The 4040 cover is 4040-72. The 4110 cover is 4110-72. This convention allows field technicians to identify the correct cover replacement without a catalog lookup if they know only the closer series number.

 

Regular Arm 3077: Which Series It Fits

The LCN regular arm 3077 is the standard arm shipped with most LCN surface-mounted closers. It works with the 1260, 1460, 4010, 4020, and 4040 (non-XP). It does not work with the 4040XP (different spindle shape), the 4110 (ships with EDA as standard and requires different arm geometry for parallel arm mounting), or any overhead concealed series. The 3077 is ordered with the series prefix: 4010-3077 for the 4010, 4020-3077 for the 4020, 4040-3077 for the 4040 (non-XP).

 

Fast Power Adjust: The Spring Adjustment That Prevents Cylinder Replacement

The 4010, 4020, 4030, and 4110 Series all include the Fast Power Adjust indicator system for spring power adjustment. This allows the spring power setting to be increased or decreased in the field without removing the cover or replacing the cylinder. When a 4010 or 4110 closer begins closing a door slowly or not latching reliably, the Fast Power Adjust should be the first intervention before any cylinder replacement is considered.

Most unnecessary cylinder replacements on 4010, 4020, and 4110 closers happen because the technician is not aware that the spring power is adjustable on these models. A closer with a spring power setting at size 1 on a heavy exterior door will not close reliably. Increasing the spring power to size 3 or 4 (appropriate for the door weight) restores reliable closing without any parts replacement. This takes two minutes with the correct allen key. A cylinder replacement for the same symptom takes 30 minutes and costs the cylinder assembly price.

 

LCN 4040XP: The Institutional Benchmark and Its Unique Features

The LCN 4040XP is identified in LCN's own catalog as the most durable and flexible heavy-duty closer designed for institutional and other demanding high-traffic applications. It is the reference product against which all other surface-mounted closer specifications are compared for institutional procurement.

 

What Makes the 4040XP Different from Other 4000 Series Models

The 4040XP's distinguishing features at the parts level are the cast iron body construction (versus the cast aluminum of the 4050A), the 1-1/2-inch piston diameter, the double heat-treated pinion journal, the six-sided hex spindle, the non-handed universal installation, and the all-weather Liquid X fluid that eliminates seasonal closing speed adjustment. The six-sided hex spindle on the XP accepts higher torque loads than the oval spindle on the 4010, 4020, and 4110, making it more resistant to spindle wear under the repeated high-cycle stress of institutional applications.

 

4040XP Arm Requirements: The Minimum Head Frame Clearance

The 4040XP requires a minimum top rail of 3-3/4 inches for standard installations. If the top rail is less than 3-3/4 inches, the plate 4040XP-18 is required. This plate is also required for parallel arm mounting where reveal is less than the specified minimum. The 4040XP auxiliary stop is recommended at the hold-open point or where the door cannot swing beyond 120 degrees. On doors mounted to pivot rather than butt hinges, the hinge width should not exceed 5 inches for correct XP arm function.

 

The 4040XP fifth hole spacer that most technicians don't know about: The parallel arm shoe installation on the 4040XP requires a fifth hole spacer (part 4040XP-201) to support the parallel arm shoe. This part is included with parallel arm 4040XP (P4040XP) orders but is not always stocked by general hardware distributors. When a 4040XP is installed in parallel arm configuration and the shoe is unstable or the arm produces unusual closing behavior, the fifth hole spacer is frequently missing. Confirm the 4040XP-201 is present before diagnosing any other parallel arm closer issue on the XP.
 

LCN 4050A: The Cast Aluminum Alternative and Its Specification Sweet Spot

The LCN 4050A serves the specification space between the 1000 Series light-to-medium duty closers and the 4040XP institutional standard. It is the correct specification for commercial building applications that require heavy-duty performance with a competitive price, but where the full institutional specification of the 4040XP is not required in the project scope.

 

4050A Construction vs 4040XP Construction

The 4050A uses cast aluminum for the outer cylinder body rather than the cast iron used in the 4040XP. Cast aluminum is lighter and less expensive than cast iron while providing adequate structural integrity for commercial (non-institutional) applications. The internal components of the 4050A match the 4040XP in piston diameter (1-1/2 inches) and pinion treatment (double heat-treated). The Liquid X all-weather fluid is also shared between the two series, eliminating seasonal adjustment on both.

The 4050A's standard mounting hole pattern (2-3/8 inches by 6-3/4 inches) is described by LCN as the most common commercial footprint, which means the 4050A can retrofit onto most commercial doors that previously had a 4000 Series or competitor closer without requiring new holes. This is one of the 4050A's underappreciated specification advantages for renovation work.

 

LCN 2210 Series: High-Security Overhead Concealed Closer for Correctional Environments

The LCN 2210 Series is the overhead concealed counterpart to the 4210/4510 Smoothee surface-mounted high-security closer. Where the Smoothee is visible on the door face but tamper-resistant, the 2210 provides complete concealment: the cylinder mounts in the head frame, and the arm and track mount in the top rail of the door. Nothing is visible from the door face in the closed position.

 

Why Complete Concealment Matters in Correctional Environments

In correctional facilities, psychiatric units, and juvenile detention environments, any hardware visible on the door face presents a potential leverage point. Surface-mounted door closers, regardless of their tamper resistance, provide a grasping surface and a mechanical anchor that motivated occupants can attack with improvised tools. The 2210's complete concealment eliminates this exposed hardware entirely. From the occupant's side of a door with a 2210 installed, the door appears to have no closer hardware at all.

 

2210 Series Key Specifications

The 2210 uses TORX tamper-resistant fasteners rather than standard Phillips or hex-head screws. Standard fastener tools carried by most people cannot drive TORX fasteners, creating a meaningful access barrier for impromptu disassembly attempts. The arm is forged steel with a heavy steel mounting plate engineered for high-abuse application loads. The single-lever arm and security track (non hold-open standard) are included with standard shipments.

The 2210 includes an optional door position switch (DPS) that signals a security or building automation system when the door is open or closed. This integrates the 2210 with correctional facility monitoring systems, providing real-time door status for every monitored opening. Standard cylinders are sized for interior doors to 4 feet 6 inches and exterior doors to 3 feet 6 inches. Handing must be specified (right or left swinging door) because the cylinder mounts in the head frame with a fixed orientation.

 

SRI Finish Option for Corrosive Environments

The 2210 is available with the LCN Special Rust Inhibiting (SRI) process for installations where the environment is potentially corrosive: laundry rooms in correctional facilities, coastal building locations, chemical storage areas, or any application where moisture and cleaning chemicals create above-normal corrosion risk. LCN's SRI process treats ferrous metal components with an inhibiting pretreatment before the powder coat is applied. The resulting finish exceeds the 100-hour salt spray protection level of standard LCN powder-coated finishes. This is not a standard option across the full LCN catalog and is specific to the high-security closer line.

 

The DPS option that most correctional facility specifications miss: The LCN 2210 Series optional door position switch (DPS) converts a mechanical closer into a door status monitoring device at essentially zero additional hardware cost over the baseline closer. In correctional environments where door status monitoring is a security requirement at every controlled opening, specifying the 2210 with DPS eliminates the need for a separate door status sensor on every closer-equipped door. Many correctional facility specifications that are already requiring the 2210 for tamper resistance overlook the DPS option because the specification writers are familiar with the closer product but not with the integrated monitoring capability. The DPS adds real-time door open/closed status to the security system at the point of the closer, not as a separate sensor installed later.
 

Comparing the Full 4000 Series: Choosing the Right Model

 

ModelBodyMountingHandingSpindleSpring RangeWarranty
4010Cast ironPull side onlyHandedFlat ovalNon-sized adjustableLCN standard
4020Cast ironTop jamb onlyHandedFlat ovalNon-sized adjustableLCN standard
4030Cast ironUniversal 3-wayNon-handedFlat oval1 to 430-year
4040 / 4040XPCast ironUniversal 3-wayNon-handedHex (6-sided)1 to 6 (Green Dial)30-year
4050ACast aluminumUniversal 3-wayNon-handedFlat oval1 to 6 (Green Dial)25-year
4110Cast ironParallel arm onlyHandedFlat ovalNon-sized adjustableLCN standard
4000TCast ironPocket doorN/AUniqueSizedLCN standard
2210Cast iron concealedFrame/door overheadHandedTrack systemSized 1 to 415-year

 

What Fails First on LCN 4000 Series and 2210 Closers

 

Application-Specific 4000 Series (4010, 4020, 4110)

Spring power drift: Over years of high-cycle use, the spring power setting on the Fast Power Adjust system can drift downward, particularly on heavy exterior doors. The door begins closing more slowly and eventually fails to latch. Before diagnosing this as hydraulic fluid loss or cylinder failure, check and increase the Fast Power Adjust setting to confirm the spring power is at the correct level for the door weight.

 

Arm screw loosening: The 159 arm screw (1/4-20, 3/4-inch head diameter) holds the arm on the spindle across all 4000 Series models. High-cycle applications produce vibration that works the arm screw loose over time. A loose arm screw presents as a door that closes slowly or drifts open because the arm is spinning on the spindle instead of transmitting spring force to the door.

 

Fluid leak: A closer that closes too fast despite valve adjustment at the maximum restriction setting has lost hydraulic fluid. Fluid loss produces a loss of regulated closing control. Cylinder replacement is the correct service action. Additional valve adjustment on a dry cylinder produces no improvement.

 

4040XP

Parallel arm shoe wear: On parallel arm 4040XP installations, the shoe that connects the arm to the parallel bracket takes repeated mechanical load. The shoe connection can wear or the fasteners can loosen, producing a bouncy or unstable closing arc. Confirm the 4040XP-201 fifth hole spacer is present and the shoe fasteners are torqued correctly before diagnosing any other parallel arm complaint.

 

2210 Series

Track roller wear: The 2210 uses a track system (similar in concept to the 3130) where a roller travels in the track on every door cycle. Track roller wear is the primary maintenance item on the 2210. A 2210 installation that begins producing closing resistance or does not fully close despite correct spring sizing usually has a worn or seized track roller. Replacing the track roller restores correct operation without cylinder replacement.

Browse the LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all 4000 Series and 2210 components with interactive diagrams. For the full LCN door closer catalog including Sentronic, 1000 Series, and overhead concealed series, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog. For related exit device and electric strike parts on the same doors, browse exit device parts and electric strike parts. Pre-order support is at 845-935-0301 or the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for LCN 4000 Series and 2210 Parts

Spindle geometry table, Fast Power Adjust diagnostic, 4040XP fifth hole spacer, 2210 DPS monitoring option, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Spindle Geometry Table

We document that the 4040XP uses a hex spindle, the 4010/4020/4110 use an oval spindle, and 1000 Series uses a star spindle. Arms are not cross-compatible. This table prevents the most common wrong-arm order in the 4000 Series.

 

Fast Power Adjust First

We document the Fast Power Adjust spring system on the 4010, 4020, and 4110 as the first-check item before any cylinder replacement. Many unnecessary cylinder replacements happen because the installer did not know spring power was adjustable.

 

2210 DPS Option

We document the 2210's optional door position switch as a integrated security monitoring feature that most correctional specs overlook. Adding DPS at spec time eliminates a separate sensor installation cost.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most 4000 Series and 2210 parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for spindle identification and arm compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for LCN 4000 Series Parts

  • We document the three-spindle-type architecture of the LCN closer catalog (hex for 4040XP, oval for 4010/4020/4110, star for 1000 Series) and explain why arms cannot be cross-used between spindle types. No other parts supplier documents this relationship at the buying stage.
  • We document the 4040 non-XP arm on a 4040XP as a functional but deficient combination: it works mechanically but provides inadequate backcheck protection on high-abuse institutional doors. Correctly using XP-specific arms prevents hardware damage from repeated hard door stops.
  • We document the 4040XP fifth hole spacer (4040XP-201) as a parallel arm installation component that is frequently missing when a parallel arm shoe is unstable. Missing this part generates closure behavior complaints that are misdiagnosed as arm or cylinder failures.
  • We document the 2210 Series optional DPS as a door monitoring integration feature that correctional facility specifications frequently overlook, eliminating a separate sensor installation on every monitored opening in the facility.
  • We carry LCN 4000 Series parts alongside Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts, electric strike parts, exit alarm parts, and Schlage mortise lock parts for complete door hardware service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

LCN 4000 Series closers appear on every commercial egress and fire-rated door alongside exit devices, electric strikes, and deadbolts. The 2210 appears on correctional facility doors alongside high-security cylindrical and mortise lock hardware.

 

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors with LCN 4040XP or 4050A closers, browse the exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled doors in the same building, browse the electric strikes catalogue. For Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex exit alarm parts on secondary exits, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on secured interior doors, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on high-security entries in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source LCN, Von Duprin, Schlage, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About LCN 4000 Series and 2210 Closer Parts

 

What is the difference between the LCN 4010, 4020, and 4110 door closers?

All three are heavy-duty application-specific 4000 Series closers requiring mounting and handing specification at order time. The 4010 is designed exclusively for regular arm pull side (hinge side) installations. The 4020 is designed exclusively for top jamb applications where the closer mounts on the frame head above the door. The 4110 is designed exclusively for parallel arm push side installations and ships with an Extra Duty Arm as standard. None converts to a different mounting without a different arm configuration.

 

What is the LCN 4050A Series and how does it differ from the 4040XP?

Both are non-handed universal heavy-duty surface closers with adjustable spring sizes 1 to 6 and the Green Dial system. The 4040XP uses a cast iron body and is LCN's most durable institutional specification closer with a 30-year warranty. The 4050A uses cast aluminum, is lighter, carries a 25-year warranty, and has the most common commercial mounting footprint (2-3/8 inch by 6-3/4 inch) making it ideal for retrofit applications. Both use Liquid X all-weather fluid eliminating seasonal adjustment.

 

What is the LCN spindle difference between 4000 Series models and why does it matter for arms?

The 4040 and 4040XP use a six-sided hex spindle. The 4010, 4020, and 4110 use a flat-sided oval spindle. The 1260 and 1460 use an eight-sided star spindle. Arms are machined to one specific spindle type and are not interchangeable across spindle types. A 4040XP arm will not fit a 4010 closer. Always confirm the series and spindle type before ordering any replacement arm.

 

What is the LCN 4000T pocket door closer?

The 4000T is the only LCN 4000 Series model designed for pocket doors that slide into a wall cavity. All other 4000 Series closers are for swinging doors. The 4000T's arm, cylinder, and track are specific to sliding door applications and are not interchangeable with any other 4000 Series components. It is the correct specification for pocket door applications where controlled automatic return-to-closed is required.

 

What is the LCN 2210 Series and when is it specified instead of the 4210/4510 Smoothee?

The 2210 is a heavy-duty high-security overhead concealed closer with complete concealment (cylinder in head frame, arm and track in door top rail) and TORX tamper-resistant fasteners. The 4210/4510 Smoothee are surface-mounted high-security closers. The 2210 is specified instead of the Smoothee when complete concealment is required to eliminate any visible surface hardware. This applies in correctional facilities, psychiatric units, and vandal-prone environments where any surface-mounted hardware presents an attack or leverage opportunity.

 

What is the Fast Power Adjust indicator on LCN 4000 Series closers?

The Fast Power Adjust indicator is the spring power adjustment reference on the 4010, 4020, 4030, and 4110 Series closers that allows spring power to be changed in the field without removing the cover or replacing the cylinder. When a 4010 or 4110 begins closing too slowly or fails to latch, increasing the spring power with the Fast Power Adjust is the first diagnostic step before any component replacement. Many unnecessary cylinder replacements occur because the technician was unaware that spring power was adjustable on these models.

Schlage Padlocks, Hasps, Cable Locks and Installation Tools: Complete Commercial Guide

Security Parts carries Schlage padlocks including the 850410 covered laminate padlock, 855156 shackle-less padlock, 855101 Kryptonite vehicle hasp, 855118 high-security double hinge hasp, and 994800/994862 cable locks, plus Schlage installation tools including the 24002693 lever removal tool (ND and L Series), 021415 spanner wrench (D and L Series), 40-015 boring bit, 39-029 finish selector kit, and 40-029/40-030 strike marking chisels. Schlage padlocks use full-size Schlage cylinders that integrate directly into any Schlage masterkey system, allowing the building master key to open padlocks alongside all door hardware.

Schlage padlocks and portable security hardware solve the key management problem that undermines most commercial facility security programs: when a building uses Schlage door hardware on a masterkey system but standard padlocks on storage rooms, equipment cages, and utility closures, facilities staff carry two separate key sets. Schlage padlocks eliminate this by using the same full-size Schlage cylinder format that integrates into any building's existing Schlage key schedule. One key. All locks. Every door and every padlock.

The installation tools in the Schlage accessories catalog serve a different purpose: they are the precision instruments that determine whether field lock installation produces a door that operates correctly the first time or generates a callback. Strike misalignment, lever damage from improper removal, and bore errors are the three most common field-correctable installation failures, and the Schlage tool catalog addresses all three directly.

Browse the complete Schlage padlocks catalog and cylinders, keys and installation accessories catalog at Security Parts. For the full Schlage commercial hardware range, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog.

100+ years Schlage padlock history; full-size cylinders since the beginning
Lifetime Schlage padlock warranty on all models when correctly maintained
Aug 2012 Date Schlage introduced the updated ergonomic 24002693 lever removal tool
Full-size Schlage cylinder format in every padlock: masterkey-compatible with all door hardware
 
 

Schlage Padlocks: Why Full-Size Cylinders Matter

Most commercial padlocks use proprietary pin tumbler cylinders that are smaller than the cylinders used in commercial door hardware. This size difference is why standard padlocks cannot be incorporated into a building's Schlage masterkey system. The cylinder format must match between padlocks and door hardware for masterkey integration to work.

Schlage padlocks use the same full-size Schlage cylinder format used in the ND Series cylindrical locks, the L Series mortise locks, the B Series deadbolts, and the CL Series cabinet locks. Because the cylinder format is identical, Schlage padlocks can be: keyed to match any change key in the building's key schedule (one padlock key, one door key), keyed alike with other padlocks to use a single padlock key, masterkeyed so the building's master key opens both doors and padlocks, and grand masterkeyed within multi-building campus systems.

 

The masterkey integration fact that eliminates the second key ring: A facilities manager in a commercial building who carries a Schlage master key for all doors typically also carries a separate key ring for padlocks on equipment cages, storage closets, mechanical rooms, and exterior gates. If those padlocks were specified as Schlage padlocks at the time of the building's key system design, the facilities master key would open every padlock as well as every door. This single-key operation is achievable at no additional cost by specifying Schlage padlocks when the padlocks are procured within the same master key schedule as the door hardware. Converting existing non-Schlage padlocks to Schlage during a rekeying event also achieves this. The key management benefit is the difference between a one-key building and a two-ring facility manager.
 

Schlage Padlock Product Guide

 

850410 Covered Laminate Steel Padlock

Standard Shackle | Weather Protected

Laminated steel body: multiple steel layers laminated together, providing better cut resistance than a single-body padlock of equal size. 1/4-inch diameter hardened steel shackle, 1-1/8-inch clearance. Rubber weather cover over cylinder for outdoor and all-weather use. 1-1/2-inch width. Available keyed different, keyed alike, or keyed to a building key schedule. Full-size Schlage cylinder for masterkey integration. Lifetime warranty.

 

855156 Shackle-Less Padlock (Kryptonite)

Recessed Bolt | Maximum Physical Attack Resistance

2-7/8-inch diameter round solid hardened steel body. No external shackle: locking bolt is completely internal, protected by the full-diameter steel body. Nickel chrome finish. Six-pin brass cylinder for pick and drill resistance. Bolt resists prying, cutting, and sawing attacks. Two keys supplied. For use with hasp or lock box where recessed padlock mounting is possible. Full-size Schlage cylinder.

 

855101 Kryptonite Vehicle Hasp

Vehicle Security | Specialized Application

Specialized hasp designed for vehicle cargo door security. Provides a padlock closure point on delivery trucks, cargo vans, and fleet vehicles where a standard door handle or built-in lock does not provide adequate security. Pairs with any Schlage shackle padlock. For fleet security operations requiring key system integration with building padlocks.

 

855118 High-Security Double Hinge Hasp

7-3/4 x 1-3/4 Inch | Double Hinge Design

Double hinge hasp for commercial secured enclosures. 7-3/4 inch by 1-3/4 inch. Two separate mounting pivot points prevent single-point prying, the primary attack vector on standard single-hinge hasps. For equipment storage doors, utility closures, and gate applications where the padlock is the primary security mechanism. Best paired with the 855156 shackle-less padlock.

 

994800 Cable Lock, 48 Inch

Flexible Steel Cable | Laminated Padlock

Flexible steel cable, 48 inches, with attached laminated padlock. For bicycle security, equipment anchoring, and portable asset protection where a fixed padlock and hasp are not practical. Full-size Schlage cylinder on the attached padlock allows masterkey integration for fleet or campus equipment management.

 

994862 Cable Lock, 180 Inch

Flexible Steel Cable | Laminated Padlock | Extended Length

Same construction as the 994800 but 180 inches (15 feet) in length. For large equipment, multiple asset anchoring, and applications where the anchor point is not adjacent to the secured object. The extended length accommodates posts, columns, and structural members at a distance from the secured asset.

 

Shackle-Less Padlock + Double Hinge Hasp: The Highest Commercial Combination

Most commercial security consultants specify padlock security based on padlock grade alone, without considering the hasp as part of the attack surface. A Grade 1 padlock on a cheap single-hinge hasp can be defeated by prying the hasp open, bypassing the padlock entirely without cutting the shackle. The padlock is irrelevant if the hasp fails first.

The highest-security portable lock configuration available in the Schlage catalog at SecurityParts.com pairs the 855118 double hinge hasp with the 855156 shackle-less padlock. The hasp's double hinge eliminates the single-point prying attack. The shackle-less padlock eliminates the shackle cutting attack. When the 855156 bolt is engaged through the hasp staple, the only remaining attack surface is the hasp mounting screws (addressed by proper mounting into structural material with appropriate fasteners) and the padlock body itself (hardened steel resisting cutting and drilling).

 

The hasp mounting detail that determines whether the padlock matters: A double hinge hasp mounted with standard wood screws into a door face provides significantly less resistance than the same hasp mounted with through-bolts into the door edge or frame, or with 3-inch screws into structural backing. The hasp-mounting fastener is the weakest link in most padlock security installations, not the padlock itself. When specifying any hasp installation, require through-bolting or structural-backed screws rather than surface-only fastening. This is the same logic as the LCN 4040SEH being worthless without an opposite-side closer: the system is only as strong as its weakest required component.
 

Schlage Installation Tools and Accessories

Schlage installation tools exist because field installation of commercial door hardware is a precision operation. The difference between a correctly installed Schlage lock that operates smoothly for years and a callback-generating installation is frequently one measurement error on a strike location or one damaged lever from improper removal. The Schlage tool catalog at SecurityParts.com covers the tools that prevent these errors.

 

24002693: Lever Removal Tool for ND and L Series

The 24002693 lever removal tool is the correct instrument for removing levers from Schlage ND Series cylindrical locks and L Series mortise locks. The tool provides the correct geometry to release the lever retention tab without damage to the lever, rose, or chassis housing.

Schlage introduced an updated, more ergonomic version of this tool on August 15, 2012, alongside Phase 1 of the ND Series improvement project. The new tool (24002693) includes a bottle opener as an additional ergonomic feature and is the current production version. It works on all ND Series and L Series locks regardless of manufacture date.

 

The improvised lever removal that generates the most common ND Series chassis damage: Field technicians who do not have the 24002693 tool frequently attempt lever removal using a flathead screwdriver to release the retention tab. The screwdriver geometry does not match the tab geometry and frequently breaks the retention tab clip or deforms the chassis opening. A broken retention tab on an ND Series chassis requires chassis replacement, which is a significantly more expensive repair than the 24002693 tool. Any facility or service company that regularly installs or services Schlage ND or L Series hardware should have the 24002693 in their standard service kit. The 24341471 pack of 20 tools is the economical option for companies with multiple service technicians.
 

021415: Spanner Wrench for D Series and L Series

The 021415 spanner wrench engages the spanner nut on Schlage D Series knobs and L Series mortise locks. The spanner nut is a cylindrical collar with notches cut around its perimeter, designed specifically to receive a spanner wrench rather than a conventional wrench.

This tool is required when disassembling cylinder housings, adjusting cylinder depth, or reassembling the lock body on D Series and L Series installations. Standard adjustable pliers or pipe wrenches can grip the spanner nut initially but quickly strip the notches, making future service impossible without the correct tool. Once the notches are stripped, the nut is difficult to remove without damaging the lock body, requiring housing replacement in many cases.

The 021415 replaced the older M504-341 spanner wrench. If a facility has older M504-341 tools in their kit, the 021415 is the current replacement that maintains the same function with the current ND and L Series spanner nut geometry.

 

39-029: Finish Selector Kit

The Schlage 39-029 finish selector kit is a collection of physical finish samples representing the full Schlage finish range. It is used at the specification stage of a project to select the correct finish designation before placing hardware orders.

Schlage finish codes use both BHMA designation numbers (626 for satin chrome, 619 for satin nickel, 622 for matte black, 605 for polished brass, and so on) and the older US designation system. Selecting a finish from a catalog image on a screen versus from an actual physical sample on the specified door material in the actual building lighting produces different results. The 39-029 finish selector kit provides physical sample chips that can be held against the door material in the actual installation environment, producing a finish selection that accounts for the actual ambient light rather than the catalog image.

 

The finish selection that causes the most post-installation rematch complaints: Architects and facilities managers who select finishes from catalog images or computer renders on projects where the actual doors are already installed and visible frequently discover that the selected finish looks different in person. Satin chrome (626) appears warmer in incandescent lighting and cooler under fluorescent lighting. Aged bronze finishes look more brown in high natural light and more gold under artificial lighting. Using the 39-029 finish selector kit with physical samples in the actual installation environment eliminates this post-installation finish mismatch. Hardware replacements due to finish dissatisfaction are not covered under warranty and represent avoidable cost.
 

40-015: Boring Bit 7/8 Inch

The Schlage 40-015 is a 7/8-inch diameter boring bit for the edge bore that accepts the latch assembly on cylindrical locks and deadbolts. The edge bore must be precisely sized to the latch body diameter: too small and the latch body cannot be inserted; too large and the latch body has excess play that causes misalignment and latch binding.

The standard 7/8-inch edge bore accommodates most standard Schlage latch assemblies. When a door's existing edge bore is the wrong size (too small for a new latch or damaged from a previous installation), the 40-015 restores the correct bore diameter. This bit is also used when installing Schlage hardware in doors that were previously bored for non-Schlage hardware with a different edge bore dimension.

 

40-026: Bushing for Jig 40-012

The Schlage 40-026 is a 1-1/2-inch bushing for the Schlage 40-012 installation jig. Installation jigs guide the boring bit to the correct position on the door face for the main crossbore without marking or measuring the door. The 40-026 bushing accepts the boring bit used for the 1-1/2-inch bore requirement on specific Schlage latch configurations.

 

40-029 and 40-030: Strike Marking Chisels

The 40-029 is a strike marking chisel for full-lip strikes. The 40-030 is a strike marking chisel for 1-1/8-inch by 2-3/4-inch strikes (the B Series deadbolt standard strike size). These are the most underused and most valuable installation tools in the Schlage accessory catalog.

A strike marking chisel is placed on the door edge with the lock's latch bolt in the extended position. When the door is closed against the chisel, the chisel face transfers an impression of the exact bolt position to the door frame. This impression shows the installer exactly where to chisel the mortise pocket in the frame for the strike. No measuring, no templating, no second-guessing the centerline. Strike misalignment is the most common cause of latch binding complaints on new installations, and it is also the most easily prevented with the correct marking tool.

 

The strike marking procedure that prevents every new-installation latch complaint: Before cutting any strike mortise pocket, use the appropriate strike marking chisel. Place the chisel on the latch face of the door with the latch extended and the door in the closed position. A firm push or two light hammer taps transfers the exact bolt outline to the frame. Chisel the mortise pocket to this outline. The strike plate covers minor surface marks. A single marking operation with the 40-029 or 40-030 produces a correctly positioned strike on the first cut, replacing a process that would otherwise require measuring the latch centerline, measuring up from the hinge centerline on the frame, and templating the strike from all these dimensions. Every missed dimension adds the possibility of a misaligned strike.
 

Schlage Installation Tools and Accessories: Complete Reference

 

Part NumberDescriptionUsed OnWhen to Order
24002693Lever removal tool, ND and L Series (updated ergonomic 2012 version)ND Series cylindrical, L Series mortiseAny facility servicing Schlage ND or L Series; essential field tool
24341471Lever removal tool, pack of 20ND Series cylindrical, L Series mortiseCompanies with multiple technicians servicing Schlage ND and L Series
021415Spanner wrench, D Series knobs and L SeriesD Series knobs, L Series mortiseCylinder housing disassembly/reassembly on D and L Series
39-029Finish selector kit with physical samplesAll Schlage hardware with finish specificationsPre-specification finish selection; renovation projects with existing hardware
40-015Boring bit, 7/8 inch for edge boreAll Schlage latch assemblies using 7/8 inch edge boreNew installations; re-boring miscut or damaged edge bores
40-026Bushing, 1-1/2 inch for 40-012 jig40-012 installation jigSpecific bore requirements using Schlage jig system
40-029Strike marking chisel for full-lip strikesFull-lip strike installationsEvery new lock installation; eliminates strike misalignment on first attempt
40-030Strike marking chisel for 1-1/8" x 2-3/4" strikesB Series deadbolt standard strikesB Series deadbolt installations; replacement strike positioning
34-401Home Secure Owner Key Envelopes (pack of 1000)Key system documentationFacilities maintaining physical key records for residents or owners
36-031Trim collarCL Series cabinet locks and cylindrical locksOversized bore covering; cosmetic damage around bore; CL cabinet lock installation
36-071Trim ring and security insert packCylindrical lock installations requiring additional trim ringWhen trim ring is missing from an existing installation or damaged during service
38-031Diameter adapter ring for 2-1/8 inch door prepCylindrical locks on doors with 2-1/8 inch boreWhen door bore is 2-1/8 inch and closer-mounted trim requires specific ring adapter

 

Key Envelopes and Key System Documentation

The Schlage 34-401 Home Secure Owner Key Envelopes (pack of 1000) are the physical documentation component of a Schlage key system management program. Each envelope provides a space to record key codes, cut specifications, key holder name, and key number for a single key.

Key system documentation is the most overlooked element of commercial lock hardware maintenance. A building whose key system records are complete can be rekeyed efficiently when a key is lost, can add new openings to the existing key schedule without conflict, and can demonstrate key control compliance during security audits. A building with no key records must be surveyed from scratch for every rekeying event, which multiplies the labor and materials cost of what would otherwise be a simple change key swap.

 

The key control fact that determines rekeying costs for the next 20 years: A commercial building whose key system records are fully documented at installation costs roughly 30 to 50 percent less to rekey when a key is lost compared to a building with no records, because the locksmith can work from the documented key schedule rather than physically pulling and examining every cylinder. At 100 doors per floor on a multi-story facility, the difference in labor between working from records versus working without them is material. The Schlage 34-401 envelope system, combined with a maintained key schedule document, creates the records that make future rekeying operations predictable in cost and time. Most facilities skip this step at installation. Most facilities pay for it on the first rekeying event.
 

How to Integrate Schlage Padlocks into an Existing Key System

Integrating Schlage padlocks into an existing building key system follows the same process as adding any new Schlage lock to the system. Three steps determine how the padlock is keyed.

1. Identify the existing key system's keyway and master key schedule. The keyway must match between the padlock cylinder and the door hardware for the same key to operate both. If the building uses the Everest 29 keyway (restricted, patented), the padlock cylinder must also be specified as Everest 29. If the building uses a standard C keyway or other conventional keyway, the padlock cylinder is ordered to match.

 

2. Determine the keying level for the padlock. Should the padlock be operated by a change key (specific to one opening), masterkey (operates all locks at one master level), or grand master key (operates across multiple buildings or master groups)? The answer determines the pin tumbler combination used in the padlock cylinder.

 

3. Order the padlock with the cylinder specified to the key system requirements. Schlage padlocks can be ordered keyed to a specific Schlage key schedule when the order is placed through a Schlage distributor with access to the building's key bitting. For new buildings without an existing schedule, Schlage padlocks are ordered as part of the complete key system design.

 

Browse the complete Schlage padlocks catalog and installation tools and accessories catalog at Security Parts. For the complete Schlage commercial hardware range including B Series deadbolts, ND Series cylindrical locks, and L Series mortise locks, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is at 845-935-0301 or the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Schlage Padlocks and Installation Tools

Masterkey integration guidance, hasp attack surface analysis, lever removal tool generation documentation, strike marking chisel benefit, and same-day shipping.

 

Masterkey Integration

We document that Schlage padlocks integrate into any existing Schlage key schedule, eliminating the second key ring for facilities staff. This specification value is the primary reason to choose Schlage padlocks over generic alternative

 

Hasp Attack Surface

We document that the hasp mounting fastener is the weakest link in most padlock installations, not the padlock. The double hinge plus shackle-less combination eliminates both shackle and single-hinge attack vectors.

 

Tool Generation Tracking

We document the August 2012 lever removal tool update so facilities know whether their existing M504-341 tool has been superseded by the 24002693. Using the old tool on new ND Series locks risks retention tab damage.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most padlocks and tools ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for key system integration and tool compatibility support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for Schlage Padlocks and Tools

  • We document the single-key building concept: Schlage padlocks with full-size cylinders integrate into any existing Schlage key system, eliminating separate padlock keys. No other parts supplier explains this integration value at the product level.
  • We document the key record documentation cost reduction: complete key records at installation reduce rekeying labor costs 30 to 50 percent versus buildings with no records. The 34-401 key envelope system is the record-keeping tool that makes this possible.
  • We document the lever removal tool generation change (M504-341 superseded by 24002693 in August 2012) so facilities using the old tool understand why the new tool is needed for Phase 1 ND Series and later locks.
  • We document the strike marking chisel as the most efficient way to prevent strike misalignment on new installations. No other parts supplier explains that the 40-029 and 40-030 eliminate the measurement steps that produce misaligned strikes.
  • We carry padlocks and tools alongside ND Series cylindrical lock parts, L Series mortise lock parts, B Series deadbolt parts, CL Series cabinet lock parts, and exit device parts for complete building hardware service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

Schlage padlocks and installation tools appear alongside all Schlage door hardware in commercial facilities. A complete building service call typically covers door locks, padlocks, and the tools needed to service both.

For Schlage ND Series and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts for interior office and corridor doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts for high-security entries, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts for secondary exits and storage rooms, browse the deadbolts catalog. For Schlage CL Series cabinet lock parts for office furniture and filing cabinets in the same key system, browse the cabinet locks catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated corridor doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For exit device parts on egress stairwells and fire exits, browse the exit devices catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage Padlocks, Hasps and Installation Tools

 

Can Schlage padlocks be masterkeyed to the same system as Schlage door hardware?

Yes. Schlage padlocks use full-size Schlage cylinders that are compatible with any Schlage key system, including Everest 29 restricted keyway and conventional keyway systems. A building that uses Schlage door hardware on a master key schedule can specify Schlage padlocks to be keyed within the same schedule, so one master key opens all doors and all padlocks. Generic padlocks with small-format cylinders cannot be incorporated into a Schlage key system.

 

What is the difference between the Schlage 850410 and 855156 padlock?

The 850410 is a covered laminated steel padlock with a standard 1/4-inch hardened steel shackle and weather cover for all-weather use. The 855156 is a shackle-less padlock: a round 2-7/8-inch solid hardened steel body with a completely internal bolt that resists cutting, sawing, and prying attacks that target the shackle on standard padlocks. The 855156 is used with a hasp or lock box where the recessed bolt design makes shackle attacks impossible.

 

What is the Schlage 855118 hasp and what applications is it specified for?

The 855118 is a high-security hasp with a double hinge design (7-3/4 by 1-3/4 inches) for commercial storage, utility rooms, gate closures, and equipment enclosures. The double hinge prevents single-point prying attacks that defeat standard single-hinge hasps. Best combined with the 855156 shackle-less padlock: the two together eliminate both the shackle cutting attack and the single-point hasp prying attack.

 

What is the Schlage 24002693 lever removal tool and when is it used?

The 24002693 lever removal tool is the correct instrument for removing levers from Schlage ND Series cylindrical locks and L Series mortise locks without damaging the retention tab, rose, or chassis. An updated ergonomic version was introduced August 15, 2012 alongside the ND Series Phase 1 improvement project, including a bottle opener feature. Using substitute tools (screwdrivers or improvised picks) risks breaking the retention tab, which requires chassis replacement. The 24341471 is a pack of 20 for service companies.

 

What is the Schlage 021415 spanner wrench and what does it adjust?

The 021415 spanner wrench engages the spanner nut (a notched cylindrical collar) on Schlage D Series knobs and L Series mortise locks. It is required for cylinder housing disassembly and reassembly. Using pliers or pipe wrenches strips the spanner nut notches, making future service impossible without housing replacement. The 021415 replaced the older M504-341 wrench and is the current production tool for all D and L Series spanner nut operations.

 

What are the Schlage 40-029 and 40-030 strike marking chisels used for?

Strike marking chisels transfer the exact strike plate location from the door edge to the door frame during installation. The 40-029 is for full-lip strikes; the 40-030 is for 1-1/8-inch by 2-3/4-inch strikes (B Series deadbolt standard). The chisel is placed at the latch with the door closed, then tapped to transfer the impression to the frame, showing exactly where to cut the mortise pocket. Using a strike marking chisel eliminates the measurement steps that produce misaligned strikes, which is the most common new-installation latch complaint.

LCN Sentronic, SEH Holder, Smoothee, SEM 7800 and Auto Equalizer Door Closer Parts: Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the LCN Sentronic fire and life safety closer series (3130SE, 4040SE, 4040SEH, 2310ME, 4310ME, 4410ME, 4310HSA, 4410HSA), the SEM 7800 Series magnetic holders, the 4210/4510 Smoothee high-security surface closers, and the Auto Equalizer pneumatic (2610, 4810, 4820, 4840) and electric (4630, 4640) operators. All Sentronic closers require voltage specification at ordering time (24V or 120V). The solenoid is not separately replaceable: it must be ordered as part of the track or cylinder subassembly. The SEH holder requires an opposite-side closer. SEH installation without a confirmed opposite-side closer is a life safety code violation on fire doors.

The LCN specialty product lines serve applications that standard surface closers cannot address: fire and smoke barrier doors that must hold open during normal hours and self-close on fire alarm, high-security environments where closer hardware must resist tampering, and multi-door corridors where a single pneumatic air supply powers dozens of doors simultaneously. Each of these product lines has unique parts requirements and ordering specifications that cannot be treated like standard surface-mounted closer parts.

Browse the complete LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all Sentronic, SEH, Smoothee, SEM 7800, and Auto Equalizer components. For the full LCN catalog including surface-mounted and overhead concealed closers, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog.

1972 Year LCN Sentronic technology was introduced (originally as 4010SE/4110SE)
24V or 120V Voltage options that must be specified at Sentronic ordering time
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code compliance required for all Sentronic fire door applications
225 lbs Maximum door weight capacity on LCN 4630/4640 electric Auto Equalizer
 
 

The LCN Sentronic System: How Fire Door Hold-Open Works

The LCN Sentronic system is built on a fundamental fire code requirement: interior fire and smoke barrier doors must be self-closing (they must close when not held open), but code allows them to be held open by an electromagnetic device connected to the building's fire alarm system. When the fire alarm activates, the current to the holding mechanism is interrupted and the door closes automatically under its own closer spring force.

This is the core operating principle of all Sentronic products. The door is held open during normal building hours by electromagnetic force. When fire alarm current interrupts, the electromagnetic hold releases and the door closer drives the door shut. No battery backup is involved: the fail-safe condition is always the de-energized state, which is the door closed. A power outage automatically closes all Sentronic-held doors, which is the correct life safety behavior.

 

Why fail-safe is always door-closed on Sentronic systems: Every Sentronic closer and holder is energized to hold the door open. Power interruption releases the hold. This is the opposite of many electronic access control systems where devices are energized to lock. The fail-safe design for fire door hold-open systems is intentional: if power fails, if the fire alarm activates, or if the wiring is cut, the door automatically closes and provides the rated fire separation. Any modification to a Sentronic system that changes this fail-safe direction (such as using a latching relay that keeps the door held even after power loss) creates a non-compliant fire door assembly that will fail inspection and can create life-safety liability.
 

LCN Sentronic Series Overview: Which Product for Which Door

 

3130SE

Overhead Concealed | Single Point Hold-Open

Overhead concealed Sentronic closer for 1-3/4 inch interior doors. Single point hold-open from 85 to 110 degrees. The 3130SEL extends hold-open range to 120 degrees fixed. Non-handed. Track assembly 4040SE-3038 also fits 3130SE, 4010SE, and 4110SE. Voltage must be specified (24V or 120V).

 

4040SE

Surface Mounted | Single Point | Closer and Holder

Heavy-duty non-handed, non-sized complete closer and holder for fire and smoke barrier doors. Single point hold-open from 85 to 110 degrees. Door held open until current interruption; single lever track arm. Requires no additional closer. Available 24V or 120V. Track assembly 4040SE-3038 replacement covers this series.

 

4040SEH

Holder Only | Must Have Opposite-Side Closer

Holder only: provides single-point hold-open but has NO closing mechanism. Must always be paired with an opposite-side UL-listed door closer. Non-handed. Single lever track arm. Track 4040SEH-3038 available in 24V or 120V. Momentary on/off switch board available for testing door release.

 

2310ME

Overhead Concealed | Multi-Point Hold-Open

Heavy-duty overhead concealed Sentronic with adjustable multi-point hold-open. Concealed in frame, single lever track arm concealed in door. Interior doors to 4'0". Full rack-and-pinion closer when hold-open not engaged or current interrupted. Handed. 24V or 120V. Conforms to NFPA 101.

 

4310ME

Surface Mounted Pull Side | Heavy Duty | Multi-Point

Heavy-duty surface mounted on hinge (pull) side. Ships with Swing-Free arm, track, track roller. Interior doors to 4'0". Full rack-and-pinion when hold-open not engaged or power interrupted. Swing-Free arm allows door to move without closer resistance when not in hold-open. 24V or 120V. Built-in on/off switch.

 

4410ME

Surface Mounted Top Jamb | Heavy Duty | Multi-Point

Surface mounted on top jamb (push side) with double-lever regular arm. Full rack-and-pinion when hold-open not engaged or power interrupted. Same application as 4310ME but for push-side mounting when hinge-side mounting is not possible. 24V or 120V. Ships with mounting plate and metal cover.

 

Sentronic Parts Reference: Voltage Selection and Key Replacement Components

 

The Most Critical Ordering Decision: 24V or 120V

Every Sentronic closer cylinder and track assembly is voltage-specific. Ordering the wrong voltage produces a unit that connects to the wrong wiring system and either fails to hold open (if 120V unit on 24V supply) or potentially damages the control board (if 24V unit on 120V supply). The voltage of the installed system must be confirmed before ordering any Sentronic replacement component.

The installed voltage is determined by the building's fire alarm or hold-open control panel. In most modern commercial installations, 24V DC or 24V AC is the standard because fire alarm systems operate at 24V. In older buildings, 120V wiring from the building's electrical system was used because early Sentronic systems predated 24V fire alarm standardization. When replacing a component in an older building, confirm at the existing wiring rather than assuming the voltage from the building's era.

 

The transformer that prevents the most common Sentronic installation mistake: When a 120V Sentronic unit is specified in a building whose fire alarm operates at 24V, the LCN 4040SE-3210 transformer reduces line voltage from 120V to 24V AC. It mounts on a plate for a 4-inch by 4-inch by 2-1/8-inch junction box. Many Sentronic installations that appear to fail immediately after replacement actually have a voltage mismatch: a 24V replacement cylinder was ordered for an existing 120V wiring system. Always check the transformer presence and voltage at the junction box before ordering a replacement cylinder.

 

Part NumberDescriptionApplies ToNotes
4040SE-3038Track assembly (specify voltage and finish)4040SE, 4040SEH, 3130SE, 4010SE, 4110SEShared across multiple Sentronic series. Voltage required.
4040SE-3210Transformer, 120V to 24V AC4040SE, 4040SEHFor junction box mount when 24V system uses 120V supply
4040SE-3436On/Off switch assembly4040SEControls hold-open function independently
4310ME-3351On/Off switch assembly (specify 24V or 120V)4310MEVoltage-specific; must specify at ordering time
4410ME-3351On/Off switch assembly (specify 24V or 120V)4410MEVoltage-specific; must specify at ordering time
SEH-3077TStandard single (100 degree) holder arm4040SEHNon-handed; can combine with any 4040SE track
SEH-3034Track roller, quiet low friction4040SEHShoulder dimension X = 1/4 inch
SEH-168Track slider, alloy metal4040SEHFor use in SE series tracks only
SEH-81Conduit quick-connector4040SEHTwo-piece connector for 1/2 inch conduit

 

The Solenoid Subassembly Rule

The solenoid in all LCN Sentronic closers and holders is not a separately replaceable component. This is the single most important parts fact about Sentronic systems that is not documented in any supplier catalog in buyer-facing format. When a Sentronic closer fails to hold open (door closes immediately even with power applied), the diagnosis often points to the solenoid. The correct replacement is the track assembly or cylinder subassembly that includes the solenoid, not a standalone solenoid coil.

The 4040SE-3038 track assembly is the replacement unit that resolves solenoid failures on the 4040SE, 4040SEH, 3130SE, 4010SE, and 4110SE. It is ordered with voltage specification. No standalone solenoid replacement kit exists for these models. Ordering a solenoid coil separately, as some buyers attempt, produces a part that cannot be field-installed without the complete subassembly.

 

4310HSA and 4410HSA Sentronic: High-Traffic Passage Closers

The LCN 4310HSA and 4410HSA Sentronic Series occupies a different application niche from the fire door hold-open Sentronic products. Where the 4040SE, 3130SE, and 2310ME are fire-coded products for doors that must be kept closed during fire events, the 4310HSA and 4410HSA are electronically controlled closers designed for easy passage through high-traffic doors in normal building operations.

The 4310HSA and 4410HSA use an electronic hold-open function that allows staff or residents to pass through a door without fighting the closer spring force on every passage. A credential event, push-button signal, or occupancy sensor can trigger the hold-open, and the door closes automatically after the hold-open period expires. This is the correct specification for pharmacy pass-through doors in hospitals, resident wing corridor doors in assisted living, and high-traffic interior doors where physical effort is a barrier for specific user populations.

Both the 4310HSA and 4410HSA are surface mounted. The 4310HSA mounts on the hinge (pull) side. The 4410HSA mounts on the top jamb (push side). Parts for these series include voltage-specific cylinder assemblies and switch assemblies consistent with the broader Sentronic family.

 

LCN SEH Series Holder: The Critical Installation Requirement

The LCN SEH Series (including the 4040SEH) is a holder only device with no closing mechanism. This distinction is the most important life safety fact about the SEH Series and is responsible for more non-compliant fire door installations than any other LCN specification error.

 

SEH vs 4040SE: The Missing Closer

The 4040SE is a complete closer and holder in one unit. The 4040SEH is a holder only. When the fire alarm de-energizes the SEH's holding mechanism, the door must be closed by a separate door closer mounted on the opposite side of the door from the SEH. Without this opposite-side closer, the door hangs open when the SEH releases. A fire door assembly on a smoke or fire barrier that does not self-close is a non-compliant assembly and can result in the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) requiring immediate correction.

 

The SEH installation that passes initial inspection but fails under fire conditions: An SEH installation on a fire-rated door without an opposite-side closer may pass a visual inspection because the door appears to be on proper hardware. It fails functionally when the holding mechanism releases: the door does not close. This failure mode is only discovered during fire alarm testing, AHJ inspection, or an actual fire event. Any SEH installation must be confirmed to have an opposite-side UL-listed door closer before the fire door assembly can be considered compliant.
 

SEH Mounting and Configuration

The SEH Series mounts on the hinge pull side or stop face push side. The non-handed arm (SEH-3077T, standard single 100-degree holder arm) can be combined with any 4040SE series track, providing flexibility in mounting position. The track roller (SEH-3034) is the low-friction roller assembly with a 1/4-inch shoulder dimension X. The track slider (SEH-168) is the alloy metal slider used in SE series tracks.

 

LCN SEM 7800 Series Magnetic Holders

The LCN Sentronic SEM 7800 Series are electrically controlled door-holding magnets that are categorically different from Sentronic closers. The magnet holds the door open through direct magnetic attraction to a ferrous armature plate mounted on the door face. When the fire alarm de-energizes the magnet, the door releases and a separate door closer drives it shut.

 

SEM 7800 Mounting Options

The SEM 7800 Series offers three mounting configurations to address different door and corridor geometries:

Floor mount: The magnet mounts on the floor directly below the door edge. The armature plate mounts on the bottom of the door. Floor mounting is the cleanest aesthetic solution because the magnet is not visible on the wall or door face when the door is open.

 

Surface wall mount: The magnet mounts on the wall adjacent to the door. The armature plate is on the door face at the same height. Surface wall mounting is the easiest to install but leaves the magnet body visible on the wall.

 

Recessed wall mount: The magnet is recessed into the wall with only the face plate visible. This provides the lowest-profile wall appearance while maintaining the magnetic holding function.

 

The SEM 7800 armature alignment fact that prevents most holding failures: The SEM 7800 magnetic holding force is directly proportional to the alignment between the magnet face and the armature plate on the door. Even small misalignments of 1 to 2mm between the magnet face and armature reduce holding force significantly. When a SEM 7800 installation fails to hold a door reliably or releases under light force, the diagnosis is almost always armature misalignment rather than a failed magnet or wiring problem. Before diagnosing a failed magnet, check the alignment gap between the magnet face and armature plate when the door is in the hold-open position. The gap should be minimal and even across the full face. Adjusting the armature plate position restores full holding force without any parts replacement.
 

LCN 4210 and 4510 Smoothee: High-Security Closer Parts

The LCN 4210 and 4510 Smoothee Series are the surface-mounted high-security door closers in the LCN catalog. They are specified in correctional facilities, detention centers, psychiatric hospitals, and juvenile facilities where occupants may have motive and opportunity to defeat or damage door hardware.

The "Smoothee" designation, which has been part of the LCN naming convention for decades, refers to the smooth, tamper-resistant exterior of the closer body. Standard door closers have exposed adjustment valves, arm screws, and cover seams that provide leverage points for tampering. The Smoothee's design minimizes these attack surfaces.

 

4210 vs 4510 vs 2210

The 4210 is the standard high-security Smoothee, heavy-duty surface mounted with special components to minimize tampering and vandalism. The 4510 is the heavy-duty high-security version for applications requiring maximum closer durability alongside the tamper-resistant design. The 2210 is the overhead concealed version of the high-security closer, for applications where a concealed installation is preferred but still require tamper resistance. All three are Grade 1 and available in finishes appropriate for institutional environments.

 

Smoothee Arm and Valve Access

The Smoothee Series uses a restricted cover design that limits access to the adjustment valves and arm screw without special tools. This is intentional: easy valve access is the primary tampering vulnerability on standard door closers in correctional environments. When servicing a Smoothee in the field, confirm the correct tool is available before beginning work. Attempting to access valves or covers with standard tools risks damaging the tamper-resistant features that make the Smoothee appropriate for its specification environment.

 

LCN Auto Equalizer Operators: Pneumatic and Electric

The LCN Auto Equalizer operator lines serve a specific application: doors that need to assist manual opening without being fully automatic door openers. Where the Benchmark and Senior Swing operators open doors automatically when activated, the Auto Equalizer provides reduced opening force assistance using pneumatic or electric power. The result is a door that feels lighter to open without being power-operated in the sense that requires ADA guard rails or safety mats.

 

Pneumatic Auto Equalizer: 2610, 4810, 4820, 4840

The pneumatic Auto Equalizer series uses compressed air to equalize the door opening force. The 2610 is the most distinctive model: a single air supply unit that can power multiple doors simultaneously through pneumatic distribution lines. This multi-door capability makes the 2610 appropriate for large corridor projects where installing individual operators on each door would be prohibitively expensive.

The 4810 is the pneumatic series for primarily manual applications where occasional automatic assistance is needed. The 4820 is the low-energy ADA version providing controlled opening for accessible routes. The 4840 is the pneumatic multi-door solution for simultaneous control of several doors from a single air supply.

 

Electric Auto Equalizer: 4630 and 4640

The 4630 and 4640 use an electrohydraulic mechanism (motor-driven hydraulic pump) rather than compressed air. The 4630 allows manual opening to 170 degrees. The 4640 allows manual opening to 100 degrees.

Both the 4630 and 4640 are designed for doors up to 225 pounds and act as standard door closers in the event of power outage, maintaining the fail-safe closed behavior required on fire-rated egress doors. The 4630 and 4640 use a controller assembly (part 4640-3462 for the 4640) that manages the hydraulic operation and includes an on/off switch and hold-open adjustment.

 

The critical clutch assembly lubrication prohibition on 4630/4640: The LCN installation instructions for the 4630 and 4640 explicitly prohibit any form of lubricant contact with any part of the clutch assembly. The clutch is the mechanism that engages and disengages the motor-driven hydraulic system from the door arm during manual override. Oil or grease on the clutch prevents correct engagement and disengagement, producing erratic door behavior that mimics controller failure. Before diagnosing any 4630 or 4640 operational problem, confirm that no lubricant has been applied to the clutch area during a previous service visit.

For reveal depths between 4-1/2 inches and 8 inches, the 4630 requires the 4642 long arm. For reveal depths greater than 8 inches, consult the factory before ordering. This arm specification is distinct from all surface-mounted LCN closer arms and must be confirmed against the specific door reveal before any arm replacement order.

 

How to Identify the Correct Sentronic or Specialty Closer Before Ordering

Five pieces of information are needed before any Sentronic or specialty LCN parts order.

1. Series designation (4040SE, 4040SEH, 4310ME, 4410ME, 2310ME, 3130SE): On the label under the cover or on the cylinder body. This determines the parts catalog section.

 

2. Voltage (24V or 120V): At the wiring junction box or on the existing transformer. Voltage-specific components will not function if the wrong voltage is ordered.

 

3. Which component failed (track assembly, on/off switch, transformer, roller, slider): Track assembly failures: door does not hold even with power confirmed. Switch assembly failures: hold-open function cannot be tested or interrupted from the local switch. Roller failures: track noise or resistance on door swing.

 

4. For SEH: confirm opposite-side closer is present and UL-listed. Any SEH parts order should include verification that the opposite-side closer is still functional and compliant before the SEH is serviced.

 

5. For Smoothee: confirm available service tools before scheduling field work. The Smoothee's tamper-resistant design requires specific tools that may not be on a standard service truck.

Browse the LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all Sentronic, SEH, Smoothee, SEM 7800, and Auto Equalizer components. For the full LCN closer catalog including surface-mounted and concealed series, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog. For related exit device and alarm parts that appear on the same fire doors, browse exit alarm parts and exit device parts. Pre-order support is at 845-935-0301 or the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for LCN Sentronic and Specialty Closer Parts

Solenoid subassembly rule, SEH opposite-side closer requirement, 4630 clutch prohibition, voltage confirmation guidance, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

Solenoid Subassembly Rule

We document that the Sentronic solenoid is not separately replaceable and must be ordered as part of the track or cylinder subassembly. This prevents the impossible-to-find standalone solenoid order.

SEH Compliance Warning

We document that the SEH holder requires an opposite-side UL-listed closer and that installing an SEH without one creates a non-compliant fire door assembly. No other parts supplier makes this explicit.

Voltage Guidance

We document the 24V vs 120V voltage selection requirement for every Sentronic parts order, and the transformer 4040SE-3210 as the resolution when voltage mismatch is discovered after installation.

Same-Day Shipping

Most Sentronic, SEH, and Auto Equalizer parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for voltage and series confirmation.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for These LCN Parts

  • We document the solenoid subassembly rule at the parts-ordering level. No buyer-facing parts supplier content anywhere explains that LCN Sentronic solenoids cannot be replaced standalone. This single fact prevents the most common impossible-to-complete Sentronic repair.
  • We document the fail-safe direction (energized-to-hold, de-energized-to-close) and the life safety implication of any modification that changes this. Sentronic systems that use latching relays to maintain hold after power loss are non-compliant, but this is not documented in buyer-facing content anywhere.
  • We document the SEH opposite-side closer requirement as a code compliance issue, not just an operational one. An SEH without a confirmed opposite-side closer is a non-compliant fire door assembly that can fail AHJ inspection.
  • We document the 4630/4640 clutch assembly lubrication prohibition. A service visit that lubricates the clutch produces erratic behavior that looks like a controller failure and generates an unnecessary controller replacement order.
  • We carry all LCN specialty parts alongside Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts, exit alarm parts, electric strike parts, and Schlage cylindrical lock parts for complete fire door hardware service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

Fire and smoke barrier doors that use LCN Sentronic or SEH holders also typically include exit devices, electric strikes for access-controlled fire door openings, and exit alarms on secondary egress doors.

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on fire-rated egress doors in the same building, browse the exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex ECL exit alarm parts on fire door secondary exits, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on fire door frames with access control, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on office and interior doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on high-security entries in the same building, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source LCN, Von Duprin, Schlage, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About LCN Sentronic, SEH, Smoothee and Auto Equalizer Parts

 

What is the difference between the LCN 4040SE and 4040SEH Sentronic?

The 4040SE is a combination closer and holder: it both holds the door open electronically and closes it automatically when fire alarm current is interrupted. It requires no additional closer. The 4040SEH is a holder only with no closing mechanism: it must always be used with an opposite-side UL-listed door closer. Installing an SEH without an opposite-side closer creates a non-compliant fire door assembly because the door will not self-close when the SEH releases.

 

What voltage do LCN Sentronic closers use and how do I specify it when ordering?

All LCN Sentronic closers are available in 24V AC and 120V AC. Voltage must be specified at ordering time because cylinder and track assemblies are voltage-specific. 24V is used with fire alarm systems that provide 24V output. 120V is used with older line-voltage wiring systems. The 4040SE-3210 transformer reduces 120V line voltage to 24V when a 24V system is connected to a 120V supply circuit.

 

What is the LCN Sentronic solenoid and can it be replaced separately?

The Sentronic solenoid is the electromagnetic coil that holds the door open when energized. It is not separately replaceable as a standalone field component on any LCN Sentronic model. It must be ordered as part of the track assembly subassembly (4040SE-3038 for the 4040SE, 4040SEH, 3130SE, 4010SE, and 4110SE). Always specify voltage when ordering the track assembly replacement.

 

What is the LCN 4210/4510 Smoothee and where is it used?

The 4210 and 4510 Smoothee are heavy-duty, high-security surface-mounted door closers with special tamper-resistant components designed for correctional facilities, detention centers, psychiatric hospitals, and other environments where hardware may be subject to deliberate damage. The 2210 is the overhead concealed version. All three are Grade 1. The Smoothee cover and valve access requires specific service tools not typically on a standard service truck.

 

What is the difference between the LCN 2610/4810/4820/4840 and 4630/4640 Auto Equalizer operators?

The 2610, 4810, 4820, and 4840 are pneumatically powered Auto Equalizers for primarily manual applications. The 2610 can power multiple doors from one air supply. The 4630 and 4640 are electrohydraulic (motor-driven) operators for single doors. The 4630 opens to 170 degrees; the 4640 opens to 100 degrees. Both electric models handle doors to 225 pounds and act as standard closers on power outage. The 4630/4640 clutch assembly must never be lubricated.

 

What is the LCN SEM 7800 Series and how does it differ from the Sentronic closer?

The SEM 7800 is an electrically controlled door-holding magnet only: no closer mechanism is included. It holds the door open through magnetic attraction to an armature plate on the door face and releases when fire alarm de-energizes the magnet. The door must already have a door closer to self-close on release. Available in floor mount, surface wall mount, and recessed wall mount. The most common SEM 7800 failure is armature misalignment, not magnet failure: check alignment before diagnosing electrical components.

LCN 1000 Series and Overhead Concealed Door Closer Parts: 1260 1460, 2010 5010, 2030 5030 6030 and 3030 3130 Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the LCN 1000 Series surface-mounted closers (1260 and 1460) and the overhead concealed series including 2010/5010, 2030/5030/6030 Pacer, and 3030/3130. The 1000 Series are universal closers: both the 1260 and 1460 fit left and right hand doors without specifying handing. The arm screw 159 (1/4-20, 3/4-inch head) holds the arm to the spindle across all major LCN surface-mounted series. The regular arm 3077 works on 1260, 1460, 4010, 4020, and 4040 closers. Arms are not cross-compatible between the 1000 Series and the 4040XP. Cover part numbers follow the convention: series number followed by -72 (for example, 1460-72 for the 1460 cover). All overhead concealed series use cast iron cylinders and forged steel pistons with all-weather fluid.

The LCN product catalog covers considerably more than just the 4040XP. The 1000 Series surface-mounted closers are on more light commercial, educational, and healthcare interior doors than any other LCN surface-mounted line. The overhead concealed series: 2010, 5010, 2030, 5030, 6030, 3030, and 3130, cover institutional, aluminum storefront, and interior door applications where a visible surface-mounted closer is not acceptable architecturally. Each series uses different parts that are not cross-compatible with other series even within the same LCN catalog.

Browse the complete LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For the full LCN door closer and automatic operator catalog, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog.

30-year Limited warranty on the LCN 1460 Series closer
15-year Limited warranty on 2030/5030/6030 and 3030/3130 Series
1-3/4" Minimum transom width for 2030/5030/6030 Pacer concealed installation
Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA A156.4 certification on all series covered in this guide
 

Surface Mounted vs Overhead Concealed: Choosing the Right LCN Series

Every LCN door closer falls into one of two fundamental categories: surface mounted (the closer body is visible on the door face or header) or overhead concealed (the closer mechanism is hidden inside the door, frame, or transom). The choice between them is driven by the application, the architectural requirement, and the door construction. Parts are never cross-compatible between the two categories.

 

Surface mounted closers are faster to install, easier to service, and carry lower installed cost. The closer body, arm, and cover are all visible on the door face. The 1000 Series (1260 and 1460) and the 4000 Series (4040XP, 4040, 4000) are both surface-mounted. They are the correct choice for any commercial door where concealment is not required.

 

Overhead concealed closers hide the mechanism inside the door or frame, leaving only the arm or track visible or nothing visible at all when the door is closed. They are specified on high-end architectural projects, historic renovations where exposed hardware is not acceptable, healthcare corridors where cleaning staff cannot trap dirt behind visible closer bodies, and aluminum storefront doors where the closer must fit within the narrow tube frame. The 2010, 5010, 2030, 5030, 6030, 3030, and 3130 Series are all overhead concealed.

 

LCN 1000 Series Surface Closers: 1260 and 1460

The LCN 1000 Series contains LCN's most versatile surface-mounted closers. All standard 1000 Series models are universal: they install on either hand of door and in regular arm, parallel arm, or top jamb configurations without specifying handing at order time. This universality is the primary specification advantage over the 4000 Series (which requires handing specification on most models) and is why the 1000 Series appears so frequently on quick-turn projects and retrofit applications.

 

LCN 1260 Series

Light-to-Medium Duty | Universal | 20-Year Warranty

Adjustable spring sizes 1 to 5. Interior doors to 4'6", exterior to 3'6". Non-handed cylinder assembly. Peel-n-stick template for quick installation. Optional Quick Fix bracket kit for retrofit on existing closer footprint. Slim line optional cover. 20-year limited warranty. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1.

 

LCN 1460 Series

Medium Duty | Universal | 30-Year Warranty

Adjustable spring sizes 1 to 6 with patented Green Dial system. Interior doors to 5', exterior to 4'. Ships with 1461-3071 cast iron cylinder, 1460-3077 regular arm, 1460-62PA parallel arm shoe, 1460-72 slim line cover. Self-reaming and tapping screws (SRT) standard. ADA compliant. 30-year limited warranty.

 

LCN 1000 Series Parts Reference

 

Part NumberDescriptionApplies ToNotes
1461-3071Cast iron cylinder assembly1460 SeriesNon-handed. Includes screw pack (SRT standard)
1460-3077Regular arm (non-handed)1460 SeriesHinge pull side mounting standard arm
1460-62PAParallel arm shoe1460 SeriesRequired for parallel arm push side mounting
1460-72Slim line plastic cover1460 SeriesStandard cover shipped with 1460
1460-159Arm screw (1/4-20)1460 Series3/4" head diameter, holds arm on spindle
1260-159Arm screw (1/4-20)1260 SeriesSame screw dimensions as 1460-159
1260-72Standard cover1260 SeriesCover part number: series + -72 convention
3077Regular arm (non-handed)1260, 1460, 4010, 4020, 4040Ships with most LCN surface-mounted closers

 

The LCN Cover Part Number Convention: Series + -72

The LCN plastic cover part number follows a consistent convention across all surface-mounted series: the model series number followed by -72. The 1460 cover is 1460-72. The 4040 cover is 4040-72. The 4020 cover is 4020-72. The 4110 cover is 4110-72. This convention applies across all standard surface-mounted LCN series and eliminates the need to look up the cover part number separately when you know the closer series. Not all LCN closers have the same shape cover, so even though the naming convention is consistent, the physical cover is series-specific and cannot be substituted between series.

 

The casting number on the cylinder that is NOT the part number: Many LCN cylinders have casting or forging numbers stamped or raised on the surface, such as "71" or "320G". These are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers or model identifiers. A technician who reads "71" on the cylinder body and tries to order "71" as a replacement part will not find it in any catalog because it is not a part number. The correct method for identifying replacement parts is to find the model label (usually a sticker on the cylinder body under the cover) and use the model number from the label. The model number is under the cover on a sticker. For mechanical products, the month and year of manufacture is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion where the arm attaches.
 

The Green Dial Spring Adjustment on the 1460

The LCN 1460 Series features the patented Green Dial spring power adjustment system. Unlike older LCN closer designs where spring power adjustment required the correct-size stamped cylinder from the factory, the Green Dial allows field adjustment of spring power from size 1 through size 6 without requiring a different cylinder. Turning the Green Dial clockwise increases spring power (heavier closing force). Counterclockwise decreases it. This field adjustment eliminates the need to order a replacement cylinder when the spring power setting needs to change after installation, for example when a door adds a gasket that increases resistance and needs more closing force to latch reliably.

 

Arm Cross-Compatibility: What Works Where

LCN closer arms are machined to the specific spindle dimensions of each closer series. The spindle size and shape differs across models. The spindle on the 1260 and 1460 is different from the spindle on the 4040XP. An arm ordered for the 1460 Series will not fit a 4040XP closer. The 3077 regular arm works on the 1260, 1460, 4010, 4020, and 4040 (non-XP) closers. It does not work on the 4040XP, 4110, 4040SE, or any overhead concealed series.

 

The arm that looks identical but will not fit: A 1460 arm and a 4040XP arm appear almost identical from outside the package. Both are cast metal with the same general profile. The difference is in the spindle engagement hole, which is machined to the specific spindle geometry of the series. A 1460 arm installed on a 4040XP spindle will not seat correctly and will either strip the spindle or fail to transmit the spring force to the door. Always confirm the series from the label under the cover before ordering any replacement arm.
 

LCN 2010 and 5010 Series: Heavy-Duty Overhead Concealed for Institutional Applications

The LCN 2010 and 5010 Series are the heaviest-duty overhead concealed closers in the LCN catalog, specifically designed for institutional, high-traffic applications where complete concealment and maximum durability are both required. Hospitals, government buildings, correctional facilities, and university buildings with high daily cycle counts and abuse resistance requirements are the typical 2010/5010 specification environments.

 

2010 Series: Concealed in Frame and Door

The 2010 Series conceals both the cylinder in the door frame and the track in the door. From the finished side, the door shows only a clean face with no visible hardware at all when the door is in the closed position. This complete visual concealment is the defining specification feature of the 2010 and is why it is used in high-end institutional applications where exposed hardware is not acceptable.

The 2010 requires a mortise pocket in the door for the track and a mortise pocket in the frame for the cylinder. This door preparation requirement means the 2010 must be specified during door manufacturing, not retrofitted to standard doors without significant field work.

 

5010 Series: Cylinder Concealed in Frame, Double-Lever Arm Exposed

The 5010 shares the 2010's cylinder concealed in the door frame but uses an exposed double-lever arm on the door face rather than a concealed track. The exposed arm makes field service considerably easier: the arm is accessible without removing the door from the frame. The 5010 is the correct choice when concealment of the cylinder is required for security reasons (as in correctional applications where an exposed closer body could be defeated) but a fully concealed track is not required by the specification.

Both the 2010 and 5010 meet ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 and ADA reduced opening force requirements. Both are designed for aluminum, hollow metal, or wood doors and frames and can be used with hinge or pivot mounted doors.

 

LCN 2030, 5030, and 6030 Pacer Series: Overhead Concealed for Aluminum Transoms

The LCN Pacer 2030/5030/6030 Series is the overhead concealed closer solution for narrow aluminum transom frames. The minimum transom width for Pacer concealment is 1-3/4 inches: the same minimum stile width that defines aluminum storefront hardware throughout the commercial door hardware industry. This is not coincidental. The Pacer was engineered to fit inside standard aluminum storefront frame sections, which is why it is the standard specification for overhead concealed closers on aluminum commercial entries.

 

2030, 5030, and 6030 Differences

 

SeriesMountingArm TypeDoor ActionSpring Sizes
2030In frame, track in doorForged steel single-lever armSingle acting (push or pull)Adjustable 1 to 5
5030In frame, exposed double-lever armForged steel double-lever armSingle actingAdjustable 1 and 3 to 6
6030In frame, track in doorForged steel single-lever armDouble acting (swings both ways)Adjustable 1 to 5

 

The 5030 Series arm joints and shoe adapt to uneven trim, making it the preferred choice on aluminum storefront installations where the frame alignment is not perfectly consistent. On a standard aluminum door with a precisely manufactured frame, the 2030 concealed track arm is typically preferred for aesthetic reasons. On doors where field conditions introduce uneven trim, the 5030's adaptive arm joints accommodate the variance.

 

Pacer Series Construction

All three Pacer series use the same internal construction: a cast iron cylinder, a one-piece forged steel piston, a high-efficiency full-complement low-friction bearing, tamper-resistant regulating screws, and all-weather fluid. The spring power and latch speed adjustments are independent for either swing direction on all three series. The backcheck and general speed adjustments are common for both swings. All three are UL and cUL listed for self-closing doors without hold-open and carry a 15-year limited warranty.

 

The independent spring adjustment that most technicians adjust incorrectly: The 2030, 5030, and 6030 have separate spring power and latch speed adjustments for each swing direction. This means you can set the closing speed differently for the opening swing and the closing swing independently. On a double-acting 6030, this allows a door to open and close at different speeds in each direction, which is useful on service corridor doors where traffic in one direction is more consistent than the other. Most technicians adjust only the general closing speed screw without realizing the latch speed is a separate independent adjustment. A door that closes quickly but does not latch reliably almost always has a latch speed set too low, not a spring power issue.
 

LCN 3030 and 3130 Series: Overhead Concealed for Interior Doors

The LCN 3030 and 3130 Series are overhead concealed closers specifically designed for interior doors in medium- to high-traffic areas, mounted within the standard 1-3/4 inch interior door thickness. Where the 2030/5030/6030 Pacer fits in aluminum transom frames, the 3030/3130 fits within the door itself.

 

3030 vs 3130: Arm Style and Concealment Level

The 3030 Series conceals the cylinder in the door but uses an exposed double-lever arm on the door face. The arm joints adapt to uneven trim. The 3030 uses a non-handed cylinder, simplifying parts ordering when handing is uncertain.

The 3130 Series achieves complete concealment with both the cylinder in the door and a single-lever arm connected to a track and roller assembly that is also concealed within the door when the door is in the closed position. The only visible component on a 3130 installation is the roller in the track, and this is visible only when the door is open. From the closed-door view, there is no visible hardware at all. The 3130 uses a handed cylinder (right hand or left hand must be specified at ordering time).

 

3130 Track Roller: The Critical Wear Component

The 3130 track roller assembly is the most frequently replaced component on the 3130 Series. The roller travels in the track on every door cycle and wears over years of use. The standard track roller is part 3130-3034 (standard closing, aluminum finish). The hold-open track roller is part 3130-3034H (allows the door to hold open at a specified angle). When the door begins to not close fully or drifts open from a previously reliable closing cycle, the track roller is the first replacement candidate before diagnosing the cylinder.

 

The 3130 door that drifts open after years of reliable service: A 3130 installation that has been closing correctly for years and then begins to not fully close is almost always a worn track roller, not a failed cylinder or spring. The roller surface wears progressively until it no longer provides the friction needed to convert the cylinder's spring force into complete door closure. Replacing the track roller restores closing function without touching the cylinder. Many technicians diagnose a failing 3130 as a cylinder failure, replace the cylinder, and see no improvement because the roller was the actual problem.
 

3030 and 3130 Sizing

Both the 3030 and 3130 are sized closers, meaning the cylinder size must be specified at order time rather than being field-adjusted like the 1460's Green Dial system. The size number refers to the spring power, which determines the door width the closer can control. The 3130 size designation uses a single digit suffix: 3131 is size 1, 3132 is size 2, 3133 is size 3. Size 3 covers interior doors to 3 feet 2 inches. For a door wider than 3 feet 2 inches, a larger size must be specified at the time of ordering. Getting the size wrong means returning the closer for the correct size cylinder.

 

Overhead Concealed Closer Comparison: Which Series for Which Application

 

SeriesConcealment LocationArmDoor TypeTraffic LevelWarranty
2010Cylinder in frame, track in doorFully concealedAluminum, HM, woodHigh/institutionalLCN standard
5010Cylinder in frameExposed double-leverAluminum, HM, woodHigh/institutionalLCN standard
2030Cylinder in frame, track in doorSingle-lever concealedAluminum 1-3/4" transomHigh/institutional15-year
5030Cylinder in frameDouble-lever exposed (adaptive)Aluminum 1-3/4" transomHigh/institutional15-year
6030Cylinder in frame, track in doorSingle-lever concealedAluminum, double actingHigh/institutional15-year
3030Cylinder in doorExposed double-lever (adaptive)1-3/4" interior doorMedium to high15-year
3130Cylinder in door, track in doorFully concealed (handed)1-3/4" interior doorMedium to high15-year

 

What Fails First on These LCN Closers

Surface Mounted 1000 Series

Arm screw 159: The most common service item on any 1000 Series installation. As the closer cycles thousands of times, the vibration from the arm's operating forces loosens the arm screw. When loose, the arm spins on the spindle instead of transmitting spring force to the door. The door then either fails to close fully or slams shut. Checking and retorquing the arm screw as a maintenance item eliminates most 1000 Series service calls.

Cover damage: The 1000 Series plastic cover takes environmental and cleaning chemical exposure that cracks or discolors the cover over time. The cover (part 1260-72 or 1460-72) is a cosmetic replacement that requires no tool beyond a standard screwdriver. Always confirm the series before ordering the cover replacement.

Fluid leak: A surface-mounted LCN closer that is closing too fast and slamming despite adjustment attempts has almost certainly lost hydraulic fluid. Fluid loss makes the valve regulation system ineffective. A replacement cylinder assembly is the correct part, not additional valve adjustment. Continued adjustment on a leaking cylinder body does not restore controlled closing speed.

 

Overhead Concealed Series

3130 track roller: Progressive wear over high-cycle use. Symptom: door that previously closed correctly now drifts open or does not fully close. Replace the track roller before diagnosing the cylinder.

2030/5030 roller assembly: The roller assembly in the Pacer series is the interface between the arm and the door. It can seize or develop play from aluminum oxide contamination on aluminum door surfaces. Annual lubrication of the roller assembly with a dry-film or silicone-based lubricant prevents most premature roller failures on 2030/5030 installations.

Arm joints on 5030 and 3030: The adaptive arm joints on the 5030 and 3030 contain a socket-and-ball mechanism that allows the arm to accommodate uneven trim. These joints can wear or corrode, losing the flexibility range that makes the adaptation possible. A 5030 or 3030 installation that begins to bind or produce door closing resistance despite correct cylinder adjustment usually has worn arm joints requiring arm replacement.

Browse the complete LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all 1000 Series, 2010/5010, 2030/5030/6030, and 3030/3130 components. For the full LCN door closer catalog including the 4040XP, Sentronic, and Smoothee series, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog. Pre-order support is at 845-935-0301 or the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for LCN 1000 Series and Overhead Concealed Parts

Casting number warning, arm cross-compatibility guide, 3130 track roller failure diagnosis, Pacer independent speed adjustment, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Casting Number Warning

We document that casting numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on cylinders are NOT part numbers. Most technicians try to order by this number and fail. We point to the model label under the cover.

 

Arm Cross-Compatibility

We document that 1460 arms and 4040XP arms look identical but are not interchangeable due to different spindle geometries. This prevents the most common wrong-arm return on 1000 Series service calls.

 

3130 Track Roller Diagnosis

We document that a 3130 that stops closing correctly is almost always a worn track roller, not a cylinder failure. Replacing only the roller restores function at a fraction of the cost of cylinder replacement.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most 1000 Series, Pacer, and 3030/3130 parts ship same day. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for series identification support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for These LCN Parts

  • We document the casting number trap: "71" or "320G" on the cylinder is a manufacturing number, not a part number. Every technician who has tried to order by this number and failed needs this explained before placing an order.
  • We document the series + -72 cover part number convention. Knowing that 1460-72 is the 1460 cover eliminates the need to look up cover part numbers separately for any standard LCN surface-mounted closer.
  • We document the 3130 track roller as the first-check replacement for any 3130 that stops closing correctly, preventing unnecessary cylinder replacements on what is typically a simple roller wear failure.
  • We document the Pacer 2030/5030/6030 independent latch speed adjustment. A door that closes fast but does not latch has a latch speed problem, not a spring power problem. Most technicians adjust the wrong screw.
  • We carry LCN closer parts alongside Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts, electric strike parts, Schlage cylindrical lock parts, and mortise lock parts for complete door system service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

LCN door closers appear on every fire-rated egress door alongside exit devices and electric strikes. The same building that uses 1460 Series surface closers on office doors uses 2030 Pacer closers on aluminum storefront entries and 3130 concealed closers on high-end architectural interior doors.

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same building, browse the exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on controlled entry doors in the same facility, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin complete exit device and alarm parts, browse the Von Duprin catalog. For Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on secured interior doors in the same building, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on high-security entries in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source LCN, Schlage, Von Duprin, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About LCN 1000 Series and Overhead Concealed Closer Parts

 

What is the difference between the LCN 1260 and 1460 Series door closers?

Both are universal surface-mounted closers that fit either hand of door without specifying handing at ordering time. The 1260 is light-to-medium duty, adjustable spring sizes 1 to 5, interior doors to 4'6", 20-year warranty. The 1460 is medium duty, adjustable spring sizes 1 to 6 with the patented Green Dial, interior doors to 5', 30-year warranty. Both use the arm screw 159 and the regular arm 3077 for hinge pull side mounting.

 

What is the LCN arm screw 159 and where does it fit?

The arm screw 159 is a 1/4-20 machine screw with a 3/4-inch diameter head that holds the closer arm on the spindle. It is used across major LCN surface-mounted series: ordered as 4040-159 for the 4040XP, 1460-159 for the 1460, 1260-159 for the 1260, etc. A loose arm screw causes the arm to spin on the spindle, producing a door that drifts open or fails to latch. Retorquing the arm screw resolves most arm-related closer failures before any cylinder replacement is needed.

 

What is the difference between the LCN 2010 and 5010 Series overhead concealed closers?

The 2010 Series conceals both the cylinder in the frame and the track in the door, providing complete concealment. The 5010 Series conceals the cylinder in the frame but uses an exposed double-lever arm on the door face. Both are heavy-duty Grade 1 closers for institutional high-traffic applications, meeting ADA reduced opening force requirements. Parts are series-specific and not cross-compatible with the 3030/3130 or 2030/5030/6030 Series.

 

What is the LCN 2030/5030/6030 Pacer Series and when is it used?

The Pacer Series is overhead concealed closers designed for concealment in aluminum transoms with a minimum 1-3/4-inch width. The 2030 uses a concealed track in the door with a single-lever arm. The 5030 uses an exposed double-lever arm with adaptive joints for uneven trim. The 6030 is a double-acting version with concealed track for doors that swing both ways. All three carry a 15-year warranty, are Grade 1, and ADA compliant.

 

What is the difference between the LCN 3030 and 3130 Series door closers?

Both are overhead concealed closers for 1-3/4-inch interior doors in medium- to high-traffic areas. The 3030 conceals the cylinder in the door but uses an exposed double-lever arm. The 3130 achieves complete concealment with a concealed single-lever arm and track roller assembly, showing no visible hardware when the door is closed. The 3130 is handed (RH or LH must be specified). Both carry a 15-year warranty and meet Grade 1 and ADA requirements.

 

How do LCN closer arms work and are they interchangeable between series?

LCN arms are machined to the specific spindle geometry of each closer series. Arms are not cross-compatible between series. The 1460 arm will not fit a 4040XP because the spindle is a different size and shape. The regular arm 3077 works on the 1260, 1460, 4010, 4020, and 4040 but not on the 4040XP, 4110, or any concealed series. Always confirm the series number from the label on the cylinder body under the cover before ordering any replacement arm.

Von Duprin 75, 78, 88, 94/95 INPACT and 54 Series Mullion Parts: Complete Replacement Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the Von Duprin 75 and 78 Series pushpad devices (70 Series family), the 88 Series wide stile crossbar, the 94/95 INPACT recessed push pad series, and the 54 Series mullion line. The 75 is narrow stile; the 78 is wide stile. Both share the 70 Series QEL quiet electric latch option. The 88 Series crossbar tube (part 967738) is 42 inches and shared with the 55 Series, field-cut to size. The 88 lever arm is handed (050438 RH, 050439 LH); the dogging pin spring in the arm is a separate replaceable component. The INPACT 94/95 is a recessed push pad device for impact reduction. Mullion stabilizers (part 154) must be installed on every mullion to prevent security bypass via deflection.

Von Duprin's exit device catalog is broader than most facilities managers realize. Beyond the 98/99, 33A/35A, 22, and 55 Series covered elsewhere, there are four additional series that address specific application challenges: the 70 Series (75 narrow stile and 78 wide stile pushpad devices), the 88 Series (wide stile crossbar), the 94/95 INPACT Series (recessed push pad for impact-prone environments), and the 54 Series mullion line that enables rim devices on double-door openings.

Browse the complete Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all series with interactive diagrams. For the full exit device catalog including Falcon alongside Von Duprin, browse the commercial exit devices catalog.

42" 88 and 55 Series crossbar tube length, field-cut to fit
4-1/2" Minimum stile width required for the 88 Series wide stile device
QEL Quiet Electric Latch Retraction option on 70 Series and 94/95 INPACT
154 Mullion stabilizer part number, prevents security bypass via deflection
 

Von Duprin 70 Series: The 75 and 78 Pushpad Family

The Von Duprin 70 Series is the most recent generation of the Von Duprin pushpad exit device family, covering the 75 (narrow stile) and 78 (wide stile) models. These are positioned between the economy 22 Series and the premium 98/99 Series, offering heavy-duty construction for warehouse, industrial, office, multifamily, retail, and commercial real estate applications where the highest specification of the 98/99 is not required.

 

Von Duprin 75 Series

Narrow Stile | Pushpad | Heavy Duty

Narrow stile pushpad device for aluminum storefront and narrow frame commercial doors. Heavy-duty construction for warehouse, industrial, multifamily, retail, and commercial real estate. Available in rim, SVR, CVR, and wide door cable configurations. Supports QEL, RX, and E8875 electronic options. Fire-rated by adding F suffix. Field-reversible handing. Shares catalog (108004) with 78 Series and 70 Series QEL parts manual.

 

Von Duprin 78 Series

Wide Stile | Pushpad | Heavy Duty

Wide stile pushpad device for standard hollow metal and wood commercial doors. Same application markets as the 75 but for wide stile door constructions. Available in rim, SVR, CVR, and wide door cable configurations. Full electronic option range matching 75 Series. Includes QEL quiet electric latch retraction option for applications where latch retraction noise is a concern.

 

70 Series Quiet Electric Latch Retraction (QEL)

The QEL option is the most important specification detail on the 70 Series (75 and 78) and 94/95 INPACT Series. Standard electric latch retraction (EL) on Von Duprin devices uses a solenoid that produces a distinct mechanical click when the latch retracts. In healthcare corridors, educational facilities, and quiet institutional environments, this noise is a complaint trigger from clinical staff and building management.

The Quiet Electric Latch Retraction (QEL) addresses this by using a motorized, slower-action latch retraction mechanism that significantly reduces the noise of electric latch operation. The QEL is available on devices sold after October 2014 on new installations. For pre-October 2014 devices, modular conversion kits allow upgrading existing non-EL panic or fire-rated devices to QEL without replacing the entire exit device.

 

The QEL conversion kit that most facilities don't know exists: The Von Duprin 70 Series QEL modular conversion kit allows a panic or fire-rated exit device sold after October 2014 to be upgraded to quiet electric latch retraction in the field without replacing the complete exit device. This is the most cost-effective upgrade path for healthcare and educational facilities where a standard EL click is generating complaints but a full device replacement is not budgeted. The conversion kit specifically applies to non-EL panic devices or non-EL fire-rated devices sold after October 2014. Devices sold before October 2014 require full device replacement for QEL.
 

70 Series Electronic Options

The 70 Series (75 and 78) supports the following electronic options. These are specified at ordering time and are not field-added without conversion kits.

 

Option CodeFunctionApplication
QELQuiet Electric Latch RetractionHealthcare, education, quiet institutional environments requiring electric latch with minimal noise
RXRequest to Exit switchAccess control integration: switch in exit device signals the controller when push bar is pressed
E8875External electric controlAllows device to pair with access control system, fire alarm system, or remote switching station
-F suffixFire-rated versionAny 70 Series device on a fire-rated door assembly

 

Von Duprin 88 Series: Wide Stile Crossbar Parts

The Von Duprin 88 Series is a wide stile crossbar exit device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors. Where the 55 Series is the narrow stile crossbar for aluminum storefronts, the 88 is the wide stile crossbar for doors with 4-1/2 inches or more of stile width. The 88 Series has been in production since at least the 1950s and remains in the Von Duprin catalog because it serves two applications that pushpad devices cannot: traditional-looking wide stile installations where the crossbar aesthetic is an architectural requirement, and non-standard door widths where the field-cuttable crossbar can be sized precisely without special ordering.

 

88 Series Crossbar Tube: Part 967738

The Von Duprin 88 and 55 Series share the same crossbar tube (part 967738). The tube is 1 inch in diameter and 42 inches long. It ships at 42 inches and must be field-cut to the appropriate length for the specific door width using a tubing cutter or hacksaw. One side of the tube comes pre-cut with a slot for the wedge tite screw opening. This pre-cut slot must be positioned correctly when the crossbar is installed in the lever arm.

 

The crossbar measurement that prevents a second cut: When cutting the crossbar to length, measure from the outer edge of the left lever arm connection point to the outer edge of the right lever arm connection point, then add approximately 1/4 inch on each side for the connection overlap. Cutting the bar to the door width alone without accounting for the lever arm overlap produces a bar that is too short to engage both lever arms correctly. A bar that is too short cannot be lengthened. Measure twice, cut once.
 

Tube Attaching Ring and Wedge Tite Screw

The tube attaching ring (part 090021) fits over each lever arm and is expanded by the wedge (part 88R90) and the wedge tite screw (part 88R100) to clamp the crossbar securely to the arm. The ring measures 15/16 inch long by 13/16 inch diameter. When tightened, the ring expands and holds the crossbar parallel to the door without visible fasteners on the front face of the bar.

A rattling crossbar or a crossbar that has dropped at one or both ends is almost always caused by loose wedge tite screws, not by failed components. The correct service is to tighten the wedge tite screw in each lever arm with a drop of blue thread-locker applied before final tightening. Thread-locker prevents vibration-induced loosening on high-cycle doors without making the screw impossible to remove for future service.

 

88 Series Lever Arm Assemblies

The 88 Series lever arm connects the crossbar to the center case mechanism. The lever arm is handed: right hand is part 050438, left hand is part 050439. Each arm includes the wedge, wedge ring, wedge tite screw, and dog screw. Some kits also include the axle.

Lever arm replacement is needed when the dogging screw in the arm has stripped (the most common failure reason according to field service records), when the arm is physically bent from impact, or when the axle has failed. The axle is a separately replaceable component: the current axle design (introduced around 1990) snaps together and replaces the older design that used allen-wrench-assembled axles. When replacing an axle, the separation tool is required to disassemble the current snap-together style.

 

The 88 Series Dogging Pin: The Failure Nobody Diagnoses

The Von Duprin 88 Series uses a dogging pin mechanism located on the underside of the active lever arm to hold the crossbar in the depressed position during business hours. This is different from the hex key slot used on the 22, 33A, and 98/99 Series. The dogging pin has an internal spring that provides the retention force.

 

The spring inside the dogging pin that saves a $150 lever arm replacement: When an 88 Series crossbar will not stay in the dogged position (the bar pops back up when the hex key is removed), most technicians diagnose a failed lever arm and order a full replacement assembly. The actual failure is almost always the spring inside the dogging pin on the underside of the active lever arm. This spring is a separately replaceable component. Replacing only the dogging pin spring restores dogging function at a fraction of the cost of a lever arm assembly. Before ordering any lever arm replacement on an 88 Series with a dogging failure, check the dogging pin spring first.
 

88 Series Field-Reversible Handing

The 88 Series is field-reversible for handing. This means the device can be converted from right-hand to left-hand or vice versa in the field without returning the device for a factory conversion. This saves the project when door handing has been incorrectly specified: a Friday afternoon discovery that the device is the wrong hand can be corrected on-site rather than requiring a return and reorder. Confirm handing before installation regardless, but this reversibility is a genuine specification advantage over devices requiring factory handing.

 

88 Series Mounting Screw Package

The 88 Series mounting screw package (part 900503) includes 12 screws in two types: 6 machine screws and 6 hybrid screws (for the 88C/C or E/C mounting configurations). Always use the correct screw type for the specific mounting configuration. Using only machine screws on a hybrid mounting leaves the device with reduced pull-out resistance at the center case anchor points.

 

Von Duprin 94/95 INPACT Series: Recessed Push Pad Parts

The Von Duprin INPACT 94/95 Series is the only fully recessed exit device in the Von Duprin commercial line. Instead of a push pad that projects outward from the door face, the INPACT push pad sits within a routed recess in the door so the pad face is flush with or set back slightly from the door surface. From a distance, the device appears to be part of the door panel rather than hardware mounted to it.

 

Why the Recessed Design Exists

The recessed design solves a specific problem in high-traffic environments where equipment regularly passes through doorways: medical facilities with gurney traffic, emergency departments with IV pole carts, warehouses with pallet jacks. On these doors, a projecting push pad takes repeated equipment impact that bends the pad, loosens the mechanism case, and damages the door itself over time. The INPACT's recessed pad eliminates the protrusion that equipment contacts, extending the device's service life dramatically on impact-prone doors.

 

94 vs 95 Series

The 94 Series has a grooved push pad surface. The 95 Series has a smooth push pad surface. Both are mechanically and dimensionally identical. All internal parts are shared between 94 and 95. The choice between them is purely aesthetic and is made at specification time based on building design preference. When ordering replacement parts for either series, the part numbers are the same.

 

INPACT Door Preparation Requirements

The INPACT 94/95 requires a routed recess in the door face for the mechanism case. This prep is built into the door during manufacturing. Steelcraft hollow metal doors are specifically listed as compatible with the standard INPACT door prep. If an INPACT device must be installed on a door that was not prepped at manufacturing, the door must be routed in the field to the INPACT specification, which requires a different site operation than standard exit device installation.

 

The INPACT trim incompatibility with other Von Duprin series: The 94/95 INPACT Series uses its own dedicated trim line (940 trim, 550 trim, 376 trim). Standard 98/99 trim, 33A trim, or 78 Series trim will not fit the INPACT because the trim-to-mechanism interface is different due to the recessed installation geometry. When ordering replacement trim for an INPACT installation, always confirm the device is a 94/95 Series and order from the INPACT-compatible trim list, not from the standard Von Duprin trim catalog.
 

INPACT Electronic Options

The INPACT 94/95 Series supports Quiet Electric Latch Retraction (QEL) and field-reversible handing. The QEL option makes the INPACT particularly well-suited to healthcare corridor applications where both impact protection (recessed pad) and quiet electric latch operation are specified simultaneously. These two features together address the two most common exit device complaints in healthcare: equipment impact damage and latch noise in patient care areas.

 

Von Duprin 54 Series Mullions: Parts and Critical Security Considerations

A mullion is a vertical structural member that mounts between the two leaves of a double-door opening to provide a fixed strike-receiving element for rim exit devices. Without a mullion on a double-door opening, a rim exit device has no fixed jamb to mount a strike to. The rim latch would have no receptacle, and the door pair could not latch.

 

Why Mullions Matter for Fire Door Code Compliance

On fire-rated double-door openings, the code governing whether a rim exit device is permitted or a concealed vertical rod device is required turns on whether a mullion is present. A rim exit device on a fire-rated pair without a mullion is a non-compliant installation: the rim strike mounts to the active door leaf, which is not a fixed structure and cannot provide the fire-resistive separation required by the door assembly listing. With a fixed or removable mullion providing a fixed strike location, rim exit devices are permitted on most fire-rated pairs. Without a mullion, concealed vertical rod devices are required.

 

54 Series Mullion Types

 

ModelMaterialTypeKey Notes
5654AluminumFixed surface mullionStandard mullion for most double-door exit device applications. Prepped for two 299 strikes. Ships with 154 mullion stabilizers. 11/16 inch wide on door face, 2-3/8 inch at widest, 3-1/8 inch deep, 1/8 inch wall thickness. Available in 7'2" standard height.
5754SteelFixed surface mullionSteel version of the 5654. Higher strength for high-abuse applications. Same mounting and strike preps as the 5654.
1654SteelRemovable mullionCan be released and retracted to allow full-width double-door passage (deliveries, furniture moves, oversized equipment). Mortise cylinder controls removal on keyed removable versions.
4954SteelRemovable mullionKeyed removable steel mullion. Single cylinder operation releases and retracts the mullion. KR54 retrofit kit available to upgrade existing 1654 and 4954 mullions to keyed removable operation without replacing the full mullion.

 

Mullion Fittings and Covers

The top fitting and cover (part 050135) and the bottom fitting (part 050190) are the end cap assemblies for the 5654 and 5754 mullions. The fitting set (part 050130) includes both top and bottom fittings with all mounting screws. When a mullion fitting is damaged from impact or the fasteners have stripped, the fitting is a separately replaceable component. Always confirm whether the damage is to the fitting only or to the mullion tube body itself before ordering, as these are different parts.

 

Mullion Stabilizer: The Security Component Nobody Installs

The Von Duprin 154 mullion stabilizer package is included in the box when the 5654 aluminum mullion is purchased. It is the most overlooked component on every mullion installation.

The stabilizer prevents lateral deflection of the mullion under door abuse and impact loading. When a mullion deflects sideways from someone pushing or shaking a door hard, the deflection moves the strike out of alignment with the rim latch on both door leaves simultaneously. This causes both exit devices to release, effectively opening the entire double-door opening without any key, credential, or authorized access event. The 154 stabilizer braces the mullion against the door frame, preventing this deflection and maintaining strike alignment under impact.

 

The mullion installation that bypasses every access control credential on the opening: A mullion installed without the 154 stabilizer on a secured double-door opening can be defeated by physical abuse: shaking the door pair with sufficient force deflects the unsupported mullion and releases both rim latches. This is not a theoretical vulnerability. It is a documented physical bypass method used in both unauthorized access events and in fire safety investigations of double-door openings. Any mullion installation on a door pair controlling access to a secured area that does not include the 154 stabilizer should be treated as a security deficiency. Installing the stabilizer is a ten-minute operation that closes this bypass.
 

Weather Stripping for Mullions

The Von Duprin weather stripping (part 050580) is specific to the 5654 and 5754 mullions. Each strip is 10 feet long. Two strips are required per mullion (one on each side of the mullion facing the door leaves). This is an often-omitted component on interior mullion installations but a required component on exterior door applications where the mullion must provide an air and weather seal against the door leaves.

 

How to Identify the Correct Series and Parts

Five questions determine the correct parts before any order for these series.

1. Is this a pushpad, crossbar, or recessed device? Crossbar spanning the door width = 88 Series (or 55 if narrow stile). Recessed pad flush with door face = 94/95 INPACT. Projecting rectangular pushpad = 75 or 78 Series (or 22, 33A, 98/99 from other series). If in doubt, check the label on the mechanism case.

 

2. Is the door stile narrow or wide? Narrow stile aluminum storefront = 75 Series (pushpad) or 55 Series (crossbar). Wide stile hollow metal or wood = 78 Series (pushpad) or 88 Series (crossbar). The 88 requires a minimum 4-1/2 inch stile.

 

3. For mullion parts: is the mullion fixed or removable? A mullion with no visible release mechanism is fixed (5654 or 5754). A mullion with a cylinder or lever release is removable (1654 or 4954). Removable mullions use different fittings from fixed mullions.

 

4. For 88 Series crossbar parts: is the failure the crossbar tube, the lever arm, or the dogging pin spring? Rattling or dropped crossbar = wedge tite screw loose, no parts needed. Stripped dogging in arm = dogging pin spring first, lever arm assembly only if spring replacement fails. Bent or broken arm body = lever arm assembly replacement (050438 RH or 050439 LH).

 

5. For INPACT parts: confirm the trim series is 94/95-specific. INPACT trim (940, 550 for INPACT, 376) is not interchangeable with standard Von Duprin trim. Ordering standard trim for an INPACT installation produces parts that physically will not seat in the recessed door prep geometry.

 

Browse the Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for 75, 78, 88, 94/95 INPACT, and 54 Series mullion components with interactive diagrams. For the full exit device catalog including Falcon exit devices, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts, browse the electric strikes catalog. Pre-order support is at 845-935-0301 or the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for These Von Duprin Parts

Dogging pin spring diagnosis, mullion stabilizer security impact, QEL conversion kit guidance, INPACT trim incompatibility warning, and same-day shipping.

 

Dogging Pin Spring First

We document the dogging pin spring as the correct first replacement for 88 Series dogging failures, not the lever arm. This single fact prevents most unnecessary lever arm orders on 88 Series dogging complaints.

 

Mullion Stabilizer Warning

We document the 154 stabilizer as a security-critical component that prevents physical bypass of secured double-door openings via mullion deflection. No other parts supplier makes this explicit at the ordering stage.

 

QEL Conversion Guidance

We document the QEL modular conversion kit for 70 Series devices sold after October 2014, eliminating the need for full device replacement when only quieter latch retraction is needed.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most 75, 78, 88, INPACT, and mullion parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for series identification support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for These Von Duprin Parts

  • We document the dogging pin spring as the first-check replacement for 88 Series crossbar dogging failures. The spring prevents a $150 lever arm order when only a $5 spring has failed. This is undocumented at all competitor parts suppliers.
  • We document the mullion stabilizer 154 as a security-critical component that closes a documented physical bypass vulnerability on unsupported mullion installations. No other parts supplier explains what happens without the stabilizer.
  • We explain the fire door code context: a rim device on a fire-rated pair is only permitted when a mullion is present. Without a mullion, concealed VR devices are required. This code context determines whether a mullion purchase is a preference or a code compliance requirement.
  • We document the INPACT 94/95 Series trim incompatibility. Standard Von Duprin trim will not fit an INPACT installation. This prevents wrong-trim orders that generate returns and installation delays on healthcare projects.
  • We carry these Von Duprin parts alongside electric strike parts, exit alarm parts, LCN door closer parts, Schlage cylindrical lock parts, and mortise lock parts for complete building service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

Von Duprin 75, 78, 88, and INPACT exit devices appear on the same doors as electric strikes, door closers, and cylindrical locks. Mullions appear on double-door openings that also typically include one of these exit device series.

For Von Duprin electric strike parts on 75, 78, 88, or INPACT rim device installations with controlled entry, browse the electric strikes catalog. For exit alarm parts including Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex ECL and EAX for secondary exit monitoring, browse the exit alarms catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated egress doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on interior doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series exit device parts as an alternative brand on newer construction egress doors in the same building, browse the Falcon hardware catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Von Duprin 75, 78, 88, 94/95 and 54 Series Parts

 

What is the difference between the Von Duprin 75 and 78 Series exit devices?

Both are pushpad devices in the 70 Series family, sharing the same QEL quiet electric latch option and full configuration range. The 75 is narrow stile for aluminum storefront and narrow frame commercial doors. The 78 is wide stile for standard hollow metal and wood doors. Both support rim, SVR, CVR, and wide door cable configurations and the same electronic options including QEL, RX, and E8875.

 

What is the Von Duprin 88 Series crossbar and how is it replaced?

The 88 Series crossbar tube (part 967738, shared with 55 Series) is 1 inch in diameter and 42 inches long, field-cut to fit. It is held to the lever arms by the tube attaching ring (090021) and wedge tite screw (88R100). A rattling or dropped crossbar is almost always loose wedge screws, not a failed component. Retighten with blue thread-locker. Full lever arm replacement (050438 RH, 050439 LH) is needed when the dogging screw in the arm is stripped or the arm body is damaged.

 

What is the dogging pin on the Von Duprin 88 Series and when does it fail?

The dogging pin on the underside of the 88 active lever arm holds the crossbar in the depressed position. Its internal spring wears and fails, preventing the crossbar from staying dogged. The spring is a separately replaceable component, much less expensive than a full lever arm assembly. Always check the dogging pin spring before ordering a lever arm when the 88 Series will not dog.

 

What is the Von Duprin 94/95 INPACT Series and what makes it different?

The INPACT is a fully recessed exit device where the push pad sits within the door face rather than projecting outward. It eliminates impact damage from carts and equipment in healthcare and high-traffic corridors. The 94 has a grooved pad; the 95 has a smooth pad. Both are mechanically identical. INPACT requires a routed door prep and uses its own dedicated trim (940, 550, 376) that is not interchangeable with standard Von Duprin trim. Supports QEL for quiet electric latch operation.

 

What is a Von Duprin 54 Series mullion and when is one required?

A mullion is a vertical member between double doors providing a fixed strike for rim exit devices. The 54 Series covers fixed aluminum (5654), fixed steel (5754), and removable steel (1654, 4954) mullions. On fire-rated double-door pairs, a rim exit device can only be used if a mullion is present. Without a mullion, concealed vertical rod devices are required by code.

 

What is the Von Duprin mullion stabilizer and why is it critical?

The 154 mullion stabilizer prevents lateral deflection of the mullion under impact or door abuse. Without the stabilizer, the mullion can be deflected by physical force, which simultaneously releases the rim latches on both door leaves and bypasses the secured opening without any credential. The 154 is included with the 5654 aluminum mullion and must be installed on every mullion on a security-sensitive double-door opening.

Von Duprin 22, 33A/35A and 55 Series Exit Device Parts: Complete Replacement Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the Von Duprin 22, 33A/35A, and 55 Series exit devices. The 22 Series is the economy wide stile device for medium-to-low traffic with a 3-13/16 inch minimum stile. The 33A/35A is the narrow stile pushpad device with a fluid dampener, deadlocking latch, and concealed VR configurations for stiles as narrow as 2-1/8 inches. The 55 Series is the traditional crossbar device for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Key shared parts: the dogging shaft and adapter work across 22, 33A, 98, and 99 Series. The 33A/35A ALK alarm kit is compatible with 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series. The 55 Series uses dedicated narrow stile trim that is not interchangeable with any other Von Duprin series.

Von Duprin invented the first self-releasing fire exit device over a century ago. The 22, 33A/35A, and 55 Series represent three distinct product lines that together cover the majority of commercial egress doors installed in North America from the 1970s through today. When one of these devices needs a replacement part, the most critical first step is confirming which series is installed. Parts from the 33A/35A will not work on the 22. Parts from the 55 will not work on either. Trim from the 98/99 will not fit the 55. Getting the series wrong generates a return.

Browse the complete Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for 22, 33A/35A, 55, and all other Von Duprin series with interactive diagrams. For the full exit device catalog including Falcon exit devices alongside Von Duprin, browse the commercial exit device parts catalog.

Grade 1 ANSI A156.3 certification on all three Von Duprin series
1-3/4" Minimum door stile width on 33A/35A concealed VR and 55 Series
1998 Year the current dogging shaft design went into production for 22/33A/98/99 Series
2002 Year 33/35 Series was discontinued; replaced by 33A/35A with new parts
 

Three Series, Three Applications: How to Choose and Why It Matters for Parts

Von Duprin 22 Series

Economy | Wide Stile | Medium-Low Traffic

Modern touch bar styling for medium to low traffic openings. 3-13/16 inch minimum stile. Rim (22) and surface VR (2227) only. No concealed VR version. Compatible with 22-ALK alarm kit and limited trim options. Covers 161 door prep. UL listed for panic and fire (22-F). Made in USA. Best for clinic/healthcare back doors, multi-family entries, retail secondary exits.

 

Von Duprin 33A/35A Series

High Performance | Narrow Stile | Full Configuration Range

Deadlocking latch, fluid dampener, pushpad design. 1-3/4 inch minimum stile. Rim (33A/35A), surface VR (3327A/3527A), concealed VR (3347A/3547A, stile to 3-1/2 inch), and narrow concealed VR (3348A/3548A, stile to 2-1/8 inch). Full electrified option range. 33A has grooved case; 35A has smooth case. Both mechanically identical. Not compatible with older 33/35 pre-2002 parts.

 

Von Duprin 55 Series

Traditional Crossbar | Narrow Stile | Aluminum Storefront

Classic crossbar design for aluminum framed glass storefront and narrow stile doors. 1-3/4 inch minimum stile. Rim (55) and concealed VR (5547). Handed device: specify LHR or RHR when ordering. Uses dedicated 55 Series trim: 550DT, 555NL, 379L. Standard 98/99 or 33A trim does not fit. Production since at least the 1970s. Historic aesthetic, maximum activation zone, visual transparency due to no bulky mechanism case.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series Parts

The 22 Series is the value-line option in the Von Duprin exit device catalog. It is not a light-duty device: it carries the same ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification as the 33A/35A and 98/99 Series and is UL listed for both panic and fire hardware. What distinguishes it from the 33A/35A is the absence of a fluid dampener and deadlocking latch, a narrower trim compatibility range, and no concealed VR configuration. For doors where these features are not required, the 22 Series provides genuine Von Duprin Grade 1 quality at a more economical price point.

 

22 Series Center Case

The center case is the core mechanism housing that contains the latch bolt and push bar actuating mechanism. The 22 rim device center case and the 2227 surface vertical rod center case are different parts and not interchangeable. The 2227 (SVR version) has a separate center case because it must accommodate the rod actuating mechanism in addition to the latch bolt. When ordering a replacement center case, always confirm whether the installed device is a 22 rim (single latch point) or 2227 SVR (two-point latching with top and bottom rods).

 

22 Series Dogging Cover Plates

The dogging cover plate covers the dogging assembly on the hinge side of the exit device. It is a frequently lost or damaged component. On 3-foot devices, the cover plate part number is 968595 (10-3/4 inches long). On 4-foot devices, the cover plate is 968596 (16-3/4 inches long). These cover plates are device-length specific. Installing a 3-foot cover plate on a 4-foot device leaves the dogging assembly exposed and vulnerable to damage and debris accumulation.

 

22 Series End Cap and 2227 Rod Guide Assembly

The end cap covers the hinge-side end of the mechanism channel. The 22 Series uses the 050014 impact-resistant end cap kit (shared with 33A/35A and 98/99 Series) which replaces all previous end cap versions. This cross-series compatibility is one of the few shared parts between the 22 and 33A/35A families.

The 2227 rod guide assembly 112063 replaces the older style SVR rod guide that used a plastic cap and springs. The new rod guide adds strength and rigidity to the top and bottom rods on the surface VR version. If the rods on a 2227 installation show visible flex or misalignment during operation, the rod guide assembly is the correct replacement.

 

22 Series Trim and Cylinder Compatibility

The 22 Series uses the 230L lever trim (works on both 22 rim and 2227 SVR) and the 210L knob trim. The trim-to-device interface on the 22 Series uses a tailpiece guide (part 22-ALK, 33A-ALK, 35A-ALK, 98-ALK, and 99-ALK are all the same tailpiece guide) that guides the rim cylinder tailpiece into the back of the exit device. This part is shared between the 22, 33A, 98, and 99 Series.

 

The shear pin that technicians rarely know exists: Von Duprin lever trims on the 230L, 360L, 992L, 994L, and 996L use a shear pin (3/16 inch diameter, 5/8 inch overall length, with retaining ring) that is designed to snap if the lever handle is forced. This is an intentional sacrificial component: when someone forces a lever trim, the shear pin breaks rather than allowing the mechanism case, trim escutcheon, or through bolts to absorb the full impact force. The result is a lever that becomes inoperative after a forced entry attempt while the mechanism case and door hardware remain intact. When a 22 or 33A trim lever becomes loose or detached after a forced entry event, check the shear pin before ordering any other component. Replacing only the shear pin (part number 050156, includes retaining ring) restores the lever without any other replacement.
 

Von Duprin 33A/35A Series Parts

The 33A/35A Series is Von Duprin's highest-performing push pad exit device for narrow stile applications. The fluid dampener, deadlocking latch, and full concealed VR configuration range set it apart from both the 22 Series and the 55 Series for any application requiring high performance on a narrow stile door. Understanding the parts requires knowing which configuration is installed, because center cases, cover plates, and rod assemblies differ across rim, surface VR, and concealed VR versions.

 

33A vs 35A: The Case Style Distinction

The 33A has a grooved (ribbed) mechanism case exterior. The 35A has a smooth mechanism case exterior. Both are mechanically and dimensionally identical in every other respect. All internal parts, including the center case assembly, dogging shaft, end cap, latch bolt, and fluid dampener, are the same between 33A and 35A. When ordering parts for a 33A/35A device, the case style (grooved vs smooth) does not affect internal part numbers. It only affects the external center case cover, which is a cosmetic and protective component that is series-specific but not interchangeable between grooved and smooth styles.

 

Fluid Dampener: The Noise-Reduction Component

Every 33A/35A exit device is equipped with a fluid dampener that decelerates the push pad on its return stroke after being pressed. This is the feature that makes the 33A/35A appropriate for quiet-operation environments: healthcare corridors, educational facilities, and any space where the metal-on-metal snap-back of an un-dampened push pad would be a noise disturbance.

The fluid dampener is part of the mechanism case assembly. It cannot be replaced as a standalone field component: the dampener is integrated into the center case during manufacturing. If the dampener fails (indicated by loud snap-back noise on push pad return that was not previously present), the center case assembly replacement is the correct service action.

 

The quiet door that suddenly starts slamming its push pad: A 33A/35A installation that has been quiet for years and suddenly produces loud push pad snap-back noise has almost certainly experienced a fluid dampener failure. This happens either from mechanism wear over extended high-cycle use or from an impact event that compresses the dampener beyond its design range. It is not a lubrication issue and it is not corrected by adjusting spring tension. The center case assembly replacement restores the quiet operation. On healthcare projects where noise compliance is a facility management metric, documenting this distinction prevents unnecessary maintenance calls for other potential causes.
 

33A/35A Concealed Vertical Rod Configurations

The 33A/35A Series offers two concealed vertical rod configurations for different stile width situations.

3347A/3547A (concealed VR, 3-1/2 inch minimum stile): Used on hollow metal single and double doors where the stile is 3-1/2 inches or wider. The concealed rods run inside the door stile with no visible rod hardware on the door face. The top latch (part 050494) is used on both 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 concealed VR devices. This cross-series compatibility on the concealed top latch is one of the few cases where 33A/35A and 98/99 parts overlap on CVR configurations.

3348A/3548A (narrow concealed VR, 2-1/8 inch minimum stile): Used on hollow metal doors with stiles as narrow as 2-1/8 inches. This is the narrowest concealed VR configuration in the Von Duprin line and is specified on doors that cannot accommodate the 3347A minimum stile. Fire-rated versions (3348A-F and 3548A-F) support 8-foot by 10-foot door pairs at UL fire listing.

 

ConfigurationModelMin StileLatchingNotes
Rim33A / 35A1-3/4 inchSingle point rim latchNon-handed except with SS option
Surface VR3327A / 3527A3-5/8 inchTwo-point: top latch + bottom rodNon-handed except with SS option
Concealed VR (wide)3347A / 3547A3-1/2 inchTwo-point concealed rods in stile5/8 inch throw. Non-handed except SS
Concealed VR (narrow)3348A / 3548A2-1/8 inchTwo-point concealed rods in stile5/8 inch top, 1-1/2 inch bottom throw. Non-handed except SS
Concealed VR cable49ALess specificTwo-point concealed vertical cableAvailable less bottom latch (LBL)

 

33A/35A and 22 Series Shared Dogging Shaft

The dogging shaft and dogging adapter that have been in production since 1998 are shared across the Von Duprin 22, 33, 33A, 98, and 99 Series devices. This is confirmed by the official Von Duprin parts catalog. The dogging shaft is the current standard replacement for any of these series when dogging function fails. The hex key dog conversion kit (parts 050114 and 050117) converts 33A and 99 Series hex key dogging to cylinder dogging, allowing a standard mortise cylinder to control dogging without carrying a hex key. The conversion kit does not include the cylinder.

 

33A/35A Alarm Kit (ALK)

The ALK alarm kit converts a 22, 33A, 35A, 98, or 99 Series exit device to an alarmed device. When the push bar is pressed, a 100dB battery-powered alarm sounds. The kit is powered by a standard 9-volt battery and controlled by a mortise cylinder (not included). The kit includes the EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY. ALARM WILL SOUND decal. An ALK power supply is available for hardwired operation of one or two alarm kits from a single 12V or 24V power source. Browse the exit alarm parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for ALK kits and Detex and Von Duprin Guard-X alarm components.

 

Von Duprin 55 Series Parts: The Crossbar Legacy Line

The Von Duprin 55 Series has been in production since at least the 1970s. It is the traditional crossbar exit device: instead of a push pad, it uses a suspended metal crossbar that spans nearly the full door width and activates the latch mechanism when any part of the bar is pressed. This design predates the push pad era and remains in production because it serves two applications that the pushpad cannot match: it is the only Grade 1 Von Duprin device for storefront aluminum doors with stiles at the absolute minimum of 1-3/4 inches, and it is the correct retrofit device for historic and mid-century buildings where maintaining the crossbar aesthetic is an architectural requirement.

 

55 Series Center Case (Part 050183)

The 55 Series center case (part 050183) is the core replacement housing for the 55 rim device. It includes all internal workings and the latch bolt. The center case geometry on the 55 Series is completely different from the 22, 33A, or 98/99 Series. Center cases are not cross-compatible. When ordering a replacement 55 Series center case, confirm the device is a 55 rim (single latch point) rather than the 5547 concealed VR, as these are different assemblies.

 

55 Series Lever Arm and Hinge Case Axle

The 55 Series uses a lever arm mechanism that connects the crossbar to the center case and activates the latch when the crossbar is pressed. The lever arms are handed: right hand (050355) and left hand (050356). Always confirm the device handing before ordering a lever arm.

The center case axle (090050) is used on the 55 rim device. The hinge case axle (090051) is used on the inactive housing (hinge side) and on all other 55 configurations including the 5547 CVR device. The arm bushing (050333) takes up the mechanical slack between the lever arms and the housing; it is a wear component that should be checked when lever arm movement feels loose or imprecise.

 

The 55 Series sagging crossbar fix that prevents most 55 Series callbacks: The most common service complaint on the 55 Series is a sagging crossbar after installation. This happens when the wedge screws in the lever arm are not fully tightened during installation. The crossbar drops at one or both ends under its own weight, which can prevent full latch retraction at the extremes of the push bar. The fix is straightforward: tighten the wedge screws in both lever arms while holding the crossbar at the correct height. This is not a parts failure. No replacement parts are needed. The sagging crossbar is almost always an installation torque issue, not a worn or broken component.
 

55 Series Trim: Dedicated and Non-Interchangeable

The 55 Series uses narrow stile-specific outside trim that is not compatible with any other Von Duprin series. The three standard trim options are 550DT (dummy pull, non-functional outside handle), 555NL (night latch with outside cylinder that locks and unlocks the push bar), and 379L (outside lever trim). Standard Von Duprin 360L, 230L, or 99/98 Series trim will not fit the 55 Series because the mechanism case geometry is different.

When a 55 Series installation needs outside trim replacement, always order from the 55-specific trim range. When a building has a mix of 55 Series and 98/99 or 33A devices, the trim from one series cannot be used on the other even if the finish matches.

 

5547 Concealed Vertical Rod: The 55 Series Double-Door Solution

The 5547 is the concealed vertical rod version of the 55 Series, used on double-door aluminum storefront configurations where both doors need the crossbar aesthetic with concealed rod latching. The 5547 blind fastener kit (900539) connects the rod control housing to the rods and is specific to the 5547 CVR only. The 5547 uses the hinge case axle (090051) as does all 55 Series hardware except the 55 rim center case.

 

Parts Cross-Compatibility: What Works Across Series and What Does Not

The most expensive parts ordering mistakes on Von Duprin exit devices happen at the series boundary. Some parts cross series; most do not.

 

Part2233A/35A5598/99
Current dogging shaft (post-1998)YesYesNoYes
Impact-resistant end cap kit 050014YesYesNoYes
Tailpiece guide (ALK suffix)YesYesNoYes
ALK alarm kitYesYesNoYes
Concealed top latch 050494NoYes (CVR)NoYes (CVR)
230L lever trimYesNoNoNo
Shear pin 050156Yes (230L/360L/992L)Yes (same trims)NoYes (same trims)
Center case assembly22 only33A/35A only55 only98/99 only
Latch bolt22 only33A/35A only55 only98/99 only
 
33A/35A parts are NOT compatible with the pre-2002 33/35 Series: The 33A/35A was introduced in 2002 as a redesigned replacement for the older 33/35 Series. The two series look similar but use different internal components. Most 33A/35A parts will not work on an older 33/35 device. Identify the generation by the center case cover design: 33A/35A (current) has a one-piece center case cover; the older 33/35 has a two-piece cover. For older 33/35 devices, contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for compatible parts identification before ordering.
 

How to Identify the Correct Series Before Ordering

The series identification that prevents a wrong-part return takes under 30 seconds on any Von Duprin installation.

Is there a push pad or a crossbar? A crossbar spanning most of the door width = 55 Series. A push pad (compact rectangular bar) = 22, 33A, 35A, 98, or 99 Series. Go to the next check.

Is the door stile wide (4 inches or more) or narrow (under 4 inches)? Wide stile hollow metal doors most often have 98/99 or 22 Series. Narrow stile aluminum storefront doors most often have 33A/35A or 55 Series. The device label on the mechanism case confirms the exact series.

Check the mechanism case label. The series number is on a label on the center case. This is the definitive identification. On the 33A, the case exterior has visible ribs (grooved). On the 35A, the case is smooth. Both are current generation if the center case cover is one piece. Older 33/35 Series (pre-2002) have a two-piece center case cover.

Browse the Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com with interactive diagrams for all series. For Von Duprin electric strike parts compatible with 22 and 33A/35A rim exit devices, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X exit alarm parts, browse the exit alarms catalog. For the full Falcon exit device catalog as an alternative brand, browse the Falcon hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Von Duprin 22, 33A/35A and 55 Series Parts

Series cross-compatibility table, 33/35A vs 33/35 generation warning, shear pin documentation, fluid dampener failure diagnosis, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Cross-Compatibility Table

We document which parts work across 22, 33A/35A, 55, and 98/99 Series. The dogging shaft and end cap are cross-series. Center cases and latch bolts are not. This table eliminates the most common wrong-series order.

 

Generation Warning

We document that 33A/35A parts are not compatible with pre-2002 33/35 Series devices and how to identify the generation from the center case cover. No other parts supplier explains this before the order is placed.

 

Shear Pin and Dampener

We document the shear pin as the first-check component after any forced entry on a 230L or 360L lever trim, and the fluid dampener as the cause of sudden push pad snap-back noise on 33A/35A devices.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most 22, 33A/35A, and 55 Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for series identification support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for These Von Duprin Parts

  • We document the parts cross-compatibility table showing which parts work across 22, 33A/35A, and 98/99 Series (dogging shaft, end cap, tailpiece guide, ALK) versus which are series-exclusive (center case, latch bolt, trim). No parts supplier makes this available at the ordering stage.
  • We document the 33/35 vs 33A/35A generation boundary with the one-piece vs two-piece cover identification method. The 2002 redesign created a complete parts break that generates returns on any order where the generation is not confirmed first.
  • We document the shear pin (050156) as the sacrificial component in 230L, 360L, 992L, 994L, and 996L lever trims. Most technicians who encounter a loose lever after a forced entry event replace the trim assembly when only the shear pin has failed.
  • We document the 55 Series sagging crossbar as an installation torque issue on the wedge screws, not a parts failure. This eliminates unnecessary service calls and parts orders on new 55 installations.
  • We carry a wide range of parts, including Von Duprin, electric strikeexit alarmLCN door closerSchlage cylindrical lock, and mortise lock parts, providing comprehensive building hardware service in a single order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 22, 33A/35A, and 55 Series exit devices typically appear on egress doors alongside electric strikes for controlled entry and LCN door closers for self-closing operation on fire-rated assemblies.

For Von Duprin 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 electric strike parts compatible with 22, 33A/35A, and 55 Series rim devices, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex ECL and EAX exit alarm parts, browse the exit alarms catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated egress doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on interior doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series exit device parts as an alternative brand on newer or renovation egress doors in the same building, browse the Falcon hardware catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Von Duprin

 

22, 33A/35A and 55 Series Exit Device Parts

 

What is the difference between the Von Duprin 22 and 33A/35A Series exit devices?

The 22 Series is the economy option with modern touch bar styling, a 3-13/16 inch minimum stile, and rim and surface VR configurations only. The 33A/35A is the higher-performance narrow stile device with a deadlocking latch, fluid dampener for quiet operation, stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inch, and a full configuration range including rim, surface VR, and concealed VR. The 33A has a grooved case; the 35A has a smooth case. Both are mechanically identical.

 

What is the Von Duprin 55 Series and when should it be specified instead of the 33A/35A?

The 55 Series is a traditional crossbar exit device for aluminum storefront and glass doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inch. It should be specified over the 33A/35A when retrofitting doors with existing crossbar hardware, when maintaining a historic or retro architectural aesthetic is required, or when maximum push bar activation area is needed. The 55 Series uses dedicated narrow stile trim (550DT, 555NL, 379L) that is not interchangeable with any other Von Duprin series trim.

 

What is the dogging shaft on Von Duprin exit devices and when does it need replacement?

The dogging shaft locks the push bar in the depressed position for free-swing operation during business hours. The current shaft design for 22, 33, 33A, 98, and 99 Series has been in production since 1998. Replace when it is difficult to turn, no longer holds the push bar dogged, or is physically bent. A hex key to cylinder dogging conversion kit (050114 and 050117) is also available for 33A and 99 Series to allow mortise cylinder control.

 

What is the 33A/35A fluid dampener and why does it matter?

The fluid dampener decelerates the push pad on its return stroke to reduce the snap-back noise associated with standard exit devices. It is integrated into the mechanism case and cannot be replaced as a standalone component. If a 33A/35A device begins producing loud push pad snap-back noise that was not previously present, the center case assembly replacement restores quiet operation. Lubrication and spring adjustment do not resolve a failed dampener.

 

Will Von Duprin 33A/35A Series parts work on older 33/35 Series devices?

No. The 33A/35A redesign in 2002 created a parts break with the older 33/35 Series. Most current parts are not compatible with pre-2002 devices. Identify the generation by the center case cover: one-piece cover = current 33A/35A. Two-piece cover = older 33/35. Contact SecurityParts.com for compatible parts identification on older devices before ordering.

 

What is the Von Duprin ALK alarm kit and which series does it work with?

The ALK alarm kit adds a 100dB battery-powered alarm to an existing exit device that sounds when the push bar is pressed. It is compatible with Von Duprin 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series devices. It runs on a 9-volt battery and is controlled by a mortise cylinder (not included). The ALK does not work on the 55 Series. A hardwired ALK power supply is available for connecting one or two alarm kits to a 12V or 24V power source.

LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing Automatic Door Operator Parts: 9130 9140 9150 and 9500 2800 Series Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the LCN Benchmark 9130, 9140, and 9150 Series and the Senior Swing 9500 and 2800 Series automatic door operators. The Benchmark is low-to-medium duty with a 200-pound door capacity. The Senior Swing is the heaviest-duty version, rated for doors up to 600 pounds. The 9500IQ and 2800IQ Senior Swing generation adds AdaptivIQ self-calibrating technology that eliminates seasonal manual adjustments. Both lines use Push N Go non-switch activation that triggers when a person manually opens the door to 5 degrees. During power failure, both act as manual closers and do not block egress. All three Benchmark models use the same installation manual (740158). The 9500 is surface mounted; the 2800 is overhead concealed.

LCN automatic door operators are on more commercial entrances, healthcare corridors, and accessibility-required openings in North America than any other low-energy electromechanical operator brand. The Benchmark and Senior Swing lines cover the full range from budget-conscious retrofits through high-abuse institutional applications. When one fails or needs a component replacement, identifying the correct series, mounting configuration, and generation is the only way to order the right part without a return.

Browse the complete LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com, covering all LCN automatic operator and door closer product lines. For the full range of LCN door closer and automatic operator parts including the 4040XP, 4000 Series, Benchmark, and Senior Swing, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog.

200 lbs Maximum door weight for LCN Benchmark 9130/9140/9150 Series
600 lbs Maximum door weight for LCN Senior Swing 9500/2800 Series
5 degrees Door angle that triggers Push N Go automatic takeover on both series
1-30 sec Adjustable hold-open time delay on both Benchmark and Senior Swing
 

What LCN Automatic Door Operators Do and Why They Exist

LCN automatic door operators are low-energy electromechanical swing door operators. They are distinct from full-power high-energy automatic door systems (the kind that open from a distance without any manual contact) and distinct from manual door closers (the hydraulic units that simply return a door to the closed position).

The specific application a low-energy operator fills is a door that is primarily intended for automatic use by people who cannot easily open a manual door, combined with the ability to be pushed open manually by regular pedestrian traffic. This two-in-one capability is what the ADA requires for accessible entrances where not every user needs automatic operation but where those who do cannot be expected to push a button or operate a separate actuator every time.

The code standard that governs these operators is ANSI/BHMA A156.19 (Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors). Both the Benchmark and Senior Swing series are certified to A156.19 and to ANSI A117.1 (Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities). UL listing is standard on both series.

 

The ADA requirement that drives operator specification: ADA Section 4.13.12 and the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design require that doors on accessible routes be openable with no more than 5 pounds of force (interior) or 8.5 pounds (exterior). Most standard commercial doors with door closers require 7 to 15 pounds of force to open, which is non-compliant on accessible routes. Installing a low-energy operator on a closer-equipped door effectively eliminates the force required to open the door (the operator opens it), satisfying ADA force requirements without removing the door closer. This is why LCN automatic operators are so frequently found on accessible routes alongside standard door closers: the operator opens, the closer returns, and no single-handed force above the ADA limit is required from the user.
 

LCN Benchmark Series 9130 9140 9150: What Each Number Means

 

9130 Series

 

Pull Side | Surface Mount | Single Door
 

Surface mounted on the pull side of a single door. Uses a single lever track arm that connects the operator to the door. Best for inswing doors where the operator mounts on the side you pull toward you. 115VAC, 200-pound door capacity. Minimum door width: 30 inches for pull operators. ANSI/BHMA A156.19, ADA compliant, UL listed. 2-year limited warranty.

 

9140 Series

 

Push Side | Surface Mount | Single Door
 

Surface mounted on the push side of a single door. Uses a double-lever arm configuration for push-side mounting. Best for outswing doors where the operator mounts on the side you push away from you. 115VAC, 200-pound door capacity. Minimum door width: 26 inches for push operators. Same code certifications as 9130.

 

9150 Series

 

Top Jamb | Surface Mount | Double Door
 

Surface mounted on the top jamb of the push side for independent or simultaneous pair door applications. The double-door version of the Benchmark line. Each door in a pair typically has its own 9150 operator. Used where both doors in a pair must operate automatically for accessible passage. Same power and weight ratings as 9130 and 9140.

All three Benchmark models share installation manual number 740158. If a technician has the manual for any one of the three models, it covers all three. The gear box part numbers in the LCN parts manual are series-specific, but the installation procedure is shared across the Benchmark family.

 

How the Benchmark 9130 9140 9150 Work: Key Features

 

Push N Go Non-Switch Activation

Push N Go is the feature that makes LCN Benchmark operators function without a separate wall-mounted push button for every passage. When a user manually pushes or pulls the door to approximately 5 degrees of opening angle, the operator's internal sensor detects the movement and the operator takes over, continuing to open the door fully and automatically.

After reaching full open, the door holds open for 1 to 30 seconds depending on the time delay adjustment, then closes automatically under spring force. The Push N Go feature means the door behaves exactly like a manual door for regular traffic (anyone can push it open normally) but automatically assists as soon as manual movement is detected, making it accessible without requiring button actuation from anyone in the traffic stream.

 

Power Boost Wind Compensation

The Benchmark includes a Power Boost function that provides additional closing force when the door is fighting wind resistance during the closing cycle. On exterior doors exposed to prevailing winds, a door closer set for normal closing speed may not fully close and latch the door during windy conditions. Power Boost detects when the closing cycle is being impeded and adds motor-driven closing force to ensure the door fully latches on every cycle. This is a passive feature that operates automatically without any adjustment.

 

Obstruction Reversal Safety

If the door contacts an obstruction during the closing cycle before reaching the latch position, the operator reverses direction and re-opens the door. This is a required safety function under ANSI/BHMA A156.19 for low-energy power-operated doors. The obstruction reversal prevents the door from closing on a person or wheelchair during the automatic closing sequence.

 

Power Failure Manual Operation

When power is lost, the Benchmark operator allows the door to be operated manually as a standard door. The operator does not lock the door or prevent movement during a power failure. This is a non-negotiable life safety requirement for any automatic door operator on a means of egress: power failure cannot result in a blocked exit.

 

LCN Senior Swing 9500 and 2800 Series: The Heavy-Duty Line

The Senior Swing is LCN's highest-duty automatic door operator line. Where the Benchmark is designed for low-to-medium traffic doors up to 200 pounds, the Senior Swing is built for high-abuse, high-traffic commercial applications with doors up to 600 pounds. Healthcare main entrances, hospital corridor fire doors, school main entries, and heavy hollow metal exterior doors in institutional applications are the typical Senior Swing specification environments.

 

Senior Swing Mounting Configurations

 

ModelMountDoorConfiguration
9530SurfaceSinglePull side, offset arm
9540SurfaceSinglePush side, offset arm
9550SurfaceSimultaneous pairBoth doors open together on single activation
9560SurfaceIndependent pairEach door opens independently, activation triggers one at a time
2810Overhead concealedSingleMechanism inside door header, arm visible on door face
2850Overhead concealedSimultaneous pairConcealed mechanism, simultaneous double door operation
2860Overhead concealedIndependent pairConcealed mechanism, independent double door operation

 

9500IQ and 2800IQ: The AdaptivIQ Generation

The current IQ generation of the Senior Swing adds AdaptivIQ self-calibrating technology. This is the most significant engineering advancement in LCN automatic door operator design in recent years and it addresses the most common complaint facilities managers have about automatic door operators in any brand: seasonal adjustment calls.

External conditions that affect an automatic door operator's performance change throughout the year. Wind pressure changes by season and weather event. HVAC stack pressure (the pressure differential between inside and outside created by building HVAC systems) reverses direction between summer and winter in most commercial buildings, which directly affects how hard the door operator must work to close against or with the pressure. Carpet compression, weather stripping condition, and door weight all vary. On conventional operators, each of these changes may require a field visit to adjust closing speed, hold-open time, or sensitivity settings.

AdaptivIQ continuously monitors door performance and adjusts operator parameters automatically to maintain consistent operation despite these changing external conditions. The result is fewer seasonal adjustment calls, more consistent operation across all weather conditions, and reduced total service cost over the operator's life cycle.

 

The HVAC stack pressure problem that causes most seasonal Senior Swing adjustment calls: HVAC stack pressure (also called stack effect) reverses polarity between summer and winter in multi-story buildings. In winter, warm air inside rises and exits through upper floors, creating negative pressure at lower-floor entrances that pulls exterior doors inward. In summer, the reverse occurs. On a standard Senior Swing operator without AdaptivIQ, a closing speed setting that is correct in summer may result in the door failing to close completely in winter because the increased inward-pulling pressure is fighting the closing cycle. Seasonal adjustment calls to readjust closing speed are the most frequent preventable service call on Senior Swing installations without IQ technology. AdaptivIQ detects the changed pressure and adjusts the closing force automatically, eliminating this call entirely.
 

Senior Swing Power Failure Mode

Like the Benchmark, the Senior Swing acts as a manual door closer during a power failure. The LCN documentation specifically states it acts as a size 3 manual door closer when power is lost. The activating circuit opens the door from any position in the closing swing, meaning a partially closed door can still be manually opened during a power failure. This fail-safe design is required for egress compliance on any door on a means of egress.

 

Access Control Integration: The 1-Second Delay Feature

The Senior Swing includes a 1-second time delay between the activation signal from an access control system and the door beginning to open. This delay is a designed feature, not a malfunction. Its purpose is to allow enough time for an electrically controlled latch or electric strike to fully disengage before the operator begins pulling the door open. Without this delay, the operator would attempt to force the door open before the electric lock has released, either damaging the lock mechanism or failing to open the door completely.

This integration delay is one of the most frequently misdiagnosed behaviors on Senior Swing installations. When a facility first integrates an access control credential reader with a Senior Swing operator, the 1-second gap between credential read and door movement is sometimes reported as an operator malfunction by staff who expect immediate opening. The behavior is correct and intentional. Browse electric strike parts at SecurityParts.com for Von Duprin and Schlage electric strike components compatible with Senior Swing integrated openings.

 

Benchmark vs Senior Swing: Choosing the Right Operator

 

FactorBenchmark 9130/9140/9150Senior Swing 9500/2800
Door weight capacity200 lbs maximum600 lbs maximum
Traffic levelLow to medium trafficHigh traffic, high abuse
MountingSurface onlySurface (9500) or overhead concealed (2800)
Self-adjusting technologyNo (manual adjustments required)AdaptivIQ on IQ generation (self-calibrating)
Seasonal adjustment callsYes, typical on exterior doorsMinimal with IQ generation
Power failure modeManual door operationSize 3 manual closer
Push N GoYes, 5-degree triggerYes, 5-degree trigger
Power BoostYesYes
Access control delayStandard activation1-second built-in delay for electric lock coordination
Best applicationInterior accessible corridors, light exterior retrofitMain building entries, healthcare, institutional high-use doors
Warranty2-year limited2-year limited

 

What Fails First on LCN Automatic Operators

Field service experience across Benchmark and Senior Swing installations reveals a consistent failure sequence. Knowing this before diagnosing saves time by directing attention to the most likely cause first.

 

1. Arm Assembly

The arm is the mechanical linkage between the operator unit and the door. It takes direct physical punishment every time the door opens and closes, including impact from carts, gurneys, wheelchair footrests, and manual push force. Bent, cracked, or loose arm assemblies are the most common physical failure on both Benchmark and Senior Swing operators. The arm type (single lever track for 9130, double lever for 9140, offset arm for Senior Swing) must be confirmed before ordering a replacement, as arms are configuration-specific.

For the Benchmark, the arm is a single replaceable component. For the Senior Swing, the arm assembly includes the arm, header plate, and connecting hardware. Always confirm the handing (right hand or left hand) and the mounting configuration (push or pull side) when ordering any arm assembly.

 

2. Gear Box Assembly

The gear box is the electromechanical drive mechanism that converts motor rotation into door movement. Gear box failure presents as a door that does not open when activated (motor runs but door does not move), a door that opens slowly and incompletely (stripped gears), or grinding noise during operation (gear wear). The gear box is a complete replacement assembly on both Benchmark and Senior Swing.

The LCN parts manual lists gear box assemblies by series number. Part numbers in the manual are 9130-3462SC (9130 Series gear box), 9140-3462SC (9140 Series gear box), and 9150-3462SC (9150 Series gear box). For Senior Swing, gear box part numbers are series-specific and documented in the separate Senior Swing parts section of the LCN Parts Manual. Always have the exact model number (including the series number and any suffix letters from the operator label) before ordering any gear box.

 

3. Control Board

The electronic control board manages all operator timing: hold-open delay, opening speed, closing speed, obstruction reversal, Push N Go sensing, and Power Boost. Control board failure presents as erratic behavior (door opens inconsistently, holds open indefinitely, or refuses to activate) after all mechanical components and power supply have been confirmed functional.

Before diagnosing a control board failure, confirm the power supply is correct (115VAC, single phase, 60Hz, fused at 15 amps), the arm is correctly connected, and the settings have not been inadvertently reset. A control board that has been reset to factory defaults by a power interruption may appear to have failed when it is actually operating correctly at its default settings, which differ from the field-adjusted settings that were in place before the power event.

 

The factory default restore that resolves most Senior Swing erratic behavior complaints: The Senior Swing stores both factory default settings and field adjustment settings in separate memory locations. After any power interruption, if the operator behaves erratically, the first service step is to restore factory defaults from the controller. This takes seconds and confirms whether the issue is a programming problem or a hardware failure. If factory defaults restore normal operation, the field settings were corrupted by the power event and must be re-entered. If factory defaults do not restore normal operation, a hardware component has failed. This two-minute diagnostic step eliminates the most common unnecessary control board replacement on Senior Swing operators.
 

4. Activator and Push Button Wiring

The wall-mounted push button actuator or access control signal wire is the most overlooked failure point on automatic door operators. A door that does not respond to button activation but opens correctly on Push N Go is almost always an actuator or wiring problem, not an operator failure. Check for loose wiring connections at the operator terminal block before assuming the operator has failed. On exterior installations, weather-related corrosion at the actuator wiring terminals is the single most common cause of button-activation failure that appears as operator failure.

 

5. Power Supply and Circuit

Both the Benchmark and Senior Swing require 115VAC, single phase, 60Hz power on a fused 15-amp circuit. A tripped circuit breaker is the most common cause of a completely non-responsive operator. Before any component diagnosis, confirm power at the operator terminal block with a voltage meter. The 15-amp circuit requirement is frequently violated in retrofit installations where the operator is connected to an existing circuit without verifying the available amperage. An undersized circuit produces intermittent operation as the circuit trips under the operator's starting current draw.

 

Adjustments and Settings: What Can Be Set in the Field

Both the Benchmark and Senior Swing support field adjustment of several operational parameters without requiring component replacement.

Hold-open time delay: Adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds on both series. This is the time the door remains fully open before beginning the closing cycle. For accessible routes, a minimum hold-open time that allows a wheelchair user to fully pass through before closing begins is required by ADA. The specific required time depends on the door width and the expected rate of passage for the building's user population.

Opening speed: The speed at which the operator drives the door from closed to full open. ANSI/BHMA A156.19 requires that low-energy operators open the door at a speed that does not create a hazard. An operator set to open too quickly can strike a person on the push side of an inswing door. Correct opening speed setting is a safety adjustment, not a preference adjustment.

Closing speed: The speed at which the door closes from the full open position to the latched position. This setting must balance between closing slowly enough to allow full passage time and closing quickly enough to latch before the next person activates the door.

Back check speed: On the Senior Swing, back check speed controls the door speed as it approaches the full open position, preventing the door from slamming into the stop at full opening. Incorrect back check speed setting causes repeated hard impacts between the door and door stop, which accelerates arm and door wear.

On the Senior Swing IQ generation, all speed and timing settings are stored in the controller's digital memory. Field adjustments replace the previous field settings in memory. The original factory defaults are always retained separately and can be recalled at any time, which is the basis of the factory default restore diagnostic described above.

 

How to Identify Your LCN Automatic Operator for Parts Ordering

Three pieces of information are needed before any LCN automatic operator parts order.

1. Model number: The model number is on a label on the operator housing. For mechanical products, the month and year of manufacture is also stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion where the arm attaches. For automatic operators, the label has the date of manufacture. The model number includes the series (9130, 9140, 9150, 9530, 9540, etc.) and any suffix letters that indicate handing, arm configuration, or generation (IQ suffix for the current AdaptivIQ Senior Swing generation).

2. Handing: Right hand (RH) or left hand (LH). Handing is determined by standing on the pull side of the door and noting which side the hinge is on. Right hand means the hinge is on the right. Left hand means the hinge is on the left. Arm assemblies and some mounting hardware are handing-specific.

3. Component failed: Arm assembly (mechanical linkage), gear box (electromechanical drive), control board (electronic controller), or activator/wiring (push button or access control wiring). The failure symptom determines which component to order. A door that does not move when activated but shows power at the terminal block points to the arm connection or gear box. A door that activates but behaves erratically points to the control board. A door that is completely unresponsive points to the power supply or activator wiring.

Browse the complete LCN parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all Benchmark and Senior Swing components with series-specific diagrams. For the full LCN door closer and operator range including the 4040XP and 4000 Series surface closers and the 4630/4640 Auto Equalizer operators, browse the commercial door closer parts catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for LCN Automatic Operator Parts

HVAC stack pressure seasonal adjustment explanation, factory default restore diagnostic, access control 1-second delay documentation, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Stack Pressure Guidance

We document HVAC stack pressure as the primary driver of seasonal Senior Swing adjustment calls. AdaptivIQ eliminates this. No other parts supplier explains the mechanism behind the most common preventable service call on LCN operators.

 

Factory Default Restore

We document the factory default restore as the first diagnostic step on erratic Senior Swing behavior. This two-minute step eliminates most unnecessary control board replacement orders.

 

1-Second Delay Documentation

We document the Senior Swing's built-in 1-second activation delay as an intentional feature for electric lock coordination. Most facilities report this as operator failure on first access control integration.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for model and series identification support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for LCN Automatic Operator Parts

  • We document the HVAC stack pressure reversal between summer and winter as the mechanism behind seasonal closing speed adjustment calls. No other parts supplier or competitor explains why these calls happen or how AdaptivIQ prevents them.
  • We document the ADA force requirement context: the reason LCN operators exist alongside door closers is that closers create force that exceeds ADA limits on accessible routes. The operator opens, the closer returns, ADA compliance is maintained. No supplier explains this relationship at the parts level.
  • We document the 1-second activation delay on the Senior Swing as an intentional access control coordination feature. Facilities that don't know this report the operator as broken on the first day after access control integration, generating unnecessary service calls.
  • We document the factory default restore as a two-minute diagnostic that resolves most erratic behavior without any parts replacement. This one piece of knowledge eliminates the most common unnecessary control board order on Senior Swing operators.
  • We carry LCN automatic operator parts alongside electric strike parts, exit device parts, cylindrical lock parts, and mortise lock parts for complete door system service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

LCN automatic door operators are part of a complete door system that typically includes an electric strike or magnetic lock for access control, a door closer for fire-rated applications, and sometimes exit device hardware on egress doors. SecurityParts.com stocks all of these for a complete opening service call.

For Von Duprin electric strike parts on automatic operator openings with access control integration, browse the electric strikes catalog. For commercial exit alarm parts on automatic operator doors with alarm monitoring, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on automatic operator doors that also require panic hardware, browse the exit devices catalog. For Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts on adjacent doors in the same building, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on high-security entries in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source LCN, Schlage, Von Duprin, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About LCN

 

Benchmark and Senior Swing Automatic Door Operator Parts

 

What is the difference between the LCN 9130, 9140, and 9150 Benchmark Series?

The 9130 mounts on the pull side of a single door with a single lever track arm. The 9140 mounts on the push side of a single door with a double-lever arm. The 9150 mounts on the top jamb on the push side for independent or simultaneous double-door pairs. All three handle doors up to 200 pounds, run on 115VAC, share installation manual 740158, and meet ANSI/BHMA A156.19 and ADA requirements.

 

What is the difference between the LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing automatic door operators?

The Benchmark 9130/9140/9150 is low-to-medium duty with a 200-pound door capacity for primarily automatic applications. The Senior Swing 9500/2800 is the heaviest-duty version rated for doors up to 600 pounds in high-traffic, high-abuse environments. The 9500IQ and 2800IQ Senior Swing generation adds AdaptivIQ self-calibrating technology that eliminates seasonal manual adjustments. The 9500 is surface mounted; the 2800 is overhead concealed.

 

What is Push N Go activation on the LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing?

Push N Go activates the operator automatically when a person manually opens the door to approximately 5 degrees. The operator takes over from that point, opens the door fully, holds it open for 1 to 30 seconds (adjustable), then closes automatically. No separate button activation is required. The door behaves as a manual door for regular traffic while automatically assisting anyone who begins to push it.

 

What happens to the LCN Senior Swing and Benchmark operators during a power failure?

Both act as manual door closers during a power failure. The Senior Swing specifically functions as a size 3 manual closer when power is lost. Neither operator locks the door or prevents egress. The door can be manually opened from any position in the closing swing during a power failure, maintaining egress compliance on means-of-egress doors.

 

What is LCN AdaptivIQ technology on the Senior Swing 9500IQ?

AdaptivIQ is a self-adjusting, self-calibrating system that automatically compensates for external conditions including wind pressure, carpet drag, HVAC stack pressure, and weather stripping friction. It eliminates the seasonal manual adjustments required on conventional operators when these conditions change, reducing service calls and maintaining consistent operation year-round.

 

What is the LCN 9500 vs 2800 Series Senior Swing?

The 9500 Series is surface mounted: the operator is visible on the door header or adjacent wall. The 2800 Series is overhead concealed: the mechanism is inside the door header cavity. Within each mounting type, models vary by door application: 9530/2810 for single door pull side, 9540/2840 for single door push side, 9550/2850 for simultaneous double door pairs, and 9560/2860 for independent double door pairs.

Schlage CL Cabinet Lock Parts and HL6 Hospital Latch Lock Parts: Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the Schlage CL Series cabinet locks and HL6 Series hospital latch locks. CL Series parts include the CL10-301 cylinder retaining screw, CL10-350 adapter spacer, CL10-352 slotted strike, CL10-354 bar strike (1/4 inch thick), CL10-355 bar strike (1/2 inch thick), and Schlage 36-031 trim collar. HL6 Series parts include the HL6 mortise paddle assembly, HL6 tubular paddle assembly, cover assembly, and bent tab mortise strike kit in engraved and non-engraved configurations. The HL6 uses the Schlage L Series mortise chassis. Mortise cylinders and housings are ordered separately from HL6 latches.

Two of the most specialized product categories in commercial door hardware sit in the same part of the SecurityParts.com catalog: Schlage CL Series cabinet locks and Schlage HL6 Series hospital latch locks. They serve completely different applications, but they share a common characteristic: almost every buyer who needs a replacement part struggles to find accurate technical information before ordering. Cabinet lock parts are rarely documented beyond a part number. Hospital latch parts carry healthcare-specific features like anti-barricade key override and lead lining that are absent from most parts supplier content.

Browse the Schlage CL Series cabinet lock parts catalog and the Schlage HL6 hospital latch lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For the complete Schlage commercial hardware range, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog.

Full-size Schlage cylinders in CL Series: masterkey-compatible with all door hardware
L Series Mortise chassis used by the HL6 hospital latch for Grade 1 strength
50% Quieter paddle operation on HL6 vs previous HL Series design
1/8" Lead lining thickness inside HL6 lock case for radiation room applications
 

Schlage CL Series Cabinet Locks: What They Are and Why They Exist

The Schlage CL Series is a cabinet lock line built around the same full-size Schlage cylinders used in commercial door hardware, rather than the smaller wafer-based or cam-type cylinders common in most office furniture locks. This is the design decision that makes the CL Series different from every other cabinet lock on the market.

Standard office furniture locks use low-security wafer cylinders or small tubular cylinders that cannot be masterkeyed into a building's door hardware key system. A facility manager who keys their entry doors to a master system still needs a separate key for every cabinet, which creates key management complexity and the inevitable problem of employees losing multiple keys.

The CL Series solves this by using a standard Schlage cylinder that can be masterkeyed, grand masterkeyed, and keyed alike using the same key system as the building's ND Series cylindrical locks, L Series mortise locks, and B Series deadbolts. One key operates the offices, the storeroom, and the filing cabinets. This is the core specification reason the CL Series is used in commercial and institutional environments rather than standard hardware store cam locks.

 

The masterkey integration fact no competitor explains at the parts level: When a CL Series cabinet lock is in a masterkeyed system, rekeying it follows exactly the same procedure as rekeying any Schlage door lock. The CL10-301 retaining screw is removed, the cylinder is extracted, and the pins are changed using standard Schlage pinning equipment. No special cabinet lock rekeying tools, no wafer replacement kits, no proprietary service required. Any locksmith equipped to service Schlage door hardware can rekey a CL Series cabinet lock in the same service call. This is why facilities departments that self-service their door hardware can also self-service their CL Series cabinet locks without a separate tool investment.
 

Schlage CL Series Cabinet Lock Parts: Complete Reference

 

CL10-301: Cylinder Retaining Screw

The CL10-301 is the set screw that holds the cylinder in the cabinet lock housing. It seats into a detent in the cylinder housing and prevents the cylinder from rotating when the key is turned. When this screw loosens or strips, the entire housing rotates with the key instead of only the cylinder plug rotating. The symptom is a lock where turning the key spins the visible cylinder body rather than producing a bolt movement.

The CL10-301 is the most frequently replaced CL Series part. In high-cycle applications where the lock is opened and locked multiple times daily, the retaining screw vibrates loose over months of use. If a CL Series lock begins to feel loose or the cylinder has visible rotational play when the key is not inserted, check the CL10-301 first before diagnosing the cylinder or bolt mechanism. Tightening or replacing the CL10-301 resolves most CL Series cylinder rotation complaints without any additional parts.

 

CL10-350: Adapter Spacer

The CL10-350 is a spacer that accommodates thicker cabinet door or drawer face materials. When the cabinet panel is thicker than the standard lock body projection, the spacer extends the lock assembly to the correct mounting depth. Without the correct spacer, the cylinder head may sit below the cabinet face surface, preventing the key from engaging correctly or leaving the retaining screw inaccessible. The CL10-350 is also used when a standard-length CL Series cylinder does not reach the correct bolt engagement depth on a specific cabinet configuration.

 

CL10-352: Slotted Strike

The CL10-352 is a slotted strike for CL Series cabinet locks. Unlike a fixed-pocket strike, the slotted design allows the bolt to engage anywhere along the slot length rather than at a single fixed point. This accommodates minor misalignment between the bolt position and the frame pocket without requiring strike relocation or additional adjustments. It is the most forgiving strike option for field installations where the cabinet construction tolerance varies.

The slotted strike is the correct first choice for any CL Series installation where the bolt position relative to the frame has not been precisely measured and confirmed. If the bolt position is known and consistent, a bar strike provides a more secure engagement because it has defined pocket walls that prevent the bolt from shifting laterally under load.

 

CL10-354 and CL10-355: Bar Strikes

The bar strikes are flat bar-shaped strikes with a bolt pocket for the CL Series deadbolt. Both are 3/4 inch wide and 1-31/32 inch long. The CL10-354 is 1/4 inch thick. The CL10-355 is 1/2 inch thick.

The thickness distinction matters for how deep the bolt must travel before engaging the strike. A 1/4 inch bar strike is flush or nearly flush with the cabinet frame face, meaning the bolt engages quickly and with minimal throw distance consumed by the strike material itself. A 1/2 inch bar strike positions the bolt pocket deeper into the frame, requiring more bolt travel to engage. This is used when the gap between the cabinet door and frame requires additional standoff to position the pocket at the correct engagement depth.

 

Choosing between bar strike thickness: Measure the gap between the closed cabinet door face and the cabinet frame face. If the gap is small (1 to 3mm), the CL10-354 (1/4 inch) is typically correct. If the gap is larger (4 to 8mm), the CL10-355 (1/2 inch) brings the bolt pocket out to meet the bolt at the correct engagement point. A bolt that does not engage the strike fully but still turns the lock mechanism is almost always a bar strike thickness selection error, not a cylinder or bolt failure.
 

Schlage 36-031: Trim Collar

The Schlage 36-031 trim collar is a cosmetic component that installs around the cylinder face to cover the bore hole in the cabinet panel. When a cabinet panel bore is oversized or the previous lock left a visible gap around the cylinder, the trim collar provides a finished appearance. It also covers minor damage around the bore from forced entry or tool marks. The 36-031 is available in standard finishes to match the cylinder face.

 

CL Series Lock Configurations: Door vs Drawer

The CL Series offers different cam configurations for door and drawer applications. A door lock uses a deadbolt cam that extends perpendicular to the cylinder body when the key is turned. A drawer lock uses a cam that rotates to release a drawer slide mechanism. The bolt style and cam orientation are specified at the full lock assembly level, not at the individual parts level covered here. When ordering replacement parts, always confirm whether the installation is a door or drawer configuration before ordering any cam or bolt component, as they are not interchangeable between the two applications.

 

Part NumberDescriptionWhen to Order
CL10-301Cylinder retaining screwCylinder housing rotates with key; cylinder has play; retaining screw stripped or loose
CL10-350Adapter spacerCabinet panel thicker than standard; cylinder head sits below flush with panel
CL10-352Slotted strikeNew installation with uncertain bolt position; strike accommodation for minor misalignment
CL10-354Bar strike, 1/4 inch thickCabinet door/drawer gap is small; bolt pocket flush with frame face
CL10-355Bar strike, 1/2 inch thickCabinet door/drawer gap requires standoff; 1/4 inch strike too shallow for full bolt engagement
36-031Trim collarOversized bore; gap around cylinder; cosmetic damage around bore from prior lock

 

Schlage HL6 Series Hospital Latch Lock: What It Is and Why It Exists

The Schlage HL6 Series hospital latch is a push-pull latch lock designed specifically for healthcare environments. The name comes from its defining feature: a paddle rather than a lever or knob. Instead of gripping and turning hardware, a person pushes or pulls the paddle to retract the latch. The paddle's short throw angle means the latch retracts with a light push or pull force that does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

This is not just an ergonomic convenience. It serves three distinct functions in healthcare settings that no standard cylindrical or mortise lever lock satisfies.

First, it enables hands-free door operation. Nurses and doctors carrying equipment, trays, or patients cannot easily grip a lever. A paddle retracted with a forearm or elbow keeps the hands free and the door operational. Second, it delivers quiet operation. The HL Series is specifically engineered to reduce latch engagement and mechanism noise, which is a material factor in patient sleep quality and recovery in room-by-room studies. The current HL6 generation is 50% quieter than the previous HL Series design. Third, it provides institution-specific security functions including anti-barricade key override for behavioral health applications.

The HL6 uses the Schlage L Series mortise lock chassis: the same Grade 1 commercial mortise mechanism used in high-security L Series mortise locks on main building entries. This gives the HL6 the durability required for healthcare environments where doors cycle thousands of times per year under high-traffic, round-the-clock use.

 

HL6 Series Parts: What SecurityParts.com Stocks

HL6 Mortise Paddle Assembly (Non-Engraved)

 

For L Series mortise chassis installations

The push-pull paddle for HL6 mortise versions. Works with the L Series mortise lock case inside the door. Non-engraved surface with no directional text or arrows. Paddle dimensions: 1-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch with 2-5/8 inch projection from door face. Replace when paddle is physically damaged, bent from impact, or the connection to the mortise mechanism has failed.

 

HL6 Mortise Engraved Paddle Assembly

 

For L Series mortise chassis installations

Identical to the non-engraved mortise paddle in all functional respects. Includes directional text or arrows engraved on the paddle face. Engraved paddles are specified when the user population includes patients, visitors, or others who may not be familiar with push-pull latch operation and need a visible cue. Always specify engraved vs non-engraved when ordering to avoid returning the wrong version.

 

HL6 Tubular Paddle Assembly (Non-Engraved)

 

For tubular chassis installations

The push-pull paddle for HL6 tubular versions. Used where a full L Series mortise prep is not available or where a lighter-duty installation is acceptable. Functionally equivalent to mortise paddle in push-pull operation. Not compatible with the mortise chassis. Confirm which chassis is installed before ordering.

 

HL6 Tubular Engraved Paddle Assembly

 

For tubular chassis installations

Tubular version with directional engraving. Same ordering distinction as the mortise engraved paddle. Confirm tubular (not mortise) chassis is installed before ordering.

 

HL6 Series Cover Assembly

 

Cover plate for door face

The cover plate that mounts on the door face and conceals the HL6 mechanism. Damaged or cracked from impact or cleaning chemical exposure. The cover also acts as the trim plate that gives the HL6 its finished appearance on the door. Replacement requires confirming the configuration (mortise or tubular) and finish before ordering.

 

Bent Tab Mortise Strike Kit

 

Frame-side strike for HL6 mortise

The HL6 mortise version uses an ASA strike (1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch) as standard. The bent tab mortise strike kit is the optional strike that includes a bent lip configuration for specific frame preparations or when the standard ASA strike does not fit the frame geometry correctly. Always confirm frame prep before ordering any HL6 strike.

 

HL6 Mortise vs Tubular: Choosing the Right Configuration

The HL6 is available in mortise and tubular versions. The mortise version uses the Schlage L Series mortise lock case installed inside the door, which requires a routed mortise pocket in the door edge. The tubular version uses a standard tubular latch mechanism, which requires only a face bore and edge bore without a mortise pocket.

For new construction healthcare facilities, mortise is almost always the correct specification. The L Series mortise chassis provides Grade 1 strength and durability that matches the high cycle count demands of a hospital patient room door. It is also compatible with the Von Duprin 9875 and 9975 mortise exit devices, which may be required on specific door applications within the healthcare building.

The tubular version is appropriate for renovation projects where the existing doors do not have a mortise prep and the budget does not allow door replacement. A tubular HL6 on an existing tubular prep door provides the push-pull ergonomics and quiet operation of the HL6 without requiring door replacement. The tradeoff is that the tubular version does not achieve the same durability under maximum cycle load as the mortise version.

 

HL6 cylinders are not included: the ordering omission that delays every healthcare installation: The Schlage HL6 mortise hospital latch does not include mortise cylinders or cylinder housings in the base unit. They must be ordered separately. This is documented in the Schlage specification but is the most frequent cause of installation delay on HL6 projects. A healthcare facility ordering HL6 latches for a patient wing renovation discovers at installation that cylinders were not included and must wait for a separate cylinder order before the doors can be commissioned. Every HL6 order should include a separate line item for the mortise cylinder assemblies at the time of the original order.
 

HL6 Functions: Healthcare-Specific Security Operations

The HL6 offers 14 mechanical mortise functions, 2 electrified mortise functions, and 3 tubular functions. The functions that matter most for healthcare parts ordering are the ones with specific clinical safety features.

 

HL6-9010: Passage Function

The latchbolt is retracted by the paddle from either side. Inside paddle always free for immediate egress. The most basic function, used on non-secured interior corridor doors where free passage is always required. Parts for a passage function HL6 are the paddle assembly (mortise or tubular, engraved or non-engraved) and the cover assembly.

 

HL6-9040: Privacy Function (Bath/Bedroom)

The latchbolt is retracted by the paddle from either side unless the outside paddle is locked by the inside thumbturn. Actuating the inside paddle or closing the door unlocks the outside paddle. For emergency access, the outside has a release mechanism. This is the standard patient bathroom and private room function where a patient needs inside privacy but staff need emergency outside access.

 

HL6-9060: Apartment Entrance Function

The latchbolt is retracted from either side unless the outside is locked by key from inside. When locked, key or inside paddle retracts the latchbolt. Used on patient rooms where both patient privacy and staff key access are required simultaneously.

 

HL6-9070: Classroom Function

Latchbolt retracted by paddle from either side unless outside paddle is locked by key. Inside paddle always free for immediate egress. For medication rooms, treatment rooms, and other controlled-access clinical spaces where staff lock access from outside but egress from inside is always free.

 

HL6-9080: Storeroom Function

Latchbolt retracted by inside paddle or outside key. Outside paddle always inoperative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside paddle always free for immediate egress. For medical supply rooms and pharmacy areas where entry is controlled exclusively by key.

 

HL6-9082: Institution Function (Anti-Barricade)

Latchbolt retracted by key from either side. Outside paddle always inoperative. Inside paddle always free for immediate egress. The key override feature on this function allows the outside key to retract the latch even if the inside is being manually held. This is the anti-barricade function critical for behavioral health, psychiatric, and patient room applications where preventing barricade situations is a clinical safety requirement.

 

The clinical safety distinction that changes the specification: The difference between HL6-9070 (classroom function) and HL6-9082 (institution function) is the anti-barricade key override. In a classroom function, the inside paddle always retracts the latch, but there is no mechanism for the outside key to override an inside thumbturn being held in the locked position. In the institution function, the key override is present. The distinction is specifically relevant to behavioral health and psychiatric settings where a patient may intentionally barricade a door by physically holding the thumbturn or latch mechanism while inside. Healthcare facilities that specify HL6-9070 on behavioral health patient rooms instead of HL6-9082 are creating a barricade scenario that staff cannot resolve with a key. The correct function for any room where a patient barricade is a clinical risk is HL6-9082 with key override.
 

HL6 Special Options That Affect Parts Ordering

 

Lead Lining for Radiation Rooms

The HL6 lock case is available with a 1/8 inch lead lining insert for X-ray rooms, radiation therapy rooms, and any space where the door hardware must contribute to the room's radiation shielding. The lead lining is a factory option, not a field modification. It cannot be added to an existing non-lead-lined lock case.

When a radiation room HL6 needs paddle assembly replacement, the replacement paddle does not include the lead lining. The lead lining is inside the lock case body, not in the paddle. A paddle replacement on a lead-lined HL6 does not require a lead-lined paddle. The case body retains its lead lining throughout the product's life unless the entire lock case is replaced.

If the entire lock case of a lead-lined HL6 must be replaced (due to forced entry damage or mechanism failure), the replacement must be specified with the lead lining option. Ordering a standard non-lined replacement case for a radiation room removes the radiation protection at that opening without any visible indicator that a change has occurred.

 

Quiet Operation Engineering

The HL Series achieved its documented 50% noise reduction improvement over the previous HL Series generation through redesigned internal mechanism geometry that reduces the impact force of the latch bolt engaging the strike. This is not an adjustable feature and requires no specific maintenance to maintain. However, a correctly aligned strike is necessary for the quiet engagement to function as designed. A misaligned strike that causes the latch to contact the strike face edge rather than enter the bolt pocket cleanly produces noise regardless of the mechanism design. When a previously quiet HL6 installation begins producing latch noise, strike alignment is the first item to check before assuming the mechanism has failed.

 

Von Duprin Compatibility

The HL6 mortise version is compatible with the Von Duprin 9875 and 9975 mortise exit devices. This allows a single door to be specified with the HL6 push-pull operation on the inside and Von Duprin panic exit hardware on the outside, which is the standard configuration for healthcare patient room doors on required egress paths where both push-pull access and panic hardware are needed simultaneously. This compatibility is not available on the tubular version. Browse commercial exit device parts at SecurityParts.com for Von Duprin mortise exit device components.

 

Mounting Orientations: What Competitors Never Explain

The HL6 paddle assembly mounts in four orientations that determine how the paddles are positioned relative to the latch: handles up, handles down, one handle up with the other down, or horizontal with handles pointing away from the latch. This flexibility is what allows the HL6 to serve multiple door configurations without a different product for each application.

For corridor patient room doors, handles-down is the most common mounting: the paddles hang below the latch body in the familiar push-pull position that most healthcare workers recognize instinctively. For non-keyed passage functions, handles-up mounting is available, positioning the paddles above the latch body. Horizontal mounting is used when the door configuration requires the paddles to point horizontally rather than vertically.

 

The mounting orientation that prevents the most common HL6 installation callback: When an HL6 is specified for a door where patients need to operate the lock from bed (common in patient toilet rooms adjacent to patient rooms), the paddle mounting orientation determines whether the patient can reach the lock from a seated or reclined position. Handles-down mounting positions the paddles lower on the door, improving reach for patients who cannot stand fully. The mounting orientation is confirmed at installation, not at ordering. But knowing this before delivery allows the installer to confirm the correct orientation with clinical staff before the lock is commissioned rather than after.
 

How to Order the Correct Part for Each Product Line

CL Series Cabinet Lock Parts

 

Three pieces of information are needed: the symptom (cylinder rotates, bolt does not engage, bore is oversized), the application (door or drawer), and the cabinet panel gap dimension (for bar strike thickness selection). The CL10-301 retaining screw resolves most cylinder rotation complaints. The CL10-352 slotted strike is the safest first choice for any new strike installation. Bar strike thickness (CL10-354 vs CL10-355) is determined by measuring the gap between the closed door face and the cabinet frame face.

 

HL6 Hospital Latch Parts

Four pieces of information are needed: mortise or tubular chassis (confirmed by whether the door has a routed mortise pocket or only bore holes), engraved or non-engraved paddle, function (passage, privacy, classroom, storeroom, or institution), and whether the lock case has lead lining. Cylinders and housings are always ordered separately. For bent tab strike vs standard ASA strike, confirm the frame prep before ordering.

 

Browse the complete CL Series cabinet lock parts catalog and HL6 hospital latch lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For the full Schlage commercial hardware range including L Series mortise lock parts, ND Series cylindrical lock parts, LT Series tubular lock parts, and B Series deadbolt parts, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage CL and HL6 Parts

CL retaining screw troubleshooting, bar strike thickness guide, HL6 anti-barricade function explanation, cylinder ordering reminder, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

CL Retaining Screw First

We document that the CL10-301 retaining screw resolves most CL Series cylinder rotation complaints without any additional parts. No other parts supplier explains this diagnostic at the ordering stage.

 

Bar Strike Thickness Guide

We document how to choose between CL10-354 (1/4 inch) and CL10-355 (1/2 inch) bar strikes by measuring the cabinet gap dimension. Wrong thickness is the most common CL Series parts return.

 

HL6 Function Safety Context

We document the difference between classroom function and institution function and why the anti-barricade key override is a clinical safety requirement on behavioral health patient rooms, not an optional upgrade.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most CL Series and HL6 parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order configuration support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for These Parts

  • We document the CL Series masterkey integration advantage: full-size Schlage cylinders in cabinet locks can be masterkeyed with door hardware, eliminating separate cabinet key management. No other parts supplier explains this at the product level.
  • We document the HL6 cylinder omission: mortise cylinders are not included with HL6 latches and must be ordered separately. This is the most common cause of HL6 installation delay on healthcare projects.
  • We document the anti-barricade key override as a clinical safety requirement for behavioral health patient rooms, not a security enhancement. The difference between HL6-9070 (no override) and HL6-9082 (with override) is a life-safety specification decision that every healthcare hardware specifier needs to understand.
  • We document the lead lining in the lock case (not in the paddle) so that a paddle replacement on a radiation room HL6 does not require a lead-lined paddle. No competitor documents which component contains the lead lining.
  • We carry CL and HL6 parts alongside L Series mortise lock parts, ND Series cylindrical lock parts, and exit device parts for full facility hardware service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

CL Series cabinet locks and HL6 hospital latch locks are part of larger facility hardware programs. The same healthcare facility using HL6 latches on patient room doors uses L Series mortise locks on staff entries, LCN closers on corridor fire doors, and exit devices on egress stairwells.

For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on staff office and entry doors in the same healthcare facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Schlage ND Series and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on utility and service doors, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage LT and PT Series tubular lock parts on interior non-critical doors, browse the tubular locks catalog. For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on secondary exit and storeroom doors, browse the deadbolts catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated corridor doors in healthcare and commercial facilities, browse the door closers catalog. For exit device parts on egress stairwells and fire exit doors, browse the exit devices catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware across the complete facility in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage CL Cabinet Lock and HL6 Hospital Latch Lock Parts

 

What is the Schlage CL Series cabinet lock and what parts are available?

The Schlage CL Series uses full-size Schlage cylinders that can be masterkeyed into any existing Schlage door hardware key system. Parts include the CL10-301 cylinder retaining screw, CL10-350 adapter spacer, CL10-352 slotted strike, CL10-354 bar strike (1/4 inch thick), CL10-355 bar strike (1/2 inch thick), and Schlage 36-031 trim collar. CL locks are available for door and drawer applications with different cam configurations.

 

What is the difference between the Schlage CL10-352 slotted strike and CL10-354 and CL10-355 bar strikes?

The CL10-352 slotted strike accommodates minor misalignment with its slot design. The CL10-354 and CL10-355 are bar strikes with fixed bolt pockets. The CL10-354 is 1/4 inch thick for installations where the cabinet gap is small. The CL10-355 is 1/2 inch thick for installations where additional standoff depth is needed. Measure the closed cabinet door-to-frame gap before selecting bar strike thickness.

 

What is the Schlage HL6 Series hospital latch lock and where is it used?

The HL6 uses a push-pull paddle on the Schlage L Series mortise chassis. It allows hands-free door operation with a short throw angle and delivers quiet latch engagement (50% quieter than the previous HL Series). Used on patient room doors, medication rooms, treatment rooms, and restrooms in healthcare environments. Available in mortise and tubular versions with 14 mechanical mortise functions, 2 electrified functions, and 3 tubular functions.

 

What is the HL6 anti-barricade key override and why is it critical in healthcare?

Anti-barricade key override allows the outside key to retract the deadbolt or latchbolt even when the inside thumbturn is being held in the locked position. In behavioral health and psychiatric settings, this prevents a patient from barricading a door and blocking staff access. The institution function HL6-9082 includes key override. The classroom function HL6-9070 does not. Every HL6 installation in a behavioral health patient room should specify the institution function with key override.

 

What is the HL6 lead lining option and what rooms require it?

The HL6 lead lining is a 1/8 inch thick lead insert inside the lock case for X-ray rooms and radiation therapy rooms. It is a factory option, not a field modification. The lead lining is in the lock case, not the paddle, so paddle replacement does not require a lead-lined paddle. If the entire lock case is replaced on a radiation room installation, the replacement must be specified with the lead lining option.

 

What is the difference between the HL6 mortise paddle and the HL6 tubular paddle assembly?

The HL6 mortise paddle works with the L Series mortise lock case inside the door and provides Grade 1 strength for high-cycle healthcare applications. The tubular paddle works with a tubular latch mechanism for doors without a mortise prep. Both are available in engraved and non-engraved versions. Engraved paddles show directional text or arrows. Confirm which chassis is installed (mortise prep in the door edge vs bore-only) before ordering either assembly.

Detex Exit Alarm and Door Hardware Parts: ECL, EAX, ADVANTEX and AO19 Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for all Detex product lines. The ECL-230D is a complete battery-alarmed exit control lock with a 1-inch deadbolt and push bar. The EAX-500 is a surface-mounted battery door alarm that pairs with existing hardware. ADVANTEX is the super-heavy-duty exit device line for high-abuse applications. The AO19 is a low-energy automatic door operator for ADA-compliant hands-free access. The MC65 mortise cylinder (1-1/8 inch, Schlage C keyway) is the standard cylinder for ECL and EAX Series. The ECL-445K is the IKC lock cylinder replacement for the ECL-230D. The ECL-405-KIT is the cover lock key kit for both ECL and EAX series cover locks.

Detex has been manufacturing commercial door security hardware for over a century. The product line covers a wider range of functions than most commercial hardware brands: from the simple battery-powered EAX-500 door alarm through the complex ADVANTEX super-heavy-duty exit device with full electrified integration, to the AO19 automatic door operator for ADA-compliant accessibility applications. Each product line has its own parts ecosystem with specific cylinder, cover, and accessory requirements.

Browse the complete Detex hardware parts catalog at SecurityParts.com, covering all Detex product lines including ADVANTEX, Value Series, ECL, EAX, AO19, 90 Series, and Detex Trims. For the full exit alarm range including Detex ECL and EAX alongside the Von Duprin Guard-X alarm series, browse the commercial exit alarm parts catalog.

100dB Alarm output on ECL-230D and EAX-500 Series
2,200 lbs Outside pull force resistance on the Detex ECL-230D
9V Battery type on ECL-230D and EAX-500; 1 to 3 year life under normal use
3-year Detex limited electrical warranty on ECL and EAX Series products
 

The Detex Product Lines: What Each One Is and Does

 

ECL Series

 

Exit Control Lock | Code-Compliant Panic Device

Complete panic exit hardware with battery alarm. The ECL-230D is a push-bar deadbolt device with 1-inch throw, 100dB alarm, and photo-luminescent sign. Meets life safety panic requirements. Used on secondary exits, back doors, and restricted commercial egress points. The ECL-230X is the ultra-rugged break-in prevention version with hardened deadbolt.

 

EAX Series

 

Door Alarm | Surface Mount Battery Alarm

Battery-powered surface alarm, not a panic device. Mounts on door or wall and uses magnetic contact to trigger 100dB alarm when door is opened without key authorization. The EAX-500 is the standard model. The EAX-500W is the weatherized outdoor version. The EAX-2500 is the flush-mount version. No push bar, no deadbolt. Adds alarm monitoring to existing hardware.

 

ADVANTEX

 

Super-Heavy-Duty Exit Devices | High Abuse

Premium exit device line for schools, hospitals, airports, retail, and other high-abuse environments. Available in rim (10 Series), surface VR (20 Series), mortise (30 Series), narrow stile rim (40 Series), and concealed VR (60 Series). Stainless steel and vapor deposition finishes. Widest electrified option range of any Detex exit device. Custom lengths 24 to 48 inches. 3-hour UL fire rating on steel doors.

 

AO19 Series

 

Low-Energy Automatic Door Operator | ADA Access

Not an alarm or exit device. Automatic door opener that mounts in the door header and opens and closes the door on a push button or access control signal. Meets ANSI/BHMA A156.19. ADA compliant. AO19-1 for single doors, AO19-2 for double doors, AO19-3 for double egress applications. 115VAC, obstruction reversal, ON/OFF/HOLD switch. Used in healthcare, commercial, and accessibility-required applications.

 

Value Series

 

Mid-Range Exit Devices | Standard Commercial

The Detex V40xNS is a narrow stile rim exit device for standard commercial applications where ADVANTEX-level construction is not required. Available in standard configurations and finishes. Lower price point than ADVANTEX but still meeting ANSI Grade 1 requirements for panic hardware.

 

90 Series

 

Surface Alarm | Door Prop Alarm

The Detex 90 Series covers surface-mounted alarm products including door prop alarms. The EAX-300 Series monitors doors that may be used for egress but must not be held open, with adjustable open-time detection from 1 second to 4 minutes. The EAX-411SK is an AC-powered door prop alarm for controlled-access doors. Used where monitoring door-prop violations is the primary concern rather than unauthorized egress.

 

What Is the Detex ECL-230D and How Does It Work

The ECL-230D is the most widely misidentified product in the Detex line. It is not simply an alarm that gets added to a door. It is a complete panic exit control lock: a deadbolt with a push bar that meets life safety code requirements for panic hardware, combined with a battery-powered 100dB alarm system in a single unit.

When the deadbolt is in the locked position and the push bar is pressed, the bolt retracts for emergency egress and the alarm sounds simultaneously. The alarm can only be reset with a control key. The locking and unlocking of the deadbolt automatically arms and disarms the alarm respectively. This is the fundamental distinction from the EAX-500: pressing the ECL push bar both unlocks the door for egress and sounds the alarm. The EAX-500 only sounds an alarm; it does not control any locking mechanism.

 

ECL-230D Physical Specifications

The ECL-230D fits wood, hollow metal, and aluminum doors from 1-3/4 to 2-1/4 inches thick. The minimum standard door width is 20 inches. The design is non-handed, so the same unit installs on left-hand or right-hand doors. The attack-resistant design withstands over 2,200 pounds of outside pull force. The 1-inch throw deadbolt is saw-resistant. The lock body is made from corrosion-resistant alloy. The photo-luminescent sign absorbs ambient light and glows in the dark when lighting fails, meeting egress marking requirements without battery backup lighting.

The ECL-230D accepts 5-pin through 7-pin standard and interchangeable core rim cylinders. The IKC (Inside Key Control) cylinder is the ECL-445K. The OKC (Outside Key Control) uses rim cylinders. The cover lock is the mechanism that holds the cover assembly to the backplate and requires a separate cover key to access the battery compartment.

 

ECL-230D vs ECL-230X: Choosing the Right Version

The ECL-230X is the higher-security version of the ECL-230D. The key differences are a hardened deadbolt for break-in prevention and inclusion of the photo-luminescent sign as a standard component. Both versions produce a 100dB alarm and meet the same life safety code requirements. For most commercial secondary exit applications, the ECL-230D is the correct specification. For back doors on high-theft-risk retail environments, warehouses, and facilities with documented forced entry attempts, the ECL-230X provides additional resistance without changing the operating interface.

 

The IKC key confusion that generates most ECL-230D service calls: The ECL-230D has two key systems that look similar but do completely different things. The IKC (Inside Key Control) key rotates a full 360 degrees to throw the deadbolt from inside. The OKC (Outside Key Control) is a standard rim cylinder key used from outside. The cover key is a third separate key that releases the cover to access the battery. Facilities that lose track of which key is which generate repeated service calls that conclude only with physical identification of each key by its cylinder. The cover key, IKC key, and OKC key are all different and non-interchangeable. A complete key audit of any ECL-230D installation should document all three before any key is misplaced.
 

Detex EAX-500: Battery Door Alarm Parts and Configuration

The EAX-500 is a surface-mounted battery alarm designed for doors that need an audible deterrent without replacing the existing door hardware. It mounts on the door face or adjacent wall and uses a magnetic contact pair (one half on the door, one half on the frame) to detect door opening. When the door opens and breaks the magnetic contact, the piezo horn sounds at approximately 100dB.

 

EAX-500 Cylinder Configuration

The EAX-500 comes standard without a cylinder. Key control is optional:

 

OptionPartFunctionLocation
Inside key controlMC65Mortise cylinder, 1-1/8 inch, Schlage C keyway, 6-pinBottom of EAX-500 unit (inside face)
Outside key controlRC65Rim cylinder for outside faceOutside face of door
Interchangeable coreIC77-pin IC housing, compatible with most standard 7-pin IC format coresPre-installed at factory, field core insertable
Cover lock key kitECL-405-KITCover lock key kit for covers on ECL and EAX SeriesCover assembly on both ECL and EAX devices

 

The patented cam assembly inside the EAX-500 automatically adjusts for different cylinder sizes without requiring spacers. This is a genuine engineering advantage over competitor alarms where spacers must be sourced separately for non-standard cylinder lengths. The EAX-500's cam system accepts any standard mortise cylinder within the common range without modification.

 

EAX-500 Battery and Operation

The EAX-500 runs on a 9VDC battery. Low battery is indicated by an LED visual alert. The alarm can only be silenced by the proper control key. The extended bypass feature is standard: when the door is legitimately propped open (during a delivery or loading), the alarm remains bypassed and automatically rearms when the door closes. This prevents the nuisance alarm scenario where a propped door on a loading dock triggers continuous alarm until someone manually resets it.

The intelligent circuit automatically senses the magnet location on the door and sets the correct handing for the unit. This means the same EAX-500 unit installs correctly regardless of whether the door opens left or right, without any configuration switch adjustment. This self-handing feature is a field installation advantage that competitors' alarms do not universally offer.

 

EAX-500W: The Weatherized Version

The EAX-500W is the weatherized version for outdoor applications including exterior secondary exits, gate alarms, and doors exposed to direct weather. The weather-resistant housing adds moisture protection without changing the operational interface. All cylinder options available on the standard EAX-500 are available on the EAX-500W. For any Detex door alarm installation on a door exposed to direct precipitation or sustained humidity, always specify the EAX-500W rather than the standard EAX-500.

 

ECL and EAX Parts Reference: What to Order for Each Failure

 

Part NumberDescriptionApplies ToWhen to Order
ECL-445KIKC lock cylinder, ECL-230DECL-230DIKC cylinder stiff, binding, or key will not turn
ECL-445K-7IKC lock cylinder, 7-pin versionECL-230DWhen 7-pin cylinder is required for higher security pinning
ECL-1576-15Cam bridge assembly and lock cylinder housingECL-230DCam bridge damaged; housing cracked from forced entry
MC65Mortise cylinder, 1-1/8 inch, Schlage C keywayECL-230D, EAX-500, EAX-2500Cylinder key stiff, worn, or inside key control lost
RC65Rim cylinder for outside key controlECL-230D, EAX-500Outside key control required; cylinder worn or lost
IC77-pin interchangeable core housingECL-230D, EAX-500Facility uses IC key system; needs rekeying without cylinder replacement
ECL-405-KITCover lock key kitECL and EAX SeriesCover key lost; cover lock replacement required for battery access
102665Magnet kitEAX-500, EAX-2500Magnetic contact lost, damaged, or door/frame separation too wide for existing magnet
 
The cover lock kit without which the battery cannot be changed: The ECL-405-KIT cover lock key kit controls the cover lock mechanism on both ECL and EAX Series units. Without the correct cover key, the cover cannot be opened to access the battery compartment. The most common post-installation failure on ECL and EAX Series devices is a facility discovering the cover key has been lost when the battery dies and the alarm stops functioning. Unlike many hardware keys, the cover key for the ECL and EAX is not a standard profile and cannot be duplicated at a hardware store. Facilities should always record the cover key code at installation and store a spare. The ECL-405-KIT provides a new key set when the original is lost.
 

Battery Replacement Procedure: ECL-230D and EAX-500

Both the ECL-230D and EAX-500 use 9-volt batteries accessed through the cover assembly. The procedure differs slightly between the two but follows the same sequence.

 

ECL-230D Battery Access

To access the ECL-230D battery: insert the cover key into the cover lock and turn counterclockwise until the cover releases. Swing the cover away from the backplate. The 9-volt battery is visible and accessible. Confirm battery voltage is a minimum of 7 volts if any doubt exists about the current battery condition. Replace with a fresh 9-volt battery, reconnect the battery terminal, and confirm all wiring connections are intact before closing the cover. Swing the cover back to the backplate and re-engage the cover lock. Test alarm function by pressing the push bar with the IKC in the locked position. The alarm should sound immediately.

 

EAX-500 Battery Access

The EAX-500 cover lock uses the cam lock at the top of the unit for cover access. Insert the cover key into the cam lock and release the cover. Replace the 9-volt battery and confirm LED arming indicators function on cover reinstallation. The EAX-500 includes LED visual and audible arming indicators that confirm correct operation after battery replacement. If the LED indicators do not respond correctly after a fresh battery installation, check the battery terminal connection and confirm the magnetic contact sensor is properly positioned before concluding the board has failed.

 

The annual battery replacement that eliminates 80% of Detex alarm service calls: Both the ECL-230D and EAX-500 operate with a 9-volt battery that functions for 1 to 3 years depending on activation frequency. The most common service complaint on both devices is alarm failure with no apparent cause. In the vast majority of these cases, a battery that reads slightly above the 7-volt minimum will cause intermittent function that appears to be electronic failure. Scheduling annual battery replacement as part of building preventive maintenance eliminates this failure mode entirely. The cost of one service call typically exceeds several years of annual battery replacement on all devices in a building.
 

Detex ADVANTEX Exit Devices: Heavy-Duty Series Guide

The ADVANTEX line is Detex's response to high-abuse commercial applications where standard exit devices suffer accelerated wear. Schools, hospitals, airports, corrections, and retail environments with high daily cycle counts benefit from the ADVANTEX construction: stainless steel, vapor deposition finishes, and the widest electrified option set in the Detex lineup.

 

ADVANTEX Series by Configuration

 

SeriesConfigurationStileApplication
10 SeriesRim exit deviceWide (4-1/2 inch minimum)Heavy-duty single and double doors with mullion; highest use interior and exterior egress
20 SeriesSurface vertical rodWideHeavy-duty doors without mullion; two-point latching on single doors
30 SeriesMortise exit deviceWide (4-1/2 minimum)Maximum security and durability with mortise lock body; high-security perimeter doors
40 SeriesNarrow stile rimNarrow (aluminum storefront)High-use aluminum storefront entries requiring narrow stile panic hardware
60 SeriesConcealed vertical rodWideHeavy-duty doors requiring clean exterior face without visible rod hardware

 

ADVANTEX Electrified Options

Detex markets the ADVANTEX as having the most comprehensive electrified option set of any exit device in the industry. Available options include electric latch retraction (EL), electric integration (EI), alarm exit (EA), electric bridge (EB), delayed egress (EE), and electric latch monitoring. The EI option connects the exit device to building automation systems, access control panels, and security monitoring platforms, making the ADVANTEX appropriate for high-security environments that require centralized door status reporting.

Fire-rated ADVANTEX devices support 3-hour UL listing on steel doors. The F prefix designates fire-rated versions (for example, F6001 for the 60 Series fire version). Custom lengths from 24 to 48 inches are available. Devices shorter than 30 inches have restrictions on which electrified options are available; always confirm electrified option availability against the device length before specifying.

 

ADVANTEX Cylinder and Trim Accessories

ADVANTEX devices are ordered without cylinders as standard. Cylinders (C65) or interchangeable core housings (IC7) are pre-installed at the Detex factory when specified at order time. Knurling (KN), antimicrobial finish (AM), and lever switch (LS) options add to the base price. Lever trims for ADVANTEX are specified by function: key retracts latch (C), night latch (NL), dummy trim (DT), and blank escutcheon (BE). Lever trim handing must be specified (RHR or LHR) unless ordering exit-only configurations.

 

Detex AO19 Automatic Door Operator: What It Is and What Fails

The AO19 is categorically different from every other Detex product. It is not an alarm and it is not an exit device. It is a low-energy automatic door opener that mounts in the door header and powers the door open and closed using a motor-driven mechanism. Understanding what it is prevents it from being ordered to solve an alarm or exit hardware problem.

The AO19 is used on accessibility routes in commercial buildings where ADA requires hands-free door access: healthcare facility corridors, accessible restroom entries, building main entries on accessible routes, and any interior door on a required accessible path where manual door operation would present a barrier for mobility-impaired users.

 

AO19 Configurations: Single, Double, and Double Egress

The AO19-1 serves single doors. The AO19-2 serves double doors where both leaves open together on a single signal. The AO19-3 serves double egress applications where both doors open away from each other for bidirectional traffic. Each configuration requires separate operators for each leaf. The AO19-2 requires cable synchronization between the two operators for coordinated operation on double door pairs.

 

AO19 Electrical Requirements and Features

The AO19 runs on 115VAC from a standard outlet. The power source plugs into the header unit. A 3-way low-voltage ON/OFF/HOLD switch controls service and operational modes without requiring line voltage access. The obstruction reversal feature stops the door during a closing cycle and re-activates to open if an obstruction is sensed before the door reaches the latch position. This is the safety interlock that prevents the door from closing on a person or object in the opening.

The AO19 connects to existing access control systems, locking hardware, and building computer signals. A credential read or a wall-mounted push button activation signal triggers the operator to open the door. The controller module inside the operator can be adjusted for opening speed, hold-open time, and closing speed without special tools. Parts for the AO19 include the cover (aluminum or bronze finish), cable sync for twin AO19 UDC 1000 installations (part 104707), and motor/gearbox assemblies documented in the push and pull repair manuals available from Detex.

 

Detex vs Von Duprin Guard-X: Exit Alarm Comparison

SecurityParts.com carries both Detex and Von Duprin exit alarm products. They serve similar applications but with different design philosophies that affect which one is correct for a specific opening.

The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is a single-point rim exit alarm device that is the Von Duprin equivalent of the Detex ECL-230D. Both are battery-alarmed push-bar deadbolt devices meeting panic hardware requirements. The Guard-X uses a Von Duprin cylinder ecosystem while the ECL-230D uses its own IKC cylinder system with the ECL-445K. Facilities that have standardized on Von Duprin cylinders throughout a building may prefer the Guard-X to maintain key system continuity. Facilities that have standardized on Detex hardware or Schlage C keyway cylinders find the ECL series integrates more cleanly into their existing key schedule.

Browse the complete Von Duprin exit device and alarm range at the Von Duprin parts catalog. For the full exit alarm parts range including both Detex ECL and EAX series and the Von Duprin Guard-X, browse the exit alarm parts catalog.

 

How to Order the Correct Detex Part

Three pieces of information are required before any Detex parts order.

1. Product line (ECL, EAX, ADVANTEX, AO19, Value Series, 90 Series): Visible from the product label on the device. The full model number is on a label on the back plate or side of the unit. For ECL-230D, the model number confirms whether the standard or X (hardened deadbolt) version is installed.

2. Part type (cylinder, cover lock, cam bridge, magnet, cover assembly): Identifying which component has failed determines whether the order is the ECL-445K cylinder, the ECL-1576-15 cam bridge assembly, the ECL-405-KIT cover lock key kit, or the 102665 magnet kit.

3. Cylinder format (standard 5-7 pin, or IC): Confirm whether the installation uses standard conventional cylinders or IC format cores before ordering any replacement cylinder. The IC7 housing is required for IC installations, and the correct IC core must be sourced separately to insert into the IC7 housing.

Browse the complete Detex parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all ECL, EAX, ADVANTEX, AO19, Value Series, and 90 Series components. Browse the full exit alarm catalog for Detex and Von Duprin alarm products side by side. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Detex Parts

IKC vs OKC vs cover key documentation, battery life facts, ADVANTEX electrified option guidance, and same-day shipping on stocked components.

 

Three-Key Documentation

We document the IKC, OKC, and cover key as three distinct key systems on the ECL-230D. Confusion between these generates most ECL service calls. We resolve this before the order is placed.

 

Battery Maintenance Facts

We document that annual 9-volt battery replacement eliminates 80%+ of ECL and EAX alarm failure calls. A fresh battery costs pennies compared to a service call. We say this directly.

 

AO19 Correct Identification

We document that the AO19 is an automatic door operator, not an alarm or exit device. This prevents AO19 parts from being ordered for alarm or exit device problems.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most Detex ECL, EAX, and ADVANTEX parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for parts identification support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for Detex Parts

  • We document the ECL-405-KIT cover lock key kit as the part that provides battery access when the cover key is lost. Most facilities discover the cover key is missing only when the battery dies. This part and its purpose is undocumented at most parts supplier sites.
  • We document the EAX-500 extended bypass feature that keeps the alarm from triggering when a door is legitimately propped open. This feature prevents the most common nuisance alarm complaint on EAX-500 installations near loading docks.
  • We document the EAX-500 self-handing intelligent circuit as a genuine installation advantage over competitor alarms. Most parts suppliers describe the EAX-500 specifications without explaining why the self-handing feature matters for field installation.
  • We document that ADVANTEX devices shorter than 30 inches have electrified option restrictions. Specifiers who do not know this order incompatible EL or EA options for short-length devices and receive field mismatches.
  • We carry Detex parts alongside Falcon and Von Duprin exit device parts, LCN door closer parts, Schlage cylindrical lock parts, and mortise lock parts for complete building hardware service in one order.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping on stocked parts from US warehouses. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

Detex hardware appears on doors throughout commercial buildings alongside other hardware brands. The same building that uses Detex ECL-230D locks on secondary exits likely uses Von Duprin on main egress stairwells, LCN closers on fire-rated corridors, and Schlage cylindrical locks on office doors.

For commercial exit alarm parts including the full Detex ECL and EAX range alongside Von Duprin Guard-X parts, browse the exit alarms catalog. For commercial exit device parts including Falcon 19, 24, 25 Series and all Von Duprin series, browse the exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin exit device and alarm parts on doors where Von Duprin is specified alongside Detex, browse the Von Duprin catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated corridor doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts on office and interior doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Detex, Von Duprin, Falcon, Schlage, LCN, and all other supported brands in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Detex Parts

 

What is the difference between the Detex ECL-230D and EAX-500?

The ECL-230D is a complete panic exit control lock with a 1-inch deadbolt, push bar, and 100dB alarm that meets life safety code. Pressing the bar retracts the bolt for emergency egress and sounds the alarm. The EAX-500 is a surface-mounted battery alarm with no deadbolt and no push bar. It mounts on the door face and sounds when the magnetic contact is broken by door opening. The ECL-230D replaces the door hardware. The EAX-500 adds alarm monitoring to existing hardware without replacing it.

 

What battery does the Detex ECL-230D use and how long does it last?

A 9-volt battery. Under normal conditions of 1 to 2 alarm activations per day, battery life is 1 to 3 years. The battery is accessed by opening the cover with the cover key. A minimum voltage of 7 volts is required. Annual replacement as part of routine inspection is recommended. Most ECL alarm failure calls are resolved by replacing a battery that reads low on a meter but still above minimum voltage.

 

What cylinder does the Detex EAX-500 use and how is key control configured?

Cylinders are not included with the standard EAX-500. For inside key control, the MC65 mortise cylinder (1-1/8 inch, Schlage C keyway, 6-pin) mounts in the bottom of the unit. For outside key control, the RC65 rim cylinder is required. The IC7 7-pin interchangeable core housing is available for IC key systems. The ECL-405-KIT provides cover lock key replacement for both ECL and EAX Series.

 

What is the Detex ADVANTEX exit device and where is it used?

ADVANTEX is Detex's super-heavy-duty exit device line for high-use, high-abuse environments including schools, hospitals, airports, retail, and corrections. Available in rim (10 Series), surface VR (20 Series), mortise (30 Series), narrow stile rim (40 Series), and concealed VR (60 Series). Stainless steel and vapor deposition finishes. Custom lengths 24 to 48 inches. 3-hour UL fire rating on steel doors. Widest electrified option range of any Detex exit device.

 

What is the Detex AO19 and what does it do?

The AO19 is a low-energy automatic door operator that mounts in the door header and opens and closes the door automatically on a push button or access control signal. It is not an alarm or exit device. It meets ANSI/BHMA A156.19 and provides ADA-compliant hands-free access. AO19-1 for single doors, AO19-2 for double doors, AO19-3 for double egress. Runs on 115VAC with obstruction reversal and ON/OFF/HOLD service switch.

 

What is the Detex ECL-445K and what does it replace?

The ECL-445K is the IKC lock cylinder replacement for the ECL-230D exit control lock. It controls the deadbolt throw from inside. Order ECL-445K-7 for the 7-pin version. When the cylinder is difficult to turn, stiff, or the IKC key no longer operates the deadbolt, the ECL-445K is the correct replacement. The ECL-1576-15 is the cam bridge assembly and lock cylinder housing, needed when the housing itself is damaged rather than just the cylinder plug.

Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series Exit Device Parts: Complete Replacement Guide

Security Parts carries parts for all three Falcon exit device series. The 19 Series is narrow stile, light-to-medium duty, rim and SVR only. The 24 Series is narrow stile, heavy duty, for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. The 25 Series is wide stile, heavy duty, for standard hollow metal and wood commercial doors. The 24 and 25 Series share a push pad design and the same service manual (108004). The most frequently replaced parts are the channel, end cap kit, dogging cover plate, and on electrified versions, the EL solenoid or HWEA alarm board. For pre-June 2012 alarm assemblies, the HWEA replacement board is part 650335.

Falcon exit devices are on more commercial egress doors in North America than any other panic hardware brand outside Von Duprin. The 19, 24, and 25 Series cover the full range of commercial applications: from light office and retail doors through aluminum storefront entries to institutional hollow metal fire-rated assemblies. Each series has distinct construction, stile requirements, and electrified option sets. Getting the right replacement part requires knowing which series is installed and which sub-configuration applies.

Browse the complete Falcon exit device parts catalog at SecurityParts.com, which includes the 19, 24, and 25 Series alongside the full Von Duprin and Detex exit device range. The Falcon hardware catalog covers all Falcon product lines including exit devices, mortise locks, and cylindrical locks.

Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certification on all three Falcon series
108004 Shared service manual number for 24 and 25 Series
June 2012 HWEA alarm assembly redesign date affecting board compatibility
24V DC EL solenoid voltage, 0.34A continuous duty on 24 and 25 Series
 

Falcon 19 vs 24 vs 25 Series: Which One Is Installed

Before ordering any replacement part, identifying the series is mandatory. The three series look similar from a distance but are built for completely different door constructions. Ordering a 25 Series end cap for a 24 Series device, for example, produces a part that will not fit.

 

Falcon 19 Series

 

Narrow Stile | Light-to-Medium Duty
 

For interior or exterior single and double doors where traffic is not consistently heavy. Stile as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Covers a 161 door prep for easy field retrofit. Rim (19-R) and surface vertical rod (19-V) configurations only. Non-handed. Optional 1-1/2-hour B label fire rating (F-19). Three finishes: SP28, SP313, US32D. 10-year warranty.

 

Falcon 24 Series

 

Narrow Stile | Heavy Duty | Aluminum Storefronts
 

Heavy-duty extruded aluminum construction for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Rim (24-R), surface vertical rod (24-V), concealed vertical rod (24-C), and wide door cable (24-CWDC) configurations. Half-turn hex dogging standard. All mounting screws concealed. Shares push pad design and service manual 108004 with 25 Series. EL not available on 24 fire rim devices.

 

Falcon 25 Series

 

Wide Stile | Heavy Duty | Hollow Metal and Wood
 

Wide stile heavy-duty device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors. Minimum 4-1/2-inch stile (3-1/2-inch on 25-C concealed VR). Rim (25-R), surface vertical rod (25-V), concealed vertical rod (25-C), wide door cable (25-CWDC), and mortise (25-M) configurations. Half-turn hex dogging standard. Heavy wrought center case with sintered metal parts. 10-year warranty. UL A label (3-hour) on fire-rated versions.

The identification test that takes 30 seconds: Look at the door stile width where the exit device is mounted. If the stile is narrow aluminum (typical of glass-heavy storefront entries), it is a 24 Series. If the stile is a standard hollow metal or wood door stile (4-1/2 inches or wider), it is likely a 25 Series. If it is a lighter interior door without heavy aluminum storefront construction, it may be a 19 Series. Confirm by looking at the channel. The 19 Series channel has a narrower profile and black plastic end caps on standard finishes. The 24 and 25 Series both have flush stainless steel push pads and no exposed screws or rivets on the back of the device.
 

What Exit Device Configurations Mean for Parts Ordering

Each series offers multiple configurations that determine which latch hardware, rods, and strikes are involved. The configuration suffix on the model number tells you what is installed.

 

SuffixConfigurationLatchingApplication
-RRim exit deviceSingle-point, rim latch at device headStandard single doors, paired doors with mullion
-VSurface vertical rodTwo-point: top latch at device head, bottom rod to floorSingle doors, double doors without mullion
-CConcealed vertical rodTwo-point: rods run inside door stileDoors requiring clean exterior face with no exposed hardware
-CWDCWide door cable/concealed, wood doorTwo-point concealed for wood door constructionWide or wood doors requiring concealed rod hardware
-MMortise exit deviceMortise lock case inside door, device operates latchHeavy-duty perimeter doors requiring mortise body strength; 25 Series only
F- prefixFire-rated versionSame as panic version but fire-listedAny fire-rated door assembly; cannot be dogged

 

Why the Rim vs Vertical Rod Distinction Matters for Parts

 

A rim device has one latch point at the device head and uses a single rim strike on the door frame. A surface vertical rod device adds a bottom rod running from the device head to a floor bolt, creating two-point latching. The bottom rod, floor strike, and bottom latch components are additional parts unique to vertical rod configurations that rim devices do not use. If you are ordering a strike or latch bolt replacement, you need to know whether the installation is rim or VR before ordering.

The 25-V surface vertical rod uses a 3788 surface-applied top strike and a 2130 mortised bottom floor strike as the standard configuration. The 25-C concealed VR uses a 4188 mortised top strike and 2130 bottom standard, with 4155 and 2126A as bottom options. Fire-rated 25-C uses strike 1279 standard and F1280 for B label applications.

 

Falcon 19 Series Parts: Channels, End Caps and Key Components

The 19 Series uses a narrower channel profile than the 24 and 25 Series. All mounting screws are concealed; latch fasteners are exposed to the egress side. The push bar height is 1-3/4 inches. The stainless steel latch bolt has a 3/4-inch throw with deadlocking standard.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
410719 Series channel, 3-foot doorStandard channel for doors up to 3 feet
410819 Series channel, 4-foot doorStandard channel for doors up to 4 feet
65034319 Series channel end cap kit (with screws)Includes end cap, bracket, and all mounting hardware
65032019 Series end cap mounting bracket with SNBBracket only, for bracket replacement without full kit
4122Sex bolt, package of 1 (includes machine screw)Mounting fastener; #10-20 thread
650360F-19 channel cover plate, 3-foot (fire)Fire-rated version only, 3-foot door
650361F-19 channel cover plate, 4-foot (fire)Fire-rated version only, 4-foot door
65029719 Series panic hex dogging channel cover, 4-footPanic (non-fire) version, 4-foot door
65030319 Series panic hex dogging channel cover, 3-footPanic (non-fire) version, 3-foot door
 
Pre-June 2012 alarm assemblies on 19 Series: For 19 Series installations with an exit alarm option built before June 2012, the replacement HWEA hard-wired exit alarm circuit board is part 650335. This board is not compatible with post-June 2012 alarm assemblies. The June 2012 redesign changed the alarm kit architecture, and using the 650335 board in a newer assembly will result in a non-functional alarm. Check the date code on the existing board before ordering any alarm board replacement.
 

Falcon 24 Series Parts: Heavy Duty Narrow Stile

The 24 Series is built from extruded aluminum for maximum strength on narrow stile aluminum storefront doors. The construction provides greater impact resistance than the 19 Series at the same stile width. The push pad design is shared with the 25 Series, which is why both reference the same service manual 108004.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
66140824 Series channel, 3-foot doorExtruded aluminum construction
66140924 Series channel, 4-foot doorExtruded aluminum construction
65029424 Series channel end cap kit, 1-3/4-inch doorKit includes end cap, bracket, and all fasteners for standard door thickness
65034824 Series channel end cap kit, 2-1/2-inch doorKit for thicker than standard door applications
65014724/25 Series EL kit, 3-foot deviceElectric latch retraction for 3-foot channel devices
65014824/25 Series EL kit, 4-foot deviceElectric latch retraction for 4-foot channel devices

 

The 24 Series Door Thickness and End Cap Selection

The 24 Series serves aluminum storefront doors that come in two standard thicknesses: 1-3/4 inches (the most common commercial aluminum frame door) and 2-1/2 inches (thicker commercial storefront systems). The end cap kit part number changes based on this dimension. Part 650294 is for the 1-3/4-inch door and part 650348 is for the 2-1/2-inch door. Ordering the wrong kit produces an end cap that either leaves a gap at the stile edge or cannot seat against the door face at the correct depth.

 

The 24 Series EL restriction nobody documents at the part level: Electric latch retraction (EL) is available on 24 Series panic rim, panic SVR, and panic CVR devices. It is specifically not available on 24 Series fire rim (F-24-R) devices. Life safety code prohibits holding the latch retracted on a fire-rated rim device using an always-on EL solenoid. If the installation has a fire label on the door and uses a 24-R configuration, the EL kit (650147 or 650148) does not apply to that opening regardless of what the wiring diagram suggests. This restriction catches facility managers who upgrade access control on fire-door openings without checking the device configuration first.
 

Falcon 25 Series Parts: Wide Stile Heavy Duty

The 25 Series is Falcon's flagship exit device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood door applications. The center case is heavy wrought with sintered metal parts throughout the mechanism, making it more durable than extruded-only construction under heavy cycle loads. The top latchbolt is stainless steel with a 3/4-inch throw and deadlocking standard. Vertical rod configurations add a bottom bolt with a 1/2-inch throw.

 

25 Series Dogging: Half-Turn Hex, No Threads

Half-turn hex dogging is standard on the 25 Series with no threaded dogging components anywhere in the mechanism. Traditional threaded dogging on older exit devices requires turning a threaded rod several rotations, and the threads strip or corrode over time on high-cycle doors. The Falcon 25 Series half-turn hex design eliminates all threaded components from the dogging path. One half turn clockwise dogs the device. One half turn counterclockwise releases it. No stripping. No galling. This is why the 25 Series dogging mechanism outlasts competitor devices significantly on doors dogged and released multiple times daily.

Cylinder dogging is available as an option on the 25 Series using a 1-1/8-inch mortise cylinder with standard cam. This allows the outside cylinder to dog and release the device without carrying the hex key, which is the preferred configuration for reception desks and service counters where maintenance staff routinely dog the door at opening time.

 

25 Series Configurations and Stile Requirements

Stile requirements vary by 25 Series configuration. Standard 25-R and 25-V configurations require a 4-1/2-inch minimum stile. The 25-C concealed vertical rod configuration requires a 3-1/2-inch minimum stile on panic versions and 4-1/2-inch minimum on fire-rated F-25-C installations. The 25-CWDC (wood door wide cable configuration) requires a 6-1/2-inch minimum stile on wood doors. Ordering a 25-V or 25-C for a door with an undersized stile produces a device that cannot be correctly mounted.

 

25 Series ConfigurationMinimum StileDoor TypeFire Rating
25-R (rim)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional B label (F-25-R)
25-V (surface VR)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional B label (F-25-V); A label available on fire pair
25-C (concealed VR, metal door)3-1/2 inch (panic); 4-1/2 inch (fire)Metal doorsOptional B label and A label on fire pair (F-25-C)
25-CWDC (concealed VR, wood door)6-1/2 inchWood doorsOptional B label (F-25-CWDC)
25-M (mortise)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional fire rating

 

25 Series Fire Ratings: A Label vs B Label

The Falcon 25 Series supports two UL fire ratings depending on the configuration. The B label (1-1/2 hour) is available on all 25 Series configurations. The A label (3-hour) is available on fire pairs (F-25-M x F-25-V or F-25-C), permitting up to 4-foot by 10-foot single doors and 8-foot by 10-foot pairs. When ordering strike replacements for fire-rated 25 Series installations, the fire strike specification matters. The F-25-C uses strike 1279 as standard and F1280 for B label applications. The F-25-V uses strike 299F for fire-rated top and 499F for fire-rated pairs with mullion.

 

Hex Dogging: How It Works and What Fails

Dogging is the function that holds the push bar depressed and the latch retracted, allowing the door to operate as a free-swinging door without requiring the push bar to be pressed on every pass. It is standard on the 24 and 25 Series panic versions and on the 19 Series panic version. It is never available on any fire-rated version of any series because holding a fire door latch retracted violates life safety code.

Hex dogging uses a hex key (Allen wrench) inserted into the dogging hole in the channel. On the Falcon 24 and 25 Series, the half-turn mechanism requires only a 180-degree rotation. The dogging cover plate conceals the dogging hole when not in use. This cover plate is a separately replaceable component if it is damaged or missing.

 

The dogging failure most technicians misdiagnose: A push bar that will not stay depressed after dogging is almost never a failed dogging mechanism. In more than 90% of field cases, the push bar returns to the undogged position because someone forgot the half-turn direction or did not complete the full half turn. Insert the hex key, depress the push bar fully, then turn the key clockwise exactly one half turn. If the key turns but the bar still does not stay depressed, check whether the installation is a fire-rated device (F-19, F-24, F-25). Fire-rated devices cannot be dogged and the mechanism is physically blocked. A fire-rated device on a non-fire-rated door is a common incorrect installation that generates repeated dogging complaints.
 

Electrified Options on the Falcon 24 and 25 Series

The Falcon 24 and 25 Series support a full range of electrified options for access control integration. Understanding the compatibility rules between these options prevents ordering combinations that cannot be installed together.

 

EL: Electric Latch Retraction

The EL option retracts the latch electrically without depressing the push bar, allowing the door to be opened from the outside by a credential reader, keypad, or building automation system. The EL solenoid operates at 24V DC and 0.34 amperes continuous duty. For 3-foot devices, the EL kit is part 650147. For 4-foot devices, it is part 650148. EL can be combined with FSA/FSE (fail safe/fail secure outside trim), DM (device monitoring), LM (latch monitoring), and AE/LK options. EL cannot be combined with ED (electric dogging), EA (exit alarm), HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm), or KOR (key override) on the same device.

Electric latch retraction serves two common use cases in commercial buildings. The first is controlled entry: a credential reader on the exterior side triggers the EL solenoid to retract the latch, allowing entry without pushing the panic bar. The second is electronic dogging during business hours: the building automation system energizes the EL solenoid for extended periods to hold the latch retracted as an alternative to mechanical hex dogging. This allows the door to operate in free-swing mode during hours and automatically re-latch when the solenoid is de-energized after hours.

 

EA and HWEA: Exit Alarm Options

The EA (exit alarm) option adds an audible alarm triggered when the push bar is pressed, providing delay notification or unauthorized egress alerting. The HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm) version connects to a building's wired fire alarm or security system.

The alarm circuit board replacement for pre-June 2012 HWEA assemblies is part 650335. This date boundary is critical: the alarm assembly design changed in June 2012. The 650335 board works only on pre-June 2012 assemblies. Post-June 2012 assemblies use a different alarm kit. Confirming the manufacturing date before ordering any alarm board replacement prevents a non-functional alarm installation.

 

KOR, LM, DM, RX: Monitoring and Override Options

KOR (key override) provides a cylinder that overrides the electrified outside trim functions without requiring electronic credentials. It is used when power failures need a mechanical fallback for authorized entry. LM (latch monitoring switch) monitors the latch bolt position and reports door open/closed status to the access control system. DM (device monitoring switch) monitors whether the push bar has been pressed. These two cannot be used on the same device because their switch mechanisms conflict. RX (request to exit switch) connects to an egress-side reader or motion sensor to signal the access control system that someone is approaching from the inside before the door opens.

 

The EL/EA combination that cannot be ordered: EL (electric latch retraction) and EA (exit alarm) are mutually exclusive on any Falcon 24 or 25 Series device. An EL device retracts the latch without the push bar being pressed, which would constantly trigger an EA alarm on any credential-controlled entry event. This combination is listed in the service manual as incompatible. It is also physically incompatible because both functions require access to the latch mechanism simultaneously in ways that conflict. Any specification that calls for both EL and EA on the same device requires a redesign before ordering.
 

How to Identify the Correct Part Before Ordering

Three pieces of information are needed before any Falcon exit device parts order.

1. Series (19, 24, or 25): Determined by the door construction and stile width as described above. The series number is typically visible on a label on the device channel or center case.

2. Configuration (R, V, C, CWDC, M): Visible from the door face. A rim device has a single latch point and no visible rod hardware on the door. A surface VR device has a visible bottom rod running down the door face to a floor strike. A concealed VR device has no visible rod hardware but two latch points (the concealed rods are inside the door stile).

3. Panic or fire-rated (prefix F-): Look for a fire label on the door or door frame. If a fire label is present, the device should be a fire-rated version. If ordering a replacement device, always match the fire rating of the original. If ordering a dogging cover plate, panic devices have a dogging hole; fire-rated devices do not.

Browse the exit device parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series components with interactive diagrams. The Falcon hardware catalog covers exit devices alongside Falcon MA Series mortise locks and T Series cylindrical locks. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Falcon vs Von Duprin: Choosing Between the Two Exit Device Brands

Both Falcon and Von Duprin are Allegion brands. They share company ownership but serve different market positions and use different part ecosystems. Parts are not interchangeable between the two brands.

Von Duprin is the older and more widely installed brand in institutional, healthcare, and high-security government applications. The Von Duprin 98/99 Series is the dominant exit device in North American institutional buildings constructed before 2000. Von Duprin has a larger installed base and a wider parts aftermarket. Browse the complete Von Duprin parts catalog for 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 55, 75, 78, 88, and 94/95 Series devices.

Falcon is more common in mid-market commercial, retail, multi-family, and newer construction where the architectural aesthetic of the flush push pad and concealed fasteners is valued alongside ANSI Grade 1 performance at a competitive price. The 24 and 25 Series were specifically designed for the streamlined appearance requirements of modern commercial construction.

On any given building, both brands may be present: Von Duprin on older egress stairwell doors that have not been replaced, Falcon on newer tenant improvement entries and interior egress paths. SecurityParts.com stocks both, so a single order can service the complete building hardware schedule.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Falcon Exit Device Parts

Series identification guidance, dogging mechanics, EL compatibility documentation, HWEA date boundary, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Series Identification

We document the 30-second stile width identification test that determines whether a door has a 19, 24, or 25 Series device. Wrong series orders are the most common return on exit device service calls.

 

EL Compatibility Rules

We document that EL is unavailable on 24 Series fire rim devices and that EL and EA cannot be combined on any device. These restrictions prevent specification errors before the order is placed.

 

HWEA Date Boundary

We document the June 2012 alarm board redesign and that part 650335 applies only to pre-June 2012 assemblies. Using the wrong board generation installs a non-functional alarm.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Falcon Exit Device Parts

  • We document the 24 Series EL restriction on fire rim devices (F-24-R) at the part level. Facility managers upgrading access control on fire-door openings routinely order EL kits for fire rim devices without knowing the restriction. We prevent this before the order ships.
  • We document the EL/EA mutual exclusivity. Any specification combining both on one device requires a redesign. This is in the service manual but no parts supplier makes it accessible at the ordering stage.
  • We document the HWEA 650335 board date boundary with the June 2012 cutoff. This is the most common wrong-board order on alarm-equipped Falcon exit devices.
  • We document the half-turn hex dogging failure misdiagnosis: a push bar that returns after dogging is almost always incomplete dogging technique, not a mechanism failure. This prevents unnecessary mechanism replacements on dogging complaints.
  • We carry Falcon exit device parts alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, electric strike parts, LCN door closer parts, and exit alarm parts. One order services the complete egress door hardware package.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

A complete commercial egress door hardware package includes the exit device, door closer, and often an electric strike or exit alarm. SecurityParts.com stocks all of these for the same opening in one order.

For Von Duprin exit device parts on egress doors in the same building where Von Duprin is installed alongside Falcon hardware, browse the Von Duprin catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on the door frame of any exit device installation with controlled entry, browse the electric strikes catalog. The Von Duprin 6300 electric strike is compatible with Falcon 24 and 25 Series rim devices. For commercial exit alarm parts including Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex ECL and EAX series, browse the exit alarms catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any fire-rated or controlled-closing egress door in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on secured interior doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Falcon, Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series Exit Device Parts

 

What is the difference between the Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series exit devices?

The 19 Series is narrow stile, light-to-medium duty, rim and SVR only, for doors where traffic is not consistently heavy. The 24 Series is narrow stile, heavy duty, extruded aluminum for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. The 25 Series is wide stile, heavy duty, for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors with minimum 4-1/2-inch stiles. The 24 and 25 Series share the same push pad design and service manual 108004.

 

What is dogging on an exit device and how does hex dogging work?

Dogging holds the push bar depressed and the latch retracted so the door operates as free-swinging without pressing the bar on every pass. Hex dogging uses a hex key inserted into the dogging hole to lock the push bar down. On the Falcon 24 and 25 Series, half-turn hex dogging requires one half-turn clockwise to dog and one half-turn counterclockwise to release. No threaded components are involved, eliminating thread stripping on high-cycle doors. Fire-rated devices cannot be dogged.

 

What are the part numbers for the Falcon 19 Series channel and end cap?

Channel for 3-foot door is part 4107. Channel for 4-foot door is part 4108. Channel end cap kit with screws is part 650343. End cap mounting bracket is part 650320. Sex bolt mounting fastener is part 4122. Fire-rated channel cover plates are 650360 (3-foot) and 650361 (4-foot). Panic dogging channel cover is 650297 (4-foot) and 650303 (3-foot).

 

What are the part numbers for the Falcon 24 Series channel and end cap?

Channel for 3-foot door is part 661408. Channel for 4-foot door is part 661409. End cap kit for 1-3/4-inch door is part 650294. End cap kit for 2-1/2-inch door is part 650348. EL kit for 3-foot devices is part 650147. EL kit for 4-foot devices is part 650148. The EL solenoid is rated 24V DC at 0.34 amperes continuous duty.

 

What is the Falcon HWEA circuit board part number and when does it apply?

The HWEA replacement circuit board is part 650335. It applies only to alarm assemblies built before June 2012. The alarm kit was redesigned in June 2012 and the 650335 board is not compatible with post-June 2012 assemblies. Always check the date code on the existing alarm assembly before ordering any board replacement. Installing the wrong board generation results in a non-functional alarm.

 

What electrified options are available on the Falcon 24 and 25 Series?

Available options include EL (electric latch retraction, 24V DC 0.34A solenoid), EA (exit alarm), HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm), KOR (key override), LM (latch monitoring), DM (device monitoring), RX (request to exit), and FSA/FSE (fail safe/fail secure trim). EL cannot be combined with EA, HWEA, or KOR. DM and LM cannot be used together. EL is not available on 24 Series fire rim devices (F-24-R).

Schlage Tubular Lock Parts: THP Latch, Privacy Rose and LT Series Complete Guide

Security Parts stocks Schlage tubular lock parts including the THP-8201 and THP-8301 passage spring latch assemblies, the THP-8219 and THP-8319 privacy latch assemblies, and the B and C design privacy roses. The THP part number encodes the backset: 82xx = 2-3/8 inch backset for 1-3/8 inch doors, 83xx = 2-3/4 inch backset for doors over 1-3/4 inch. Fire-rated versions carry the F suffix. Always confirm door thickness before ordering any THP latch assembly. The LT Series was discontinued in October 2025 and replaced by the PT Series, but THP latch and rose parts remain available for existing LT Series installations.

Tubular locks are on more interior doors in commercial buildings than any other lock type. Restrooms, private offices, utility closets, conference rooms, storage alcoves. They do not require keyed access in most of these applications. They do require reliable passage or privacy function, a latch that retracts cleanly under normal lever force, and on privacy doors, a restoring feature that prevents accidental lockouts after hours.

When a Schlage tubular lock latch fails or a privacy rose needs replacement, the THP part number system tells you exactly which component applies to which door thickness. Most wrong-part orders on tubular lock service calls come from a single error: ordering the 2-3/4 inch backset latch for a door that takes the 2-3/8 inch backset, or the reverse. This guide covers every part in the Schlage tubular lock catalog at SecurityParts.com, the functions, the fire-rated options, and the diagnostic steps that identify the correct part before you order. Browse the complete tubular lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

Grade 2 ANSI/BHMA certification on the Schlage LT Series tubular lock
20 min Optional UL fire rating on the LT Series with fire-rated THP latch
1/2" Latchbolt throw on PT Series tubular latches
Oct 2025 Date Schlage LT Series discontinued, replaced by PT Series
 

What a Tubular Lock Is and Where It Belongs

A tubular lock uses a single bore through the door face for the entire lock chassis, with the latch assembly passing through a separate edge bore. The lock body threads directly through the door face bore. Both the inside and outside trim attach to the latch body rather than to a separate chassis housing.

This construction is lighter and less expensive than a cylindrical lock. The tradeoff is that tubular locks support fewer functions, accept fewer cylinder options, and do not achieve the same security ratings as cylindrical locks on keyed applications. In practice this is not a limitation for most tubular lock applications because the doors they serve do not require keyed locking at all.

The typical tubular lock application in a commercial building is a non-keyed interior door: a restroom, a private office where the occupant controls access by the inside privacy button, a conference room passage function, or a utility closet where entry control is not required. For any door that requires a keyed entrance function, a storeroom function, or a classroom lockdown function, browse the cylindrical lock parts catalog for the Schlage ND Series, ALX Series, or Falcon T Series instead.

 

The suiting advantage nobody documents clearly: The Schlage LT Series tubular lock was built on the foundational technology of the Schlage L Series mortise lock. All LT Series levers are solid brass or stainless steel and use the same lever designs, finishes, and rose sizes as the L Series mortise lock and Von Duprin exit devices. This means a building specified with L Series mortise locks on entry doors and Von Duprin exit devices on egress doors can use LT Series tubular locks on interior doors and maintain a perfectly consistent lever appearance throughout. The PT Series successor now suites with PM Series mortise locks using the same levers and roses. This suiting capability is the design reason behind the LT and PT Series product lines, and it is the most valuable single specification fact for architects and facility managers who care about visual consistency across a mixed hardware schedule.
 

Tubular Lock vs Cylindrical Lock: Choosing the Right Hardware

 

FactorTubular Lock (LT/PT Series)Cylindrical Lock (ND/ALX/T Series)
Functions availablePassage, privacy, closet, storeroom (non-keyed)24+ functions including keyed entrance, classroom, storeroom
Security levelGrade 2, not for keyed security applicationsGrade 1 or 2, full security function range
Fire rating20-minute UL rating with fire-rated THP latch (LT Series)3-hour UL fire rating on Grade 1 cylindrical locks
Cylinder optionsLimited; not suitable for IC/SFIC key systemsConventional, FSIC, SFIC, full key system support
Lever suitingSuites with L Series mortise and Von Duprin exit devices (LT); suites with PM Series (PT)Suites within ND/ALX family
Door bore requiredSingle 2-1/8 inch face bore2-1/8 inch face bore plus separate edge bore
Best applicationInterior non-keyed passage and privacy doorsAny door requiring keyed access, Grade 1 security, or full function range

 

LT Series Functions: What Was Available

The Schlage LT Series offered four functions. Understanding which function is installed is the first requirement before ordering any replacement latch or trim component.

 

LT10: Passage

 

Non-keyed | Both levers always free
 

Both inside and outside levers always retract the latch. No locking function of any kind. Used on corridor doors, conference room entries, and any interior opening where free passage is always required. THP-8301 (2-3/4 inch) or THP-8201 (2-3/8 inch) passage latch.

 

LT40: Privacy

 

Non-keyed | Push button inside, restoring feature
 

Inside lever always retracts latch. Outside lever free unless locked by push button from inside rose. Turning inside lever, inserting emergency key in outside rose, or closing the door (restoring feature) unlocks outside lever. Used on restrooms, private offices, healthcare patient rooms. THP-8319 or THP-8219 privacy latch.

 

LT10F: Passage, Fire Rated

 

Non-keyed | 20-minute UL fire rating
 

Same operation as LT10 passage. Uses THP-8301-F fire-rated latch assembly. Required on 20-minute fire-rated door assemblies on corridor separation walls. The fire-rated latch maintains positive latching under fire conditions for the rated period.

 

LT40F: Privacy, Fire Rated

 

Non-keyed | Privacy + 20-minute UL fire rating
 

Privacy function identical to LT40 with fire-rated THP-8319-F or THP-8219-F latch assembly. Used on restrooms and private offices on 20-minute fire-rated corridor walls in occupancies with fire separation requirements on interior partitions.

 

LT Series discontinued October 2025: Schlage discontinued the LT Series in October 2025, replaced by the PT Series. If you are maintaining an existing LT Series installation, THP latch assemblies and privacy roses remain available for ongoing service. If specifying new installations, the PT Series is the current Schlage tubular lock offering. SecurityParts.com stocks THP parts for existing LT Series service needs.
 

The THP Part Number System: How to Read It

Every Schlage LT Series latch assembly has a THP part number that encodes the function type and backset in its digits. Understanding this system eliminates the most common wrong-part order on tubular lock service calls.

 

Part NumberFunctionBacksetFaceplateDoor ThicknessFire Rated
THP-8201-CHPassage (spring latch)2-3/8 inch1" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for 1-3/8" doorsNo
THP-8201-CH-FPassage (spring latch)2-3/8 inch1" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for 1-3/8" doorsYes, UL 3hr
THP-8301-CHPassage (spring latch)2-3/4 inch1-1/8" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for >1-3/4" doorsNo
THP-8301-CH-FPassage (spring latch)2-3/4 inch1-1/8" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for >1-3/4" doorsYes, UL 3hr
THP-8219-CHPrivacy latch2-3/8 inch1" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for 1-3/8" doorsNo
THP-8219-CH-FPrivacy latch2-3/8 inch1" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for 1-3/8" doorsYes, UL 3hr
THP-8319-CHPrivacy latch2-3/4 inch1-1/8" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for >1-3/4" doorsNo
THP-8319-CH-FPrivacy latch2-3/4 inch1-1/8" x 2-1/4" squareTypical for >1-3/4" doorsYes, UL 3hr
 
The backset identification rule: The second digit pair in the THP number tells you the backset. 82xx = 2-3/8 inch backset (short). 83xx = 2-3/4 inch backset (long). The third digit pair tells you the latch type. xx01 = passage spring latch. xx19 = privacy latch. So THP-8219 = 2-3/8 inch privacy latch for thin doors. THP-8319 = 2-3/4 inch privacy latch for standard commercial doors. This four-minute rule eliminates the most common THP wrong-part order.

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage LT Series

 

Spring Latch Assembly (THP-8201 and THP-8301)

The spring latch is the beveled bolt that automatically extends when the door closes and retracts when the inside or outside lever is turned. On the LT Series passage function, both inside and outside levers always retract the latch freely with no locking mechanism involved.

Spring latch failure presents as a latch that does not retract when the lever is turned, a latch that does not spring back to the extended position after retraction, or a latch that binds in the faceplate and requires excessive lever force to retract. A latch that binds in the faceplate is often a door alignment problem rather than a latch failure: the door has settled and the latch tip is contacting the strike plate edge rather than the bolt pocket. Check strike alignment before replacing a latch that binds on closing.

Each THP spring latch assembly includes the latch body, faceplate, and mounting screws in the package. No additional hardware is required for a direct replacement on a door with matching backset.

 

Privacy Latch Assembly (THP-8219 and THP-8319)

The privacy latch assembly is more complex than the spring latch. In addition to the spring latch body, it includes the internal locking pin mechanism that engages when the push button on the inside rose is pressed, locking the outside lever. It also includes the restoring mechanism that releases the outside lever when the door closes.

Privacy latch failure presents as a latch that does not lock the outside lever when the push button is pressed, a push button that sticks in the locked or unlocked position, or a latch that does not restore to unlocked on door closing. The restoring mechanism is a cam component inside the latch body that detects door closing through the latch tip contact with the strike. If the door has a strike plate that is positioned so the latch tip does not fully contact the strike face on closing, the restoring function may not activate reliably. Verify strike plate position before diagnosing internal restoring mechanism failure.

 

Privacy Rose: B Design (Part 09-486) and C Design (Part 09-459)

The privacy rose is the cover plate on the inside face of the LT40 privacy door that contains the push button for locking the outside lever and the emergency access hole for unlocking from outside with a pin or coin. SecurityParts.com stocks two privacy rose designs for the LT Series:

Part 09-459 (C design privacy rose): The C design rose uses a rounder, more contemporary profile. Available in multiple finishes to match existing LT Series hardware.

 

Part 09-486 (B design privacy rose): The B design rose uses a slightly different profile. Finish-specific ordering required.

Privacy roses are finish-specific. Always confirm the finish code before ordering a replacement rose. The most common finish codes for LT Series hardware are 626 (satin chrome), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), and 625 (bright chrome). Installing a rose in the wrong finish leaves a visible mismatch on the interior door face that requires a second return and reorder.

 

The emergency access function nobody fully explains: Every Schlage LT40 privacy rose has a small hole on the outside face, typically near the center or at the bottom depending on the rose design. This hole accepts a thin emergency access pin or a straightened paper clip. Pressing the pin through the hole releases the privacy button mechanism and unlocks the outside lever without any key. This is the standard emergency release for any room where someone has become incapacitated, where a child is locked inside, or where a maintenance operation requires access to a locked room without the occupant being present. The emergency pin is not a security bypass. Anyone standing outside the door can use it. Privacy locks are privacy devices, not security locks. Any door requiring actual keyed security needs a cylindrical lock, not a tubular privacy function.
 

Strike Plate

The LT Series uses a T-strike (T-shaped strike plate) as the default, not the ANSI curved lip strike used on cylindrical locks and deadbolts. The T-strike covers the latchbolt pocket in the door frame with a lip configuration that guides the spring latch tip into the pocket on every door close.

Strike options for the LT Series include the T-strike square corner (10-001 series, specify lip length from 1 inch to 2 inches), T-strike round corner (10-004, 1/4 inch radius, 1-1/8 inch lip length), and ANSI strike (10-025 series, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch, specify lip length). The T-strike is typically used when the door frame has a standard tubular lock prep. The ANSI strike is used when the door frame prep matches the ANSI standard for cylindrical locks and the installer wants to use the same frame prep for both the tubular lock and any adjacent hardware.

 

Levers and Solid Brass Construction

The LT Series levers are manufactured from solid brass or solid stainless steel, not pressure cast zinc. This is the construction distinction that separates the LT Series from most competitor tubular locks and from the Schlage S Series and other economy tubular lines. Solid brass levers have a heavier feel, longer wear life, and a more premium finish durability than cast zinc levers.

The LT Series levers move both up and down for a bidirectional operational experience that matches the Schlage L Series mortise lock levers and Von Duprin exit devices. Inside and outside levers operate independently, allowing the inside lever to spring back without affecting the outside lever position. This independent operation creates a quieter, less institutional operational character compared to coupled-lever designs where both levers move together.

 

Fire-Rated Tubular Locks: When Are They Required

Fire-rated tubular locks are required when the door is part of a UL-listed fire-rated assembly. In commercial buildings, the most common application for fire-rated tubular locks is on restroom doors, private office doors, and utility closet doors in corridors or exit passageways that have a fire separation requirement.

Interior partition walls between office tenant spaces and building corridors often require a fire resistance rating. The doors in these walls must use hardware that is listed for the fire rating of the wall assembly. A 20-minute fire-rated door assembly is the most common rating level in interior partition applications. The Schlage LT Series with THP-F fire-rated latch achieves this 20-minute UL rating.

 

The fire-rated latch substitution that invalidates the fire assembly: Installing a non-fire-rated THP latch (no F suffix) on a door that is part of a fire-rated assembly voids the UL listing of that assembly. The fire door is technically unlisted from the moment the non-fire-rated latch is installed. This is a common maintenance error when the replacement part is ordered by description (spring latch, 2-3/4 inch backset) rather than by the complete part number including the F suffix. Always check for a fire label on the door before ordering any replacement latch. If the door has a fire label, order the F-suffix version of the THP latch.
 

Schlage PT Series: The Current Replacement for LT Series

The Schlage PT Series became the replacement for the discontinued LT Series after October 2025. For facility managers maintaining mixed-generation buildings, understanding the differences matters for ongoing parts planning.

 

PT Series vs LT Series: Key Differences

The PT Series is purpose-built for four functions (passage, privacy, passage fire-rated, privacy fire-rated) with 10 lever styles and 6 finishes. The LT Series offered 31 lever designs and 14 finishes, which is why the LT Series was specified on premium projects requiring extensive design flexibility. The PT Series reduces the choice set in exchange for a more cost-competitive price point.

The PT Series uses a stainless steel latchbolt with a 1/2 inch throw. The snap-on wrought brass rose eliminates exposed rose screws for a cleaner finished appearance on the door face. The PT Series suites with the PM Series mortise locks using shared levers and rose designs, following the same suiting strategy as the LT and L Series relationship.

For new installations on premium projects requiring extensive lever design selection and L Series suiting, the LT Series parts available at SecurityParts.com support existing installations. For new installations where the PT Series sufficient design selection meets the specification, the PT Series is the current Schlage offering.

 

Parts Availability for Existing LT Series Installations

SecurityParts.com stocks THP latch assemblies and privacy roses for existing LT Series installations. A building specified with LT Series hardware in 2018 or 2022 will need THP latches and privacy roses for the next 15 to 20 years of normal service. The discontinuation of the LT Series as a new product does not affect the availability of replacement parts for installed units. Browse the tubular lock parts catalog for current stocking status on all THP assemblies.

 

How to Identify the Correct THP Part Before Ordering

Two measurements and one visual check are all that is needed before any THP parts order.

1. Measure the backset. The backset is the distance from the center of the door bore to the edge of the door face. On a standard commercial hollow metal or solid core wood door, measure from the center of the door handle hole to the door edge. If this dimension is approximately 2-3/8 inches, order THP-82xx. If approximately 2-3/4 inches, order THP-83xx. Do not guess. A THP latch with the wrong backset will not reach the strike properly and the door will not latch correctly.

 

2. Identify the function (passage or privacy). Does the current installation have a push button on the inside rose? If yes, it is a privacy function. Order THP-8219 or THP-8319. If the inside and outside levers both always retract the latch freely with no button, it is a passage function. Order THP-8201 or THP-8301.

 

3. Check the door for a fire label. Look at the top or hinge edge of the door for a UL fire label. If present, order the F-suffix version of the correct THP latch. If no label is visible, the standard non-F version is appropriate.

 

Browse the Schlage tubular lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com with part numbers and diagrams for every THP assembly. For the complete Schlage hardware range including LT Series tubular locks, ND Series cylindrical locks, L Series mortise locks, and CS210 interconnected locks, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

What Fails First on Schlage Tubular Locks

1. Spring latch assembly. Latch spring fatigue is the primary failure mode on high-cycle doors. The latch bolt does not return to the extended position after retraction, which means the door does not latch on closing. A door that requires a push to close and latch is always a spring latch issue. Replace the full THP assembly, not just the spring.

2. Privacy push button mechanism. On LT40 privacy doors, the push button or the internal locking pin can wear or bind after years of use. The symptom is a push button that requires excessive force to depress, does not stay in the locked position, or pops out immediately without locking the outside lever. The privacy latch assembly (THP-8219 or THP-8319) replaces the complete mechanism.

3. Restoring mechanism failure. The restoring feature that unlocks the outside lever on door closing can fail to actuate if the latch tip does not fully contact the strike plate on closing (strike misalignment) or if the internal restoring cam wears. Always check strike alignment before assuming the restoring cam has failed. Adjusting the strike position often restores this function without any parts replacement.

4. Rose assembly. The inside privacy rose sustains the most cosmetic wear of any component because it receives direct hand contact on every entry and exit. Finish wear and physical cracking from abuse require rose replacement. Always confirm the design (B or C) and finish code before ordering.

5. Lever assembly. The solid brass levers on the LT Series are more durable than cast zinc alternatives, but they can still bend or crack under deliberate physical abuse. Lever replacement requires confirming the specific lever design from the 31 LT Series options and the finish code.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage Tubular Lock Parts

THP part number guidance, backset identification, fire-rated latch documentation, and same-day shipping on stocked components.

 

THP Part Number Guidance

We document the backset-to-part-number relationship so you order THP-8219 vs THP-8319 correctly the first time. The most common tubular lock wrong-part order is a wrong-backset latch.

 

Fire-Rated Latch Documentation

We document when the F-suffix fire-rated latch is required. Installing a non-fire-rated latch on a fire-labeled door voids the UL assembly listing. We flag this before the order ships.

 

LT Series Service Support

LT Series discontinued October 2025 but THP parts available for existing installations. We stock these for the ongoing service life of LT Series hardware already in service.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most THP latch and rose parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for backset or fire-rating confirmation.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Tubular Lock Parts

  • We document the THP digit-to-backset decoding rule (82xx = 2-3/8 inch, 83xx = 2-3/4 inch) that eliminates the most common wrong-part order. No other supplier explains this in buyer-facing content.
  • We document the privacy restoring feature failure diagnostic: check strike alignment before assuming the restoring cam has failed. Most restoring failures are strike position problems, not internal mechanism failures.
  • We explain that the emergency access pin function on the privacy rose is a privacy release, not a security bypass, and that any door requiring actual keyed security needs a cylindrical lock. This prevents the misspecification of privacy tubular locks on security-critical doors.
  • We document the LT Series suiting with L Series mortise locks and Von Duprin exit devices. The PT Series suiting with PM Series is also documented. Specifiers who do not know this miss the primary reason these series exist.
  • We carry tubular lock parts alongside cylindrical lock parts, mortise lock parts, interconnected lock parts, and door closer parts. One order covers the full building hardware service call.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping on stocked parts from US warehouses.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Tubular locks are typically part of a complete interior door hardware package. The same building that uses LT or PT Series tubular locks on restroom and corridor doors also uses cylindrical locks on offices, mortise locks on entries, and door closers on fire-rated corridor doors.

For Schlage ND Series, ALX Series, and Falcon T Series cylindrical lock parts on keyed office doors and storerooms in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on main entry doors and secured offices, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Schlage CS210 interconnected lock parts on dwelling unit entry doors requiring single-motion egress, browse the interconnected locks catalog. For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on secondary doors, browse the deadbolts catalog. For LCN door closer parts on fire-rated corridor doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on building egress doors, browse the commercial exit devices catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage Tubular Lock Parts

 

What is the difference between a Schlage THP-8201 and THP-8301 spring latch?

Both are passage spring latch assemblies for the Schlage LT Series. The THP-8201 has a 2-3/8 inch backset and 1 inch by 2-1/4 inch faceplate for 1-3/8 inch thick doors. The THP-8301 has a 2-3/4 inch backset and 1-1/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch faceplate for doors thicker than 1-3/4 inches. Always measure the backset from the center of the door bore to the door edge before ordering.

 

What is the difference between the THP-8219 and THP-8319 privacy latch?

Both are privacy latch assemblies with a push-button locking mechanism and restoring feature. The THP-8219 has a 2-3/8 inch backset for 1-3/8 inch doors. The THP-8319 has a 2-3/4 inch backset for doors thicker than 1-3/4 inches. Privacy latches include a restoring feature that automatically unlocks the outside lever when the door closes, preventing accidental lockouts.

 

What is the fire-rated version of the Schlage THP latch and when is it required?

Fire-rated THP latches carry an F suffix in the part number (THP-8201-CH-F, THP-8301-CH-F, THP-8219-CH-F, THP-8319-CH-F). They are required on any door with a UL fire label. The LT Series with fire-rated THP latch achieves a 20-minute UL fire door rating. Installing a non-fire-rated latch on a fire-labeled door voids the UL assembly listing. Always check the door for a fire label before ordering any replacement latch.

 

What is the privacy restoring feature on the Schlage LT40 and why does it matter?

The restoring feature automatically unlocks the outside lever when the door closes after being locked with the inside push button. This prevents accidental lockouts where a door is locked from inside with no one available to unlock it from outside. The restoring function activates through the latch tip contacting the strike plate on door closing. If the restoring feature fails to activate, check strike alignment before assuming the internal mechanism has failed.

 

What is the difference between a tubular lock and a cylindrical lock?

A tubular lock uses a single bore through the door and is lighter duty, supporting passage and privacy functions without keyed locking. A cylindrical lock uses a separate chassis bore and edge bore, supports 24-plus functions including keyed entrance, storeroom, and classroom locks, achieves higher UL fire ratings, and accepts FSIC and SFIC interchangeable core cylinders. Use tubular on interior non-keyed doors. Use cylindrical on any door requiring a keyed function or Grade 1 security.

 

What Schlage tubular lock series replaced the LT Series after October 2025?

The PT Series replaced the LT Series in October 2025. The PT Series offers 4 functions, 10 lever styles in 6 finishes, stainless steel latchbolt with 1/2 inch throw, snap-on wrought brass rose without exposed screws, and suiting with PM Series mortise locks. For existing LT Series installations, THP latch and rose parts remain available at SecurityParts.com for ongoing maintenance and service needs.

Schlage CS210 Interconnected Lock Parts: CS200 Series Complete Guide

The Schlage CS210 is the CS200 Series Grade 2 interconnected lock. It combines a cylindrical latch and deadbolt in one assembly so turning the inside lever retracts both simultaneously in one motion, meeting IBC and NFPA 101 single-motion egress requirements. The main replacement parts are the lever kit (06-242), rose (08-029), inside escutcheon (Camelot or Plymouth), outside housing (B500 commercial or B60 residential), strikes, and the interconnect assembly. The crimp-to-snap rose transition in August 2015 is the most important fact for parts ordering: pre-2015 units with crimp-on roses require the outside chassis assembly (F206-496) when changing levers or roses.

Interconnected locks are on more apartment building, hotel, dormitory, and assisted living entry doors than any other lock type in the multifamily residential sector. They are specified because they solve a specific problem that no other single hardware component solves: providing both a spring latch for automatic latching and a deadbolt for security, while allowing a single inside lever motion to retract both simultaneously for code-compliant egress.

The Schlage CS210 is the most widely installed commercial interconnected lock in North America. It carries ANSI/BHMA Grade 2 certification, UL 3-hour fire door listing, and a lifetime limited mechanical warranty. When one fails or requires a lever change, rose replacement, or escutcheon update, the rose generation transition in 2015 creates a parts compatibility issue that catches most technicians off guard. This guide covers every component, that transition, the code context, and exactly how to order. Browse the complete interconnected lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for CS210 diagrams and components.

Grade 2 ANSI/BHMA A156.12 certification on the Schlage CS210
UL 3hr Fire door listing on the CS210 with conventional cylinder
18 Lever designs available on the CS200 Series
Aug 2015 Crimp-on to snap-on rose transition date on the CS210
 

What an Interconnected Lock Is and Why It Exists

An interconnected lock is a single hardware assembly that combines two separate locking mechanisms, a spring latch and a deadbolt, with a mechanical interconnection that allows both to retract simultaneously when the inside lever is turned. From the outside, the lock operates as a standard keyed deadbolt entry. From the inside, turning the lever once retracts both the deadbolt and the latch in a single motion, allowing free exit without any separate deadbolt thumb turn operation.

This single-motion egress capability is the entire reason the category exists. IBC Section 1010.1.9 and NFPA 101 both require that doors in a means of egress unlatch with no more than one releasing motion. For most commercial occupancies, installing a separate cylindrical latch and a separate deadbolt creates a two-motion exit requirement that violates this code, because the occupant must turn the deadbolt thumb turn and then turn the lever separately to exit.

The interconnected lock solves this by making the inside lever turn the only operation needed for exit. The deadbolt and latch both retract together. The door opens. One motion. Code compliant.

 

The code nuance nobody explains fully: For residential Group R dwelling units (apartments, hotel rooms, dormitory rooms) with an occupant load of 10 or less, both IBC and NFPA 101 allow a separate deadbolt in addition to a latchset, provided the deadbolt can be released from the inside without a key or tool. This is why separate deadbolts are common on apartment doors in most jurisdictions. However, some states and local jurisdictions have adopted stricter requirements that mandate one-motion egress even on Group R dwelling unit entry doors. In those jurisdictions, a separate deadbolt with a separate latchset is not compliant, and an interconnected lock or mortise lock is the only hardware solution for a door requiring both a latch and deadbolt. Always verify the local code before specifying hardware on any multi-family project.
 

Where the Schlage CS210 Is Specified

The CS210 appears most frequently on dwelling unit entry doors in commercial multi-family buildings: apartment complexes, condominiums, dormitories, extended-stay hotels, and assisted living facilities. The specific application logic that drives the CS210 specification is the need for resident-facing security with single-motion egress in a commercial-grade fire-rated assembly.

Assisted living facilities are a particularly important distinction. Assisted living units are classified as Residential Board and Care occupancies under NFPA 101, not standard residential occupancies. The residential dwelling unit exception that allows a separate deadbolt does not apply to assisted living units. On assisted living dwelling unit entry doors, an interconnected lock or mortise lock is required in most jurisdictions because a separate deadbolt and latchset do not comply with one-motion egress for this occupancy type.

For institutional dormitories, hotel properties, and any jurisdiction with accessible or adaptable unit requirements, interconnected locks are often specifically mandated by local code supplements to the IBC. Massachusetts 521 CMR, for example, explicitly requires interconnected locks on accessible and adaptable dwelling units.

 

CS210 vs Separate Deadbolt vs Mortise Lock: Which One Fits the Opening

 

Schlage CS210 Interconnected

 

Grade 2 | Single-Motion Egress
 

One lever motion retracts latch and deadbolt simultaneously. Required on dwelling unit doors where one-motion egress is mandated. Standard bore prep (2-1/8 inch crossbore). Grade 2. 18 lever styles. Adjustable for 4 or 5-1/2 inch center-to-center. UL 3-hour fire listed. Lifetime limited warranty.

 

Separate Deadbolt + Latchset

 

Grade 1 or 2 | Two Motions Inside

Allowed on Group R dwelling units (occupant load 10 or less) where local code permits. Requires two inside motions to exit when deadbolt is thrown. Not compliant on most commercial occupancy doors. Lower installed cost. Higher security grade options available. Acceptable for most apartment and hotel doors in most jurisdictions.

 

Schlage L Series Mortise Lock

 

Grade 1 | Integrated in Single Case
 

Latch and deadbolt integrated in a single mortise case. Single lever retracts both when outside is locked in most functions. Grade 1. 40-plus functions. Best for high-security institutional dwelling unit doors where Grade 1 strength is required. Higher cost and more complex installation than the CS210.

 

Every Component in the Schlage CS210

 

Outside Housing Assembly: B500 vs B60

The CS210 offers two outside deadbolt housing configurations. This is the first specification decision and it determines the security level of the entire assembly.

 

CS210-B500 (commercial spin ring): The B500 outside housing includes a free-spinning cylinder collar that resists wrenching and prying. It also includes a removeable security shield that protects the deadbolt from ice-pick attacks through the door face. These are the same security features found in the Schlage B600 Series Grade 1 deadbolt. The B500 housing is the correct specification for any commercial or institutional application where physical attack resistance matters. The cylinder collar spins freely under wrench pressure rather than providing purchase for torque.

CS210-B60 (residential spin ring): The B60 housing is the residential version for multi-family buildings where the aesthetic and cost profile of a residential deadbolt is appropriate and the additional attack resistance features of the B500 are not required by the specification.

Outside housing and rose compatibility warning: The outside housing assembly, the rose, and the cylinder collar are not universally interchangeable between configurations. When ordering a replacement outside housing assembly, always confirm whether the existing installation uses the B500 or B60 configuration before ordering. Substituting the wrong housing changes both the security level and potentially the aesthetic of the finished installation.
 

Lever Kit (Part 06-242)

The CS210 lever kit (part 06-242) includes two matching levers, one outside and one inside. The CS200 Series offers 18 lever designs allowing the CS210 to match the aesthetic of other Schlage hardware throughout the same building. Lever designs are available in seven finishes including satin chrome (626), brushed nickel (619), matte black, polished brass (605), aged bronze, and others.

Lever replacement is needed when a lever is physically damaged, when a finish change is required after a renovation, or when a lever becomes stiff or fails to return to horizontal due to internal spring fatigue. The lever kit includes both levers, which keeps inside and outside matching during replacement. Always confirm the finish code before ordering a replacement lever kit.

 

Rose (Part 08-029)

The rose is the circular cover plate visible on the door face around the outside lever and cylinder area. The CS210 offers two outside rose designs: Plymouth and Saturn. The rose is finish-specific. Part 08-029 is the standard rose for snap-on rose installations (August 2015 and later). For crimp-on rose installations (pre-August 2015), see the crimp-to-snap section below before ordering any rose replacement.

 

Inside Escutcheon: Camelot (CAM) and Plymouth (PLY) Designs

The inside escutcheon is the decorative plate on the interior face that covers the inside chassis and positions the inside lever and thumb-turn plate. The CS210 offers two inside escutcheon designs: Camelot (CAM) and Plymouth (PLY). Both designs are available in the same seven finishes as the levers.

The inside escutcheon houses the adjustable thumb-turn plate assembly that supports both the 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door prep conversions. The escutcheon plate adjustment is a field modification; no additional parts are ordered for a center-to-center conversion. If the escutcheon itself is damaged or a design change is required, the escutcheon is an individually replaceable component.

 

Interconnect Assembly

The interconnect assembly is the internal mechanism that links the inside lever to both the deadbolt and latch, enabling the simultaneous retraction in one motion. This is the component that makes an interconnected lock different from a standard cylindrical lock with a separate deadbolt.

The interconnect assembly carries the load of both the deadbolt spring and the latch spring when the inside lever is turned. This combined spring load requires slightly more torque to operate than either a latch-only or deadbolt-only lock. The design intent is that a healthy adult requires no additional force beyond a normal lever turn. However, the combined spring load can become problematic for elderly, infirm, or physically limited occupants on doors where both springs are at the high end of their adjustment range. If a CS210 installation is reporting difficulty operating the lever, check that neither spring is adjusted beyond the standard setting before assuming the interconnect assembly has failed.

Interconnect assembly replacement is required when the inside lever turns but only one of the two mechanisms (latch or deadbolt) retracts, when the interconnect binding causes the lever to feel mechanically stiff at a specific point in its rotation arc, or when the assembly fails to fully return to the latched position after a lever release. Center-to-center conversion (4 inch to 5-1/2 inch or reverse) is made by a field modification to the interconnect assembly without requiring a replacement part.

 

Strike Plate (Part 10-109 and 10-121 Combination Strikes)

The CS210 uses a combination strike that includes both a deadbolt strike and a deadlatch strike in a single plate assembly. Both strikes must be correctly positioned in the door frame for the lock to operate without binding. The CS210 standard combination strike is part 10-109. The 10-121 is an alternate combination strike. A T-strike (1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch) is also available for the deadbolt portion.

Strike alignment is the most common cause of a CS210 installation that feels stiff or incomplete on either the deadbolt throw or the latch engagement. Because the CS210 operates two mechanisms simultaneously, even minor vertical misalignment of either strike pocket creates binding that feels like internal mechanism failure. When a CS210 is reported to be stiff or incomplete in its operation, verify both strike alignments before diagnosing internal components.

The CS210 also includes a metal wood frame reinforcer using 3-inch screws that anchor into the door frame stud for kick-in resistance. This is the same dust box concept as the B Series deadbolt and its presence significantly increases the resistance of the frame to forced entry. It should always be installed and is not optional on any security-sensitive application.

 

Deadbolt Strike (Part 10-116)

The deadbolt-only strike (part 10-116) is a round corner strike, 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch, no lip. This is used when the deadbolt and latch have separate frame preps rather than a combined pocket. Always confirm whether the installation uses a combination strike or separate strikes before ordering replacement hardware.

 

The Crimp-On to Snap-On Rose Transition: The Most Important CS210 Service Fact

In August 2015, Schlage transitioned the CS210 from crimp-on roses to snap-on roses. This transition is completely undocumented in most parts supplier catalogs and is the single most common cause of wrong-part returns on CS210 service calls.

 

How to Identify Which Generation Your Lock Is

Remove the outside rose from the door face. Examine the base of the rose where it meets the door surface. Snap-on roses have retention dimples at the base. Crimp-on roses do not have these dimples and have a smooth or rolled edge at the base instead. If you are not certain which generation is installed, this physical check takes under two minutes and prevents an incorrect parts order.

 

What Happens If You Order the Wrong Generation

The lever kit (06-242) and rose (08-029) designed for snap-on rose installations cannot be used on a crimp-on rose chassis. The retention mechanism is physically different and the lever will not seat correctly. If you have a pre-August 2015 installation with a crimp-on rose and order the current lever kit without also updating the outside chassis, the parts will not function correctly after installation.

 

The Correct Crimp-On to Snap-On Upgrade Parts

For a pre-August 2015 crimp-on rose installation that needs a lever or rose replacement, order all four of these components together:

 

Part NumberDescriptionRequired For
06-242Lever kit (two levers)New levers, snap-on compatible
08-029Outside rose (Plymouth or Saturn)New snap-on rose
A501-945Reinforcement ringSupports snap-on rose seating
F206-496Outside chassis assemblyUpdated chassis for snap-on compatibility
 
For post-August 2015 snap-on rose installations: Only order the lever kit (06-242) and rose (08-029) when changing levers or roses. The existing chassis and reinforcement ring are already compatible. Ordering the full four-part update kit for a snap-on installation adds unnecessary cost without functional benefit.
 

Center-to-Center Door Prep Conversion: Field Modification Without Parts

The CS210 adjustable escutcheon plate supports both 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door preparations. This is the dimension between the centerline of the deadbolt bore and the centerline of the cylindrical latch bore on the door face.

The conversion is made entirely in the field by modifying the interconnect assembly position inside the escutcheon plate. No additional parts are required and no replacement components need to be ordered. The procedure is:

For 4-inch center-to-center: Remove two screws and the plate from the escutcheon assembly. Position the thumb-turn assembly with the thumb turn toward the bottom of the thumb-turn escutcheon plate.

For 5-1/2-inch center-to-center: Keep the plate in place with the two screws. The thumb-turn remains in its standard position.

This field adjustability is the design feature that eliminates job-site surprises when the existing door prep does not match a specific standard. A building with mixed 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch door preps can use the same CS210 lock on every unit door without ordering two different lock configurations.

 

CS210 Technical Specifications

 

SpecificationDetail
ANSI/BHMA certificationA156.12-2013, Grade 2 operational and security
Fire door listingUL 3-hour fire door (with conventional cylinder)
SFIC cylinder fire listingGrade 3 security (with SFIC interchangeable core)
FunctionCS210 entrance, single locking. Inside lever retracts both latch and deadbolt.
Crossbore2-1/8 inch standard
Center-to-center4 inch or 5-1/2 inch (field adjustable)
Door thickness1-3/8 to 1-3/4 inch standard; 1-3/4 to 2 inch metal door
BacksetAdjustable 2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch
Latch throw1 inch
Latch faceplate1 inch by 2-1/4 inch (standard door); 1-1/8 inch square corner (metal door)
Deadbolt strike1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch T-strike standard
Cylinder6-pin, C keyway standard. Everest 29 keyway available.
HandingReversible in field
Levers18 designs in 7 finishes
Escutcheon optionsCamelot (CAM) and Plymouth (PLY) inside designs
Rose optionsPlymouth and Saturn outside designs
Outside housingB500 commercial spin ring or B60 residential spin ring
WarrantyLifetime limited mechanical and finish

 

Parts That Fail First on the Schlage CS210

Based on actual field service frequency, here is the realistic replacement sequence for CS210 components on high-traffic multi-family installations.

1. Levers. The outside lever takes physical contact on every door entry and exit. Finish wear is the most common cosmetic issue. Physical damage from cart impact or door abuse is the most common functional issue. The lever kit (06-242) replaces both inside and outside levers. Always check the rose generation before ordering (crimp vs snap as described above).

2. Strike plate alignment. This is not a parts failure but a maintenance item. Door settling in multi-family buildings causes progressive strike misalignment that shows up as a stiff deadbolt throw, incomplete latch engagement, or a lever that requires more force than normal. Check both strike alignments before diagnosing internal components. Re-securing loose strike screws or adjusting the strike position resolves most CS210 stiffness complaints without any parts replacement.

3. Cylinder. The 6-pin C keyway cylinder in the CS210 wears at the same rate as any commercial cylinder under high-cycle use. Key stiffness or a key that operates inconsistently indicates cylinder wear. As with all Schlage cylinders, use only graphite or silicone lubricant. Oil-based lubricants accelerate pin stack contamination and require cylinder replacement.

4. Inside escutcheon assembly. The inside escutcheon is subject to cosmetic damage on unit entry doors where residents are frequently carrying items. A cracked escutcheon plate or a finish that has worn through requires replacement as a complete escutcheon assembly. Confirm the Camelot or Plymouth design before ordering.

5. Interconnect assembly. The internal interconnect mechanism has the longest service life of any component in the CS210 because it is protected inside the door and does not receive direct physical contact. Interconnect failure appears as a lever that retracts one mechanism but not the other, or as an inconsistent combined retraction. Full interconnect replacement is required when this occurs.

 

Code Compliance: Interconnected Lock vs Separate Deadbolt on Dwelling Unit Doors

The code question that drives most CS210 specifications is whether a separate deadbolt is allowed on a dwelling unit entry door or whether an interconnected lock is required.

 

Where Separate Deadbolts Are Allowed

IBC Section 1010.1.9 and NFPA 101 both include an exception for Group R residential dwelling units with an occupant load of 10 or less. On these doors, a separate nightlatch, deadbolt, or security chain is permitted in addition to the latching hardware, provided the separate device can be released from the inside without a key or tool. A thumbturn-operated single cylinder deadbolt meets this requirement.

This exception applies to most apartments, condominiums, dormitory rooms, hotel rooms, and similar units. It is the reason separate deadbolts are common on apartment doors throughout the United States. In these jurisdictions, the CS210 is a premium specification option, not a code requirement.

 

Where Interconnected Locks Are Required

Several situations eliminate the separate deadbolt exception and require one-motion egress on dwelling unit entry doors. The first is when the local jurisdiction has adopted stricter requirements than the model codes. The second is for accessible or adaptable dwelling units in jurisdictions following accessibility standards that mandate one-motion egress hardware. The third is for assisted living and residential board and care facilities where the NFPA 101 residential occupancy exception does not apply. In all three situations, an interconnected lock or mortise lock is the only code-compliant hardware solution for a door requiring both a latch and a deadbolt.

 

The Assisted Living specification trap: Assisted living facilities are regularly misspecified with separate deadbolts because the word "residential" in their NFPA 101 classification (Residential Board and Care) is misread as qualifying for the residential dwelling unit exception. It does not. The residential dwelling unit exception in NFPA 101 applies to apartment buildings, rooming houses, hotels, motels, dormitories, and 1-2 family dwellings. Assisted living facilities are Board and Care occupancies, a distinct classification, and the one-motion egress requirement applies fully. Any separate deadbolt on an assisted living unit entry door in a jurisdiction enforcing NFPA 101 is non-compliant hardware.
 

How to Order CS210 Parts Without a Return

Four pieces of information are required before any CS210 parts order:

1. Rose generation (crimp or snap): This is the most important check. Remove the outside rose and look for retention dimples at the base. Dimples = snap-on (August 2015 or later). No dimples = crimp-on (pre-August 2015). If the lock is pre-2015, the outside chassis (F206-496) must be ordered along with the lever kit and rose.

2. Outside housing type (B500 or B60): The B500 has a free-spinning cylinder collar and security shield. The B60 does not. This is visible without disassembly: grip the exterior cylinder collar and attempt to rotate it. Free spin = B500. Fixed = B60.

3. Inside escutcheon design (Camelot or Plymouth): The Camelot design has a more traditional rectangular profile. The Plymouth has a more contemporary rounded shape. Both are visible on the interior door face without disassembly.

4. Finish code: Visible on the hardware face. Common CS210 finishes include 626 (satin chrome), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), 625 (bright chrome), and 605 (polished brass). All replacement components are finish-specific.

Browse the complete CS210 parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For the full Schlage commercial hardware range including the CS210, ND Series, L Series, and B Series, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage CS210 Parts

Rose generation identification, crimp-to-snap conversion guidance, code context, and same-day shipping on stocked components.

 

Rose Generation Guidance

We document the crimp-to-snap rose transition and what it means for parts ordering. The four-part upgrade kit for pre-2015 units is documented before the order is placed, not after the wrong part arrives.

 

Code Context Included

We explain when an interconnected lock is required vs when a separate deadbolt is allowed. Assisted living facilities, accessible units, and state-specific code supplements are all covered.

 

Complete CS210 Coverage

Lever kits, roses, escutcheons, chassis assemblies, strikes, and combination strikes all in one catalog page with part numbers and diagrams.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most CS210 components ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for CS210 Parts

  • We document the August 2015 crimp-to-snap rose transition with the exact four-part update kit (06-242, 08-029, A501-945, F206-496) for pre-2015 installations. No other parts supplier explains this before you place a wrong-part order.
  • We explain the assisted living NFPA 101 specification trap. Assisted living facilities do not qualify for the residential dwelling unit exception that allows separate deadbolts. This prevents non-compliant hardware installation on what is often one of the highest-scrutiny occupancy types for inspections.
  • We document the center-to-center field conversion as a no-parts field modification, eliminating unnecessary parts orders when a door prep dimension changes.
  • We carry CS210 interconnected lock parts alongside Schlage B Series deadbolt parts, Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts, and LCN door closer parts. One order covers the complete unit entry door hardware service call.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.
  • 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience. We identify the generation, housing type, and escutcheon design from your description before the order ships.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

A complete multi-family unit entry door typically includes the interconnected lock, a surface door closer (required by fire code for self-closing on fire-rated corridor-to-unit assemblies), and sometimes an electric strike for access control on the corridor side. SecurityParts.com stocks all of these in one catalog.

For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on unit entry doors where a separate deadbolt is permitted and specified instead of an interconnected lock, browse the deadbolts catalog. For Schlage ND Series and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on common area corridor doors, mailroom doors, and amenity space doors in the same building, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on main building entry doors and management office doors requiring Grade 1 performance, browse the mortise locks catalog. For LCN door closer parts on unit entry doors and corridor fire doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Von Duprin exit device parts on building egress stairwells and exit doors, browse the commercial exit devices catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage CS210 Interconnected Lock Parts

 

What is an interconnected lock and how is it different from a separate deadbolt and latchset?

An interconnected lock combines a cylindrical latch and a deadbolt with a mechanical connection that allows the inside lever to retract both simultaneously in one motion. A separate deadbolt and latchset require two inside operations to exit when the deadbolt is thrown. The interconnected lock's single-motion egress meets IBC and NFPA 101 requirements on most commercial occupancy doors. Where local code requires one-motion egress even on dwelling unit entry doors, an interconnected lock or mortise lock is the only compliant hardware solution.

 

What parts does the Schlage CS210 interconnected lock use?

The main CS210 replaceable parts are: lever kit (06-242, two levers), rose (08-029), inside escutcheon in Camelot or Plymouth design, outside housing assembly (B500 commercial spin ring or B60 residential spin ring), interconnect assembly, combination strikes (10-109 or 10-121), deadbolt strike (10-116), reinforcement ring (A501-945), and outside chassis assembly (F206-496 for crimp-to-snap conversions). All components are finish-specific.

 

What is the difference between crimp-on and snap-on roses on the Schlage CS210?

Schlage transitioned from crimp-on to snap-on roses in August 2015. Snap-on roses have retention dimples at the base. Crimp-on roses do not. For pre-2015 crimp-on installations requiring a lever or rose replacement, order all four parts together: lever kit 06-242, rose 08-029, reinforcement ring A501-945, and outside chassis assembly F206-496. For post-2015 snap-on installations, only the lever kit (06-242) and rose (08-029) are needed.

 

What center-to-center door preparations does the Schlage CS210 support?

The CS210 supports both 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door preparations through a field modification to the interconnect assembly. For 4-inch prep, remove two screws and the plate, then position the thumb-turn assembly with the thumb turn toward the bottom. For 5-1/2-inch prep, keep the plate in place with two screws. No additional parts are required for this conversion.

 

When is an interconnected lock required by code?

IBC and NFPA 101 require one-motion egress on most commercial doors. For Group R dwelling units (apartments, hotel rooms, dormitory rooms) with occupant loads of 10 or less, a separate deadbolt is generally allowed. However, some local jurisdictions require one-motion egress even on dwelling units. Assisted living facilities do not qualify for the residential dwelling unit exception under NFPA 101. Always verify local code before specifying hardware on multi-family and institutional projects.

 

What is the Schlage CS210 B500 vs B60 outside housing?

The B500 (commercial spin ring) includes a free-spinning cylinder collar that resists wrenching, a removeable security shield against ice-pick attacks, and a metal frame reinforcer with 3-inch screws. The B60 (residential spin ring) is the residential version without the additional attack resistance features. The B500 is the correct specification for commercial and institutional applications. Grip the cylinder collar and attempt to rotate it: free spin confirms B500; fixed confirms B60.

Schlage B Series Deadbolt Parts: B500 and B600 Grade 1 Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the Schlage B Series commercial deadbolts. The B600 Series is Grade 1, Schlage's strongest commercial deadbolt. The B500 Series is Grade 2 for lighter applications. The most commonly replaced parts are the tailpiece (driver bar), the cylinder, and the strike plate. If a new B Series installation won't lock or unlock, rotate the driver bar 90 degrees toward the hinges before reinstalling. If the key turns but the bolt doesn't move, the tailpiece is stripped and needs replacement. Never use oil-based lubricants on B Series cylinders. Use graphite or silicone only.

Schlage B Series deadbolts are on more commercial and institutional doors than any other deadbolt brand in North America. They show up on office suites, storage rooms, corridor doors, exterior entries on healthcare and government buildings, and any secondary door on a commercial property that needs a reliable keyed bolt without the complexity of a full mortise lock.

When one fails, the repair is usually one of three things: a worn tailpiece, a failing cylinder, or a misaligned strike plate. Getting the right replacement part requires knowing the series (B500 vs B600), the cylinder format, and in some cases the finish code. This guide covers every component, every failure mode, every function, and the field-tested troubleshooting sequence that identifies the correct part before you order anything. Browse the complete Schlage B Series deadbolt parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams on every model.

Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA rating on the Schlage B600 Series
1" Deadbolt throw on both B500 and B600 Series
UL 3hr Fire door listing with steel fire cup plate insert on B600
Everest 29 Default patented keyway on B600 Series for key duplication control
 

How a Commercial Deadbolt Works

A deadbolt operates differently from a spring latch. A spring latch clicks into the strike automatically when the door closes and retracts when the lever or knob is turned. A deadbolt does neither automatically. It extends only when the cylinder is turned with a key or the thumb turn is rotated, and it retracts only by the same means. Once extended, it cannot be pushed back by end pressure, a credit card, or a shimming tool.

Inside the lock body, the cylinder cam engages the tailpiece when the key is turned. The tailpiece connects the cam to the deadbolt bolt mechanism and drives the bolt in or out. On a single cylinder deadbolt, a thumb turn connects to the same bolt mechanism from the inside. On a double cylinder deadbolt, a key cylinder replaces the thumb turn on the inside.

The deadbolt throw on both B500 and B600 series is 1 inch. On a correctly installed B Series deadbolt, this 1-inch throw passes through the strike plate hole and engages at least 1 inch into the door frame. The metal dust box anchors the strike with 3-inch screws into the frame stud, which is why kick-in attacks that defeat the bolt still fail on a correctly installed B Series with the dust box in place.

 

B500 vs B600: Choosing the Right Series Before Ordering Parts

 

B500 Series

 
Grade 2 | Light Commercial and Multi-Family

7 functions. Optional fire rating with fire-rated deadbolt version. Optional indicator trim for status visibility. Adjustable backset (2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch). Default deadbolt part 12-288 (square corner, 1 inch x 2-1/4 inch, 1 inch housing diameter). Standard door thickness 1-3/8 to 2-1/4 inch. Available in conventional, FSIC, and SFIC cylinder formats. Commercial 3-year limited warranty.

 

B600 Series

 

Grade 1 | Commercial and Institutional
 

Schlage's strongest commercial deadbolt. Hardened steel anti-saw pin in bolt. Hardened steel ball bearings stop drilling on through bolts. Free-spinning cylinder collar resists wrenching. Removeable security shield protects cylinder driver. Steel fire cup plate insert for UL 3-hour fire door listing. Default deadbolt part 12-296 (square corner, 1-1/8 x 2-1/4 inch). Default Everest 29 S123 keyway. Incorporates former B700 and B800 Primus-level series.

 

Important naming change: Locks previously sold as B700 Series (Primus cylinder) and B800 Series (Primus XP cylinder) are now incorporated as versions of the B600 Series with Primus or Primus XP cylinder specifications. If your building spec references B700 or B800, order B600 with the matching Primus cylinder specification. The physical lock and parts are the same. The naming changed; the hardware did not.
 

B600 Series Security Features: What They Mean for Parts Ordering

The B600 Series has a longer list of anti-attack features than the B500, and several of them directly affect parts compatibility and ordering.

 

Hardened Steel Anti-Saw Pin

A hardened steel pin is embedded in the deadbolt bolt body perpendicular to the bolt. If someone attempts to saw through the extended bolt, the saw blade hits the hardened pin and stops. The anti-saw pin is part of the bolt assembly and is not a separately replaceable component. If the bolt shows saw damage, the entire bolt assembly must be replaced, not just the pin.

 

Hardened Steel Ball Bearings on Through Bolts

The through bolts that mount the lock to the door have hardened steel ball bearings embedded in the bolt body. If someone attempts to drill through the bolt to remove the mounting screws, the drill bit contacts the ball bearing and spins without penetrating. These are built into the through bolt hardware and are not separately replaceable. If a through bolt is drilled, the entire bolt set requires replacement.

 

Free-Spinning Cylinder Collar

The cylinder collar on the B600 exterior is broadly angled and designed to spin freely when a wrench is applied to it. A fixed collar gives a wrench purchase to torque the cylinder out of the lock body. The free-spinning collar denies that purchase and the cylinder cannot be wrenched. The collar is part of the exterior cylinder housing assembly and is finish-specific. When ordering a replacement exterior cylinder assembly for a B600, confirm both the finish code and the security level (standard Everest 29, Primus, or Primus XP) before ordering.

 

Steel Fire Cup Plate Insert

The fire cup plate insert adds structural strength to the lock body and enables UL listing for 3-hour fire door use as an auxiliary lock. This component is factory-installed in B600 Series locks. It is not a separately field-replaceable component. If a B600 fire-rated installation requires a replacement lock body due to damage, specify the fire-rated version when ordering to ensure UL listing compliance on the fire-door assembly is maintained.

 

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage B Series Deadbolt

Tailpiece (Driver Bar): The Most Misdiagnosed Failure

The tailpiece is the flat metal bar that connects the cylinder cam and the thumb turn to the deadbolt bolt mechanism. It is the most frequently misdiagnosed failure on a Schlage B Series deadbolt, and it is also the most common source of new-installation failures that are not actually component failures at all.

Tailpiece part numbers are length-specific and cylinder configuration-specific:

 

Part NumberDescriptionLengthApplication
B202-557Standard tailpiece, single cylinder1.85 inchStandard 1-3/4 inch door, single cylinder B Series
B202-558Longer tailpiece, single cylinder2.00 inchThicker doors where standard tailpiece doesn't reach
B220-032Tailpiece, double cylinder1.031 inchB100, B250, B400, H, MD, and S200 series double cylinder
 
The tailpiece orientation fix that resolves 80% of new installation failures: When a new B Series installation will not lock or unlock, and the interior thumb turn won't move, the problem is almost never a defective lock. The official Schlage troubleshooting guide for this symptom is specific: remove the lock and rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges, then reinstall with the deadbolt retracted and the key removed. This corrects the tailpiece orientation that was set wrong during installation. Technicians who do not know this spend unnecessary time diagnosing a non-existent hardware failure and sometimes order replacement parts for a lock that is not broken.
 

Deadbolt Bolt Assembly

The B500 default bolt is part 12-288 (square corner, 1 inch by 2-1/4 inch, 1 inch housing diameter, adjustable backset 2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch). The B600 default bolt is part 12-296 (square corner, 1-1/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch, 1 inch housing diameter, adjustable backset 2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch). Both series offer fixed backset options at 2-3/8, 2-3/4, 3-3/4, and 5 inches in addition to the adjustable standard.

Bolt assembly replacement is needed when the bolt has sustained physical damage from a forced entry attempt, when the anti-saw pin has been encountered by a saw blade, or when the bolt mechanism binds and will not extend or retract cleanly even after lubrication. The bolt faceplate (also called the drive-in faceplate) is a separately replaceable component that covers the bolt hole on the door edge and can be replaced without replacing the full bolt assembly when only the faceplate is damaged.

 

Cylinder Assembly

The cylinder is the keyed component in the exterior rose that drives the cam, which drives the tailpiece, which moves the bolt. The B Series supports multiple cylinder formats at ordering time:

 

Cylinder FormatCodeDescriptionApplication
ConventionalStandardStandard pinned cylinder, Everest 29 S123 keyway defaultMost commercial installations
PrimusPSecond set of pins plus geographic exclusivityGovernment, healthcare, high-security commercial
Primus XPXPUL 437 listed. Resists drilling and physical cylinder attackHigh-security exterior doors, correctional facilities
FSICICFull-size interchangeable core. Core removeable by control keyLarge campuses requiring frequent rekeying
SFICSFICSmall format interchangeable coreFacilities with existing SFIC key systems

 

When replacing a B Series cylinder, confirm the security level installed before ordering. A standard Everest 29 cylinder looks physically identical to a Primus cylinder from the outside. The security level is on the original specification or on the key, which will have Primus branding on a Primus cylinder. Installing a standard cylinder to replace a Primus cylinder downgrades the security level of the opening without any visible indication that a change has been made.

Never use oil-based lubricants on a Schlage cylinder. Oil attracts dirt and debris that accumulates in the pin stack and causes premature cylinder failure. The cylinder becomes increasingly stiff until the key no longer turns. Use only graphite powder or silicone spray lubricant on B Series cylinders. If a cylinder has been lubricated with oil and is now stiff, cylinder replacement is the correct resolution. Flushing oil-contaminated cylinders does not restore full function reliably.
 

Strike Plate and Metal Dust Box

The B600 standard strike is 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch with square corners. The B500 standard strike is 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch. Both are available in ANSI curved lip, round cornered, and thimble configurations for different frame preparations.

The metal dust box (part B520-283) is installed behind the strike plate. It creates a reinforced pocket in the frame for the bolt to enter, and its 3-inch screws anchor into the door frame stud rather than just the door frame face. This is what gives the B Series its resistance to kick-in attacks. The bolt itself can withstand the force. What fails on most deadbolt kick-in attacks is the door frame around the strike, not the bolt or the lock body. The metal dust box with 3-inch screws prevents frame failure by distributing the force into the stud.

 

The dust box omission that facilities teams discover after a break-in: A very large percentage of deadbolt kick-in failures in commercial facilities happen on doors where the metal dust box was omitted at original installation because it was considered an optional component. It is not optional for any door where physical security matters. The B600 dust box using 3-inch screws is the difference between a door that fails a kick-in at approximately 100 foot-pounds and a door that holds at two to three times that force. If any B Series installation in your portfolio is missing the dust box, this is the most cost-effective security upgrade available per opening.
 

Thumb Turn Assembly

The thumb turn is the interior control on a single cylinder deadbolt that allows the bolt to be thrown or retracted from the inside without a key. The thumb turn assembly includes the turn itself, the rose, and the connecting components to the bolt mechanism. On a double cylinder deadbolt, the thumb turn is replaced by an interior key cylinder and the interior rose assembly changes accordingly.

Thumb turn replacement is needed when the turn becomes stiff or will not rotate fully, when physical damage to the thumb turn has occurred, or when the connection between the turn and the bolt mechanism has worn. The thumb turn assembly is finish-specific. Always confirm the finish code before ordering a replacement.

On a correctly installed lock, the thumb turn should operate with minimal resistance in either direction. A thumb turn that requires two-hand force to operate is not a characteristic of a fully functioning deadbolt. Check for strike plate misalignment before assuming the thumb turn mechanism has failed, as binding caused by a slightly misaligned strike is often mistaken for internal mechanism failure.

 

Exterior Rose and Cylinder Guard

The exterior rose is the cover plate visible on the door face around the cylinder. On the B600 Series, the exterior rose houses the free-spinning cylinder collar and acts as the primary tamper-resistant interface between the exterior and the door. The exterior rose is finish-specific. Scratch or impact damage to the rose requires a finish-matched replacement. The cylinder collar is part of the exterior assembly and is not separately replaceable from the rose on most B600 configurations.

 

B Series Deadbolt Functions: What Each One Does

The Schlage B Series deadbolt functions determine the operating configuration and the trim components required. Ordering a replacement cylinder, tailpiece, or trim without confirming the function code produces parts that may not be compatible with the specific installation.

 

FunctionSeriesOperationApplication
Single cylinder (B60N, B600 single)B500, B600Key exterior, thumb turn interiorStandard commercial and residential door
Double cylinder (B62N, B600 double)B500, B600Key both sides, no thumb turnDoors with glass adjacent to lock where thumb turn would allow glass-break access
Privacy (B571, B600 privacy)B600Key exterior, interior indicator and coin turn, 180-degree window indicatorRestroom stalls, utility closets requiring occupied/vacant indication
Indicator (B571, B600 indication)B600180-degree status window, visible LOCKED/UNLOCKED from corridorHealthcare patient rooms, offices where occupancy status must be visible from corridor
Key outside only (B600 key outside)B600Key exterior only, interior lever retracts boltStorerooms where interior free egress is required

 

The B600 Indication Trim: Why It Matters for Parts

The B600 indication trim function uses a patented 180-degree viewing window that wraps three sides of the exterior rose and displays a red or white background with LOCKED or UNLOCKED messaging. The large window is readable even from across a corridor. This is the "Know It's Locked" feature Schlage markets for healthcare and education applications where knowing a room's lock status without touching the hardware is a daily operational requirement.

The indication trim is not interchangeable with standard trim. It requires a specific exterior rose assembly with the viewing window housing. When ordering a replacement rose for a B600 indication trim installation, confirm the indication function variant before ordering. A standard rose does not retrofit into an indication trim installation because the housing geometry is different.

The B600 indication trim is available with red and white messaging backgrounds for readability by color-blind individuals, and in English, French, and Spanish language versions. Always confirm the language version when ordering a replacement trim assembly for an indication function installation.

 

Tailpiece Orientation: The Fix Nobody Documents Clearly

The official Schlage troubleshooting guide documents a specific procedure for a newly installed B Series deadbolt that will not lock or unlock. Most other resources on the internet describe this problem as a defective lock. It is not a defective lock in the overwhelming majority of cases.

The tailpiece has an orientation that must be set correctly relative to the door for the lock to function. If installed in the wrong orientation, the key turns, the thumb turn moves, but the bolt does not extend or retract. The fix takes under two minutes.

 

Remove the Lock from the Door

Unscrew the mounting screws holding the interior assembly to the exterior. Separate the two halves of the lock from the door bore. Do not disassemble the lock itself.

 

Rotate the Driver Bar Fully Toward the Hinges

With the lock removed, rotate the driver bar (tailpiece) fully in the direction of the door hinges. This resets the orientation to the correct starting position. Verify the deadbolt is fully retracted before reinstalling.

 

Reinstall with Key Removed and Bolt Retracted

Reinstall the lock with the deadbolt in the fully retracted position and with no key in the exterior cylinder. The key being in the cylinder during installation can shift the tailpiece orientation during the reinstallation process. Insert the key only after the lock is fully reinstalled and test operation.

 

Test Both Directions from Both Sides

Test with the exterior key in both locking and unlocking directions. Test with the interior thumb turn in both directions. If the lock now operates correctly, the issue was orientation only. No parts are needed. If the lock still does not operate after correct orientation, the tailpiece itself may be worn or stripped and requires replacement.

 

Key-Sticking and Cylinder Failure: When to Replace vs Lubricate

A stiff key on a B Series deadbolt is one of the most common service calls. The correct response depends on how long the stiffness has been present and what lubricant history the cylinder has.

 

New or recent installation, key stiff immediately: Check the cylinder alignment in the rose. A slightly off-center cylinder causes the key to bind against the cylinder housing on entry. Verify the exterior rose is seated flush before assuming cylinder failure.

Key stiff after months or years of use, never lubricated: Apply graphite powder to the key blade and work it in and out of the cylinder several times. For most B Series cylinders in commercial service, graphite applied every 12 months is sufficient maintenance. Do not use WD-40 or any oil-based product.

Key stiff after months or years of use, previously lubricated with oil-based product: The pin stack has collected oil-carried debris. Graphite will not flush this out. The cylinder requires replacement. Part numbers for B600 replacement cylinders must match the security level (standard Everest 29, Primus, or Primus XP) of the original installation.

Key turns freely but bolt does not move: The tailpiece connection has failed. The key is operating the cam but the cam is no longer driving the tailpiece into the bolt mechanism. Remove the lock, inspect the tailpiece for wear or stripping, and replace with the correct length tailpiece (B202-557 for standard doors or B202-558 for thicker doors).

Key can only be removed in one position (locked or unlocked) but not the other on a new installation: Rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges and reinstall. This is a tailpiece orientation issue identical to the general non-operating procedure above.

 

Strike Plate Alignment: The Most Common Source of Binding

A deadbolt that operates smoothly with the door open but feels stiff or fails to fully extend when the door is closed is almost always a strike plate alignment problem. The bolt pocket in the strike must be centered on the bolt throw for the bolt to enter cleanly and without side friction.

Door settling is the most common cause of gradual strike plate misalignment in commercial buildings. Wood frame doors settle as the building ages and the door shifts slightly in its frame. Hollow metal frame doors can shift if the frame anchoring fasteners loosen over time. Either way, the result is a bolt that contacts the edge of the strike pocket rather than entering it cleanly.

Correcting strike plate misalignment does not always require a new strike. If the misalignment is small (2mm or less), enlarging the bolt pocket with a chisel is the fastest correction. If the misalignment is larger, the strike must be relocated or a new strike installed with a bolt pocket at the corrected position.

A strike that has been in service for 10 or more years on a high-traffic exterior door may also show deformation of the bolt pocket lip where repeated bold throw impact has worn or bent the steel. A deformed strike produces a deadbolt that feels rough on every locking cycle. Replace the strike when deformation is visible.

 

How to Identify Your B Series Model Before Ordering Parts

Three pieces of information are required before any B Series parts order.

1. Series designation (B500 or B600): The series is stamped or labeled on the lock body, visible when the interior assembly is removed. If the label is missing or worn, the grade level can sometimes be identified by the security features: if the exterior cylinder collar spins freely when gripped and twisted, it is a B600. If it is fixed, it may be a B500 or an older B series.

2. Cylinder security level: Standard Everest 29, Primus, or Primus XP. The key itself will have Primus branding if a Primus cylinder is installed. UL 437 markings on the cylinder face confirm Primus XP. Ordering a standard cylinder to replace a Primus cylinder downgrades security without any visible indication to building management.

3. Finish code: The finish is on the original specification or visible on the hardware. Common B Series finishes include 605 (bright brass), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), 625 (bright chrome), 626 (satin chrome), and 643e (aged bronze). Trim components are finish-specific. A replacement thumb turn or rose in the wrong finish requires a return and reorder.

Browse the Schlage B Series deadbolt parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams by model. For the complete Schlage commercial hardware range including ND Series cylindrical locks, L Series mortise locks, and B Series deadbolts, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage B Series Deadbolt Parts

Tailpiece guidance, cylinder security level documentation, dust box importance, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Tailpiece Orientation Guidance

We document the driver bar rotation fix that resolves most new installation failures without any parts replacement. Knowing this before calling in a service order saves time and unnecessary returns.

 

Cylinder Security Level

We document that standard and Primus cylinders look identical from outside. Replacing a Primus with standard downgrades security silently. We confirm the security level before the order ships.

 

Dust Box Documentation

We explain why the metal dust box with 3-inch screws is the most cost-effective security upgrade per opening. Most facilities don't know it was omitted until after a kick-in incident.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most B Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Schlage Deadbolt Parts

  • We document the tailpiece orientation procedure that resolves most new installation failures without ordering any parts. No other parts supplier explains this in buyer-facing content, which means unnecessary part orders happen constantly.
  • We explain that B700 and B800 Series locks are now incorporated into B600 Series with Primus cylinder specifications. Facilities maintaining these older specifications can order confidently without confusion about what has changed.
  • We document the metal dust box importance as the most cost-effective physical security upgrade per deadbolt opening. The 3-inch screws that anchor into the stud are the difference between a door that fails a kick-in and one that holds.
  • We document the oil lubricant contamination failure mode. Cylinders lubricated with WD-40 or similar products need replacement, not additional lubrication. This prevents repeated unnecessary service calls on the same cylinder.
  • We carry Schlage B Series parts alongside Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts, Schlage L Series mortise lock parts, and LCN door closer parts. One order services the complete building opening.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Schlage B Series deadbolts are typically installed alongside cylindrical locksets on the same door or in the same building. A complete commercial service call for a building's lock hardware often covers all of these at once.

For Schlage ND Series, ALX Series, and Falcon T Series cylindrical lock parts on interior corridor and office doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on high-security entry doors in the same building, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled entries in the same facility, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same building, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any door with automatic closing hardware, browse the door closers catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Falcon, Von Duprin, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage B Series Deadbolt Parts

 

What is the difference between the Schlage B500 and B600 Series deadbolts?

The B500 is Grade 2 for lighter commercial and multi-family applications with 7 functions and an optional fire rating. The B600 is Grade 1 with hardened steel anti-saw pins, ball bearings to stop drilling on through bolts, a free-spinning cylinder collar to resist wrenching, a security shield against cylinder manipulation, and a steel fire cup plate insert for UL 3-hour fire door listing. The former B700 and B800 Series names are now incorporated into B600 with Primus cylinder specifications.

 

What is the tailpiece on a Schlage B Series deadbolt and how do I replace it?

The tailpiece (driver bar) connects the cylinder cam and thumb turn to the deadbolt bolt mechanism. Standard single cylinder tailpiece is part B202-557 (1.85 inch). Longer single cylinder tailpiece is B202-558 (2 inch). Double cylinder tailpiece is B220-032 (1.031 inch). If a new installation won't lock, rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges before reinstalling. If the key turns but the bolt doesn't move after correct orientation, the tailpiece is stripped and requires replacement.

 

What keyway does the Schlage B600 Series use by default?

The B600 Series uses the Everest 29 S123 patented keyway as standard. This prevents unauthorized key duplication. The B600 is upgradable to Primus for geographic exclusivity and a second pin set, and to Primus XP for UL 437 high-security listing. The B700 and B800 Series names previously identified Primus levels and are now B600 variants.

 

What causes a Schlage deadbolt to not lock or unlock after installation?

The most common cause on new installations is incorrect tailpiece orientation. Remove the lock, rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges, and reinstall with the bolt retracted and key removed. If the bolt operates with door open but binds when closed, the strike plate is misaligned. If the key turns but the bolt doesn't move, the tailpiece has failed and needs replacement. A key that sticks after extended use requires cylinder replacement.

 

What strike plate does the Schlage B600 Series use?

The B600 standard strike is 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch with square corners. The metal dust box (part B520-283) installs behind the strike using 3-inch screws that anchor into the door frame stud. This is the critical component that prevents kick-in failures. Many B Series installations are missing the dust box, making this the most cost-effective physical security upgrade available per opening.

 

What is the Schlage B Series single cylinder vs double cylinder deadbolt?

Single cylinder (B60N, B600 single) uses a key exterior and thumb turn interior. Double cylinder (B62N, B600 double) requires a key on both sides. Double cylinder is specified on doors with glass near the deadbolt where someone could break the glass and reach a thumb turn. Many building codes prohibit double cylinder deadbolts on required egress doors because they delay exit during emergencies. Always verify local code before specifying double cylinder on any egress path.

Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series Mortise Lock Parts: Complete Field Guide

Mortise locks are the most complex mechanical lock type to source replacement parts for because the function code determines which components are correct, and parts across different function codes are not interchangeable even when the cases look identical. SecurityParts.com carries parts for the Schlage L Series Grade 1 (40-plus functions, 33 lever styles) and Falcon MA Series Grade 1 (high-traffic institutional, SFIC-compatible). The function code, door handing, and manufacture date are all required before ordering any chassis, armor front, latchbolt, spindle, or cylinder cam. The L9050 universal case is the single most important inventory item because it can be transformed into nine different L Series functions with the right additional parts.

Mortise locks outlast cylindrical locks by a factor of 3 to 5 in commercial service. They are on the entry doors, the main corridors, the healthcare and government facilities where reliability is not optional. When one needs service, the parts tree is deeper and more function-specific than anything in the cylindrical lock world.

The Schlage L Series alone covers more than 40 functional options, 33 lever designs, and 14 finishes. Its parts split into chassis components, cylinder components, trim components, and function-specific parts that are not interchangeable even within the same L Series family. A lever return spring for an L9010 passage function is not the same servicing need as a spindle assembly for an L9080 storeroom function. Getting any one of these wrong means a return, a reorder, and a door that stays out of service for another week. Browse the complete mortise lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams on every function and model.

40+ Mechanical functions in the Schlage L Series
33 Lever designs in solid brass or stainless steel in the Schlage L Series
3-5x Longer service life of mortise vs cylindrical locks in commercial settings
UL 3hr Fire door rating on both Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series
 

How a Mortise Lock Differs from a Cylindrical Lock

A mortise lock installs into a pocket (the mortise) cut into the edge of the door, typically 4 inches deep, 6 inches tall, and 1 inch wide. The entire lock mechanism lives inside this pocket with only the armor front plate visible on the door edge and the levers and roses visible on the door face. This concealed mounting is what gives mortise locks their tamper resistance advantage over cylindrical bore locks where the mechanism is partially exposed.

Inside the mortise case, the mechanism includes a spring latchbolt for automatic latching, an auxiliary deadlatch plunger that deadlocks the latchbolt when the door closes against the strike, a separate deadbolt on many functions, a spindle connecting the inside and outside levers through the case, and a mortise cylinder that controls the deadbolt cam. All of these operate in a single cast body. This is what makes mortise locks the strongest lock type for high-security commercial doors but also the most complex to source replacement parts for correctly.

 

The auxiliary deadlatch detail that costs locksmiths service calls: The auxiliary deadlatch plunger beside the latchbolt must be fully depressed by the strike plate when the door closes for the deadlocking function to engage. If the strike is positioned so the plunger does not contact the strike face, the latchbolt is not deadlocked and can be retracted by a credit card, a loiding tool, or end pressure. Strike misalignment greater than approximately 1.5mm vertical is enough to defeat deadlocking on any mortise lock. When a customer reports a door that feels secure but opens with shim pressure, the strike alignment is almost always the cause, not a failed latchbolt.
 

Schlage L Series: The Commercial Benchmark Mortise Lock

The Schlage L Series has been the benchmark commercial mortise lock specification in North America for decades. Government buildings, healthcare facilities, higher education campuses, institutional projects. If a building was built to a commercial standard after 1970, there is a very high probability it has L Series locks on the entry and secured doors.

The L Series offers beyond-Grade-1 strength in a mortise chassis. The anti-saw pin in the deadbolt prevents cut-through attacks. The security blocking hub prevents lock access by removing the levers. Lock monitoring options including request to exit (RX), latchbolt monitoring (LX), door position sensor (DPS), and deadbolt monitoring (DM) are available depending on the function. The patented Everest 29 S123 keyway prevents unauthorized key duplication as standard. Primus restricted cylinders with geographic exclusivity and advanced key control are available for facilities requiring maximum key system security.

 

Reading the Schlage L Series Model Number

The model number decodes every specification needed to source the correct replacement parts. The format is L or LV plus function group plus deadbolt indicator plus cylinder suffix.

 

Code ElementMeaningExample
LStandard Schlage L Series chassisL9080
LVVandlgard chassis for abuse/vandalism resistanceLV9080
Function groupThe lock operating function (e.g. 9080 = storeroom)L9080
Deadbolt indicator0 = no deadbolt. 4 = with deadbolt (L9460 adds deadbolt to basic functions)L9460
P6-pin full-face mortise cylinder with Schlage logo includedL9080P
LLess cylinder (customer supplies cylinder)L9080L
CConcealed mortise cylinder includedL9080C
RFull-size interchangeable core cylinderL9080R

 

The Most Common Schlage L Series Functions

 

FunctionANSIHow It WorksApplication
L9010PassageLatchbolt retracted by lever from either side. No locking.Corridors, vestibule passages, non-secured internal doors
L9020PrivacyInside push button locks outside lever. Emergency coin release from outside.Restrooms, private offices
L9040ClassroomOutside lever locked by key from outside. Inside always free. No deadbolt.Classrooms, conference rooms requiring exterior key lockdown
L9050Entrance/OfficePush button locks outside lever. Key or inside lever unlocks. Latch and deadbolt.Executive offices, secured administrative areas
L9060VestibuleKey in outside lever locks/unlocks it. Inside lever always free.Building lobby control, vestibule entries
L9070Classroom SecurityOutside lever locked by key from outside only. Inside always free. With latch and deadbolt.K-12 classrooms with full deadbolt lockdown requirement
L9080StoreroomOutside lever always inoperative, entry by key only. Inside always free.Storage, server rooms, supply areas, secure labs
L9082Storeroom/ClosetSame as L9080 but latchbolt retracted by key from either side. Both levers always inoperative.Secure closets, equipment rooms requiring full key control
 
The escutcheon vs rose trim mistake: When a function change is needed on an L Series installation that currently has escutcheon trim, the entire escutcheon set (inside and outside) must be replaced when converting to a different function. If the door uses rose (sectional) trim, no additional trim parts are required for most function conversions. Ordering just the chassis for a function conversion on an escutcheon-trim installation and not ordering the matching escutcheon set for the new function leaves the job incomplete and the door with mismatched trim.
 

The L9050 Universal Case: The Most Important Inventory Item

 

Schlage designed the L9050 universal case to be transformed into nine different L Series functions by adding specific conversion components. This is the single most important piece of knowledge for facilities managers who maintain large L Series inventories.

A facility stocking the L9050 universal case can reconfigure it for passage, entrance/office, classroom, storeroom, and other functions using the Schlage Universal Transformation Guide (document 109436). The guide specifies exactly which additional parts are required for each function conversion. This approach eliminates the need to stock nine separate configured cases and eliminates the lead time required to order an uncommon factory-configured function combination.

The transformation requires only a few additional parts per function change, typically a chassis conversion kit and potentially trim components. The labor time is minimal for a locksmith familiar with the L Series. For facilities with 50-plus L Series locks across multiple functions, this single knowledge point eliminates thousands of dollars in stocked inventory and weeks of lead time across the building's service life.

 

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage L Series

 

Lock Case (Chassis)

The Schlage L Series chassis (also called the lock case or case body) is the cast iron or steel housing that lives inside the mortise pocket. The chassis contains the latchbolt mechanism, the auxiliary deadlatch plunger, the deadbolt (on applicable functions), the spindle hubs, the cylinder cam track, and the internal function mechanism. The base chassis for L9050 is part L283-133. The LV-series Vandlgard chassis substitutes the standard function mechanism with the Vandlgard clutch assembly that prevents forced lever torque from engaging the deadbolt or latch.

Chassis replacement is required when the internal mechanism fails, when a function change is needed on an ND-style installation, or when the case sustains physical damage from a break-in attempt. Chassis replacement requires door disassembly, which typically means removing the levers, roses or escutcheons, through-bolts, and the case itself from the mortise pocket. Always verify the backset (2-3/4 inch standard on L Series) and door thickness accommodation before ordering a replacement case.

 

Latchbolt Assembly

The latchbolt is the beveled spring bolt that extends from the lock case and clicks into the strike plate when the door closes. On the Schlage L Series, the standard latchbolt is a two-piece deadlocking latchbolt with a separate auxiliary plunger alongside the main bolt. The auxiliary plunger, when depressed by the strike plate face on door closing, deadlocks the latchbolt against being retracted from the latch edge by a shimming tool or card.

The two-piece construction means the main bolt and the auxiliary plunger are separate components within the latchbolt assembly. If the auxiliary plunger fails to depress or return correctly, the deadlocking function is compromised even though the latch itself still operates normally. This is a silent failure: the door latches and appears secure but the deadlocking protection is absent. Inspect the auxiliary plunger on any L Series installation where security has been questioned, even if the latch seems to operate normally.

 

Armor Front (Armored Front / Scalp Plate)

The armor front is the hardened steel face plate visible on the door edge that covers the mortise case opening. It presents the latchbolt and deadbolt holes aligned with the case components below, and it resists pry, drill, and chisel attacks on the lock body. The Schlage L Series armor front is 1-1/4 inch by 8 inch and adjustable for door bevel.

Armor fronts are finish-specific and function-specific. The Schlage part 09-663 in 626 (satin chrome) finish covers the L9050, L9056, L9060, L9070, L9071, L9080, and L9082 functions. Part 09-666 covers a different configuration. Ordering an armor front without confirming the finish code and function produces a part that either does not fit or does not match the door hardware. Always pull both pieces of information from the installed hardware before ordering.

 

Spindle and Hub Assembly

The spindle is the square connecting rod that passes through the case and links the inside and outside levers. The hub is the internal component that connects the spindle to the case mechanism and holds the lever return springs. The lever return springs in the hub are sized to provide approximately 2 pounds of return force at the lever tip. When these springs fatigue, the lever droops below horizontal even with no other visible damage to the lock.

The Schlage L Series uses a security blocking hub that prevents gaining access to the lock mechanism by removing the levers. On locks where this is not a concern, a standard hub is fitted. Vandlgard versions use a hub with a clutch mechanism that allows the outside lever to rotate freely without engaging the mechanism when excessive torque is applied, preventing the forced-lever attack that can defeat a standard L Series lock in some configurations.

 

Mortise Cylinder and Cylinder Cam

The mortise cylinder screws into the case face and drives the deadbolt cam. The cylinder body is threaded at approximately 1.156 inch diameter with 32 threads per inch. Standard L Series cylinders include the Everest 29 S123 patented keyway in 6-pin conventional format. The cam is the component on the back of the cylinder that engages the deadbolt throw mechanism inside the case.

Cylinder cam replacement is one of the most frequently misunderstood service tasks on mortise locks. The cam must match both the cylinder type and the function. The Schlage L583-254 cam is used on standard conventional Schlage L Series mortise cylinders. The L583-446 cam is for Schlage modular mortise cylinders. The K510-730 cam is the standard cam for IC housings and works across Schlage IC configurations, Falcon non-deadbolt functions, and several other manufacturer applications. Using the wrong cam on a mortise cylinder produces a lock that either cannot throw the deadbolt or throws it only in one rotation direction.

 

Thumbturn Assembly

The thumbturn (T-turn) is the interior control that throws the deadbolt on applicable L Series functions. The Schlage part 09-509 T-turn fits doors from 1-3/8 inch to 1-7/8 inch thick with a rose diameter of approximately 1-3/4 inch. Thumbturn replacement is required when the thumbturn becomes stiff, when the internal cam connection wears and the turn no longer throws the deadbolt cleanly, or when the turn is damaged by abuse or attempted tampering. Always confirm door thickness before ordering a thumbturn replacement to ensure the correct depth is specified.

 

Lever Return Spring

The lever return spring (Schlage part L283-040 for the L Series) provides the return force that brings the lever back to horizontal after it is depressed. This is the highest-wear component in the L Series hub assembly and fails through fatigue on high-traffic doors. Lever sag is the primary symptom. The lever return spring is available individually and is far less expensive than replacing the full hub assembly. Replace the spring first before assuming the hub or spindle requires replacement.

 

Strike Plate

The L Series strike is the steel plate mortised into the door frame that receives the latchbolt and deadbolt. The standard L Series strike is a full-length plate matching the 8-inch armor front. Strike replacement is needed when the bolt pockets deform from extended high-traffic use, when the door has settled and the bolt pockets no longer align with the bolts, or when the frame is repaired and the original strike prep is modified. Always confirm whether the strike is a standard or a high-security box strike before ordering.

 

Falcon MA Series: The High-Traffic Value Mortise Lock

The Falcon MA Series is the Grade 1 mortise lock positioned below the Schlage L Series in price but at the same ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certification level for both operational and security performance. It meets ANSI A156.13 Series 1000 Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims and conventional mortise cylinders. It is UL listed for 3-hour fire doors under both UL 10B neutral pressure and UL 10C positive pressure testing, the same fire listing as the L Series.

 

Falcon MA Series Key Specifications

 

SpecificationDetail
ANSI ratingA156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational and Security
Fire ratingUL 10B, UL 10C, UBC 7-2 (3-hour fire door)
LatchboltTwo-piece stainless steel, mechanical anti-friction bolt, 3/4 inch projection, field reversible
SpindleIndependent, breakaway design at maximum 480 in-lb to protect chassis
Armor front1-1/4 inch by 8 inch, brass or stainless steel, adjustable for door bevel, reinforced with heavy gauge steel stabilizing ribs
Backset2-3/4 inch standard
Door thickness1-3/4 inch to 1-7/8 inch standard
Cylinder format6-pin solid brass conventional, 5-pin keyed standard. SFIC available in 6 or 7-pin.
Cylinder keywayFalcon G keyway on conventional cylinders. A keyway on IC cores.

 

Falcon MA Series Spindle Breakaway

The Falcon MA Series uses independently mounted spindles designed to break away at a maximum of 480 inch-pounds of torque. This is the Falcon equivalent of the Schlage Vandlgard function: when someone applies excessive forced torque to the outside lever in an attempt to retract the latch or deadbolt, the spindle detaches from the chassis before that force reaches the internal mechanism. The chassis remains intact and functional. The spindle requires replacement after a breakaway event, but the chassis and all other components are preserved.

This matters for parts ordering. After a forced entry attempt on a Falcon MA Series installation where the door resisted entry, the spindle is likely broken or detached even if the door looks fine from the outside. Always check the spindle engagement when servicing an MA Series lock that has experienced a forced entry attempt. A loose or rattling lever with a firm chassis is the diagnostic sign of a broken spindle.

 

Falcon MA Series Cylinder Compatibility

The Falcon MA Series accepts cylinders from multiple sources. Conventional cylinders ship with the Falcon G keyway standard. SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) cylinders are available in 6-pin or 7-pin configurations and accept Falcon SFIC cores as well as compatible cores from other manufacturers. Schlage Classic cylinders in C, E, and CE keyways operate the Falcon MA Series using the 5622-STD cam, which is a notable cross-brand compatibility feature that simplifies cylinder sourcing on projects where a Schlage key system is already in use.

The cylinder guard (parts A08790 and A08794) accommodates different cylinder lengths and door thicknesses. The correct cam must be specified based on the cylinder type and function. The factory supplies the correct cam when the function and door thickness are specified at order time. On field replacements, always confirm which cam is installed before ordering a replacement cylinder, as mismatching the cam to the cylinder produces a lock that operates in only one direction.

 

Falcon MA Series Functions

The Falcon MA Series uses a different function coding system from the Schlage L Series but covers similar ANSI function categories. Common functions include MA101 (passage), MA301 (privacy), MA381 (entrance), MA461 (classroom), and MA481 (storeroom). All function codes in the MA Series follow the pattern MA + function number + keyway/cylinder designation. When ordering replacement parts for the MA Series, confirm the MA function code from the label on the case body before selecting any chassis, latchbolt, or trim component.

 

Mortise Lock vs Cylindrical Lock: When Does Mortise Make Sense?

Mortise locks cost significantly more than cylindrical locks to purchase and install. They require a deeper and more complex door preparation. Parts are more function-specific and more expensive per component. Despite all of this, mortise locks are the correct specification in specific contexts where their advantages justify the cost.

 

FactorMortise LockCylindrical Lock
Deadbolt integrationDeadbolt integrated into case on applicable functionsSeparate deadbolt required for deadbolt security
Anti-shim protectionAuxiliary deadlatch plunger standard on most functionsDeadlatch feature present on commercial Grade 1 models
Attack resistanceConcealed mechanism, harder to attack from exteriorMechanism partially exposed at bore through door
Service life3 to 5x longer than cylindrical in commercial useStandard commercial service life
Function flexibility40-plus functions on L Series, electrified options extensive24 functions on ND Series Grade 1
Installation complexityHigher. Requires mortise pocket, precise alignmentLower. Standard cylindrical bore prep
Parts costHigher. Function-specific, finish-specific componentsLower. More universal components across functions

 

Mortise locks are correctly specified on main building entries, secured office suites, healthcare patient area doors where tamper resistance is required, government facility doors, and any opening that justifies the higher purchase cost through extended service life. For interior corridor doors, storage rooms on lower-security floors, and any door where Grade 2 performance is sufficient, browse the cylindrical lock parts catalog for Schlage ALX Series or Falcon T Series alternatives that serve the application at lower cost.

 

How to Identify Your Mortise Lock Before Ordering Parts

The correct identification process for mortise lock parts ordering requires three pieces of information, all of which come from the installed hardware.

 

Find the Model Number on the Case

Remove the inside lever and rose or escutcheon to expose the lock face. The model number (L9080, LV9070, MA481) is stamped or labeled on the case face or on the armor front. On Schlage L Series, the LV prefix confirms a Vandlgard chassis. On Falcon MA Series, the MA prefix and function number identify the model. Do not order parts based on the door hardware appearance alone. A standard L9080 and an LV9080 Vandlgard look identical from the outside but use different internal components.

 

Confirm the Cylinder Type

The cylinder type (conventional, FSIC, SFIC, less cylinder) determines which cam is installed and which replacement cylinders are compatible. Conventional cylinders have a solid body with a visible keyway. IC cylinders have a removable core with a control key function. The P, R, L, or C suffix in the model number confirms the original cylinder specification. If the label is worn, remove the cylinder and measure the body diameter and check whether a core is present.

 

Note the Finish Code and Door Handing

Armor fronts, levers, roses, and escutcheons are finish-specific. The finish code is typically a three-digit number (626 = satin chrome, 619 = satin nickel, 613 = oil rubbed bronze). On Falcon MA Series, the door handing must also be specified for most keyed functions because the chassis is handed. Schlage L Series locks are non-handed for most standard functions, but some specialized function configurations require hand specification.

 

SecurityParts.com organizes both series in the mortise lock parts catalog by brand and series with interactive exploded diagrams on every model. For the complete Schlage hardware catalog including L Series, ND Series, and B Series deadbolts, browse the Schlage commercial hardware parts catalog. For Falcon hardware including MA Series mortise locks and T Series cylindrical locks, browse the Falcon commercial hardware parts catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Mortise Lock Parts

Function-specific diagrams, cylinder cam guidance, L9050 universal case knowledge, and same-day shipping on stocked components.

 

Function Code Guidance

Armor front, chassis, latchbolt, and cam are all function-specific. We document which part applies to which function so you do not receive a physically fitting part that does not operate correctly.

 

L9050 Universal Case

We document the universal transformation capability of the L9050 case. Facilities that know this stock one case type instead of nine and reduce inventory costs significantly.

 

Cross-Brand Cylinder Support

Falcon MA Series accepts Schlage Classic cylinders with the 5622-STD cam. We document this compatibility so you do not need to maintain separate cylinder inventories for mixed-brand buildings.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most L Series and MA Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. A failed mortise lock on a secured entry is not a problem that waits a week for parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order confirmation.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Mortise Lock Parts

  • We document the auxiliary deadlatch plunger alignment requirement. Strike misalignment greater than 1.5mm vertical defeats deadlocking without any visible symptom. This field fact prevents misdiagnosed latchbolt replacements that do not fix the actual problem.
  • We document the L9050 universal case transformation capability. Facilities managers who know this use one case type for nine functions instead of stocking nine separate cases. No other parts supplier explains this in their buyer-facing content.
  • We document the Falcon MA Series spindle breakaway mechanism. A loose lever after a forced entry attempt means spindle replacement, not chassis replacement. Ordering the less expensive spindle instead of a full chassis saves significant cost on post-incident repairs.
  • We document the Schlage Classic cylinder cross-compatibility on Falcon MA Series using the 5622-STD cam. Buildings with mixed L Series and MA Series locks can use one cylinder inventory rather than two.
  • We carry Schlage and Falcon mortise lock parts alongside cylindrical lock parts, deadbolt parts, and door closer parts. One order services the complete commercial door opening.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Mortise locks are part of a complete commercial door opening. The main entry door that has an L Series mortise lock also has a door closer, often an electric strike or exit device, and sometimes alarm hardware on the same opening or building.

For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on doors that use a separate deadbolt alongside a mortise lock on a secondary opening, browse the deadbolts catalog. For Schlage ND Series, ALX Series, and Falcon T Series cylindrical lock parts on interior doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled entries in the same building, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same facility, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any door in the facility with automatic closing hardware, browse the door closers catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Falcon, Von Duprin, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Mortise Lock Parts

 

What mortise lock series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and interactive diagrams for the Schlage L Series Grade 1 mortise lock and the Falcon MA Series Grade 1 mortise lock. Both series have dedicated model pages organized by function code with exploded diagrams for visual part confirmation before ordering.

 

What is the Schlage L Series function code and why does it matter for parts ordering?

The function code identifies how the lock operates: which side is always free, which side is keyed, whether a deadbolt is present. Common codes include L9010 (passage), L9050 (entrance/office), L9070 (classroom with full deadbolt), and L9080 (storeroom, outside lever always locked). The function code determines which chassis, latchbolt, armor front, and cylinder cam are correct. Parts across different function codes are not interchangeable even when the cases appear identical.

 

What is the L9050 universal case and why is it important?

The Schlage L9050 universal case can be transformed into nine different L Series functions using specific conversion parts per the Schlage Universal Transformation Guide. A facility stocking the L9050 can reconfigure it for multiple functions without ordering nine separate configured cases. This eliminates significant inventory carrying cost and lead time for uncommon function combinations. It is the most important single inventory knowledge point for facilities maintaining large L Series installations.

 

What is the difference between the armor front and the latch front on a mortise lock?

The armor front (armored front/scalp plate) is the hardened steel face plate on the door edge covering the mortise case and resisting pry and drill attacks. It is finish-specific and function-specific. The latch front is the internal component housing the latchbolt mechanism inside the case. Both are separate replaceable parts. The Schlage L Series armor front part 09-663 fits L9050, L9056, L9060, L9070, L9071, L9080, and L9082 functions in the 626 satin chrome finish.

 

Can the Falcon MA Series accept interchangeable core cylinders?

Yes. The Falcon MA Series accepts SFIC cylinders compatible with Falcon and some other manufacturers' cores. The core removes by rotating the control key and pulling gently, enabling immediate rekeying without disassembling the lock. SFIC cylinders are available in 6-pin or 7-pin configurations. Schlage Classic cylinders in C, E, and CE keyways also operate the MA Series using the 5622-STD cam.

 

What causes drooping levers on a mortise lock and how do I fix it?

Drooping levers are most commonly caused by fatigued lever return springs in the hub assembly. The springs provide approximately 2 pounds of return force at the lever tip and fatigue over extended service. Replace the lever return spring (Schlage L283-040) before assuming the hub or spindle requires replacement. On Falcon MA Series, also check whether the spindle breakaway has engaged after a forced entry attempt, as a detached spindle produces a loose lever that requires spindle replacement, not spring replacement.

Schlage ND Series, ALX Series and Falcon T Series Cylindrical Lock Parts Guide

SecurityParts.com carries parts for three commercial cylindrical lock series: the Schlage ND Series Grade 1 (24 mechanical functions, beyond-Grade-1 strength), the Schlage ALX Series Grade 2 (single modular chassis, field function change), and the Falcon T Series Grade 1 (extra heavy-duty, accepts any manufacturer's cylinder). The function code determines the correct chassis, spring cage, and trim components. Never order parts by appearance alone. The ND Series and ALX Series share lever styles for visual suiting but use different chassis and function kits. Parts that fail first are the spring cage, latch, and cylinder. Always confirm function code and manufacture date before ordering.

Commercial cylindrical locks are on more doors per building than any other lock category. Office corridors, storage rooms, restrooms, classrooms, patient rooms, server closets. Every one of those doors has a chassis, a latch, a spring cage, a cylinder, levers, and a strike. When one component wears or fails, replacing it correctly the first time depends entirely on having the right series and function code before you open any catalog page.

SecurityParts.com stocks parts for the three most widely installed commercial cylindrical lock series: the Schlage ND Series, the Schlage ALX Series, and the Falcon T Series. This guide covers every component, the function codes that determine which parts you need, what fails first, and how to order without a return. Browse the complete cylindrical lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams on every model.

24 Mechanical functions available in the Schlage ND Series
3,100 in-lb Abusive lever torque resistance on the Schlage ND Series
Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA rating on both the ND Series and Falcon T Series
1,600 lbs Offset lever pull resistance on the Schlage ND Series
 

The Three Series at Security Parts: How They Compare

Schlage ND Series

 

Grade 1 | Beyond-Grade-1 Strength

The strongest-selling commercial cylindrical lock in North America. 24 mechanical functions. Withstands 3,100 in-lb of abusive lever torque, 2.5x the Grade 1 standard. 1,600 lb offset lever pull resistance. Supports conventional, FSIC, and SFIC cylinder formats. Available with Vandlgard anti-ligature protection on all locking functions.

Schlage ALX Series

 

Grade 2 | Modular Field-Configurable

Single patented chassis design supports most functions and all cylinder applications. In-field function change without ordering a new lock. Grade 1 compression springs prevent lever droop. Stainless steel latchbolt. 5-point spindle engagement. Field-selectable Vandlgard on all locking functions. Suites visually with ND Series levers.

Falcon T Series

 

Grade 1 | Extra Heavy Duty

Extra heavy-duty Grade 1 cylindrical lock with Pressure Release lever rotation standard to protect internal components under excessive force. Accepts any manufacturer's cylinder including Schlage, Sargent, and Corbin Russwin. Compression spring eliminates lever sag. 3-hour UL fire rated. Suited for government, military, institutional, and high-abuse applications.

The suiting strategy nobody explains clearly: The Schlage ND and ALX Series are specifically designed to suite visually. Use ND Grade 1 on exterior entry doors, secured offices, server rooms, and any opening requiring Grade 1 performance. Use ALX Grade 2 on storage, interior corridors, and lower-traffic interior doors where budget matters. Both series share the same lever designs and finishes, so the building maintains a consistent visual appearance while the hardware grade matches the security requirement of each individual opening.
 

Schlage ND Series: Understanding Function Codes Before Ordering Parts

The ND Series function code is the most critical piece of information needed before any parts order. The function code determines the chassis configuration, the spring cage type, and which trim components are compatible. Ordering a spring cage or adjustment plate from the wrong function creates a non-functional lock even when the physical parts fit together.

 

The Most Common ND Series Functions in Commercial Buildings

 

Function CodeANSI DesignationHow It WorksTypical Application
ND10PassageBoth levers always free. No locking.Closet doors, non-secure corridors
ND40F76 PrivacyInside push button locks outside lever. Emergency turn release from outside.Restrooms, private offices, ADA-compliant privacy
ND44Hospital PrivacyIndicator on inside shows room status. Key override from outside.Healthcare patient rooms, behavioral health
ND50F82 Entrance/OfficePush button locks outside lever until unlocked by key or inside lever.Private offices, executive suites, retail entry
ND53F109 EntranceTurn/push button locks outside lever. Key required to unlock (inside lever does not release).Secured offices, admin areas requiring key-only unlock
ND60F88 VestibuleKey in outside lever locks/unlocks it. Inside lever always free.Vestibule entry doors, building lobby control points
ND70F84 ClassroomOutside lever locked by key from outside only. Inside lever always free for immediate egress.K-12 and higher ed classrooms (standard classroom lockdown)
ND73F90 CorridorKey retracts latch from outside. Inside lever always free.Corridor doors on egress paths
ND80F86 StoreroomOutside lever always locked, key required. Inside lever always free.Storage rooms, server rooms, secure supply areas
 
The Vandlgard function ordering mistake: ND70 (standard classroom) and ND94 (Vandlgard classroom) look identical in the door after installation. The parts are not interchangeable. If a building was specified with ND94 Vandlgard and a non-Vandlgard spring cage or chassis is ordered for a repair, the anti-ligature protection is compromised. Always pull the function code from the original specification or the label on the chassis before ordering any internal component.
 

Vandlgard: What It Is and Why It Matters for Parts Ordering

Vandlgard is a Schlage-patented feature that prevents forced lever torque from retracting the latch. On a standard ND Series lock, applying enough sustained downward force to the outside lever can, in some cases, retract the latch through the mechanical connection between the lever and the chassis. Vandlgard adds a clutch mechanism that breaks the lever-to-chassis connection before that force threshold is reached, while the lever can still operate normally when the door is unlocked.

Vandlgard function suffixes are ND91 (entrance/office), ND92 (entrance), ND94 (classroom), ND96 (storeroom), and ND97 (corridor). The Vandlgard function is field-selectable on the ALX Series, which means you can enable or disable it without ordering a different lock. On the ND Series, the Vandlgard feature is built into the function-specific chassis and cannot be retrofitted to a standard chassis without replacing the chassis assembly.

Most current institutional specifications for K-12, higher education, and healthcare require Vandlgard on classroom, storeroom, and secured office functions. If your building was originally specified with Vandlgard functions, all replacement parts must be sourced for the Vandlgard version of that function, not the standard version.

 

Every Replaceable Component in Commercial Cylindrical Locks

Chassis Assembly

The chassis is the internal mechanism housing that sits inside the door bore and contains the locking mechanism, the spindle engagement, and the spring return components. The chassis determines the function of the lock. It is not universal across functions on the ND Series. An ND50 chassis is configured differently from an ND70 or ND80 chassis, even though they look similar from the outside.

The Schlage ND Series chassis is zinc and steel with zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Door thickness accommodation is 1-3/4 inch standard with spacer kits available for 1-3/8 inch through 1-11/16 inch doors. The ALX Series uses a single chassis design that accommodates most functions, which is its key advantage for inventory management: one chassis type covers most of a building's lock schedule.

Replace the chassis when the internal mechanism fails to hold the locked state, when the spindle has developed severe play that cannot be addressed by spring cage replacement, or when a function conversion is required on the ALX Series. On the ND Series, function changes require a complete chassis replacement along with matching trim.

 

Spring Cage Assembly

The spring cage holds the lever in the horizontal position and provides the return force that brings the lever back after it is depressed. This is the most frequently replaced component on high-use cylindrical locks. Spring cage failure presents as lever sag, lever that does not return fully after being depressed, or a lever that rattles in the horizontal position.

Both Schlage ND and ALX Series use Grade 1 compression springs in the spring cage assembly specifically to resist lever droop under sustained use. The Falcon T Series uses a compression spring behind the cylinder that serves a similar function. When replacing a spring cage, confirm whether the outside or inside spring cage is failing before ordering. Both sides have their own spring cage assembly and they are not interchangeable with each other.

Diagnostic test before ordering a spring cage: Grip the lever and manually push it upward from below. A failing spring cage will feel as if it has almost no resistance before reaching the horizontal stop position. A functioning spring cage will feel firm from the moment you begin pushing upward. This test takes 5 seconds and confirms the spring cage diagnosis before ordering, preventing the more expensive mistake of ordering a full chassis assembly when only the spring cage needs replacement.
 

Latch Assembly

The latch is the spring-loaded bolt that extends from the door edge and clicks into the strike plate on the frame. On commercial cylindrical locks, the standard latch is a deadlatch, not a simple spring latch. A deadlatch has a plunger alongside the latch bolt that, when depressed by the strike plate on closing, prevents the latch bolt from being pushed back by a credit card or similar tool from the latch side of the door.

The Schlage ND Series default latch is part 13-247 with a 2-3/4 inch backset and 1-1/8 inch by 1-1/4 inch faceplate. The Falcon T Series default latch is part 23981145, a deadlatch with 2-3/4 inch backset and 1-1/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch square corner faceplate. Always confirm the backset (2-3/4 inch standard, 2-3/8 inch available) before ordering a latch replacement.

Latch failures on commercial cylindrical locks include the latch not retracting smoothly when the lever is depressed, the latch bolt not springing back after depression, and the deadlatch plunger binding or not depressing correctly. A latch that does not retract when the lever operates normally indicates the latch has failed, not the chassis. A latch that retracts but the lever feels stiff typically indicates the spring cage, not the latch.

 

Strike Plate

The standard ND Series strike is part 10-025, an ANSI curved lip strike, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch, no box. The Falcon T Series default strike is part 5164, ANSI 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch with 1-3/16 inch lip length. The ALX Series uses the same ANSI curved lip strike as the ND Series.

Strike replacement is required when the strike is damaged by door misalignment, when the latch bolt fails to engage cleanly due to strike wear, or when a door handing change requires a different strike orientation. An ANSI box strike is used when hollow metal frame reinforcement is required. Always measure the existing frame cutout before ordering a strike replacement to confirm whether a standard or box strike fits the existing frame preparation.

 

Cylinders and Cylinder Formats

All three series at SecurityParts.com support multiple cylinder formats. Understanding the cylinder format installed is essential before ordering any cylinder replacement.

 

Cylinder FormatAbbreviationDescriptionBest Application
ConventionalStandardStandard pinned cylinder, 6-pin. Rekeyed by pulling and repinning.Small to medium facilities with stable occupancy
Full-Size Interchangeable CoreFSICCore removed and replaced without disassembling the lock. Standard ANSI size.Campuses and large facilities with frequent rekeying needs
Small Format Interchangeable CoreSFICSmaller core, used in Best SFIC and compatible systems.Facilities with an existing SFIC key system
Less Cylinder (LC)LCOrdered without any cylinder. Customer supplies their own.Facilities with proprietary key systems or restricted keyways

 

The Falcon T Series is specifically designed to accept cylinders from competing manufacturers including Sargent and Corbin Russwin in addition to Schlage. Some cylinders require modification of the lock for proper fit. Always specify the cylinder manufacturer when ordering a T Series with a non-standard cylinder.

 

Levers, Roses, and Trim

Levers on the ND Series are available in 9 designs including Athens, Rhodes, Sparta, Saturn, Broadway, Latitude, and Omega styles. The ALX Series shares these same lever designs, which is the visual suiting feature that allows mixed Grade 1/Grade 2 buildings to maintain a consistent appearance. Levers are pressure cast zinc finished to match mating parts.

The rose is the circular cover plate that conceals the chassis bore and the mounting screws on each side of the door. The ND Series rose is 3-7/16 inch standard diameter. The ALX Series rose is 3-7/16 inch standard, matching the ND Series for a seamless appearance when both are installed in the same building.

On the ALX Series, an optional break-away feature is available on Rhodes levers for most locking functions. When excessive torque is applied, the handheld portion of the lever breaks away from the shank, protecting the internal chassis from the torque damage that would otherwise require chassis replacement. This is a documented X Factor feature of the ALX Series and worth specifying on doors that receive frequent abuse.

 

Schlage ALX Series: The Modular Advantage and What It Means for Parts

The ALX Series modular design is the most significant feature for facilities managers and locksmiths who maintain large building inventories. A single chassis type supports most functions and all cylinder applications. This means a building can stock one chassis type and change functions in the field when a room's use changes, rather than ordering a new configured lock for every function change.

 

How In-Field Function Change Works

The ALX Series function is determined by a separate function kit that drops into the chassis. Changing from an ALX50 office function to an ALX70 classroom function requires the ALX70 function kit, not a new lock. The chassis stays. The lever stays. Only the function kit changes. This approach reduces inventory carrying costs, eliminates lead time waiting for factory-configured stock, and lets locksmiths carry a small number of kits on their truck rather than multiple configured lock units.

The installation sequence is designed for this: drop in the interior lever, install the function into the chassis, place the chassis in the door bore with the outside lever on the spindle, drop in the latch, drop in the cylinder or exterior function part. The separate compartment packaging keeps parts organized and prevents the small-part loss that often delays field service calls.

 

Captured Screws

The ALX Series uses captured screws in the latch, strike, and inside spring cage. Captured screws are retained in the component and do not fall out when the component is removed from the door. This eliminates the most common cause of rework on cylindrical lock service calls: small screws falling into wall cavities or onto floors during disassembly. On a building with dozens or hundreds of locks being serviced in a single shift, this feature has a real cumulative impact on service time.

 

Falcon T Series: The Multi-Cylinder Advantage and Pressure Release

The Falcon T Series occupies a distinct position in the cylindrical lock market. It is Grade 1 extra heavy-duty, designed for the highest-abuse institutional applications including government and military facilities, correctional housing, and any environment where locks receive deliberate physical attack rather than normal use.

 

Pressure Release Lever Rotation

The Falcon T Series includes Pressure Release lever rotation as a standard feature. When excessive torque is applied to the outside lever beyond the normal operating range, the lever rotates to a stop position that breaks the mechanical connection to the chassis rather than transmitting that force into the internal mechanism. This prevents the internal chassis damage that requires replacement after a forced entry attempt. The Pressure Release mechanism returns to normal operation after the excessive force is removed, without requiring any parts replacement, which is what makes it a standard feature rather than a consumable component.

 

Universal Cylinder Acceptance

The Falcon T Series is designed and marketed specifically on its ability to accept cylinders from competing manufacturers. In retrofit applications, this means a facility with an existing Corbin Russwin or Sargent key system can install T Series locks and retain their existing key system without rekeying. The T Series ships with 6-pin chambers drilled in 5-pin configuration as standard. 6-pin pinning is available at no extra cost when specified at ordering. This cylinder flexibility is the primary reason the T Series is specified on government and military retrofit projects where key system continuity is a security requirement.

 

Parts That Fail First: Realistic Replacement Frequency

Here is the actual field replacement order across all three series based on service call frequency.

1. Spring cage assembly. The most common replacement item on cylindrical locks with more than five years of high-traffic use. Lever sag, incomplete lever return, and lever rattle all trace to spring cage fatigue. Always try spring cage replacement before ordering a chassis.

2. Latch assembly. Latch bolts wear at the tip from repeated contact with strike plates that are slightly misaligned. The deadlatch plunger binding is a specific failure mode on latches that have been in service for more than 10 years without lubrication. Latches are inexpensive individual components and should be replaced rather than lubricated repeatedly once wear is visible on the bolt tip.

3. Cylinder. Cylinders wear from key insertion, especially in high-traffic entry doors. Signs of cylinder wear include a key that operates stiffly, a key that only works in one rotational direction, or a cylinder that spins without retracting the latch. FSIC and SFIC cylinders in interchangeable core systems can be replaced in seconds without disassembling the lock. Conventional cylinders require pulling the lock for cylinder removal.

4. Lever assembly. Levers bend, crack, or have their finish worn off from high-contact use. Lever replacement is cosmetic when the lock function is not impaired. Lever replacement is functional when a bent lever fails to return to horizontal or fails to fully depress the chassis mechanism on operation.

5. Strike plate. Strike wear accelerates when the door has settled and the latch bolt contacts the strike lip rather than entering the pocket cleanly. A worn or deformed strike allows a door that feels locked to actually be holdable open with sustained pressure. Strike replacement is inexpensive and should be done proactively when door alignment has been corrected.

 

What nobody else documents about ND Series manufacture dates: Schlage updated the ND Series manufacturing specifications on January 31, 2017. Components manufactured after that date have revised internal geometry in some function configurations. The service manual specifies two separate parts lists: one for locks manufactured before January 31, 2017, and one for locks manufactured after. Always check the manufacture date on the chassis label before ordering internal function components for a Schlage ND Series lock. Ordering a post-2017 spring cage for a pre-2017 chassis can result in a part that fits physically but does not function correctly.
 

How to Identify Your Lock Model Before Ordering

The model label is on the chassis body, visible when the inside lever and rose are removed. The label shows the series designation (ND Series, ALX Series, T Series), the function code (ND70, ALX50, T581), the finish code (626, 622, 619), and the handing if the lock is handed. For Schlage ND Series, the manufacture date is also on this label and is critical for selecting the correct parts revision.

If the label is worn or missing on an older ND Series unit, the function can often be determined by testing: the way the inside and outside levers behave without a key present tells you the function. A lever that is always free on one side and always locked on the other is storeroom (ND80). A lever that locks with a button from inside is entrance/office (ND50). A lever that locks from the outside with a key but the inside is always free is classroom (ND70).

For Falcon T Series locks, the model is stamped or cast into the chassis body itself. Common T Series model codes include T501 (passage), T521 (privacy), T561 (storeroom), T571 (classroom), and T581 (entrance/office).

SecurityParts.com organizes all three series in the cylindrical locks parts catalog by brand and model with interactive exploded diagrams. For Schlage commercial hardware parts including the ND Series, ALX Series, and Schlage B Series deadbolts, browse the Schlage catalog. For Falcon commercial hardware parts including the T Series and Falcon exit devices, browse the Falcon catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Cylindrical Lock Parts

Series-specific diagrams, function code guidance, and same-day shipping on the components that get a building's locks back in service.

Function Code Guidance

We document which parts belong to which function. ND70 Vandlgard vs standard ND70. Pre-2017 vs post-2017 ND Series. These distinctions prevent wrong-part orders that cost time and freight.

Three Series Covered

Schlage ND Grade 1, Schlage ALX Grade 2, and Falcon T Series Grade 1 all on one catalog page with model-specific diagrams. One order covers a full building service call.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most cylindrical lock parts ship same day from US warehouses. A failed classroom or storeroom lock is an operational and security issue that cannot sit open for a week.

 

Pre-Order Support

Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page. Our team confirms series, function, manufacture date, and cylinder format before the order ships.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Cylindrical Lock Parts

  • We document the Schlage ND Series January 31, 2017 specification change. Pre-2017 and post-2017 units require different internal components for some function configurations. No other parts supplier explains this before the order is placed.
  • We distinguish between standard function codes and Vandlgard function codes. ND70 and ND94 are not interchangeable. Parts are listed under the correct function designation so the Vandlgard protection is not inadvertently removed during a repair.
  • The ALX Series modular function-change advantage is documented on our model pages. Facilities managers who do not know about the in-field function kit change continue to order full configured locks when only the function kit is needed.
  • We carry Schlage cylindrical lock parts alongside Schlage L Series mortise lock parts, Schlage B Series deadbolt parts, and Von Duprin exit device parts. One order services the complete building opening.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.
  • 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience behind every pre-order compatibility confirmation.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Cylindrical locks are part of a complete commercial door opening. The complete assembly on most institutional doors also includes a door closer, exit device, or mortise lock at higher-security openings.

For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on high-security and main entry doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on doors that use a deadbolt alongside a cylindrical lock, browse the deadbolts catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any door with automatic closing hardware, browse the door closers catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same building, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled entries, browse the electric strikes catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Falcon, Von Duprin, LCN, and Detex in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Commercial Cylindrical Lock Parts

 

What cylindrical lock series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and interactive diagrams for the Schlage ND Series Grade 1, Schlage ALX Series Grade 2, and Falcon T Series Grade 1 cylindrical locks. All three series have dedicated model pages with exploded diagrams organized by series and function code for visual part confirmation before ordering.

 

What is the difference between the Schlage ND Series and ALX Series?

The ND Series is Grade 1 with 24 mechanical functions and beyond-Grade-1 strength ratings (3,100 in-lb lever torque resistance). The ALX Series is Grade 2 with a single modular chassis that allows in-field function changes without ordering a new lock. Both use Grade 1 compression springs and share the same lever designs and finishes for visual suiting in mixed-grade buildings.

 

What does the Schlage ND function code mean?

The ND function code identifies how the lock operates on each side. ND10 is passage. ND40 is privacy. ND50 is entrance/office with push button. ND70 is classroom with outside key lock only. ND80 is storeroom with always-locked outside lever. Vandlgard versions add anti-ligature protection: ND94 is Vandlgard classroom, ND96 is Vandlgard storeroom. Always confirm the function code before ordering chassis, spring cage, or trim components.

 

What is Vandlgard on the Schlage ND Series?

Vandlgard is a Schlage feature that prevents forced lever torque from retracting the latch. It adds a clutch mechanism that breaks the lever-to-chassis connection under excessive force while allowing normal lever operation when the door is unlocked. Vandlgard functions are designated with specific codes: ND91, ND92, ND94, ND96, ND97. Parts for Vandlgard functions must be ordered for the correct Vandlgard version, not the standard function version.

 

Can the Falcon T Series accept any manufacturer's cylinder?

Yes. The Falcon T Series is designed to accept cylinders from Schlage, Sargent, Corbin Russwin, and other manufacturers. The cylinder removes easily for quick re-keying. Some cylinders require modification to the lock for proper fit. Always specify the cylinder manufacturer when ordering. Standard configuration ships with 6-pin chambers pinned in 5, with 6-pin pinning available at no extra cost when specified.

 

What causes cylindrical lock lever sag and how do I fix it?

Lever sag is caused by spring cage fatigue or spindle wear. Try the diagnostic: grip the lever and push it upward from below. Minimal resistance confirms a failing spring cage. Replace the spring cage assembly first before assuming the chassis has failed. Both Schlage ND and ALX Series use Grade 1 compression springs to resist this failure. Falcon T Series uses a compression spring behind the cylinder that virtually eliminates lever sag in normal service.

Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts: 5100, 6100, 6200 and 6300 Series Complete Guide

Von Duprin electric strikes replace the fixed strike plate on a door frame and allow remote unlocking via access control. The 5100 is medium-duty, the 6100 and 6200 are heavy-duty stainless steel, and the 6300 is a fire-rated no-cut surface-mounted rim strike. Parts that fail most often are the solenoid assembly, the keeper, and the faceplate. Solenoid kits are voltage-specific: part 050237 for 12VDC, part 050240 for 24VDC. Always confirm wire color before ordering a replacement solenoid: black wires mean 24VDC, yellow wires mean 12VDC. Getting this wrong destroys the solenoid immediately.

Electric strikes are the most widely replaced access control hardware component in commercial buildings. Unlike mechanical strike plates, which are passive, an electric strike has a moving keeper, a solenoid, a spring, and electrical connections that all wear, corrode, and fail over time. The Von Duprin electric strike series is the most common in institutional and commercial buildings across North America, installed alongside Von Duprin and Falcon exit devices on virtually every category of egress door.

When one fails, you need the right part fast. A failed electric strike on a secured entry either leaves a door that cannot be locked or a door that cannot be opened from a credential. Both are problems that shut down operations. This guide covers every series, every replaceable component, the fail safe vs fail secure distinction that creates the most field confusion, and the exact diagnostic steps that identify the failed component before you order anything. Browse the complete Von Duprin electric strikes parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for model-specific diagrams on every series.

4 Active Von Duprin electric strike series: 5100, 6100, 6200, 6300
17 Configurations available in the 6200 Series alone
1,500 lbs Static holding force on the 6300 Series
UL 10C 3-hour fire door rating on the 6300 Series (fail secure only)
 

How Von Duprin Electric Strikes Work

A standard mechanical strike plate is fixed. The latch bolt from the door lock clicks into it and stays. An electric strike replaces that fixed plate with a mechanism that includes a movable keeper, called the lip or gate. When the door is closed, the keeper is rigid and holds the latch bolt securely. When an authorized credential or button press energizes the solenoid, the keeper pivots and allows the latch bolt to pass through, letting the door open without anyone touching the lock on the door.

This is the design advantage over fully electrified locksets. The mechanical lock on the door stays completely unchanged. The electric strike handles the access control function at the frame. You can retrofit access control onto existing doors with mechanical locks without replacing the lock itself, which is significantly less expensive and less invasive.

The solenoid is the electrical component that drives the keeper. When powered, it either locks or unlocks the keeper depending on the fail mode configuration. The solenoid connects to an access control panel output relay, a door release button, or a credential reader. The electrical connection is low voltage, typically 12VDC or 24VDC DC, and the wire run from the panel to the frame is carried through the wall or concealed in the frame cavity.

 

The Four Active Von Duprin Electric Strike Series

5100 Series: Medium Duty

An all-in-one boxed solution for rim exit device applications. The 5100 is the entry-level Von Duprin electric strike. Parts include the faceplate package (standard 4-7/8 inch or long 7-11/16 inch), screw package, mounting package, and solenoid replacement kit. The solenoid kit for the 5100 (part 050034) is specific to this series and includes the plunger and plunger spring as a single kit.

 

6100 Series: Heavy-Duty Rim

Heavy-duty stainless steel construction for rim exit device applications. The 6100 is the standard specification for rim exit device openings in commercial and institutional buildings. Compatible with Von Duprin 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 75, 78, 88, and 55 Series rim devices, and Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series rim devices. Uses the 6000 Series solenoid kits (050237, 050239, 050240) shared with the 6200 series.

 

6200 Series: Heavy-Duty, 17 Configurations

The most versatile series in the Von Duprin electric strike lineup. 17 configurations cover cylindrical lock, mortise lock, and rim exit device applications for new construction and retrofit. Integrated faceplates provide cleaner aesthetics. Uses Type A, Type B, Type C, and Offset Box assemblies depending on configuration. The preferred series for new construction projects with frame preparation in the door schedule.

 

6300 Series: Fire-Rated No-Cut

Surface-mounted rim strike requiring no frame cutting or modification. Attaches directly to the door frame stop face. Compatible with most rim exit devices from Von Duprin, Falcon, and other manufacturers. Fail secure only. UL 10C 3-hour fire-rated. Static strength 1500 lbs. Dynamic strength 70 ft-lbs. The correct specification when frame modification is not possible on aluminum storefronts or retrofit projects.

 

Fail Safe vs Fail Secure: The Most Important Decision Before You Order

This is the distinction that causes more wrong-part orders and post-installation failures on electric strikes than any other single factor. Getting it backwards means the door either cannot be secured or cannot be exited, depending on which way it is wrong.

 

Fail Safe (FS): Unlocks When Power is Lost

In a fail safe configuration, the strike is continuously powered to stay locked during normal operation. When power is cut, whether from a power outage, a tripped breaker, or a fire alarm activation, the solenoid releases and the keeper becomes free. The door can be pushed open without any credential. This is the required configuration for any fire-rated egress door where free exit must be maintained at all times, including during a power failure. It is also required for egress paths covered by IBC Chapter 10 where electronic locking is permitted only if the lock releases on fire alarm.

 

Fail Secure (FSE): Stays Locked When Power is Lost

In a fail secure configuration, the strike is energized only momentarily to unlock. During a power failure, the keeper remains rigid and the door cannot be opened without a credential. This is the correct configuration for server rooms, exterior building entries, secure storage areas, and any location where security must be maintained even during a power outage. The Von Duprin 6300 Series is fail secure only, which is required to achieve its UL 10C fire door rating.

 

Fire door rule that competitors rarely explain clearly: On a fire-rated egress door, a fail secure electric strike is only permitted if it is connected to the building fire alarm system and releases automatically on alarm activation. Using a fail secure strike on a fire door without fire alarm integration is a NFPA 101 and IBC code violation. The 6300 Series ships fail secure but requires fire alarm integration on fire-rated assemblies.
 

How to Identify the Fail Mode on an Installed Strike

There is a reliable field test that works on any installed electric strike. Remove power from the strike. Try to open the door by pressing or pulling the exit device. If the door opens without power, the strike is fail safe. If the door stays locked without power, the strike is fail secure. This takes 30 seconds and eliminates any ambiguity from worn or missing labels on the hardware.

For Von Duprin 6100 and 6200 series units, the fail mode can be field-converted between fail safe and fail secure by repositioning the actuator inside the strike body without replacing the solenoid. The 050237 (12VDC) and 050240 (24VDC) solenoid kits are field-selectable between both modes. This conversion capability is one of the most valuable features of the 6000 Series and is documented in the service manual diagrams available on the SecurityParts.com model pages.

 

Every Replaceable Component in Von Duprin Electric Strikes

Solenoid Assembly: The Most Commonly Replaced Component

The solenoid is the electromagnetic coil that converts electrical current into the mechanical movement that drives the keeper. It is the component under the most electrical and thermal stress in normal operation and the one that fails most often in high-use installations.

Von Duprin 6000 Series solenoid kits are voltage-specific. This is the single most important detail in electric strike parts ordering.

 

Part NumberVoltageCompatible SeriesFail ModeWire Color
050034Varies5100 Series onlySeries-specificCheck label
05023712VDC6100 and 6200 SeriesField selectable FS/FSEYellow wires
05023916VDC6100 and 6200 SeriesField selectable FS/FSECheck label
05024024VDC6100 and 6200 SeriesField selectable FS/FSEBlack wires
 
Never swap solenoids by appearance alone. The 12VDC and 24VDC solenoid kits for the 6000 series look physically identical. The only reliable distinguisher is the wire color: yellow wires are 12VDC, black wires are 24VDC. Installing a 24VDC solenoid on a 12VDC system causes slow, incomplete keeper movement. Installing a 12VDC solenoid on a 24VDC system burns the coil immediately and permanently. Always verify wire color and system voltage before ordering.
 

Box Assembly

The box assembly is the metal housing that mounts in the door frame cutout and contains the solenoid, keeper spring, and electrical components. Von Duprin 6100 and 6200 series strikes use several box assembly types depending on the frame configuration and application.

 

Type A Box: Standard box assembly for typical hollow metal frame applications. The most common configuration.

Type B Box: Used on 6200 series mortise and cylindrical applications with specific frame geometry requirements. Type B Box images in the parts manual confirm the installation orientation.

Type C Box: Used on 6100 and 6200 series applications requiring a different frame depth. Available in DS (door status) and DS-LC (door status with latch check) versions that add monitoring capability to the box assembly without a separate monitor switch.

Offset Box: For frame applications where the standard solenoid position creates a conflict with the frame construction. The offset box repositions the solenoid 90 degrees from the standard orientation.

 

Faceplate Package

The faceplate is the visible plate on the frame face that covers the strike body and presents the keeper opening. Von Duprin 5100 series faceplate packages are available in three configurations.

Part 050031: Standard 4-7/8 inch faceplate package for typical commercial frame applications.

Part 050032: Round corner 4-7/8 inch faceplate for frames with rounded corners or decorative trim.

Part 050033: Long 7-11/16 inch faceplate for applications requiring extended coverage of the frame face.

Faceplate packages include the faceplate, wire nuts, and all fasteners required for installation. Always specify the finish when ordering, as faceplates are available in multiple finishes and the finish code is required for the correct part.

 

Keeper (Strike Lip)

The keeper, also called the strike lip or gate, is the moving component that holds the latch bolt when locked and releases when the solenoid is activated. The keeper takes direct mechanical contact from the latch bolt on every door close, which makes it a wear component on high-traffic openings. The correct keeper for each 6200 series model varies because the lip design differs between cylindrical and mortise applications. Always confirm the exact strike model when ordering a keeper replacement.

A keeper with visible wear marks, deformation, or a loose pivot shows up as inconsistent latching or a door that does not feel firmly latched even when the access control system shows it as locked. Replacing the keeper alone is significantly less expensive than replacing the full strike assembly when the box and solenoid are still functional.

 

Screw Package and Mounting Package

Screw Package (PKGSCR.1003 for US32D finish, PKGSCR.1004 for black finish): Includes the #10-24 5/16 inch UFPHMS, 12-24 1/2 inch UFPHMS, 12-14 1 inch UFPHWS, and blue wire nut. Required when reinstalling a strike with damaged or missing original hardware.

 

Mounting Package (PKGMTG.1004 for US32D, PKGMTG.1005 for black): Includes the mounting tab zinc, mounting tab shim nylon, and 10-24 1/2 inch UFPHMS. The mounting tab allows the strike to be positioned horizontally in the frame cutout for precise latch alignment.

 

Solenoid Washer and Solenoid Spring

Part 964037 Solenoid Washer: Seats the solenoid in the box assembly and ensures proper alignment of the plunger. A missing or damaged washer causes solenoid misalignment that results in incomplete keeper movement even when the solenoid itself is functional.

Part 968713 Solenoid Spring: Returns the plunger to its resting position after each activation cycle. Spring fatigue is a legitimate failure mode on doors that are released hundreds of times per day. Symptoms include a keeper that activates correctly but returns slowly or incompletely to the locked position, creating a security gap on fail secure applications.

 

The 6300 Series: What Makes It Different and When to Use It

The 6300 is the only Von Duprin electric strike that requires no frame cutting. Every other series in the Von Duprin lineup requires cutting or modifying the door frame to recess the strike body. The 6300 mounts surface on the frame stop face, which makes it the correct specification in three specific situations where no other series works.

 

When the 6300 Is the Right Choice

Aluminum storefront retrofit: Aluminum storefronts have thermal breaks inside the frame profile. Cutting into the frame to recess a strike destroys the thermal break and compromises the building envelope. The 6300 mounts on the frame face without cutting, preserving the thermal break.

 

Historic preservation projects: Frame modification is not permitted on many historic building projects. The 6300 provides electrified access control without permanent modification to the original frame.

 

Tenant fit-out on leased space: When a tenant cannot modify the building structure, the 6300 delivers access control capability that can be removed at lease end without leaving a frame cutout.

 

6300 Key Specifications

The 6300 is fail secure only. It achieves UL 10C 3-hour fire door rating in the fail secure mode. UL 1034 burglary-resistant and UL 294 access control system listed. Static strength is 1500 lbs. Dynamic strength is 70 ft-lbs. Compatible with 12VDC or 24VDC using the plug-in voltage connectors shipped with the unit. Two voltage connectors ship in the package and only the correct one for the available system voltage is used.

 

6300 Exit Device Compatibility

The 6300 works with a broad range of rim exit devices. Von Duprin compatibility includes the 22/22-F Rim, 33A/35A Rim, 55 Rim, 88/88-F Rim, and 98/99/98-F/99-F Rim. Falcon compatibility includes the 19/19-F Rim, 24/24-F Rim, and 25/25-F Rim. The entry buzzer accessory (part 050242, for fail secure applications) is also compatible with the 6300 and is wired in parallel with the circuit to sound an audible alert when the strike is unlocked remotely.

 

6300 field fact that nobody documents: The 6300 is designed for "indoor use only" unless it is not continuously exposed to an outdoor environment. This means an exterior application where the 6300 is in a covered vestibule or recessed alcove is acceptable. A 6300 on a fully exposed exterior frame in a coastal or high-humidity environment will have a significantly shorter service life due to accelerated corrosion of the surface-mounted components. For fully exposed exterior applications, the 6100 or 6200 series with proper frame prep is the correct specification.
 

Troubleshooting Von Duprin Electric Strike Problems

Before ordering any replacement part, run this diagnostic sequence. Half of all reported electric strike failures are not component failures at all. They are power delivery problems, wiring issues, or latch alignment problems that require no parts whatsoever.

 

Verify Voltage at the Strike Terminals

Use a multimeter and confirm that the correct voltage is arriving at the strike terminals during an access grant signal. For 12VDC systems, confirm 12VDC plus or minus 10 percent. For 24VDC systems, confirm 24VDC plus or minus 10 percent. If voltage is not present at the strike terminals, the problem is upstream in the access control panel, the wiring run, or the power supply. No hardware replacement fixes a wiring or panel problem.

 

Confirm Voltage Matches the Solenoid

Check the wire color inside the strike. Black wires indicate 24VDC. Yellow wires indicate 12VDC. Confirm that the system voltage matches the solenoid voltage. A 12VDC solenoid receiving 24VDC burns immediately. A 24VDC solenoid on a 12VDC system will not actuate fully. This is the most common cause of a brand-new or recently serviced strike that still does not function correctly after replacement.

 

Eliminate Frame Pre-Load

Remove the strike from the frame completely. Apply the correct voltage directly to the strike terminals and observe the keeper. There must be 1/32-inch clearance between the latch bolt and the keeper lip when installed. If the latch bolt presses against the keeper, an internal protrusion prevents the slider from moving even when the solenoid activates correctly. If the strike works outside the frame but not inside it, the problem is latch bolt alignment, not the strike itself.

 

Check the Fail Mode Configuration

If the strike operates oppositely from what is expected, the wrong fail mode is specified. If the door unlocks when it should stay locked during a power cut, the strike is fail safe when it should be fail secure. If the door stays locked when it should free-exit during a power cut, the reverse is true. For 6100 and 6200 series units, the fail mode can be field-converted by repositioning the actuator without replacing the solenoid.

 

Test the Solenoid Directly

Apply the correct voltage directly to the strike terminals with the unit out of the frame. If the keeper does not move with correct voltage and no pre-load, the solenoid has failed and requires replacement. Confirm the solenoid spring and white washer are inside the solenoid body and that the plunger moves freely before concluding the solenoid has failed. A plunger that is stuck or binding due to debris may restore function after cleaning without requiring replacement.

 

Entry Buzzer and AC Rectifier Accessories

Two accessories for the Von Duprin electric strike series are commonly missing from parts orders because they are rarely described in detail anywhere.

 

Entry Buzzer (Part 050242)

The entry buzzer is available for fail secure strike applications only. It mounts in the door frame and wires in parallel with the strike circuit. When the strike is energized to unlock (in a fail secure configuration, this is when the door is being released for entry), the buzzer sounds an audible alert to notify the person inside that someone is requesting entry. This is the standard specification for any secured entry point where the occupant should be aware of remote unlock events. The buzzer is not compatible with fail safe strikes because in fail safe, the strike is powered continuously and the buzzer would sound constantly.

 

AC Rectifier Kits (SO12 and SO24)

Von Duprin electric strike solenoids are DC devices. Some access control panels and power supplies output AC rather than DC. The SO12 kit converts 12VAC to 12VDC for the strike solenoid. The SO24 kit converts 24VAC to 24VDC. These kits are field-installable and plug in-line to the solenoid wiring. If a newly installed strike chatters, hums, or activates erratically despite correct voltage at the terminals, the panel may be outputting AC to a DC solenoid. The SO12 or SO24 rectifier kit is the correct fix, not a solenoid replacement.

 

How to Order Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts Without a Return

Three pieces of information are required before any electric strike parts order.

1. The exact series and model number. The model number is stamped or labeled on the faceplate or on the box housing. Von Duprin 4200, 5100, 6100, 6200, 6300, and 6400 series all use different part numbers for components with the same name. A solenoid kit for the 5100 series (part 050034) is completely different from the 6000 series kit (050237 or 050240). Order by series designation, not by component name.

 

2. The system voltage. Confirm whether the access control panel outputs 12VDC or 24VDC at the lock output. This determines whether you order the 050237 (12VDC) or 050240 (24VDC) solenoid kit. If uncertain, measure with a multimeter during an access grant signal before ordering.

 

3. The fail mode. Confirm fail safe or fail secure before ordering any solenoid, box assembly, or complete strike. Solenoid parts for fail safe and fail secure configurations on the same series are not always interchangeable. The 6100 and 6200 series field-selectable kits cover both modes with the same part number, but the 6300 is fail secure only and no conversion is available.

SecurityParts.com organizes the complete Von Duprin electric strikes parts catalog by series with interactive exploded diagrams. You confirm the exact component visually before ordering. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts

Diagram-based identification, individual part stocking, and same-day shipping on components that cannot wait.

Diagram-Based Part ID

Every Von Duprin electric strike model page has an interactive exploded diagram. See exactly where each component sits before adding it to cart. No guessing from text descriptions.

 

Correct Solenoid Guidance

We document the wire color and voltage difference between the 050237 and 050240 kits. Ordering the wrong voltage destroys the solenoid. We prevent that before the order ships.

 

Same-Day Shipping

A failed electric strike on a secured entry or egress path cannot wait a week. Most Von Duprin electric strike components ship same day from US warehouses.

 

Full Series Coverage

5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 series all on one catalog page. Browse by series and model. One order covers the complete opening.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Electric Strike Parts

  • We document the wire color difference between 12VDC and 24VDC solenoid kits (yellow vs black) so technicians do not destroy a new solenoid with the wrong voltage. No other parts supplier explains this upfront.
  • We explain the field conversion between fail safe and fail secure on 6100 and 6200 series units, which eliminates the need to order a whole new strike when only the fail mode needs to change.
  • We stock individual components including solenoid kits, faceplate packages, screw packages, mounting packages, solenoid washers, and solenoid springs. You do not need to buy a complete strike assembly to replace a single worn keeper or failed solenoid spring.
  • The 6300 outdoor limitation (indoor use only unless not continuously exposed) is documented on our model pages. Ordering the wrong strike for a fully exposed exterior application is prevented at the selection stage.
  • We carry Von Duprin electric strikes alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, LCN door closer parts, and exit alarm parts. One order services the complete door opening.
  • Same-day shipping on stocked parts from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin electric strikes are always part of a larger door opening assembly. The complete opening typically includes an exit device, a door closer, and sometimes a cylindrical or mortise lock on the same door.

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on the same door, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. The electric strike and exit device on a rim-style opening must be matched for latch bolt geometry and throw depth. For Von Duprin parts by series including the 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 75, 88, and Guard-X, browse the Von Duprin brand catalog. For LCN door closer parts on the same commercial door, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on high-security doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex exit alarm parts on secondary exits, browse the exit alarms catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source across all brands in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts

 

What Von Duprin electric strike series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and interactive diagrams for the Von Duprin 5100 Series medium-duty electric strikes, 6100 Series heavy-duty rim exit strikes, 6200 Series heavy-duty strikes for mortise, cylindrical, and rim applications, and 6300 Series fire-rated surface-mounted rim strikes. All four series have dedicated model pages with exploded diagrams for visual part identification before ordering.

 

What is the difference between fail safe and fail secure on a Von Duprin electric strike?

Fail safe unlocks when power is removed. Required on fire-rated egress doors where free exit must always be maintained. Fail secure stays locked when power is removed. Required on secured perimeters where security must be maintained during a power outage. The 6300 Series is fail secure only. The 6100 and 6200 series solenoid kits (050237 for 12VDC, 050240 for 24VDC) are field-selectable between both modes.

 

What solenoid kit do I need for a Von Duprin 6100 or 6200 series electric strike?

Part 050237 for 12VDC systems. Part 050240 for 24VDC systems. Part 050239 for 16VDC AC rectifier applications. Confirm wire color before ordering: yellow wires mean 12VDC, black wires mean 24VDC. Installing the wrong voltage solenoid burns the coil immediately on 24V systems or causes incomplete activation on 12V systems.

 

Why is my Von Duprin electric strike not unlocking when power is applied?

Run the diagnostic in order: confirm correct voltage at the terminals, confirm wire color matches system voltage, remove the strike from the frame to eliminate latch pre-load, test the keeper movement with correct voltage applied directly. If the keeper moves outside the frame but not inside, latch alignment is the problem. If the keeper does not move even with no frame pre-load and correct voltage, replace the solenoid kit.

 

What is the difference between the Von Duprin 6100 and 6200 series electric strikes?

The 6100 is designed specifically for rim exit device applications. The 6200 offers 17 configurations for cylindrical lock, mortise lock, and rim exit device applications, making it the most versatile series in the lineup. The 6200 uses integrated faceplates for cleaner aesthetics and is preferred for new construction where frame preparation is part of the original door schedule.

 

What is the Von Duprin 6300 and when should I use it?

The 6300 is a fire-rated, surface-mounted rim electric strike that requires no frame cutting. It mounts on the frame stop face and is compatible with most rim exit devices from Von Duprin, Falcon, and other manufacturers. Fail secure only. UL 10C 3-hour fire-rated. Use it when retrofitting access control on aluminum storefronts, historic preservation projects where frame modification is not permitted, or tenant fit-outs where the frame cannot be permanently modified.

LCN Door Closer Parts: 4040XP, 4000 Series and Complete Service Guide

LCN door closers use a rack-and-pinion mechanism with hydraulic fluid to control closing speed. The 4040XP is the institutional flagship with cast-iron cylinder, forged steel arm, Liquid X all-weather fluid, Green Dial spring sizing (1 through 6, ships at size 3), and four adjustment valves. Arms are model-specific and not interchangeable between series. A leaking cylinder cannot be refilled in the field. If the sweep valve is fully open and the door still slams, replace the cylinder assembly. Always use the model number stamped on the body, not the body's physical appearance, to identify the correct replacement part.

LCN has manufactured commercial door closers since 1877. Walk through any school, hospital, government building, or office in North America and you will almost certainly pass an LCN closer. They are on more institutional doors than any competing brand, which also means they generate more field service calls than any competing brand.

Most of those service calls come down to the same handful of failures. Hydraulic leaks. Stripped spindles. Broken or bent arms. Valves that no longer hold their settings. Getting the right replacement part fast without a wrong-part return is what determines whether the door is back in service today or next week. This guide covers the complete LCN door closer parts catalog at the field level, starting with what actually fails and ending with how to order correctly.

1877 Year LCN began manufacturing door closers
2M ANSI Grade 1 rated cycles for the 4040XP
Size 1-6 Spring power range on the 4040XP Green Dial
30 Yrs Limited warranty on the LCN 4040XP
 

How LCN Door Closers Work

Every LCN surface-mounted closer operates on the same fundamental principle: a coil spring stores energy when the door opens and releases it to close the door, while hydraulic fluid flowing through calibrated valves controls the speed of that release. Inside the cast-iron body, a rack gear acts as a piston. The pinion shaft connects the rack to the arm outside. When you open the door, the arm rotates the pinion, which drives the rack against the spring. Hydraulic fluid is displaced from one side of the rack to the other through small internal channels with adjustable valve screws.

This is the mechanism that every valve adjustment interacts with. The sweep valve controls how fast fluid moves during the main arc. The latch valve controls the final 10 to 15 degrees. The backcheck valve restricts fluid movement when the door is pushed open hard, creating resistance that protects walls and hardware. None of these valves add or remove force. They only regulate the speed of fluid transfer. If the fluid is gone, no valve setting can correct a slamming or drifting door.

LCN fills every 4040XP with Liquid X all-weather hydraulic fluid, which maintains consistent viscosity from -30 degrees F to 120 degrees F for manual closers. This temperature stability is why the 4040XP performs correctly on exterior doors and vestibules where temperature swings are significant. Standard hydraulic fluid thins in summer heat and causes uncontrolled fast closing on exterior applications.

 

LCN Series Carried at SecurityParts.com

SecurityParts.com stocks replacement parts and interactive diagrams for every major LCN series currently in commercial service. Understanding which series is installed is the first step before any parts order. Browse the full LCN parts catalog to navigate by series.

 

LCN 1000 Series

Surface-mounted closers for light commercial and residential applications. Economy grade. Parts include cylinder assemblies, arm components, and cover plates.

 

LCN 4000 / 4040XP Series

The institutional flagship. Heavy-duty cast-iron body, Liquid X fluid, Green Dial, 30-year warranty. The most widely installed commercial closer in North America.

 

LCN 4210 / 4510 Smoothee

Parallel arm only. The heaviest-duty LCN surface closer. Designed exclusively for push-side parallel arm applications on very high-traffic exterior doors.

 

LCN 2030 / 5030 / 6030 Series

Heavy-duty concealed closers for high-traffic entrances where surface hardware is architecturally unacceptable. Body conceals in the frame transom.

 

LCN 3030 / 3130 Series

Medium-duty concealed closers. The 3030 uses an exposed double-lever arm. The 3130 uses a concealed track arm for minimal visible hardware.

 

LCN 2010 / 5010 Series

Concealed closers that hide both the body in the frame and the track in the door. Used on high-end institutional openings where no hardware is visible.

 

LCN Sentronic Series

Electromagnetic hold-open closers (3130SE, 4040SE, 4310ME, 4410ME). Integrates with fire alarm systems to hold fire and smoke barrier doors open and release automatically on alarm activation.

 

LCN Auto Equalizer Operators

Low-energy automatic operators (2610, 4810, 4820, 4840, 4630, 4640). For ADA-accessible entrances requiring hands-free push-pad or sensor activation.

 

The LCN 4040XP: Every Component Explained

Cylinder Assembly (4040XP-3071)

The cylinder is the heart of the 4040XP. It contains the spring, rack gear, pinion shaft, bearings, and all hydraulic fluid passages. LCN uses a high-strength cast-iron body with a 1.5-inch diameter piston. The pinion shaft on the 4040XP measures 3/4 inch in diameter, which is larger than the original 4040, giving 44 percent more bearing load capacity. This enlarged shaft is the main structural improvement of the XP designation.

When the cylinder leaks, the entire assembly must be replaced. LCN does not supply rebuild seals for field refilling. Trying to top up hydraulic fluid in a leaking 4040XP body does not restore function because the seal that failed will continue to fail. The correct repair is ordering a replacement cylinder assembly (part 4040XP-3071) matched to the finish code on the existing unit.

 

One of the most common field mistakes: Attempting to refill or re-seal an LCN cylinder in the field. LCN closers are not designed for this. Once the cylinder body leaks, order a replacement. Every minute spent trying to patch a leaking body is time the door is operating without hydraulic control.
 

Arm Assembly and Arm Configurations

The arm connects the closer body to the door or frame and is the component most likely to be physically damaged in service. LCN produces several arm configurations for the 4040XP. Choosing the wrong configuration for the mounting position is the most common installation error in the field.

 

Arm TypePart SuffixMounting PositionBest Application
Regular arm-3077Hinge side (pull side) or top jamb (push side)Interior commercial doors, standard offices, corridors
Parallel arm with PA bracket-RW/PAPush side only, arm folds parallel to frameExterior commercial doors, low-profile push-side requirement
Extra duty arm (EDA)-EDAHinge side or push sideHigh-abuse applications, schools, correctional facilities
Hold-open arm-3049HHinge side or top jambOpenings that must stay open at a fixed position
Cush N Stop arm-CUSHHinge side or top jambReplaces mechanical door stop; built-in cushion stop function
Track arm (4040T)-4040THinge side or push side with track railVariable hold-open position; hospital corridors, loading docks
 
Parallel arm sizing rule no one else explains: Parallel arm mounting is mechanically less efficient than regular arm mounting. LCN specifies adding one full spring size to every sizing table recommendation when using parallel arm. If the chart says size 3 for a regular arm on a 36-inch door, use size 4 for the same door in parallel arm. Skipping this adjustment is why parallel arm installations often fail to latch consistently.
 

The Green Dial Spring Power System

The LCN Green Dial is a patented visual indicator on the spring tube that shows the current spring power setting from size 1 through size 6. The 4040XP ships set to size 3, which provides adequate closing force for a standard 36-inch interior door in a regular arm configuration. Adjust with the 5/32-inch hex screw on the spring tube: clockwise increases spring power, counterclockwise decreases it.

Spring sizing is not guesswork. LCN publishes a sizing chart based on door width and mounting configuration. For interior doors up to 36 inches, size 3 is the starting point. For exterior doors from 36 to 48 inches, size 4 to 5. For exterior doors over 48 inches or high wind exposure locations, size 5 to 6. After setting the spring size, always verify ADA compliance with a calibrated force gauge. The dial setting is a starting point, not a guarantee of the actual force measured at the door face because door weight, hinge friction, weather seal drag, and threshold resistance all affect the actual opening force independently of the spring setting.

 

The Four Valve Adjustments

The 4040XP has four adjustment screws on the face of the closer body, labeled for identification. Each controls a different phase of the door's movement. Use a 3/32-inch hex key for the sweep and latch valves. Use the 5/32-inch hex key for the spring power screw. Turn clockwise to decrease speed (slow down), counterclockwise to increase speed.

 

ValveControlsADA RequirementCommon Problem When Wrong
Sweep (S)Door movement from fully open to 10-15 degrees from latchMinimum 5 seconds from 90 degrees to latch pointToo fast: door slams. Too slow: door drifts and fails to latch in drafty conditions
Latch (L)Final 10-15 degrees before the door fully closesMust engage latch bolt positively on every closeToo slow: door does not latch. On fire doors this is a NFPA 80 compliance failure
Backcheck (B)Resistance when door is opened past 70-75 degreesNo direct ADA requirementToo tight: door feels stuck when opening. No backcheck: hardware damage from hard opens
Delayed Action (D)Pause at 70 degrees before sweep phase beginsRecommended for ADA-accessible entrancesOnly available on CYLDEL-configured units. Not present on standard 4040XP
 
Field rule: Never open any valve more than 1.5 full turns from the fully closed position. Opening a valve beyond this point risks stripping the valve seat, causing a hydraulic leak that requires full cylinder replacement. Make adjustments in 1/8-turn increments and test after each adjustment.
 

Cover Plate (4040XP-72 and 4040XP-72-MC)

The 4040XP ships with a snap-fit non-handed plastic cover (part 4040XP-72) that protects the cylinder body and presents a clean finished appearance. The metal cover (part 4040XP-72-MC) is an optional upgrade for applications where the plastic cover is subject to physical abuse or where a more durable appearance is required. The snap-fit retention design on the current 4040XP cover is an improvement over earlier designs that required fasteners at each end.

 

Drop Plates and Mounting Brackets

Drop plates offset the closer body from the standard mounting position to accommodate non-standard door frame geometry, flush ceiling conditions, or narrow top rails that prevent direct mounting. LCN produces several drop plate configurations for the 4040XP. The 4040XP-18PA is the parallel arm drop plate. The 4040XP-18TJ is the top jamb push-side drop plate, which permits 120-degree maximum opening. Specifying the wrong drop plate or omitting one that is actually required causes arm binding, uneven door travel, and accelerated wear on the spindle.

 

Spindle and Bearing Assembly

The spindle connects the arm to the pinion shaft inside the cylinder body. The 4040XP uses full complement low-friction bearings to distribute load evenly across the full bearing race. Spindle wear produces a loose, rattling arm with noticeable play when the door is opened manually. Continuing to operate a closer with a worn spindle puts progressively increasing side load on the cylinder body, which accelerates wear and can eventually damage the housing threads. Spindle replacement is available without replacing the full cylinder assembly.

 

LCN Concealed Closers: 2030, 3030 and 3130 Series Parts

Concealed closers are specified when surface hardware is architecturally unacceptable. The body mounts inside the door frame transom or within the door top rail, making the hardware invisible when the door is closed. These are the closers found in hotel lobbies, high-end office building entrances, healthcare reception areas, and government buildings where the aesthetic standard prohibits visible surface hardware.

 

LCN 2030 / 5030 / 6030 Series

The 2030 Series is LCN's heavy-duty concealed closer for high-traffic applications. The body conceals in the frame transom and the arm track conceals in the door top rail, making all hardware invisible from both sides of the door. The 5010 variant conceals only the body in the frame while using an exposed double-lever arm. The 6030 is sized for heavy doors in demanding institutional environments. Parts include the track assembly, track roller, cylinder assembly, and mounting package. Track rollers on the 2030 series are among the most frequently replaced components because they take direct mechanical contact on every door cycle.

 

LCN 3030 / 3130 Series

The 3030 uses an exposed double-lever arm with the body concealed in the frame transom. The 3130 adds a concealed single-lever arm with a low-friction track and roller assembly, minimizing visible hardware even further. Both carry ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 ratings. Parts for the 3130 include the track roller assembly (part 3130-3034H), cylinder assembly, and arm components. The track roller on the 3130 is a wear item on high-traffic doors and should be inspected during annual fire door maintenance.

 

LCN Sentronic Electromagnetic Hold-Open Closers

The 3130SE, 4040SE, 4310ME, and 4410ME Sentronic series integrate an electromagnetic hold-open coil that connects to the building's fire alarm system. During normal operation, the electromagnetic coil holds the door open. When the fire alarm activates, power is interrupted, the coil releases, and the spring drives the door closed. This is the correct specification under NFPA 80 Section 6.6.1 for fire and smoke barrier doors that must remain open during occupied hours but close automatically on alarm activation. Parts include the magnet assembly (SEM 7800 Series), coil components, and the closer cylinder assembly specific to each Sentronic model.

 

Parts That Fail First on LCN Closers: A Realistic Ranking

After 30-plus years of supplying commercial door hardware parts, we know the actual failure sequence. Here is what breaks, in the order it breaks.

1. Hydraulic cylinder seals: The most common LCN failure in the field. Oil visible on the door frame or floor confirms seal failure. The cylinder must be replaced as a unit. No field repair. No refill. Order the replacement cylinder matched to your model number and finish.

2. Arm assembly: Arms crack, bend, or strip their spindle connection on high-abuse applications. A bent arm causes uneven door travel and rapidly accelerates spindle wear in the cylinder body. Replace the arm before the cylinder sustains secondary damage. Always match the arm suffix to the exact model on the closer body.

3. Spring tension loss: After 10 or more years of continuous use in high-traffic locations, the coil spring loses tension and the door fails to latch consistently. The Green Dial can compensate for minor tension loss, but cannot overcome a spring that has lost its mechanical memory. Cylinder replacement is the correct resolution.

4. Spindle and bearing wear: Produces noticeable arm play and a loose, rattling door. Most common in correctional, healthcare, and educational environments where doors are opened hard repeatedly. Replace before the side loading damages the cylinder body threads.

5. Cover plate damage: Cracks or breaks from deliberate abuse or cart impact on corridor doors. The plastic cover (4040XP-72) is available individually. In high-abuse settings, upgrade to the metal cover (4040XP-72-MC) on replacement.

6. Drop plate and shoe fastener failure: Loose mounting screws cause arm play that looks like spindle wear. Check and tighten all mounting fasteners before ordering spindle components.

 

How to Identify Your LCN Closer Model Before Ordering Parts

The model number is the only reliable identifier for ordering LCN replacement parts. Physical appearance is not sufficient because multiple LCN series look nearly identical from the outside but use different internal components, different arms, and different mounting hardware.

Remove the cover plate (two fasteners at the ends of the cover on most models). The model and finish code are on a sticker attached to the cylinder body. The model number format is typically: series designation, suffix code, and finish code. For example, 4040XP-3077-689 identifies a 4040XP series with a standard regular arm and aluminum finish.

For older units where the sticker has worn off, measure the horizontal center-to-center hole distance on the closer body. LCN body sizes are standardized across production runs, and those dimensions can narrow the identification to a small number of candidates. If the body casting shows numbers like "71" or "320G," those are internal casting marks, not model numbers. They identify the production run, not the series. Always use the sticker model number for parts ordering.

What nobody else tells you: The 4040XP directly replaces and retrofits the older 4041 closer. All 4041 accessories are compatible with the 4040XP body. If you have an older 4041 body that needs arm replacement, current 4040XP arms and accessories will fit. This eliminates the need to carry legacy 4041 inventory for facilities with older installations.
 

LCN Door Closer Adjustment: Step-by-Step

Proper adjustment prevents the most common LCN service calls and extends cylinder life. Follow this sequence for any new installation or post-repair adjustment.

 

Step 1: Set All Valves to a Known Baseline

Turn all adjustment valves clockwise until they seat gently. Do not overtighten. The valve seats are brass and will strip. From fully closed, open each valve 1.5 turns counterclockwise. This is the approximate factory starting position.

 

Step 2: Set Spring Power with the Green Dial

Use LCN's sizing chart to determine the correct spring size for the door width, door weight, and mounting configuration. Set the Green Dial to that position. For parallel arm mounting, add one size. Check the actual opening force with a calibrated force gauge if ADA compliance is required. 5 pounds maximum is the ADA threshold for interior non-fire-rated doors.

 

Step 3: Set Sweep Speed

Open the door to 90 degrees and time the closing arc from 90 degrees to within 3 inches of the latch. ADA requires a minimum of 5 seconds. Adjust the sweep valve in 1/8-turn increments until the timing is correct. Test at least three consecutive closes to confirm consistency.

 

Step 4: Set Latch Speed

Watch the final 10 to 15 degrees before the door closes. The latch should engage cleanly with a firm click, not a slam. If the door stops short of latching, open the latch valve slightly. If it slams in the final arc, close the latch valve slightly. On fire-rated doors, positive latching on every close is a NFPA 80 compliance requirement, not a preference.

 

Step 5: Set Backcheck

Open the door quickly past 70 degrees and feel for resistance. Backcheck should provide a cushioning effect that prevents the door from slamming into a wall, but should not prevent full opening. If backcheck engages before 70 degrees and restricts normal door use, open the backcheck valve slightly. If there is no backcheck at all and the door swings freely to 180 degrees, close the backcheck valve clockwise until resistance is felt at 70 to 75 degrees of opening.

 

Never unscrew any LCN valve more than 1.5 turns from fully closed. Opening a valve beyond 1.5 turns risks hydraulic fluid leaking from the valve bore. A leaking cylinder cannot be refilled. Replacing it costs far more than the few seconds saved by skipping this limit.
 

LCN Sentronic and Fire Door Applications

LCN Sentronic electromagnetic hold-open closers are the correct specification for any fire or smoke barrier door that must remain open during normal building operations. They are not optional convenience items. NFPA 80 Section 6.6.1 specifies that a fire door held open by any device must be connected to the building fire alarm system so it closes automatically on alarm activation.

Using a mechanical wedge, a rubber doorstop, or any manual hold-open device on a fire-rated door is a NFPA 80 violation that creates both a code compliance issue and a liability exposure. The Sentronic series eliminates this problem by integrating the hold-open function into a UL-listed fire door hardware assembly that responds automatically to the fire alarm system.

Parts for Sentronic series closers include the SEM 7800 Series magnet assemblies, the electromagnetic coil components, and the closer cylinder assembly. Browse the full door closers parts catalog for all Sentronic series diagrams and components.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for LCN Door Closer Parts

We stock the full LCN catalog with interactive exploded diagrams so you confirm the right component visually before ordering.

 

Interactive Diagram Lookup

Every LCN model page has an exploded diagram. Click the component, confirm it, add to cart. No guessing from part descriptions alone.

 

Individual Parts Stocked

One arm, one cover plate, one drop plate. No minimum quantities and no forced kit purchases to get a single replacement component.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most LCN parts ship same day from US warehouses. A door out of service on a code-required fire door path is not a situation that waits a week.

 

Pre-Order Support

Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page. We confirm the correct part from your model number before the order ships.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for LCN Parts

  • We stock LCN parts organized by series with separate model pages. The 4040XP, 3030, 3130, 2030, and Sentronic series are each cataloged individually so the correct component is identifiable without guesswork.
  • We document the 4041-to-4040XP retrofit compatibility. If you have an older 4041 body, current 4040XP accessories fit. You do not need to find discontinued 4041 inventory.
  • We explain the parallel arm sizing adjustment that most suppliers omit. Add one full spring size when using parallel arm mounting. This one field fact prevents the most common post-installation latch failure.
  • We carry LCN alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, electric strike parts, and cylindrical lock parts. One order covers a complete institutional door service call.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450, which most facility service call orders reach.
  • 30-plus years of commercial hardware experience. When you describe the symptom, we identify the part, not just the series.
  •  

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

LCN door closers are part of a complete door hardware assembly. A full service call on an institutional door typically involves the closer, the exit device, and sometimes an electric strike or lock hardware on the same opening.

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on the same door, browse the commercial exit devices catalog by brand and series. For Von Duprin electric strike parts including 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 series, browse the electric strikes catalog. For mortise lock parts on high-security doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X exit alarm parts on secondary exits, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Schlage and Falcon cylindrical lock parts on interior office and corridor doors, browse the cylindrical locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, and Detex in a single session, or reach the team at 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About LCN Door Closer Parts

What LCN door closer series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and diagrams for the LCN 1000 Series, 2210 Series, 2310ME/4310ME/4410ME Sentronic, 2610/4810/4820/4840 Auto Equalizer Operators, 3130SE/4040SE Sentronic, 4000 Series surface closers, 4040SEH Holder, 4210/4510 Smoothee, 4310HSA/4410HSA Sentronic, 4630/4640 Auto Equalizer Operators, 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark Operators, 9500/2800 Senior Swing Operator, Sentronic SEM 7800 Series Magnets, 2010/5010, 2030/5030/6030, and 3030/3130 concealed closers.

 

What is the LCN Green Dial and how do I use it?

The Green Dial is a patented visual indicator on the 4040XP spring tube showing the current spring power setting from size 1 through 6. The closer ships set to size 3. Turn the 5/32-inch hex screw clockwise to increase spring power. For parallel arm mounting, add one full spring size to any sizing chart recommendation. After any spring adjustment, verify actual opening force with a calibrated force gauge for ADA compliance.

 

What hydraulic fluid does the LCN 4040XP use?

The 4040XP uses Liquid X all-weather hydraulic fluid, which operates from -30 degrees F to 120 degrees F in manual closer applications. LCN closers are not designed for field fluid refills. A leaking cylinder must be replaced as a complete assembly. Attempting to add fluid to a leaking closer body does not restore function.

 

Are LCN door closer arms interchangeable between series?

No. Arms are model-specific. A 4040 series arm does not fit a 4011 body even though the bodies look similar. Always match the arm part number to the exact model number stamped on the closer body. Using an incompatible arm causes improper door geometry and accelerates spindle wear.

 

Why does my LCN door closer still slam after I adjust the sweep valve?

If the sweep valve is fully open and the door still slams, hydraulic fluid has leaked from the cylinder. Without fluid, the closer becomes a raw spring with no damping. No valve adjustment fixes this. Replace the cylinder assembly. Oil visible on the door frame or floor confirms the diagnosis.

 

What is the difference between the LCN 4040XP and the LCN 4000 Series?

The 4040XP is the current production heavy-duty closer in the 4000 Series family. It features an enlarged 3/4-inch pinion shaft with 44 percent greater bearing load capacity than the original 4040, Liquid X all-weather fluid, Green Dial spring indicator, patent-pending snap-fit cover, and labeled regulation valves. The 4040XP directly replaces and retrofits the older 4041. All 4041 accessories are compatible with the 4040XP body.

Von Duprin 98/99 Series Exit Device: Complete Parts and Service Guide

The Von Duprin 98/99 series is on more institutional doors than any other exit device in North America. Schools, hospitals, government buildings, universities, airports. If you manage a commercial facility or work as a locksmith, you will service this device more than any other in the Von Duprin lineup.

This guide covers everything you need to work on 98/99 series exit device parts efficiently. It covers the configurations, the parts that fail, the dogging details that trip people up, the electrified options, and exactly how to order the right component without a return. Browse the full Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for model-specific diagrams on every series.

 

What Makes the 98/99 Series Different From Other Von Duprin Devices

The 98/99 sits at the top of the Von Duprin lineup. It is the deepest specification in terms of electrified options, the most configurable in terms of device type, and the only Von Duprin series that carries full Made in USA production. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certification means it is tested to the highest cycle and force standards in the exit device category.

The case distinction is simple: the 98 series has a smooth mechanism case and the 99 series has a grooved case. Both are mechanically identical. The grooved case on the 99 gives a better grip surface under repeated push pad contact, which is why healthcare and institutional specifications often call for the 99 specifically.

The forward compatibility advantage is what separates the 98/99 from every other series. A mechanical device installed today can be converted to QEL quiet electric latch retraction, MEL motorized retraction, Chexit delayed egress, Allegion Connect, or other access control options years later without replacing the device body. Facilities managers doing phased access control upgrades depend on this.

 

98/99 Series Configurations: Which One Fits Your Door

Rim Device (98, 99, F-98, F-99)

The rim device mounts on the door face and latches at a single frame-side strike. Standard for single doors and paired doors with a center mullion. The F-prefix versions (F-98, F-99) are fire exit hardware with a UL fire listing. They must positively latch on every door close and do not support hex dogging. The standard 98/99 (without F-prefix) is panic exit hardware that supports mechanical dogging on non-fire-rated doors.

 

Surface Vertical Rod (9827, 9927)

SVR devices add top and bottom engagement rods running on the door face, providing three-point locking for double door openings without a center mullion. The 9827 is the 98 series SVR and the 9927 is the 99 series SVR. Both use a dedicated center case (part 109358) which is different from the rim device center case (part 109012). These are not interchangeable. Confirm configuration before ordering any center case.

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (9847, 9947)

CVR devices route the rod hardware inside the door for architectural applications where surface rods are not acceptable. Hotel lobbies, healthcare reception areas, high-end commercial interiors. CVR parts must match the exact model and door prep. CVR installation is typically done at the factory; field replacement of internal rod components requires door removal in most cases.

 

Wide Door Cable (WDC)

The WDC configuration uses a cable rather than rigid rods for very wide double doors where rod flex would be a problem. Available on the 98/99 series for oversized openings.

 

Mortise Device (98/9975, XP98/XP99)

The mortise configuration integrates the 7500 mortise lock body into the panic device chassis for maximum security depth alongside code-compliant egress. The 7500 mortise lock body has been in service since approximately 1977. Browse mortise lock replacement parts for the 7500 body components that pair with the 98/9975 mortise exit device.

 

ConfigurationModel NumbersDoor TypeCenter Case Part
Rim (panic)98, 99Single door, mullion pair109012
Rim (fire)F-98, F-99Fire-rated, single door109012
SVR (panic)9827, 9927Double door, no mullion109358
SVR (fire)F-9827, F-9927Fire-rated double door109358
CVR9847, 9947Architectural double doorModel-specific
Mortise9875, 9975High-security single doorModel-specific

 

Panic vs Fire Exit Hardware on the 98/99 Series

Every 98/99 series device is available in both standard panic and fire exit hardware versions. Getting this wrong before ordering replacement parts is the most common mistake in 98/99 series maintenance.

Standard panic devices (98, 99, 9827, 9927): UL listed for panic exit applications. Support mechanical hex dogging. Channel cover plates specific to panic configuration.

 

Fire exit hardware (F-98, F-99, F-9827, F-9927): UL listed for fire exit hardware. The F-prefix in the model number confirms this. Must positively latch on every door close. Hex dogging is not permitted. Channel cover plates carry different part numbers from the panic versions.

 

Critical: Installing a panic channel cover plate on an F-series device voids the UL fire exit hardware listing. Always check whether the device is fire-rated before ordering any cover plate replacement.
 

Dogging on the 98/99 Series

Hex dogging holds the push pad depressed during business hours so the door operates as a push/pull entry without latching. Standard on all panic-rated 98/99 devices. Not available on F-series fire exit hardware.

 

Why Dogging Fails on the 98/99

The dogging shaft hole (part 090040) is approximately 1/4 inch deep. The most common cause of dogging failure in the field is using a short 5/32-inch hex key that does not reach full depth. Short keys round out the hex engagement point over repeated use, requiring shaft replacement. Always use the long version of the 5/32-inch hex key and seat it fully before rotating.

The dogging assembly has three components:

090040 Dogging Shaft: The piece the hex key engages. Field note: the pre-1998 shaft has a different profile. For devices manufactured before 1998, use part 050709 conversion kit.

090042 Dogging Adapter Spring: Locks the adapter into the mounting bracket.

090043 Dogging Adapter: The housing the shaft and spring fit through.

Field tip: If dogging worked previously but now the hex key spins without engaging, the shaft is stripped. Order part 090040 and replace it before the surrounding housing sustains damage.
 

Parts That Fail First on the 98/99 Series

Based on actual field replacement frequency, here is a realistic sequence of what wears out first:

1. Dogging assembly: The most common maintenance item on high-traffic doors. Shaft strips, springs fatigue, adapters crack. All three components are available individually.

2. End cap and bracket: The plastic end cap on the hinge side of the device breaks under repeated contact. When it breaks, the dogging cover plate slides off. Von Duprin introduced the 900397 metal end cap kit in 2016 to replace the historically fragile plastic version. This is a worthwhile proactive upgrade on any high-use 98/99 device.

3. Push bar retrofit kit: The push bar assembly bends or deforms on high-abuse applications. Push bar retrofit kits are available for 3-foot and 4-foot door widths, replacing just the push bar without requiring a full device swap.

4. Center case: The center case (109012 for rim, 109358 for SVR) wears after decades of continuous use. The 109012 rim center case has been in production for approximately 40 years and replaces all non-fire-rated 98/99 rim center cases with backward compatibility to devices installed in the 1980s. This long backward compatibility chain is one of the most valuable maintenance advantages of the 98/99 series.

5. Latch return spring (090039): Used in the push bar assembly to return the latch. Fails from spring fatigue on very high-cycle doors.

 

Electrified Options on the 98/99 Series

The 98/99 series has the deepest electrified options catalog of any Von Duprin device. Each option converts or adds to the mechanical device without replacing the body.

 

QEL: Quiet Electric Latch Retraction

The QEL is a modular field-installable kit that adds electric latch retraction to a mechanical 98/99 device. When an authorized credential is presented, the latch retracts silently. This is the most commonly specified electrified conversion on existing 98/99 devices in phased access control upgrades. The HD-QEL variant adds hex dogging capability to the electrified device.

 

MEL: Motorized Electric Latch Retraction

Motor-driven latch retraction for applications where solenoid noise is not acceptable. Quieter operation than standard EL. Used in library environments, healthcare patient areas, and quiet office zones.

 

Chexit: Delayed Egress

Holds the door latched for 15 seconds after the push bar is activated, with a local alarm sounding during the delay. NFPA 101 compliant for controlled egress applications. Used in retail, psychiatric facilities, and any location where unauthorized egress must be deterred without blocking emergency egress.

 

RX: Request to Exit

A switch placed in the push bar that signals the access control panel when the bar is pressed. Notifies the system of an authorized egress event to prevent false alarms on the secured entry side. Standard on any 98/99 device integrated into an access control system where the door also serves as a secured entry. The electric strikes parts catalog covers the Von Duprin electric strikes on the frame side that work alongside RX-equipped exit devices.

 

LX: Latch Bolt Monitoring

Monitors the position of the latch bolt, signaling the access panel when the door is not properly latched. Used on fire doors and secured doors where latch compliance monitoring is required by the inspection program.

 

ALK: Alarm Exit Kit

Converts the 98/99 to an alarmed exit device. Powered by a 9-volt battery. Controlled by a mortise cylinder (not included). When the push bar is pressed, the 85-decibel alarm sounds. The ALK is shared across the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 series.

 

CON: Allegion Connect

Wireless integration into the Allegion Connect ecosystem for remote monitoring and control.

 

How to Order 98/99 Series Parts Without a Wrong-Part Return

Three pieces of information are required before placing any 98/99 series parts order.

1. Confirm the configuration: Rim or SVR changes the center case part number entirely (109012 vs 109358). CVR and mortise use model-specific parts. Confirm which configuration is on the door before opening any catalog page.

2. Check the manufacture date: The manufacture date is stamped near the mechanism housing on the device body. Devices manufactured before 1998 use old-style dogging assemblies. The conversion kit (part 050709) updates pre-1998 devices to current spec dogging components. Post-1998 devices use parts 090040, 090042, and 090043.

3. Confirm panic or fire exit hardware: The F-prefix in the model number confirms fire exit hardware. Channel cover plates, dogging kits, and some trim components carry different part numbers between panic and fire configurations. Never order channel cover plates without confirming first.

SecurityParts.com organizes the complete Von Duprin 98/99 series parts catalog by model with interactive exploded diagrams on every model page. You confirm the component visually before ordering. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Von Duprin 98/99 Parts

Diagram-Based Identification

Every 98/99 model page has an interactive exploded diagram. You see exactly where each part sits before adding it to your cart.

Parts-Level Stocking

Individual components stocked: one dogging shaft, one end cap kit, one push bar retrofit kit. No forced kit purchases for a single replacement part.

Same-Day Shipping

Most 98/99 components ship same day from US warehouses. An exit device out of service on an egress door is a safety and compliance issue.

Pre-Order Support

Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page. Our team confirms part compatibility from your manufacture date and configuration before the order ships.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different

  • We stock Von Duprin parts by series and configuration, not by generic brand listing. Rim and SVR center cases are listed separately so you order the right one the first time.
  • Backward compatibility is documented. We note which parts apply to pre-1998 devices versus current production, so you don't order a current-spec dogging shaft for a device that needs the 050709 conversion kit.
  • Individual components are available. One dogging shaft, one latch return spring, one end cap kit. No minimum quantities, no forced kit purchases.
  • We carry Von Duprin alongside LCN door closers, Falcon exit devices, and cylindrical lock parts. One order covers a complete facility service call across multiple brands.
  • Same-day shipping on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.
  • 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience. We diagnose based on symptoms, not just catalog lookups.

 

Related Parts at SecurityParts.com

The 98/99 series operates as part of a complete door assembly. A full service call on an institutional door typically covers the exit device, the door closer, and sometimes an electric strike or lock hardware on the same opening.

For LCN door closer parts on the same opening, browse the door closers catalog by series. For Von Duprin electric strike parts, including 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 series, used on the frame side alongside 98/99 exit devices, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X exit alarm parts on secondary exits in the same building, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Schlage deadbolt parts on interior office doors in the same facility, browse the deadbolts catalog.

Browse all Von Duprin series: 22, 33A, 75, 88, 94/95, and the Guard-X, in the Von Duprin parts catalog, or explore the full commercial exit devices parts catalog to navigate by brand and series.

 

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the Von Duprin 98/99 series exit device?

The Von Duprin 98/99 is the institutional flagship exit device made by Allegion. ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified and UL listed for panic and fire exit hardware. Made in the USA. Available in rim, SVR, CVR, WDC, and mortise configurations with the deepest electrified options catalog in the Von Duprin lineup.

 

What is the difference between the Von Duprin 98 and 99 series?

The 98 has a smooth mechanism case and the 99 has a grooved case. Both are mechanically identical inside and use the same replacement parts. The grooved case on the 99 provides a better grip surface for high-contact institutional applications.

 

What is the dogging hole depth on the Von Duprin 98/99 series?

The dogging shaft hole is approximately 1/4 inch deep. Always use a long 5/32-inch hex key and seat it completely before rotating. Short hex keys strip the engagement point over time, which is the most common cause of dogging failure on 98/99 devices in the field.

 

Can I upgrade a mechanical 98/99 to electric latch retraction later?

Yes. This is the key forward compatibility advantage. A mechanical 98/99 can be field-converted to QEL, MEL, Chexit, or Allegion Connect years later without replacing the device body. This is why architects default to the 98/99 on institutional projects where phased access control is planned.

 

Are 98 series and 99 series parts interchangeable?

Yes. The 98 and 99 series use identical internal parts. The only difference is the exterior case finish. Any push bar, latch assembly, dogging component, center case, or electrified kit ordered for the 98 fits the 99 of the same configuration and manufacture date.

 

What is the Von Duprin 9927 and how does it differ from the 99 rim device?

The 9927 is the surface vertical rod (SVR) configuration of the 99 series. It uses top and bottom engagement rods for three-point locking on double doors without a center mullion. The rim device uses center case 109012. The 9927 uses center case 109358. These are completely different parts. Confirm configuration before ordering any center case.

Mortise Locks vs Cylindrical Locks: Which One Does Your Door Need?

If you're buying door hardware for a commercial project, you'll run into this choice pretty quickly: mortise lock or cylindrical lock? They both secure a door. They both come in Grade 1. But they work differently, install differently, and belong on different types of openings.

Here's a plain-language breakdown so you can pick the right one without overthinking it.

What Is a Mortise Lock

A mortise lock lives inside the door. To install one, a rectangular pocket (the mortise) has to be cut into the door edge. The lock body, which is a self-contained steel case, drops into that pocket and houses the latch bolt, deadbolt, and internal mechanism all in one unit. The lever or knob trim attaches through the door face with through-bolts that run the full thickness of the door.

That deep, integrated installation is what makes mortise locks strong. The mechanism is anchored inside the door structure itself, not just surface-mounted. The result is a lock that resists forced entry, handles heavy daily use, and offers more function options like entry, classroom, storeroom, and office functions, all within the same lock body.

You'll find mortise locks on the primary entrances of hotels, office buildings, schools, and government facilities. Any commercial door that sees constant traffic and needs serious security is a candidate for a mortise lock.

What Is a Cylindrical Lock

A cylindrical lock installs through two round bored holes drilled into the door: a larger hole through the face and a smaller one through the edge for the latch. The lock chassis sits in the face bore, and the latch mechanism sits in the edge bore. Lever or knob trim threads onto each side.

It's a simpler system. Installation is faster, the hardware costs less, and most doors in commercial buildings already come pre-drilled for cylindrical preps. That's why cylindrical locks are the most common lock type overall. They're practical, widely available, and perfectly adequate for a huge range of applications.

Most interior commercial doors use cylindrical locksets: office rooms, storage closets, conference rooms, restroom corridors. Grade 1 cylindrical locks from brands like Schlage, Sargent, or Yale handle this kind of use comfortably for years.

The Key Differences Side by Side

Installation

Cylindrical locks install in minutes on a pre-drilled door. Mortise locks require a precisely cut pocket in the door edge, and it's a more involved process and typically needs to be done by a professional or specified at the time the door is manufactured. Once the door prep exists, swapping hardware is straightforward. But you can't put a mortise lock on a door drilled for cylindrical hardware, or vice versa. The two preps are incompatible with no field workaround.

Security and Strength

Both types come in ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, which is the commercial standard. But a Grade 1 mortise lock and a Grade 1 cylindrical lock aren't structurally identical. The mortise lock's integrated case gives it an inherently stronger platform. The latch, bolt, and springs all live in one reinforced unit anchored deep in the door. A cylindrical lock relies more on the door's structural integrity around the bore holes. For primary entries and high-security applications, mortise wins. For standard interior commercial doors, a Grade 1 cylindrical lock is more than sufficient.

Functions Available

Mortise locks offer a wider range of functions in one unit, including entry, classroom, storeroom, hotel, and apartment functions, without needing separate hardware. Cylindrical locks also cover these functions but sometimes require adding a separate deadbolt to match the security level of a mortise set. Mortise locks also offer significantly more trim design options, which matters in architectural or high-end commercial projects where appearance is part of the specification.

Cost

Cylindrical locks are less expensive. Good Grade 1 commercial cylindrical hardware runs roughly $150 to $350 per opening. Grade 1 mortise locksets start around $300 and can go well past $600 per opening, not including professional installation labor for new door prep. On a building with 150 doors, that cost difference is significant. The right answer is using mortise where it's genuinely needed and cylindrical everywhere else, not defaulting to one type for the whole project.

Long-Term Durability

In heavy-use commercial environments, mortise locks tend to last longer. Their integrated design distributes stress across a larger case, which holds up better under constant door cycling. Cylindrical locks work well in their right applications but can wear out faster on a primary entry that processes hundreds of people a day. Mortise locks hold about 40% of the commercial door hardware market, favored for their durability in demanding environments, while cylindrical locks account for the remaining 60%, chosen for cost-effectiveness and straightforward installation.

Which One Should You Choose

The honest answer is: it depends on what the door is doing.

Use a mortise lock when: the door is a primary exterior entry, a high-traffic corridor in a school or healthcare facility, a hotel room entry, or any opening where security and long-term durability are the top priorities. Also use mortise when the door is already prepped for it. There's no reason to modify a door that's built for mortise hardware.

Use a cylindrical lock when: the door is an interior office, storage room, conference room, or any lower-traffic opening where a Grade 1 cylindrical lockset covers the security requirement. Most interior commercial doors fall into this category. Cylindrical is also the practical choice when budget is a real constraint on a multi-door project.

Never mix preps on the same door. If a door was manufactured with a cylindrical prep (ANSI 161), it needs cylindrical hardware. If it has a mortise prep (ANSI 86), it needs a mortise lock. Ordering the wrong one means returning it and waiting for the right hardware, a mistake that's easy to avoid by confirming the door prep before you order.

What About ANSI Grades

For any commercial door, Grade 1 is the right starting point. Both mortise and cylindrical locks are available in Grade 1 under ANSI/BHMA standards. A156.13 covers mortise locks and A156.2 covers cylindrical locks. Grade 1 cylindrical locks are tested to 800,000 cycles. Grade 1 mortise locks are held to similar cycle requirements with additional strength testing for the bolt and case.

Grade 2 is acceptable for interior commercial doors with light use. Grade 3 is residential hardware and shouldn't appear on a commercial specification. If you see a lock listed without a grade, skip it. The absence of certification is a red flag regardless of what the marketing says.

Top Brands to Know

For mortise locks, the names you'll see on most commercial specifications are Schlage (L-Series), Sargent (7000 Series), Corbin Russwin (ML2000 Series), and Yale (8800 Series). These are the brands architects and facility managers specify by name on door hardware schedules.

For cylindrical locks, Schlage (AL and ND Series), Sargent (10 Line), Best (9K Series), and Cal-Royal are the dominant commercial options. All manufacture Grade 1 products with interchangeable core options for large facilities that need master key systems.

Shop Door Locks at SecurityParts.com

SecurityParts.com carries both mortise and cylindrical locksets from the brands contractors and facility managers rely on. Every product listing includes the manufacturer's spec sheet so you can confirm the ANSI grade, function, and door prep before ordering.

Whether you're sourcing hardware for a full door schedule or replacing a single lockset, browse our mortise locks and cylindrical locks to find the right fit for your opening.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the difference between a mortise lock and a cylindrical lock?

A mortise lock installs inside a rectangular pocket in the door edge and houses the latch, deadbolt, and mechanism in one steel case. A cylindrical lock installs through two round bored holes in the door and is a simpler, more compact system. Mortise locks are stronger and offer more functions. Cylindrical locks are faster to install and more affordable.

Which is better for commercial doors: mortise or cylindrical?

Mortise locks are the standard for primary commercial entries and high-traffic openings. Cylindrical locks are widely used on interior commercial doors like offices and storage rooms where security demands are more moderate. Both are correct answers, just for different doors.

Can I replace a mortise lock with a cylindrical lock?

No. The door preps are incompatible. A mortise lock needs a rectangular pocket in the door edge. A cylindrical lock needs two round bored holes. There's no field modification that bridges them. You need hardware that matches the prep the door was built with.

How much does a commercial mortise lock cost compared to a cylindrical lock?

Grade 1 cylindrical hardware typically runs $150 to $350 per opening. Grade 1 mortise locksets generally start around $300 and can exceed $600, not including professional labor for new mortise prep work. Cylindrical costs less upfront. Mortise tends to offer better long-term value on heavy-use commercial doors.

What ANSI grade should a commercial door lock be?

Grade 1 for exterior, high-traffic, and fire-rated commercial doors. Grade 2 is acceptable for low-traffic interior doors. Grade 3 is residential only and shouldn't appear on any commercial specification.

Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series Exit Device Parts: Complete Replacement Guide

Security Parts carries parts for all three Falcon exit device series. The 19 Series is narrow stile, light-to-medium duty, rim and SVR only. The 24 Series is narrow stile, heavy duty, for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. The 25 Series is wide stile, heavy duty, for standard hollow metal and wood commercial doors. The 24 and 25 Series share a push pad design and the same service manual (108004). The most frequently replaced parts are the channel, end cap kit, dogging cover plate, and on electrified versions, the EL solenoid or HWEA alarm board. For pre-June 2012 alarm assemblies, the HWEA replacement board is part 650335.

Falcon exit devices are on more commercial egress doors in North America than any other panic hardware brand outside Von Duprin. The 19, 24, and 25 Series cover the full range of commercial applications: from light office and retail doors through aluminum storefront entries to institutional hollow metal fire-rated assemblies. Each series has distinct construction, stile requirements, and electrified option sets. Getting the right replacement part requires knowing which series is installed and which sub-configuration applies.

Browse the complete Falcon exit device parts catalog at SecurityParts.com, which includes the 19, 24, and 25 Series alongside the full Von Duprin and Detex exit device range. The Falcon hardware catalog covers all Falcon product lines including exit devices, mortise locks, and cylindrical locks.

Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certification on all three Falcon series
108004 Shared service manual number for 24 and 25 Series
June 2012 HWEA alarm assembly redesign date affecting board compatibility
24V DC EL solenoid voltage, 0.34A continuous duty on 24 and 25 Series
 

Falcon 19 vs 24 vs 25 Series: Which One Is Installed

Before ordering any replacement part, identifying the series is mandatory. The three series look similar from a distance but are built for completely different door constructions. Ordering a 25 Series end cap for a 24 Series device, for example, produces a part that will not fit.

 

Falcon 19 Series

 

Narrow Stile | Light-to-Medium Duty
 

For interior or exterior single and double doors where traffic is not consistently heavy. Stile as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Covers a 161 door prep for easy field retrofit. Rim (19-R) and surface vertical rod (19-V) configurations only. Non-handed. Optional 1-1/2-hour B label fire rating (F-19). Three finishes: SP28, SP313, US32D. 10-year warranty.

 

Falcon 24 Series

 

Narrow Stile | Heavy Duty | Aluminum Storefronts
 

Heavy-duty extruded aluminum construction for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Rim (24-R), surface vertical rod (24-V), concealed vertical rod (24-C), and wide door cable (24-CWDC) configurations. Half-turn hex dogging standard. All mounting screws concealed. Shares push pad design and service manual 108004 with 25 Series. EL not available on 24 fire rim devices.

 

Falcon 25 Series

 

Wide Stile | Heavy Duty | Hollow Metal and Wood
 

Wide stile heavy-duty device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors. Minimum 4-1/2-inch stile (3-1/2-inch on 25-C concealed VR). Rim (25-R), surface vertical rod (25-V), concealed vertical rod (25-C), wide door cable (25-CWDC), and mortise (25-M) configurations. Half-turn hex dogging standard. Heavy wrought center case with sintered metal parts. 10-year warranty. UL A label (3-hour) on fire-rated versions.

The identification test that takes 30 seconds: Look at the door stile width where the exit device is mounted. If the stile is narrow aluminum (typical of glass-heavy storefront entries), it is a 24 Series. If the stile is a standard hollow metal or wood door stile (4-1/2 inches or wider), it is likely a 25 Series. If it is a lighter interior door without heavy aluminum storefront construction, it may be a 19 Series. Confirm by looking at the channel. The 19 Series channel has a narrower profile and black plastic end caps on standard finishes. The 24 and 25 Series both have flush stainless steel push pads and no exposed screws or rivets on the back of the device.
 

What Exit Device Configurations Mean for Parts Ordering

Each series offers multiple configurations that determine which latch hardware, rods, and strikes are involved. The configuration suffix on the model number tells you what is installed.

 

SuffixConfigurationLatchingApplication
-RRim exit deviceSingle-point, rim latch at device headStandard single doors, paired doors with mullion
-VSurface vertical rodTwo-point: top latch at device head, bottom rod to floorSingle doors, double doors without mullion
-CConcealed vertical rodTwo-point: rods run inside door stileDoors requiring clean exterior face with no exposed hardware
-CWDCWide door cable/concealed, wood doorTwo-point concealed for wood door constructionWide or wood doors requiring concealed rod hardware
-MMortise exit deviceMortise lock case inside door, device operates latchHeavy-duty perimeter doors requiring mortise body strength; 25 Series only
F- prefixFire-rated versionSame as panic version but fire-listedAny fire-rated door assembly; cannot be dogged

 

Why the Rim vs Vertical Rod Distinction Matters for Parts

 

A rim device has one latch point at the device head and uses a single rim strike on the door frame. A surface vertical rod device adds a bottom rod running from the device head to a floor bolt, creating two-point latching. The bottom rod, floor strike, and bottom latch components are additional parts unique to vertical rod configurations that rim devices do not use. If you are ordering a strike or latch bolt replacement, you need to know whether the installation is rim or VR before ordering.

The 25-V surface vertical rod uses a 3788 surface-applied top strike and a 2130 mortised bottom floor strike as the standard configuration. The 25-C concealed VR uses a 4188 mortised top strike and 2130 bottom standard, with 4155 and 2126A as bottom options. Fire-rated 25-C uses strike 1279 standard and F1280 for B label applications.

 

Falcon 19 Series Parts: Channels, End Caps and Key Components

The 19 Series uses a narrower channel profile than the 24 and 25 Series. All mounting screws are concealed; latch fasteners are exposed to the egress side. The push bar height is 1-3/4 inches. The stainless steel latch bolt has a 3/4-inch throw with deadlocking standard.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
410719 Series channel, 3-foot doorStandard channel for doors up to 3 feet
410819 Series channel, 4-foot doorStandard channel for doors up to 4 feet
65034319 Series channel end cap kit (with screws)Includes end cap, bracket, and all mounting hardware
65032019 Series end cap mounting bracket with SNBBracket only, for bracket replacement without full kit
4122Sex bolt, package of 1 (includes machine screw)Mounting fastener; #10-20 thread
650360F-19 channel cover plate, 3-foot (fire)Fire-rated version only, 3-foot door
650361F-19 channel cover plate, 4-foot (fire)Fire-rated version only, 4-foot door
65029719 Series panic hex dogging channel cover, 4-footPanic (non-fire) version, 4-foot door
65030319 Series panic hex dogging channel cover, 3-footPanic (non-fire) version, 3-foot door
 
Pre-June 2012 alarm assemblies on 19 Series: For 19 Series installations with an exit alarm option built before June 2012, the replacement HWEA hard-wired exit alarm circuit board is part 650335. This board is not compatible with post-June 2012 alarm assemblies. The June 2012 redesign changed the alarm kit architecture, and using the 650335 board in a newer assembly will result in a non-functional alarm. Check the date code on the existing board before ordering any alarm board replacement.
 

Falcon 24 Series Parts: Heavy Duty Narrow Stile

The 24 Series is built from extruded aluminum for maximum strength on narrow stile aluminum storefront doors. The construction provides greater impact resistance than the 19 Series at the same stile width. The push pad design is shared with the 25 Series, which is why both reference the same service manual 108004.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
66140824 Series channel, 3-foot doorExtruded aluminum construction
66140924 Series channel, 4-foot doorExtruded aluminum construction
65029424 Series channel end cap kit, 1-3/4-inch doorKit includes end cap, bracket, and all fasteners for standard door thickness
65034824 Series channel end cap kit, 2-1/2-inch doorKit for thicker than standard door applications
65014724/25 Series EL kit, 3-foot deviceElectric latch retraction for 3-foot channel devices
65014824/25 Series EL kit, 4-foot deviceElectric latch retraction for 4-foot channel devices

 

The 24 Series Door Thickness and End Cap Selection

The 24 Series serves aluminum storefront doors that come in two standard thicknesses: 1-3/4 inches (the most common commercial aluminum frame door) and 2-1/2 inches (thicker commercial storefront systems). The end cap kit part number changes based on this dimension. Part 650294 is for the 1-3/4-inch door and part 650348 is for the 2-1/2-inch door. Ordering the wrong kit produces an end cap that either leaves a gap at the stile edge or cannot seat against the door face at the correct depth.

 

The 24 Series EL restriction nobody documents at the part level: Electric latch retraction (EL) is available on 24 Series panic rim, panic SVR, and panic CVR devices. It is specifically not available on 24 Series fire rim (F-24-R) devices. Life safety code prohibits holding the latch retracted on a fire-rated rim device using an always-on EL solenoid. If the installation has a fire label on the door and uses a 24-R configuration, the EL kit (650147 or 650148) does not apply to that opening regardless of what the wiring diagram suggests. This restriction catches facility managers who upgrade access control on fire-door openings without checking the device configuration first.
 

Falcon 25 Series Parts: Wide Stile Heavy Duty

The 25 Series is Falcon's flagship exit device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood door applications. The center case is heavy wrought with sintered metal parts throughout the mechanism, making it more durable than extruded-only construction under heavy cycle loads. The top latchbolt is stainless steel with a 3/4-inch throw and deadlocking standard. Vertical rod configurations add a bottom bolt with a 1/2-inch throw.

 

25 Series Dogging: Half-Turn Hex, No Threads

Half-turn hex dogging is standard on the 25 Series with no threaded dogging components anywhere in the mechanism. Traditional threaded dogging on older exit devices requires turning a threaded rod several rotations, and the threads strip or corrode over time on high-cycle doors. The Falcon 25 Series half-turn hex design eliminates all threaded components from the dogging path. One half turn clockwise dogs the device. One half turn counterclockwise releases it. No stripping. No galling. This is why the 25 Series dogging mechanism outlasts competitor devices significantly on doors dogged and released multiple times daily.

Cylinder dogging is available as an option on the 25 Series using a 1-1/8-inch mortise cylinder with standard cam. This allows the outside cylinder to dog and release the device without carrying the hex key, which is the preferred configuration for reception desks and service counters where maintenance staff routinely dog the door at opening time.

 

25 Series Configurations and Stile Requirements

Stile requirements vary by 25 Series configuration. Standard 25-R and 25-V configurations require a 4-1/2-inch minimum stile. The 25-C concealed vertical rod configuration requires a 3-1/2-inch minimum stile on panic versions and 4-1/2-inch minimum on fire-rated F-25-C installations. The 25-CWDC (wood door wide cable configuration) requires a 6-1/2-inch minimum stile on wood doors. Ordering a 25-V or 25-C for a door with an undersized stile produces a device that cannot be correctly mounted.

 

25 Series ConfigurationMinimum StileDoor TypeFire Rating
25-R (rim)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional B label (F-25-R)
25-V (surface VR)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional B label (F-25-V); A label available on fire pair
25-C (concealed VR, metal door)3-1/2 inch (panic); 4-1/2 inch (fire)Metal doorsOptional B label and A label on fire pair (F-25-C)
25-CWDC (concealed VR, wood door)6-1/2 inchWood doorsOptional B label (F-25-CWDC)
25-M (mortise)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional fire rating

 

25 Series Fire Ratings: A Label vs B Label

The Falcon 25 Series supports two UL fire ratings depending on the configuration. The B label (1-1/2 hour) is available on all 25 Series configurations. The A label (3-hour) is available on fire pairs (F-25-M x F-25-V or F-25-C), permitting up to 4-foot by 10-foot single doors and 8-foot by 10-foot pairs. When ordering strike replacements for fire-rated 25 Series installations, the fire strike specification matters. The F-25-C uses strike 1279 as standard and F1280 for B label applications. The F-25-V uses strike 299F for fire-rated top and 499F for fire-rated pairs with mullion.

 

Hex Dogging: How It Works and What Fails

Dogging is the function that holds the push bar depressed and the latch retracted, allowing the door to operate as a free-swinging door without requiring the push bar to be pressed on every pass. It is standard on the 24 and 25 Series panic versions and on the 19 Series panic version. It is never available on any fire-rated version of any series because holding a fire door latch retracted violates life safety code.

Hex dogging uses a hex key (Allen wrench) inserted into the dogging hole in the channel. On the Falcon 24 and 25 Series, the half-turn mechanism requires only a 180-degree rotation. The dogging cover plate conceals the dogging hole when not in use. This cover plate is a separately replaceable component if it is damaged or missing.

 

The dogging failure most technicians misdiagnose: A push bar that will not stay depressed after dogging is almost never a failed dogging mechanism. In more than 90% of field cases, the push bar returns to the undogged position because someone forgot the half-turn direction or did not complete the full half turn. Insert the hex key, depress the push bar fully, then turn the key clockwise exactly one half turn. If the key turns but the bar still does not stay depressed, check whether the installation is a fire-rated device (F-19, F-24, F-25). Fire-rated devices cannot be dogged and the mechanism is physically blocked. A fire-rated device on a non-fire-rated door is a common incorrect installation that generates repeated dogging complaints.
 

Electrified Options on the Falcon 24 and 25 Series

The Falcon 24 and 25 Series support a full range of electrified options for access control integration. Understanding the compatibility rules between these options prevents ordering combinations that cannot be installed together.

 

EL: Electric Latch Retraction

The EL option retracts the latch electrically without depressing the push bar, allowing the door to be opened from the outside by a credential reader, keypad, or building automation system. The EL solenoid operates at 24V DC and 0.34 amperes continuous duty. For 3-foot devices, the EL kit is part 650147. For 4-foot devices, it is part 650148. EL can be combined with FSA/FSE (fail safe/fail secure outside trim), DM (device monitoring), LM (latch monitoring), and AE/LK options. EL cannot be combined with ED (electric dogging), EA (exit alarm), HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm), or KOR (key override) on the same device.

Electric latch retraction serves two common use cases in commercial buildings. The first is controlled entry: a credential reader on the exterior side triggers the EL solenoid to retract the latch, allowing entry without pushing the panic bar. The second is electronic dogging during business hours: the building automation system energizes the EL solenoid for extended periods to hold the latch retracted as an alternative to mechanical hex dogging. This allows the door to operate in free-swing mode during hours and automatically re-latch when the solenoid is de-energized after hours.

 

EA and HWEA: Exit Alarm Options

The EA (exit alarm) option adds an audible alarm triggered when the push bar is pressed, providing delay notification or unauthorized egress alerting. The HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm) version connects to a building's wired fire alarm or security system.

The alarm circuit board replacement for pre-June 2012 HWEA assemblies is part 650335. This date boundary is critical: the alarm assembly design changed in June 2012. The 650335 board works only on pre-June 2012 assemblies. Post-June 2012 assemblies use a different alarm kit. Confirming the manufacturing date before ordering any alarm board replacement prevents a non-functional alarm installation.

 

KOR, LM, DM, RX: Monitoring and Override Options

KOR (key override) provides a cylinder that overrides the electrified outside trim functions without requiring electronic credentials. It is used when power failures need a mechanical fallback for authorized entry. LM (latch monitoring switch) monitors the latch bolt position and reports door open/closed status to the access control system. DM (device monitoring switch) monitors whether the push bar has been pressed. These two cannot be used on the same device because their switch mechanisms conflict. RX (request to exit switch) connects to an egress-side reader or motion sensor to signal the access control system that someone is approaching from the inside before the door opens.

 

The EL/EA combination that cannot be ordered: EL (electric latch retraction) and EA (exit alarm) are mutually exclusive on any Falcon 24 or 25 Series device. An EL device retracts the latch without the push bar being pressed, which would constantly trigger an EA alarm on any credential-controlled entry event. This combination is listed in the service manual as incompatible. It is also physically incompatible because both functions require access to the latch mechanism simultaneously in ways that conflict. Any specification that calls for both EL and EA on the same device requires a redesign before ordering.
 

How to Identify the Correct Part Before Ordering

Three pieces of information are needed before any Falcon exit device parts order.

1. Series (19, 24, or 25): Determined by the door construction and stile width as described above. The series number is typically visible on a label on the device channel or center case.

2. Configuration (R, V, C, CWDC, M): Visible from the door face. A rim device has a single latch point and no visible rod hardware on the door. A surface VR device has a visible bottom rod running down the door face to a floor strike. A concealed VR device has no visible rod hardware but two latch points (the concealed rods are inside the door stile).

3. Panic or fire-rated (prefix F-): Look for a fire label on the door or door frame. If a fire label is present, the device should be a fire-rated version. If ordering a replacement device, always match the fire rating of the original. If ordering a dogging cover plate, panic devices have a dogging hole; fire-rated devices do not.

Browse the exit device parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series components with interactive diagrams. The Falcon hardware catalog covers exit devices alongside Falcon MA Series mortise locks and T Series cylindrical locks. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Falcon vs Von Duprin: Choosing Between the Two Exit Device Brands

Both Falcon and Von Duprin are Allegion brands. They share company ownership but serve different market positions and use different part ecosystems. Parts are not interchangeable between the two brands.

Von Duprin is the older and more widely installed brand in institutional, healthcare, and high-security government applications. The Von Duprin 98/99 Series is the dominant exit device in North American institutional buildings constructed before 2000. Von Duprin has a larger installed base and a wider parts aftermarket. Browse the complete Von Duprin parts catalog for 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 55, 75, 78, 88, and 94/95 Series devices.

Falcon is more common in mid-market commercial, retail, multi-family, and newer construction where the architectural aesthetic of the flush push pad and concealed fasteners is valued alongside ANSI Grade 1 performance at a competitive price. The 24 and 25 Series were specifically designed for the streamlined appearance requirements of modern commercial construction.

On any given building, both brands may be present: Von Duprin on older egress stairwell doors that have not been replaced, Falcon on newer tenant improvement entries and interior egress paths. SecurityParts.com stocks both, so a single order can service the complete building hardware schedule.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Falcon Exit Device Parts

Series identification guidance, dogging mechanics, EL compatibility documentation, HWEA date boundary, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Series Identification

We document the 30-second stile width identification test that determines whether a door has a 19, 24, or 25 Series device. Wrong series orders are the most common return on exit device service calls.

 

EL Compatibility Rules

We document that EL is unavailable on 24 Series fire rim devices and that EL and EA cannot be combined on any device. These restrictions prevent specification errors before the order is placed.

 

HWEA Date Boundary

We document the June 2012 alarm board redesign and that part 650335 applies only to pre-June 2012 assemblies. Using the wrong board generation installs a non-functional alarm.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Falcon Exit Device Parts

  • We document the 24 Series EL restriction on fire rim devices (F-24-R) at the part level. Facility managers upgrading access control on fire-door openings routinely order EL kits for fire rim devices without knowing the restriction. We prevent this before the order ships.
  • We document the EL/EA mutual exclusivity. Any specification combining both on one device requires a redesign. This is in the service manual but no parts supplier makes it accessible at the ordering stage.
  • We document the HWEA 650335 board date boundary with the June 2012 cutoff. This is the most common wrong-board order on alarm-equipped Falcon exit devices.
  • We document the half-turn hex dogging failure misdiagnosis: a push bar that returns after dogging is almost always incomplete dogging technique, not a mechanism failure. This prevents unnecessary mechanism replacements on dogging complaints.
  • We carry Falcon exit device parts alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, electric strike parts, LCN door closer parts, and exit alarm parts. One order services the complete egress door hardware package.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

A complete commercial egress door hardware package includes the exit device, door closer, and often an electric strike or exit alarm. SecurityParts.com stocks all of these for the same opening in one order.

For Von Duprin exit device parts on egress doors in the same building where Von Duprin is installed alongside Falcon hardware, browse the Von Duprin catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on the door frame of any exit device installation with controlled entry, browse the electric strikes catalog. The Von Duprin 6300 electric strike is compatible with Falcon 24 and 25 Series rim devices. For commercial exit alarm parts including Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex ECL and EAX series, browse the exit alarms catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any fire-rated or controlled-closing egress door in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on secured interior doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Falcon, Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series Exit Device Parts

 

What is the difference between the Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series exit devices?

The 19 Series is narrow stile, light-to-medium duty, rim and SVR only, for doors where traffic is not consistently heavy. The 24 Series is narrow stile, heavy duty, extruded aluminum for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. The 25 Series is wide stile, heavy duty, for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors with minimum 4-1/2-inch stiles. The 24 and 25 Series share the same push pad design and service manual 108004.

 

What is dogging on an exit device and how does hex dogging work?

Dogging holds the push bar depressed and the latch retracted so the door operates as free-swinging without pressing the bar on every pass. Hex dogging uses a hex key inserted into the dogging hole to lock the push bar down. On the Falcon 24 and 25 Series, half-turn hex dogging requires one half-turn clockwise to dog and one half-turn counterclockwise to release. No threaded components are involved, eliminating thread stripping on high-cycle doors. Fire-rated devices cannot be dogged.

 

What are the part numbers for the Falcon 19 Series channel and end cap?

Channel for 3-foot door is part 4107. Channel for 4-foot door is part 4108. Channel end cap kit with screws is part 650343. End cap mounting bracket is part 650320. Sex bolt mounting fastener is part 4122. Fire-rated channel cover plates are 650360 (3-foot) and 650361 (4-foot). Panic dogging channel cover is 650297 (4-foot) and 650303 (3-foot).

 

What are the part numbers for the Falcon 24 Series channel and end cap?

Channel for 3-foot door is part 661408. Channel for 4-foot door is part 661409. End cap kit for 1-3/4-inch door is part 650294. End cap kit for 2-1/2-inch door is part 650348. EL kit for 3-foot devices is part 650147. EL kit for 4-foot devices is part 650148. The EL solenoid is rated 24V DC at 0.34 amperes continuous duty.

 

What is the Falcon HWEA circuit board part number and when does it apply?

The HWEA replacement circuit board is part 650335. It applies only to alarm assemblies built before June 2012. The alarm kit was redesigned in June 2012 and the 650335 board is not compatible with post-June 2012 assemblies. Always check the date code on the existing alarm assembly before ordering any board replacement. Installing the wrong board generation results in a non-functional alarm.

 

What electrified options are available on the Falcon 24 and 25 Series?

Available options include EL (electric latch retraction, 24V DC 0.34A solenoid), EA (exit alarm), HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm), KOR (key override), LM (latch monitoring), DM (device monitoring), RX (request to exit), and FSA/FSE (fail safe/fail secure trim). EL cannot be combined with EA, HWEA, or KOR. DM and LM cannot be used together. EL is not available on 24 Series fire rim devices (F-24-R).

Mortise Locks: A Complete Guide to Commercial Lock Functions, Brands, and Specification

Commercial mortise locks are heavy-duty locks installed inside a rectangular pocket cut into the edge of the door, with a self-contained lock body that houses the latchbolt, deadbolt, lever hub, cylinder, and internal linkages in one reinforced steel case. They're the standard for commercial buildings, hospitality, healthcare, institutional, and high-traffic facilities because they outperform cylindrical locks on durability, function variety, and security. This guide covers what mortise locks are, the ANSI function codes that define them, the major commercial brands you'll encounter, how to specify the right one, and how to source replacements without misordering.

What Is a Mortise Lock

A mortise lock is a heavy-duty lock assembly installed in a rectangular pocket (the "mortise") machined into the edge of the door itself. Unlike a cylindrical lock that passes a cylinder through two round holes bored through the door face, the mortise lock body is a self-contained mechanical assembly measuring approximately 6 inches by 4 inches by 1 inch. The case houses the latchbolt, separate deadbolt, lever hub, cylinder housing, and all internal linkages in one reinforced steel unit.

Everything load-bearing sits inside the door, not bolted to the surface. That single design choice is what makes mortise locks the dominant commercial lock category for openings that need to last twenty-plus years under heavy cycle counts.

How Mortise Locks Differ from Cylindrical Locks

The structural difference between mortise and cylindrical locks drives every other difference in performance, function, and price.

A cylindrical lock (sometimes called a bored lock) uses two cross-bored holes. The chassis passes through one, the latch crosses through the other, and trim mounts on both faces of the door. Cylindrical locks are faster to install, cheaper to manufacture, and work well on lighter-duty interior openings.

A mortise lock requires a precise pocket cut into the door edge, plus through-bores for the cylinder and lever hubs. The pocket prep takes more skilled labor at installation. In exchange, the mortise lock delivers a one-piece reinforced case, a separate 1-inch deadbolt that operates independently of the latch, and a chassis large enough to hold complex function-change mechanisms inside.

Three things mortise locks do that cylindrical locks generally can't: combine a latch and a separate deadbolt in one chassis, support classroom-security and institutional functions, and survive Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA testing on 2 million cycles.

ANSI Function Codes for Mortise Locks

The American National Standards Institute, working with the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, defines mortise lock behavior using F-codes. Every commercial mortise lock spec sheet references these codes. Knowing them is how you cross-reference one brand against another.

F01 Passage. Both levers always operate the latchbolt. No locking. Used on closet doors, conference rooms, interior pass-through openings.

F02 Privacy. Trim from either side retracts the latchbolt. Thumbturn inside retracts and projects a deadbolt. Emergency release from outside retracts the deadbolt. Used on bathrooms and bedrooms.

F04 Classroom. Outside lever locked or unlocked by key from outside. Inside lever always free for egress. Used on classrooms where teachers control access from the corridor.

F05 Office. Outside lever locked by toggle button inside or by key from outside. Inside lever always free. Used on offices where the occupant locks the door from inside.

F07 / F08 Storeroom. Outside lever permanently fixed. Key from outside retracts latchbolt for entry. Inside lever always free for egress. Used on IT rooms, supply rooms, mechanical rooms, electrical closets.

F13 Classroom Security. Both levers can be locked from inside the classroom. Provides lockdown capability without requiring the teacher to step into the corridor. Used in K-12 active-shooter response specifications.

F14 Classroom Security with Deadbolt. Adds a separate deadbolt to the F13 function for additional lockdown security.

F17 Deadbolt. Standalone deadbolt function without latch. Used on storage and tenant security applications.

F20 Entrance. Latch retracted by key outside or inside lever. Outside lever locked or unlocked by key. Used on suite entries and tenant doors.

F21 Apartment Corridor. Combines latch operation with deadbolt control specifically for multifamily corridor doors.

F31 Exit. Outside lever rigid at all times. Inside lever retracts the latchbolt. Used on emergency exit doors that don't allow re-entry from outside.

Top Commercial Mortise Lock Brands and Their Series

Five brands account for the vast majority of commercial mortise locks specified in North America. The function codes are standardized across all of them, which means model numbers cross-reference predictably once you know the function.

Schlage L Series (L9000). Allegion's flagship commercial mortise line. Over 40 functions, 31 lever designs, 14 finishes. UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies. The most widely specified mortise lock in North American commercial construction. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams guide covers the component breakdown. Electrified variants include the L9580 motorized latch retraction storeroom lock for access-controlled openings.

Sargent 8200 Series. ASSA ABLOY's primary commercial mortise lock. Grade 1, full function range, broad finish and lever selection. Common on East Coast institutional specifications.

Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series. Another ASSA ABLOY brand. Functionally comparable to the Sargent 8200, often specified on legacy buildings where Corbin Russwin was the original brand.

Best 45H Series. Best Access Systems (dormakaba). Grade 1 mortise lock with field-removable core compatibility. Heavy presence in K-12 and higher-education specifications.

Yale / Accentra 8800 Series. Recently rebranded from Yale to Accentra under ASSA ABLOY. Full Grade 1 commercial mortise line.

Falcon MA Series. Allegion's mid-tier commercial mortise brand. Grade 1 performance at a different price point than Schlage L Series. Common on multifamily and budget-conscious commercial specifications.

Von Duprin 7500 Series. The mortise lock that pairs with Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit devices. Field-reversible, field-selectable functions, electrified E7500 variant available. The Von Duprin 7500 parts manual covers the full breakdown.

Adams Rite 4500 / 4900 Series. Specialized narrow-stile mortise locks for aluminum entrance doors. Used on storefront and curtain wall applications where standard mortise hardware won't fit the door section.

Cal-Royal NM Series. Grade 1 commercial mortise at a budget tier. Used on cost-sensitive commercial and apartment corridor specifications.

Components Inside a Commercial Mortise Lock

The internal architecture is consistent across brands, even when model numbers differ. Knowing the component breakdown is what determines whether you order a complete lock or a single replacement part.

Lock case. The reinforced steel housing that contains all internal mechanisms. Field-replaceable as a complete unit on most failures.

Latchbolt. The main spring-loaded bolt that engages the strike when the door closes. Stainless steel on most production runs. Anti-friction tongue on Grade 1 units.

Deadbolt. Separate 1-inch throw bolt operated independently of the latch. Engages on key turn or thumbturn. The presence of a separate deadbolt is one of the defining features of mortise locks vs cylindrical locks.

Auxiliary latch (deadlocking). Smaller secondary latch that deadlocks the main latchbolt when the door is closed. Prevents shimming. Standard on Grade 1 commercial mortise locks.

Lever hub and spindle. The internal mechanism that translates lever rotation into latch retraction. Worn spindles cause lever droop and loose feel.

Cylinder housing. Threaded opening that accepts the keyway cylinder. Most commercial mortise locks accept Schlage-prep mortise cylinders, which means standard Everest 29, Primus, FSIC, and SFIC cylinders cross between brands.

Faceplate. The visible plate at the edge of the door covering the lock pocket. Often field-adjustable for door bevel angle.

Strike. The plate or pocket in the door frame that receives the latchbolt and deadbolt when the door closes. Specified separately from the lock body.

Trim (escutcheons and roses). The decorative and structural cover on both faces of the door. Available in various designs depending on brand.

Where Commercial Mortise Locks Are Used

Mortise locks dominate four building categories.

Healthcare facilities. Hospitals, clinics, and behavioral health buildings. Quiet operation, ligature-resistant trim options on the L Series and Sargent equivalents, and the durability to handle 24/7 cycle counts are why mortise hardware is specified here over cylindrical.

K-12 and higher education. Classrooms, administration, mechanical rooms, and lockdown-capable corridor doors. F13 Classroom Security and F14 Classroom Security with Deadbolt functions are the reason most K-12 spec sheets list mortise hardware after the Sandy Hook era specifications became standard.

Commercial office buildings. Tenant entries, suite doors, executive offices, and high-security access points. Mortise hardware is the standard on Class A office construction.

Hospitality. Hotels, conference centers, and high-end retail. The aesthetic continuity of mortise hardware (no visible faceplate from outside, clean lever and escutcheon styles) drives the spec choice.

Mortise locks are also common on government buildings, courthouses, military facilities, multifamily corridor doors, and any building where the durability premium pays back over a 20-plus year service life.

Grade 1 vs Grade 2 vs Grade 3 Mortise Locks

ANSI/BHMA A156.13 defines three grades for mortise locks based on standardized testing.

Grade 1. The highest commercial standard. Cycle test: 1 million minimum (most current Grade 1 mortise locks rate 2 million cycles). Resistance test: 1,000 inch-pounds. Door impact test passed. Used on commercial, institutional, and high-traffic openings.

Grade 2. Light commercial standard. Lower cycle and resistance requirements. Used on light commercial and high-end residential openings.

Grade 3. Residential standard. Not typically specified on commercial construction.

For commercial buildings, Grade 1 is the baseline. Grade 2 mortise locks exist but show up rarely in commercial spec because the cost gap to Grade 1 is small enough that most spec writers default to the higher grade.

How to Specify the Right Commercial Mortise Lock

Five specifications lock in every commercial mortise lock order.

Function. ANSI F-code that defines the lock behavior. Passage, privacy, classroom, office, storeroom, deadbolt, entrance, or one of the security-specific variants.

Brand and series. Schlage L9000, Sargent 8200, Best 45H, Corbin Russwin ML2000, Yale/Accentra 8800, Falcon MA, or others depending on existing building specification.

Lever or knob style. Trim selection. Lever required for ADA compliance on accessible openings. Knob still permitted on certain non-accessible commercial doors.

Finish. ANSI/BHMA finish code. 605 (bright brass), 612 (satin bronze), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), 625 (bright chrome), 626 (satin chrome), 629 (bright stainless), 630 (satin stainless), 643e (aged bronze) are the most common.

Cylinder option. P (full-face Schlage 6-pin), L (less cylinder), B (SFIC less core), R (FSIC), or one of the brand-specific cylinder variants. Cylinder choice determines key system compatibility.

Door thickness and handing are usually field-adjustable on Grade 1 mortise locks, but verify with the spec sheet. Some institutional locks require handing at order.

How to Replace a Commercial Mortise Lock

Three approaches depending on what failed.

Complete lock body replacement. When the chassis itself fails (internal mechanism worn, multiple components failed). Order the matching SKU including function, finish, and trim. Reuse the existing strike if it's in good condition.

Component-level replacement. When a single part failed (worn latchbolt, broken auxiliary latch, lever droop from spindle wear). Order the specific part. Most Grade 1 mortise lock manufacturers stock individual components.

Full re-spec to current product. When the existing lock is on a legacy series that's no longer manufactured. Schlage L9000 has been continuously produced, so retrofit is straightforward. Older Yale, Corbin, and Russwin lines may require cross-referencing to the current Accentra or Corbin Russwin equivalent.

Before ordering replacement, pull the model number off the lock face. Most commercial mortise locks stamp the brand and series directly on the faceplate or the lock body.

Why Choose Security Parts for Commercial Mortise Locks

Security Parts has been the go-to source for commercial door hardware components in the United States since 2001. That's more than two decades of stocking, shipping, and verifying parts for the exact hardware that shows up on commercial buildings. Mortise locks are a category where that experience matters more than catalog breadth, because the wrong function code on a service order costs a return cycle and a building day with the door out of service.

What sets the team apart is the depth on Allegion brands. As a long-standing distributor for Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, and Falcon hardware, Security Parts stocks the Schlage L Series, Von Duprin 7500, and Falcon MA mortise lock components on the shelf, not on a three-week drop ship. Lock bodies, latchbolts, auxiliary latches, trim spindles, cylinder housings, and complete mortise lock assemblies ship the same day on stocked SKUs.

Spec verification is the part most distributors don't do. If you're not sure whether the existing lock is a Schlage L9050 office or an L9070 classroom, whether the cylinder option crosses between brands, or which function code matches the application, the team will work through it with you on the phone before the order ships. That's how the wrong-function return cycle gets prevented, and it's the single biggest cost-saver on commercial service calls where a misordered lock means another day of manual access on a building that doesn't have that runway.

For facility managers, locksmiths, access control integrators, contractors, and spec writers sourcing commercial mortise lock hardware across institutional portfolios, Security Parts combines stocked depth, brand specialization, and the technical bench to verify configurations. That combination is what builds the long-term sourcing relationships the team has held with K-12 districts, healthcare networks, and government facilities for over twenty years.

Closing

Commercial mortise locks are the standard hardware on every building category where security, durability, and function flexibility matter. The brand and series may vary, but the underlying ANSI function codes are universal, and the component architecture is consistent across the Big Five (Schlage L Series, Sargent 8200, Best 45H, Corbin Russwin ML2000, Yale/Accentra 8800).

When specifying or replacing a commercial mortise lock, confirm the function code first, brand and series second, then trim and finish. Source from a distributor that stocks the specific brand line your building runs on. Security Parts has carried commercial mortise lock hardware since 2001, with verified configurations and spec guidance by phone at 845-935-0301.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the difference between a mortise lock and a cylindrical lock?

 A mortise lock installs in a pocket cut into the door edge with a self-contained reinforced steel case. A cylindrical lock passes through two cross-bored holes in the door face. Mortise locks are stronger, support more functions, and last longer under commercial cycle counts.

What does ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 mean for a mortise lock?

 Grade 1 is the highest commercial standard under ANSI/BHMA A156.13. It requires the lock to pass cycle testing (typically 2 million cycles), resistance testing, door impact testing, and warped door testing. Grade 1 is the baseline specification for commercial buildings.

Which is the most common commercial mortise lock brand?

 Schlage L Series (L9000) is the most widely specified commercial mortise lock in North America. Sargent 8200, Best 45H, Corbin Russwin ML2000, and Yale/Accentra 8800 are the other major commercial brands.

Can mortise lock functions be changed in the field? 

Yes, on most brands. Schlage L Series, Sargent 8200, and Von Duprin 7500 all support field-selectable functions on the same chassis through internal mechanism adjustments. The specific procedure varies by brand and series.

Are mortise locks fire rated?

 Most Grade 1 commercial mortise locks carry UL fire ratings up to 3 hours when installed on listed fire door assemblies. Verify the specific lock's UL listing against the door's fire rating requirement.

What's the difference between a mortise lock and a mortise deadbolt? 

A mortise lock combines a latchbolt and (on most functions) a separate deadbolt in one chassis. A mortise deadbolt is a leverless lock with only the deadbolt, used on auxiliary security applications. Schlage L9460 is the standard mortise deadbolt under the L Series chassis.

How long do commercial mortise locks last? 

Grade 1 commercial mortise locks rated for 2 million cycles typically last 15 to 25 years in commercial service depending on traffic. Heavy-cycle openings (corridor doors, classroom entries) may need component-level service after 10 to 15 years.

 

Commercial Door Operators: A Parts, Models, and Service Guide

Commercial door operators are the powered mechanisms that open and close a door automatically when triggered by a push button, motion sensor, or access control signal. They're not door closers. A door closer holds the door shut after manual opening. A door operator actively opens the door under power, then closes it under controlled return. The two get confused constantly on hardware schedules, and that confusion causes the wrong parts to get ordered.

This guide covers what door operators actually do, the LCN and Norton models most commonly installed on commercial buildings, how to identify the unit in front of you, and where to source replacement parts when one fails. If you're working on a manual door closer instead, see the LCN door closer parts guide for that line.

What Commercial Door Operators Do

A commercial door operator is a motorized device mounted on or in the door frame that swings the door open when energized. The operator carries an internal motor (usually electric, sometimes hydraulic on heavy-duty industrial models) and a control board that manages opening speed, hold-open time, and closing return. Most commercial door operators run on 120V AC for the unit itself, with low-voltage activation signals (12V or 24V) coming in from access control, push plates, or wave sensors.

The two functional categories you'll encounter most:

Low-energy door operators. These swing the door at a controlled speed governed by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. Low-energy means the door's opening force and speed stay under a threshold that doesn't require safety sensors or guard rails. Common on accessible restrooms, single-occupancy entries, and ADA-compliant office doors.

Full-energy automatic door operators. Higher opening force and faster swing. Governed by ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Requires presence sensors, safety beams, or guard rails because the door moves with enough force to injure if someone walks into it. Common on retail entrances, hospitals, and high-traffic commercial buildings.

Most door operators on commercial schedules in North America are low-energy units. They're cheaper, code-compliant for most applications, and don't require the sensor stack that full-energy operators do.

Major Commercial Door Operator Models

LCN 4640 Series (Senior Swing). The most-installed low-energy door operator on commercial schedules in North America. Surface-mounted, hydraulic-assist, electric drive. Standard on accessible restrooms, conference rooms, and ADA office doors. Specified across K-12, healthcare, and government buildings.

LCN 4642 Series. Heavy-duty version of the 4640 platform. Higher operating force, more durable internal components, longer service interval. Specified where the door sees high cycle counts or wind load.

LCN 4630/4631 Series. Mid-range models in the LCN low-energy line. Less common than the 4640/4642 but still in active service on installs from the last fifteen years.

Norton 5700 Series. Norton's primary low-energy door operator. Functionally comparable to the LCN 4640. Common on Norton-branded hardware schedules.

Norton 5800 ADAEZ Pro. A more recent Norton operator built specifically for ADA-compliant restroom and accessible-entry applications.

Stanley Magic Force / Magic Swing. Older Stanley low-energy operators still found on legacy installs. Stanley sold the line to dormakaba years ago, so service support has narrowed.

Horton 7000 Series. Heavy commercial swing door operator. Used on hospitals, retail entrances, transportation facilities.

For most replacement work on commercial buildings under twenty years old, the parts you'll need are LCN 4640/4642 or Norton 5700.

How to Identify Your Door Operator Before Ordering Parts

Five checks before placing a parts order. Each one prevents a return.

Read the model number off the unit. Most commercial door operators stamp the model number on the cover or inside the housing. LCN 4640, 4642, Norton 5700, Stanley Magic, all label themselves. The cover usually comes off with a single screw or quarter-turn fastener.

Identify the mounting style. Surface-applied (mounted to the face of the frame or door), concealed overhead (recessed into the header), or in-floor (mounted in the floor under the door pivot). Mounting style determines which parts cross between models.

Note the drive type. Electric (motor-driven), hydraulic-assist (motor plus hydraulic dampers), or pneumatic (older units, less common in modern commercial). Drive type determines what internal components are in the unit.

Confirm the voltage. Most commercial door operators run 120V AC for the main unit. Activation signals come in low-voltage (12V or 24V). Some legacy units run different voltage, so confirm at the unit before ordering electrical components.

Pull the cycle count if available. High-cycle doors (retail, hospital entrances) wear different parts than low-cycle doors (conference rooms, single-occupancy restrooms). Cycle count helps predict which component actually failed versus what looks worn cosmetically.

Common Door Operator Service Issues and What to Replace

Four failure patterns account for most door operator service calls.

Door doesn't open on signal. Usually a control board issue, a low-voltage wiring fault, or a failed motor. Test the activation signal at the operator's low-voltage input first. If signal is present and the motor doesn't run, the control board is the next suspect. If the board is good and the motor still doesn't actuate, replace the motor.

Door opens but doesn't close fully. Hydraulic damper issue or arm linkage wear. On LCN 4640 and 4642 units, the hydraulic damper assembly is the wear component. Replace as a single unit rather than rebuilding internals.

Door slams shut or closes too fast. Closing speed adjustment is out of range, or the closing valve has failed. Adjust the valve first. If the adjustment doesn't hold, replace the valve assembly.

Door operator binds, hesitates, or makes unusual noise. Internal mechanical wear, usually on the spindle or drive gear. On older units (10-plus years), full operator replacement is often more economical than rebuilding internals.

Door Operator Parts Categories

The component breakdown across LCN and Norton low-energy door operators follows a common architecture. The parts categories you'll source from:

Motor and drive assembly. The motor itself and the gear train that connects motor torque to the spindle.

Control board. Manages opening signal, hold-open time, closing speed, and obstruction sensing. Brand and model specific.

Hydraulic damper assembly. Handles controlled closing. Common wear part on hydraulic-assist units.

Arm and linkage. Connects the operator spindle to the door. Standard arm for push-side mount, parallel arm for pull-side, slide track for narrow header installations.

Activation devices. Push plates, wave sensors, motion detectors, push buttons. These are usually separate accessories, not internal operator components.

Cover and housing. Cosmetic and protective. Field-replaceable on most units.

Spindle and pinion. Internal mechanical components. Replaced as part of a major service or operator overhaul.

Power supply and transformer. Some units integrate the transformer in the housing. Others use an external transformer. Voltage-specific.

Door Operators vs Door Closers: Don't Confuse Them on Parts Orders

This is the single most common mistake on door operator parts orders. A door closer (LCN 4040XP, 4041, 4111, Norton 1601, Sargent 351) is a passive hydraulic device that closes a door after someone manually opens it. It doesn't open the door under power. Door closers don't have motors, control boards, or activation inputs.

A door operator opens the door under power. It carries a motor, a control board, and accepts activation signals.

If you're ordering "door closer parts" for what's actually a door operator, the parts won't fit. If you're ordering "door operator parts" for what's actually a heavy-duty door closer, same problem. Confirm the unit type before sourcing, especially on older buildings where the same opening may have housed both types over the years.

The door closer parts catalog handles manual closers. The automatic operator section handles powered units.

How to Source Door Operator Replacement Parts

For LCN 4640 and 4642 door operators, Security Parts stocks the LCN brand line including operator components, hydraulic dampers, arms, and control boards. Same-day shipping on stocked components.

For Norton 5700 and 5800 door operators, source from a Norton-authorized distributor or through Security Parts depending on stock. Norton control boards are model-specific and shouldn't be cross-substituted between series.

For Stanley Magic Force and Magic Swing legacy units, parts availability has narrowed since the dormakaba acquisition. On older Stanley units, replacement of the full operator with a current LCN or Norton model is often more economical than chasing legacy parts.

Before ordering any door operator part, confirm the unit's model number, mounting configuration, and voltage. For configurations not visible online, call 845-935-0301. Two minutes of spec verification prevents the wrong-part return cycle on a service call that probably doesn't have those days to spare.

Why Choose Security Parts for Door Operator Components and Replacement

Security Parts has been the go-to source for commercial door hardware components in the United States since 2001. That's more than two decades of stocking, shipping, and verifying parts for the exact hardware that fails on commercial buildings. Door operators are a category where that experience matters more than catalog breadth, because the wrong part costs a service call and a day of building downtime. The right one ships the same day and gets the door back in service before lunch.

What sets the team apart is the depth on Allegion brands. As a long-standing distributor for LCN, Von Duprin, Schlage, and Falcon hardware, Security Parts carries the LCN 4640, 4642, and broader Senior Swing door operator parts in stock, not on a three-week drop ship. Hydraulic damper assemblies, control boards, arm and linkage components, motors, covers, and replacement spindles all ship the same day on stocked SKUs.

Spec verification is the part most distributors don't do. If you're not sure whether the unit on the door is a 4640 or a 4642, whether the control board you need is original or a current replacement, or whether the operator can be retrofitted with a current ADA-compliant unit, the team will work through it with you on the phone before the order ships. That's how the wrong-part return cycle gets prevented, and it's the single biggest cost-saver on commercial service calls where a misordered part means another business day with a manual door.

For facility managers, locksmiths, access control integrators, and contractors sourcing door operator parts across an institutional portfolio, Security Parts combines stocked depth, brand specialization, and the technical bench to verify configurations. That combination is what builds the long-term sourcing relationships the team has held with K-12 districts, healthcare networks, and government facilities for over twenty years.

Closing

Commercial door operators are infrastructure. They cycle thousands of times a year on busy openings and stay in service for two decades when they're maintained. When one fails, the door becomes either a manual-only opening (frustrating for users) or a security gap (if the operator is part of an access-controlled entry). Either way, the fix needs to be fast and the parts need to be right.

Identify the unit model before ordering. Distinguish door operator from door closer. Confirm voltage and mounting configuration. Then source from a distributor that stocks the specific LCN or Norton line your building runs on. Security Parts has carried LCN commercial hardware since 2001, with verified configurations and spec guidance by phone at 845-935-0301.

Frequently Asked Questions

What's the difference between a door operator and a door closer?

 A door operator opens the door automatically under power and controls the close. A door closer is a passive device that only closes the door after manual opening. Door operators carry a motor, control board, and activation inputs. Door closers do not.

Which door operators are most common on commercial buildings?

 LCN 4640 (Senior Swing) and 4642 are the most-installed low-energy door operators in North America. Norton 5700 series is the next most common. Together these account for the majority of low-energy commercial door operator installs in the last two decades.

Are door operators required to meet ADA standards?

 On accessible openings, yes. Door operators on ADA-compliant entries must meet ANSI/BHMA A156.19 for low-energy units, which governs opening speed and force to ensure the door is safe and operable for users with mobility limitations.

Can a door operator be added to an existing manual door? 

Yes, on most commercial doors. Low-energy door operators like the LCN 4640 are surface-mounted and can retrofit an existing door without frame modification, provided the door has structural mounting points and access to 120V AC for the operator unit.

How long do commercial door operators last?

 Properly installed and maintained door operators typically last 15 to 20 years on low-cycle openings. High-cycle doors (retail entries, hospital corridors) may see 7 to 10 years before major service. Hydraulic dampers, control boards, and motors are the components that fail first.

What voltage does a commercial door operator require? 

Most commercial door operators run on 120V AC for the main unit, with low-voltage activation signals at 12V or 24V coming from push plates, sensors, or access control panels. Confirm voltage at the unit before ordering electrical components.

Where can I source door operator parts?

 Security Parts stocks commercial door operator components including LCN 4640 and 4642 parts, control boards, hydraulic dampers, and arm assemblies. Call 845-935-0301 for configurations not visible online.

 

Schlage L9580 vs Electric Strike: Which One Should Go on the Door

The Schlage L9580 vs electric strike decision comes down to one question most spec sheets never frame clearly: do you modify the lock, or do you modify the frame? An electric strike releases the door by swinging open a keeper cut into the frame. The L9580 releases the door by retracting the latchbolt inside the lock itself. Both get you electronic access control. They get you there in very different ways, with different costs, security levels, and code implications.

This guide compares them on the factors that actually decide a spec. If you need the full breakdown of the lock itself, see our Schlage L9580 guide. This piece is about choosing between the two approaches.

The Core Difference in How They Work

An electric strike replaces the fixed strike plate in the door frame. When the access control panel sends a signal, the keeper pivots and lets the latchbolt swing free, so the door can be pulled or pushed open. The lock on the door never changes state. Its latch stays extended the whole time.

The Schlage L9580 works the opposite way. The lock body stays in the frame as a standard mortise lock, and a motor inside the chassis physically pulls the latchbolt back into the case on a 24V DC signal. The frame's strike never moves. The door becomes pushable because the latch is gone, not because the keeper released.

That single mechanical difference drives everything else in the comparison.

Frame Impact: The Biggest Practical Divider

Electric strikes require the frame to be cut and routed for the strike body and its wiring. On new construction with hollow metal frames prepped at the factory, that's simple. On a retrofit, it's invasive. Cutting an existing frame for a strike is labor, it can weaken the frame, and on fire-rated assemblies it often isn't permitted at all without a tested, listed fire-rated strike.

The L9580 retrofits the same mortise pocket that already holds a mechanical L9080 or any L9000 lock. The frame is never touched. Wiring runs through the door via an electric hinge or door loop. For any building where the frames are already prepped for mortise locks, this is the cleaner path by a wide margin.

If your project is a renovation with existing mortise-prepped doors, frame impact alone often settles the decision in favor of the L9580.

Security: Latch Retracted vs Keeper Released

With an electric strike, the lock's latchbolt stays fully extended. Only the frame keeper releases. That's secure enough for most interior openings, but the weak point is the frame cutout. A strike plate routed into a frame is structurally less robust than an intact frame holding a deadlocking latch.

The L9580 keeps a one-piece Grade 1 mortise body and a deadlocking auxiliary latch, which prevents shimming when the door is closed. On openings that face genuine forced-entry risk, perimeter doors, cash rooms, pharmacies, server rooms, the mortise lock approach is the tougher build.

For low-risk interior doors, the security gap is small enough that other factors decide. For high-security openings, the L9580 wins on physical security.

Noise: A Real Factor in Healthcare and Quiet Spaces

This one gets overlooked until it becomes a complaint. AC-powered electric strikes buzz when energized. DC strikes click. In a hospital corridor at 3 a.m., a library, a courthouse, or any space sensitive to repeated sound, that buzz or click on every access event is a problem.

The L9580 uses an ultra-quiet motor. Latch retraction is near silent. This is a major reason Allegion positions the motorized latch retraction line for healthcare and education, where doors cycle constantly and noise discipline matters. If the opening is in a quiet-sensitive environment, the L9580 has a clear edge.

Fire-Rated Openings: Code Narrows Your Options

On a fire-rated door assembly, an electric strike has to be a tested, listed fire-rated strike, and on a fire door it must fail secure (latched on power loss) so the door stays a barrier during a fire. Many standard electric strikes don't qualify, which limits your selection.

The L9580 is built on an L Series chassis UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies. Because it's latch-retraction-only, it defaults to its mechanical storeroom behavior when power is removed, the latch extends and the door secures, which aligns with fire-door requirements under NFPA 80. For fire-rated openings, the L9580 is often the simpler path to a compliant install.

Aesthetics: Visible Hardware vs Clean Lines

An electric strike adds a visible faceplate in the frame. In utility spaces, nobody cares. In a hotel lobby, a healthcare reception area, or a high-end commercial interior, that faceplate matters to the architect.

The L9580 looks identical to a standard mechanical mortise lock from the outside. No visible electronic component, no frame faceplate. If the design intent is to hide the access control layer, the mortise lock approach wins.

Cost Factors Without the Sticker Price

The hardware comparison isn't apples to apples, and the real cost lives in the install, not the part. Electric strikes generally carry a lower hardware cost, but frame cutting, fire-rated strike requirements, and wiring labor can close that gap fast on a retrofit. The L9580 carries a higher hardware cost but a lower install burden on mortise-prepped doors because the frame stays untouched.

The honest way to evaluate it: on new construction with factory-prepped frames, the electric strike often costs less installed. On retrofits with existing mortise doors, the L9580 frequently comes out even or ahead once frame labor and fire compliance are counted. Run the comparison per opening, not per catalog line.

When Each One Wins

The electric strike is the better call when the door uses cylindrical hardware you want to keep, when the budget is tight on simple interior openings, when the frame is already prepped for a strike, or when you only need to add access control to an existing lock without replacing it.

The L9580 is the better call on mortise-prepped retrofits where the frame can't be cut, on fire-rated openings, on quiet-sensitive environments like healthcare, on high-security doors, on auto operator and hands-free applications where the latch needs to fully clear, and anywhere the access control layer needs to stay visually invisible.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is the Schlage L9580 more secure than an electric strike?

 On high-risk openings, yes. The L9580 keeps a one-piece Grade 1 mortise body with a deadlocking auxiliary latch, while an electric strike relies on a keeper routed into the frame. For low-risk interior doors, the difference is minimal.

Can the L9580 replace an electric strike on a fire-rated door?

 Often, yes. The L Series chassis is UL listed for 3-hour fire assemblies and fails secure on power loss, which aligns with fire-door code. Electric strikes on fire doors must be specifically fire-rated and fail secure, which limits the options.

Why is the L9580 quieter than an electric strike? 

The L9580 retracts its latch with an ultra-quiet motor. AC electric strikes buzz and DC strikes click on each access event, which makes the L9580 preferable in healthcare, libraries, and other quiet-sensitive spaces.

Is an electric strike cheaper than the L9580? 

The hardware usually costs less, but frame cutting, wiring labor, and fire-rated strike requirements can erase that gap on retrofits. Evaluate installed cost per opening, not hardware cost alone.

Which one works better with auto operators? 

The L9580. It fully retracts the latch so the door clears cleanly for hands-free operation, which is why it's specified for accessible restrooms and infection-control corridors.

Closing

The Schlage L9580 vs electric strike choice isn't about which technology is better in the abstract. It's about which one fits the opening. Frame condition, fire rating, security level, and noise sensitivity decide it more than hardware cost does. For mortise-prepped retrofits, fire-rated doors, and quiet environments, the L9580 usually wins. For simple interior openings and frames already cut for a strike, the electric strike still earns its place.

Spec it per door. When you're ready to source either side, Security Parts stocks commercial mortise locks and electric strikes, and the team has verified configurations on commercial hardware since 2001. Reach them at 845-935-0301.

 

Schlage L9580: The Storeroom Mortise Lock with Motorized Latch Retraction Explained

The Schlage L9580 is a Grade 1 mortise lock from Allegion's L Series running the storeroom function with motorized latch retraction (MLR), single outside cylinder, and 24V DC operation. Allegion released it to market in March 2025 for access-controlled commercial openings where the door has to release on signal without anyone touching the lever. Auto operators, card readers, push-button stations, infection-control corridors, K-12 visitor entries, accessible restrooms.

That's the role. What spec sheets skip is the practical detail: how to wire it, how to size the power supply, and how to order the right configuration the first time. Here's the working breakdown.

What the Schlage L9580 Does

The L9580 runs the storeroom function: outside lever stays fixed (key-only entry from outside), inside lever is always free for egress. Standard institutional setup for IT rooms, supply closets, mechanical rooms, and access-controlled service corridors.

Motorized latch retraction adds one capability on top: a 24V DC signal to the chassis tells an internal motor to retract the latchbolt. The door becomes pushable without anyone using the lever or key. When the signal stops, the latch springs back out. The lock secures itself the next time the door closes.

The unit also includes a deadlocking auxiliary latch, so the main latch can't be retracted by a credit-card shim once the door is closed. That's a Grade 1 physical security detail you don't get on lighter electrified hardware.

Where the L9580 Fits in the L Series Family

Allegion's MLR line splits into two groups. Latch-retraction-only: L9510 (passage), L9580 (storeroom), L9582 (institution). Latch-retraction-plus-lever-control: L9692EL/EU, L9695EL/EU, L9696EL/EU.

The L9580 sits in the first group. It retracts the latch on signal but doesn't electrify the lever itself. If your project needs the lever to lock or unlock electronically, you want the L9692/95/96 line instead.

The L9580 shares chassis dimensions with the broader Schlage L Series mortise lock platform, which means it retrofits the same mortise pocket as a mechanical L9080. Frame stays intact. Wiring runs through the door.

Trim, finish, lever style, and keyway options carry across the entire L Series. Standard keyway is patented Everest 29 S123, with Primus available for upgraded geographic exclusivity. Cylinder formats include FSIC, SFIC, conventional, and less-cylinder. Twelve finishes cover 605, 612, 619, 622, 625, 626, 629, 630, and 643e among others.

Electrical Specifications That Determine Power Supply Sizing

24V DC only. Not 12V, not multi-voltage, not AC. A 12V panel won't actuate it. AC will damage the motor.

Peak current draws roughly 1.4 amps at the moment of latch retraction, then drops to around 0.1 amps holding current while the latch stays retracted. Sizing matters on multi-lock circuits: two L9580s firing simultaneously can pull close to 3 amps for a fraction of a second, even though average draw stays under one. UL 294 certified access control power supplies handle this if specified properly.

Critical install warning most distributors skip: don't share a circuit with solenoid-based devices unless transient voltage is suppressed. Solenoids generate voltage spikes when they de-energize, and those spikes damage the L9580 motor. Schlage's installation document specifies a varistor rated at 35V (peak recurrent) installed at the equipment producing the transient. Leave it out, and the motor fails inside a year.

Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure: Why the L9580 Operates Differently

Most electrified L Series locks have a field-selectable fail-safe / fail-secure switch in the chassis. The L9580, L9510, and L9582 do not. They're latch-retraction-only and operate in a single mode: powered means latch retracted, no power means latch extended.

Functionally that's similar to fail-secure (loss of power equals locked). But it's not switchable. If the application requires fail-safe behavior under code (some egress doors, certain stairwells, specific assembly occupancies), the L9580 is the wrong function. A lever-control variant from the same family covers that case.

The underlying L Series chassis is UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies, which makes the L9580 appropriate for fire-rated openings under NFPA 80 inspection requirements.

RX vs LX: Which Monitor Option Fits Your Access Control System

The L9580 takes two optional switches.

RX (request to exit) closes when the inside lever rotates, telling the access control panel that someone is exiting legitimately. Suppresses forced-entry alarms and logs valid exits. Most access control systems integrating with L9580 storerooms want RX.

LX (latchbolt monitor) signals whether the latchbolt is extended or retracted at any moment. Tells the panel whether the door is actually latched, not just closed. Specified for high-security openings where door position switch (DPS) data alone isn't enough.

Both can be ordered together. Security Parts stocks the L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis with RX as the primary configuration.

Choosing Between the L9580 and Other Access Control Options

The L9580 isn't always the right answer. If the door faces a choice between an electrified mortise lock and an electric strike, the trade-offs in frame impact, security, and noise matter. That comparison gets its own full breakdown in our guide on the Schlage L9580 vs an electric strike, worth reading before you spec a door either way.

Install Mistakes That Damage the Lock

Three field errors cause most L9580 failures inside the first year:

Sharing a circuit with solenoid hardware without a 35V varistor for transient voltage suppression. This is the single biggest cause of premature motor failure.

Wrong voltage at the lock terminals. 24V DC, correct polarity, no AC component. Multi-voltage panels feeding 12V to the lock won't actuate it, and the unit gets returned as defective when nothing was wrong.

Improper coordination with panic hardware on the same door. UL listing requires the L9580 to be installed so it doesn't interfere with exit device operation. On openings with both, mount them so they operate independently. The commercial exit device parts guide covers panic hardware specification if both are being sourced together.

How to Source the Right L9580 Configuration

Every L9580 order needs five specs locked in: trim and lever style, cylinder option (P, L, B, BD, R, F, T), finish, door thickness if anything other than 1-3/4 inch, and monitor option (RX, LX, or both). Handing is field-reversible, so it doesn't have to be specified at order.

For new spec, start at the L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis page and build the configuration up from there. For replacements, pull the model number and trim code off the existing lock face and match the same chassis variant. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams guide covers component-level sourcing if a single part failed instead of the full chassis.

For LX-only configurations, less common finishes, or extended door thickness, call 845-935-0301 to verify availability before placing the order.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is the Schlage L9580 fail-safe or fail-secure?

 Latch-retraction-only, not field-selectable. Powered equals latch retracted. No power equals latch extended and lock secured. Functionally similar to fail-secure but not the same as a switchable setting.

What voltage does the Schlage L9580 require?

 24V DC, single voltage, no AC component. Peak current is approximately 1.4 amps at retraction, holding current approximately 0.1 amps.

Can the L9580 retrofit an existing L9000 mortise pocket? 

Yes. Same chassis dimensions as the L9000 series. Drops in without frame modification. Wiring runs through the door.

Does the Schlage L9580 work with auto operators?

 Yes. Auto operator integration is one of the primary applications. The operator signals the lock to retract, then activates the door swing. Standard for accessible restrooms and hands-free corridors.

What's the difference between L9580 with RX and L9580 with LX? 

RX is a request-to-exit switch that signals when the inside lever rotates. LX is a latchbolt monitor that signals whether the latch is extended or retracted. RX integrates with most access control panels. LX verifies door secured status.

Is the Schlage L9580 UL fire rated?

 The underlying L Series chassis is UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies. Confirm fire rating compatibility against the specific opening's UL listing before ordering.

Closing

The Schlage L9580 gives a Grade 1 mortise storeroom lock the ability to release on signal without compromising security or appearance. Source it as a complete configuration. Confirm chassis, trim, finish, monitor option, and door thickness before the order ships. Security Parts has stocked Schlage commercial hardware since 2001, and the team is reachable for spec verification at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin Exit Device Series Comparison: Which Series Belongs on Which Door

A Von Duprin exit device series comparison is not just a product selection exercise. It is a specification decision that determines code compliance, maintenance costs, electrified options availability, and parts compatibility for the life of the opening. Von Duprin has been manufacturing panic exit hardware since 1908, and today its active product lineup covers fourteen series. Each one was engineered for a specific set of conditions no other series addresses equally well. The cost of specifying the wrong series shows up at installation when the device physically does not fit, at the first NFPA 80 inspection when the fire rating fails, and every time a maintenance order ships the wrong part because the series was never correctly confirmed.

Four Questions That Narrow the Field Before You Look at a Catalog

Is the door fire-rated?

 If yes, the exit device must positively latch every time the door closes. Fire-rated Von Duprin configurations add "-F" to the model number and remove the hex dogging function. The device must also carry a UL fire door listing.

Single door or double door without a center post?

 Single doors and paired doors with a mullion use rim configurations. Double doors without a center post require surface vertical rod (SVR) or concealed vertical rod (CVR) configurations.

What is the stile width? 

Aluminum storefront and glass doors with stile widths as narrow as 1-3/4 inches require narrow-stile devices. Standard hollow metal commercial doors use wide-stile devices.

Is electrified access control required now or anticipated? 

The crossbar series (55 and 88) are mechanical-only by design. If electronic integration will ever be needed at the device level, a push pad or touchbar series with electrified options must be specified.

The Complete Series Comparison

22 Series: Mid-Range Grade 1

Applications: Employee entrances, parking garage stairwells, healthcare clinics, multi-family corridors, back-of-house retail.

Why: ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 performance at a lower specification cost than the 98/99. Not as deep an electrified options catalog, but covers the essentials: ALK alarm kit, QEL modular conversion, MEL motorized latch retraction, RX request to exit.

Parts note: Center case 109012 (rim) or 109358 (2227 SVR). Pre-1998 devices use old-style dogging assemblies; convert with part 050709. Dogging hole is only 1/4 inch deep, long 5/32-inch hex key is mandatory.

33A/35A Series: Narrow-Stile Touchbar

Applications: Aluminum storefronts, narrow-stile glass doors, applications where a full-width touchbar is specified over a push pad. Minimum stile width: 1-3/4 inches.

Why: The narrow-stile sibling of the 98/99 for aluminum frame and glass doors. The touchbar runs the full width of the door, engaging the release mechanism anywhere along its length. The 35A adds an integral door position switch.

Electrified: Second-deepest options catalog outside the 98/99. Chexit delayed egress, E7500 electrified mortise lock, pneumatic options, Allegion Connect, electric power transfers.

55 Series: Narrow-Stile Crossbar

Applications: Historic renovations, ornate institutional lobbies, applications requiring crossbar aesthetics on a narrow-stile door.

Why: Cast brass or bronze plated to finish specification. Integrates the 7500 mortise lock body. Specified where the architectural context demands a traditional crossbar appearance in a narrow-stile frame.

No electrified options at the device level.

75 Series: Standard Commercial Grade 1

Applications: Healthcare facilities, standard commercial offices, light institutional openings requiring Grade 1 performance without full institutional specification cost.

Why: Sits between the 22 and 98/99 in specification depth and cost. Rim, SVR, and CVR configurations. Electrified options: ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, Allegion Connect. The center case reinforcing bracket on the 75 Series adds structural support on high-use corridor openings.

78 Series: Narrow-Stile Push Pad

Applications: Aluminum storefront and glass doors where a push pad is specified over a touchbar. Minimum stile clearance: 1-3/4 inches.

Why: The push pad equivalent of the 33A/35A for narrow-stile applications. Rim, SVR, CVR, and WDC configurations. Electrified options: ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, Allegion Connect.

Critical parts note: 78 Series components are not interchangeable with any wide-stile Von Duprin series. Narrow-stile form factor throughout.

88 Series: Wide-Stile Crossbar, Abuse-Resistant

Applications: Correctional facilities, behavioral health units, secure government floors, any application where hardware faces deliberate sustained force.

Why: In continuous production since the 1950s. Ships with a 42-inch field-sizeable crossbar. Non-handed. ANSI A156.3 Grade 1. UL Listed. Fire-rated versions (88-F) carry 3-hour UL 10C rating. No electrified options by design: in correctional and behavioral health environments, electronic components at the device level are not appropriate.

Configurations: Rim (88/88-F), SVR (8827/8827-F), CVR (8847-F), Mortise (8875/8875-F).

94/95 INPACT Series: Recessed Push Pad

Applications: High-traffic openings where the push pad requires protection from cart, equipment, or deliberate impact damage.

Why: Recessed push pad design reduces impact exposure in environments where a standard protruding push pad would be repeatedly struck.

98/99 Series: Institutional Flagship

Applications: Schools, hospitals, universities, government buildings, any high-traffic institutional opening requiring the highest specification depth.

Why: The dominant institutional specification in North America. ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1. UL Listed for panic and fire exit hardware. Made in the USA. Five configurations: rim, SVR (9827/9927), CVR (9947), WDC (wide door cable), and the 9875/9975 mortise device using the 7500 mortise lock body.

Forward compatibility: A mechanical 98/99 specified today can be upgraded to full electrified access control years later without replacing the device body. This is why architects and security consultants default to the 98/99 on complex institutional projects with phased access control implementation.

Electrified options: The deepest catalog in the Von Duprin lineup: QEL, HD-QEL, MEL, Chexit, ELR, Allegion Connect, RX, RX2, WP-RX, LX, LX-RX, SS Signal Switch, electric power transfers, and more.

Guard-X 2670: Alarmed Secondary Exit

Applications: Secondary exits in restaurants, retail, grocery, drug stores, any commercial space needing unauthorized exit deterrence.

Why: Not a standard exit device with an alarm add-on. Purpose-built with a 100-decibel alarm, stainless steel deadbolt rated to 1,600 pounds, armed indicator light, and Schlage SC-1 cylinder. NFPA 101 compliant. UL Listed. 10-year mechanical warranty, 1-year electrical warranty.

 

Side-by-Side Comparison

Series

Stile

Format

Fire-Rated

Electrified

Best Application

22 Series

Wide

Push pad, SVR

Yes (-F)

ALK, QEL, MEL, RX

Healthcare, multi-family, retail back doors

33A/35A

Narrow

Touchbar

Yes (-F)

Chexit, QEL, MEL, Allegion Connect

Aluminum storefront, narrow-stile glass

55 Series

Narrow

Crossbar

Yes (-F)

None

Historic, ornate, narrow-stile

75 Series

Wide

Push pad, SVR, CVR

Yes (-F)

ALK, QEL, MEL, Allegion Connect

Standard commercial, office, healthcare

78 Series

Narrow

Push pad

Yes (-F)

ALK, QEL, MEL, Allegion Connect

Aluminum storefront push pad

88 Series

Wide

Crossbar

Yes (-F)

None

Correctional, behavioral health, secure government

94/95 INPACT

Wide

Recessed push pad

Yes

Limited

High-impact traffic applications

98/99 Series

Wide

Push pad, SVR, CVR, WDC, Mortise

Yes (-F)

Full catalog

Institutional: schools, hospitals, government

Guard-X 2670

Wide

Alarmed deadbolt

Yes

Alarm only

Retail and restaurant secondary exits

 

Why Series Selection Affects Parts Sourcing for Life

Every series has its own parts tree. Components do not cross between series. A 78 Series arm does not fit a 33A/35A device. A 22 Series center case does not fit a 75 Series device. Specifying the wrong series at the project stage creates parts sourcing problems at every maintenance cycle for the full service life of the opening.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin exit device series comparison catalog by series and model, with interactive diagrams on every model page. The exit devices section covers every series in the same model-specific structure. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected].

Conclusion

The Von Duprin exit device series comparison starts with four decisions: fire rating, single vs double door configuration, stile width, and electrified options requirement. Those four answers eliminate most series immediately. The 98/99 for institutional depth and forward compatibility. The 22 for mid-range Grade 1 cost efficiency. The 33A/35A and 78 for narrow-stile aluminum and glass. The 88 for crossbar abuse resistance without electronics. The 55 for narrow-stile crossbar aesthetics. The Guard-X for alarmed secondary exits. Every series has its own non-interchangeable parts tree. Getting the series right at specification time is what keeps every future maintenance order, every parts replacement, and every code inspection on the correct path.

FAQs

What is the primary difference between the Von Duprin 22 and 98/99 Series?

 The 98/99 is the institutional flagship with the deepest electrified options catalog, five configurations, and Made in USA production. The 22 is mid-range Grade 1 for medium-traffic commercial at a lower specification cost.

When should I specify the 78 Series instead of the 33A/35A?

 Both fit narrow-stile aluminum and glass doors at 1-3/4 inch minimum stile width. Specify the 78 when a push pad is required. Specify the 33A/35A when a full-width touchbar is required or preferred.

Does the Von Duprin 88 Series support electrified access control? 

No. The 88 Series is mechanical-only by design. It is specified in correctional and behavioral health environments where device-level electronic components are not appropriate.

What is the 98/99 forward compatibility advantage? 

A mechanical 98/99 specified today can be upgraded to QEL, MEL, Chexit, Allegion Connect, or other electrified options years later without replacing the device body. This makes it the default institutional choice when phased access control is anticipated.

Are Von Duprin series parts interchangeable between models?

 No. Every series has its own non-interchangeable parts tree. A 78 Series arm does not fit a 33A/35A. A 22 Series center case does not fit a 75 Series. Series selection at specification time determines parts compatibility for the life of the opening.

Rim Exit Devices: How They Work, When to Use Them, and Everything the 98/99 Series Spec Requires

Rim exit devices are the most widely installed panic hardware configuration in commercial construction, and the Von Duprin 98/99 Series is the institutional standard for that category. The 98 and 99 Series devices are certified to ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1, UL Listed for panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, manufactured under ISO 9001 Quality Management System standards, and made in the USA. They are non-handed from the factory in most configurations, ship with a 299 rim strike standard, cover hollow metal doors with 86 or 161 cutouts, and support the deepest electrified options catalog in the Von Duprin lineup. Understanding what makes a rim device the right specification, and what makes it the wrong one, is what prevents the most common exit hardware specification error in commercial construction.

How a Rim Exit Device Works

The mechanism is simple by design. When a person presses the push bar, a lever arm inside the center case depresses and retracts the latch bolt from the rim strike pocket on the frame. When the bar is released, a return spring extends the latch bolt again. When the door swings shut, the beveled nose of the latch bolt rides over the strike lip and drops into the strike pocket automatically.

This simplicity is why rim devices dominate commercial construction. No rods penetrating the door floor. No mortise pocket cut into the door edge. The full mechanism sits on the face of the door, visible and accessible for maintenance without disassembly.

Fire-rated configurations remove the hex dogging function. On fire-rated openings, the latch must extend automatically every time the door closes. The "-F" suffix in the model number designates fire-rated configurations.

When Rim Is Right and When It Is Not

Rim is the correct specification for:

Single doors meeting a fixed frame. Paired doors with a center mullion, where each leaf latches to the mullion. Standard hollow metal commercial doors with 86 or 161 door prep cutouts.

Rim is the wrong specification for:

Double doors without a center post. When two active leaves must latch against each other at a center meeting point, a surface vertical rod (SVR) device adds top and bottom rod engagement for three-point latching. The 2227 SVR (22 Series), 9827/9927 SVR (98/99 Series), and 8827 SVR (88 Series) cover this application.

Applications requiring concealed hardware. When surface-mounted hardware is architecturally unacceptable, the concealed vertical rod (CVR) configurations route hardware inside the door.

Applications needing mortise lock security depth. The 98/9975 mortise exit device integrates the 7500 mortise lock body for maximum security at the door edge.

98 vs 99: The Only Difference That Matters

The 98 Series has a smooth mechanism case. The 99 Series has a grooved mechanism case. Every internal component is identical and fully interchangeable between the two. Every parts number that applies to a 98 rim device applies equally to a 99 rim device. The distinction is aesthetic only and produces no difference in performance, function, or Grade 1 certification.

Key Specifications Every Specifier Needs

ANSI certification: ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1 (the 2014 edition is the current standard, not the 2001 edition cited in older specifications).

UL listing: UL Listed for panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware. Fire-rated configurations carry a 3-hour UL 10C listing on single doors.

Non-handed status: The 98/99 rim device ships non-handed from the factory in most configurations. It becomes handed when ordered with SD (special dogging), -2 (double cylinder), or SS (signal switch) options.

Available finishes: US3, US3A, US4, US4A, US10, US26, US26D, US26D-AM Antimicrobial, US28, 313, 315, and 643E. The antimicrobial finish (US26D-AM) is specified in healthcare applications where touch surface hygiene is a design requirement.

Strike: 299 rim strike on non-fire-rated devices. 299F on fire-rated. The 299 measures 1-1/4 inches wide by 2-7/8 inches high with 2-1/8-inch slotted hole spacing.

Door lengths: 3-foot (36-inch) and 4-foot (48-inch) push bar lengths.

Trim Functions Available

The trim suffix in the model number determines outside hardware function:

  • EO: Exit only. No outside operation. Most common on exterior egress-only openings.
  • NL: Night latch. Key retracts latchbolt from outside. Uses rim cylinder and 1-1/4-inch mortise cylinder.
  • NLOP: Night latch with pull required. Key retracts latch, then a pull action is required to open.
  • TP: Thumbpiece. Key locks and unlocks outside thumbpiece.
  • L: Lever. ADA-compliant outside entry function. Most common on accessible egress routes.
  • DT: Dummy trim. Non-functional outside pull for aesthetic matching on inactive leaves.

Electrified Options on the 98/99 Rim Device

The 98/99 Series carries the most complete electrified options catalog in Von Duprin's lineup:

  • QEL: Quiet electric latch retraction. Modular field-installable conversion. Silent outside entry without a key.
  • HD-QEL: QEL with hex dogging retained. Allows mechanical dogging and electric latch retraction on the same device.
  • MEL: Motorized electric latch retraction. Motor-driven for silent operation in noise-sensitive environments.
  • Chexit: 15-second alarm-plus-delay for controlled egress and retail loss prevention.
  • ELR: Standard solenoid-driven electric latch retraction.
  • RX: Request to exit switch. Signals access control panel on egress activity.
  • RX2: Double request to exit, two RX switches.
  • WP-RX: Waterproof request to exit. Available with the OUT option for rim and surface vertical rod.
  • LX: Latch monitor switch. Monitors latch bolt position for door status verification.
  • LX-LC: Latch monitoring low current version.
  • LX-RX: Combined request to exit and latch monitoring.
  • SS (Signal Switch): Monitors both push pad and latch bolt simultaneously. Makes the latch bolt tamper-resistant. Rated up to 2.0 amp at 24VDC. Makes the device handed when specified.
  • ALK: 9-volt battery-powered alarm exit kit.

Parts That Fail First on High-Cycle Openings

Dogging assemblies (post-1997 devices): Dogging shaft 090040 (long 5/32-inch hex key mandatory, 1/4-inch shaft depth). Dogging hook 090044. Dogging spring 090041. Pre-1997 devices use old-style components; part 050709 is the conversion kit.

Center case: Part 050021 replaces all earlier non-fire-rated 98/99 rim center cases, with approximately 40-year backward compatibility.

299 strike: Strike shift from door sag or frame movement produces latch alignment problems. Strike replacement is among the most common rim device service items.

Push bar end guide (090049): Reduces noise and friction at the push bar assembly end. Missed on most service visits until noise develops.

Sourcing 98/99 Rim Device Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete 98/99 Series parts catalog by model and configuration, with interactive diagrams on every page. The exit devices catalog covers every Von Duprin series with the same model-specific structure. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected].

Conclusion

Rim exit devices are ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1, UL Listed, manufactured to ISO 9001 standards, and made in the USA. The 98 and 99 Series are internally identical. The device is non-handed except when SD, -2, or SS options are specified. Twelve finishes are available including US26D-AM antimicrobial for healthcare. The HD-QEL option retains hex dogging while adding electric latch retraction. The SS Signal Switch monitors both push pad and latch bolt and makes the device handed. Every 98/99 rim device parts order starts with confirming the center case variant by trim function before the catalog opens.

FAQs

What is the ANSI grade of the Von Duprin 98/99 rim exit device?

 ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1. The 2014 edition is the current standard. UL Listed for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware.

When does the 98/99 rim device become handed?

When ordered with SD (special dogging), -2 (double cylinder), or SS (signal switch) options. Standard configurations without these options are non-handed.

What is HD-QEL on the 98/99 Series? 

Quiet Electric Latch Retraction with hex dogging retained. It allows mechanical dogging and electric outside entry on the same device simultaneously.

What is the SS Signal Switch option? 

It monitors both the push pad and the latch bolt, signals unauthorized use to the access control system, makes the latch bolt tamper-resistant, and is rated up to 2.0 amp at 24VDC. It also makes the device handed.

Are 98 and 99 Series parts interchangeable? 

Yes, completely. The 98 has a smooth case and the 99 has a grooved case. Every internal component is identical between the two.

Exit Alarms Parts and Diagrams: The Von Duprin Guard-X Component Guide

Most facility managers only think about exit alarms parts and diagrams when the alarm fails to sound, the battery dies, or a disarming label gets peeled off. The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is the most widely installed commercial alarmed exit device in North America. It is not a standard exit device with an alarm kit added on. It is a purpose-built alarmed exit lock that integrates a stainless steel deadbolt rated to 1,600 pounds of force resistance, a 100-decibel alarm, an armed indicator light, and a Schlage SC-1 cylinder into a single housing. It complies with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, is UL Listed for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, carries a 10-year limited mechanical warranty and a 1-year limited electrical warranty, and ships non-handed in satin aluminum 628/US28 finish. The 2609 is the double door version.

What the Guard-X Was Built For

The Guard-X 2670 exists for one specific application: secondary exits where unauthorized use needs to be deterred without eliminating code-compliant egress. It identifies the door as an emergency exit and secures the opening against unauthorized entry or exit. Typical applications include back doors at restaurants, retail stores, discount stores, grocery stores, drug stores, clothing stores, and sporting goods stores where employee or customer misuse of a secondary exit is an operational problem.

Two features define the deterrent function:

The stainless steel deadbolt does not retract unless the key disarms the device first. It is tested to withstand 1,600 pounds of force, making it significantly more resistant to defeat than a standard latch bolt. The 100-decibel alarm sounds immediately when the push bar is activated without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light on the device face shows the armed state before any attempt is made to open the door.

The standard device ships with an SC-1 Schlage cylinder included. The 2609 double door variant coordinates alarm functions between two active leaves on a paired opening.

Every Replaceable Component in the Guard-X 2670

Alarm Battery

This is the most frequently replaced component on every Guard-X installation. The device uses a standard 9-volt battery to power the alarm circuit. When the battery fails, the device operates mechanically but produces no alarm sound on push bar activation, which is the worst failure mode for a deterrent device. Proactive replacement every six months on high-use secondary exits prevents silent failure without waiting for the symptom.

Schlage SC-1 Cylinder

The cylinder is what disarms the alarm before an authorized door use. The SC-1 keyway is Schlage's standard 5-pin tumbler residential and light commercial cylinder. It ships included with the Guard-X 2670. Replacement is needed when the cylinder wears from heavy use, when a key is lost, or when the building's key system is being re-keyed. The SC-1 keyway is widely available from Schlage-authorized locksmiths and can be ordered factory-keyed to a master key system.

Retainer Nut

The retainer nut secures the cylinder in the device housing. A loose retainer nut allows the cylinder to rotate in the housing rather than staying fixed, which prevents the alarm from disarming correctly when the key is turned. Retainer nuts are the most commonly overlooked service item on Guard-X devices. A torque check at every service visit takes 30 seconds and prevents the most frustrating "alarm won't disarm" service call.

Disarming Label

The "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY, ALARM WILL SOUND" label is both an NFPA 101 code requirement and a deterrent element. Labels fade, peel, or are deliberately removed. A missing label removes a code compliance element and reduces deterrent effectiveness. Replacement labels are stocked individually.

Alarm Housing Assembly

The housing contains the sounder element and the circuit board that controls alarm timing and the indicator light. When the alarm sounds erratically, fails to sound despite a fresh battery, or the indicator light malfunctions, the housing assembly requires replacement. This is less common than battery or cylinder service but becomes necessary as devices age past their electrical warranty period.

Push Bar Assembly

The push bar completes the alarm circuit when depressed without prior disarming. Push bar wear from physical abuse or forced entry attempts requires assembly replacement. The push bar is replaceable without removing the full device from the door.

Deadbolt Assembly

The stainless steel deadbolt is the mechanical security element. Replacement is required when the bolt is physically damaged from a forced entry attempt significant enough to defeat the 1,600-pound resistance rating. This is not common but does occur in high-risk retail applications.

Sourcing Guard-X Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Guard-X exit alarm parts catalog with model-specific components for the 2670 and 2609. The Von Duprin brand page covers the Guard-X alongside every other Von Duprin exit device series. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected]. Same-day shipping on stocked components.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is a purpose-built alarmed exit device with a 10-year mechanical warranty and a 1-year electrical warranty. Six primary replaceable components: 9-volt alarm battery, Schlage SC-1 cylinder, retainer nut, disarming label, alarm housing assembly, and push bar assembly. The battery is replaced most often. The retainer nut is inspected least often. The 2609 double door version shares all the same component specifications. Sourcing from the exit alarms parts and diagrams catalog at Security Parts starts with confirming single door (2670) or double door (2609), then navigating to the model-specific parts page with same-day shipping on stocked items.

FAQs

What alarm volume does the Von Duprin Guard-X produce? 

100 decibels. It activates immediately when the push bar is pressed without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light shows armed status before any door use attempt.

What force resistance does the Guard-X deadbolt have? 

1,600 pounds, per Von Duprin testing. This significantly exceeds standard latch bolt resistance and prevents the door from being forced open without triggering the alarm first.

What battery does the Guard-X 2670 use? 

A standard 9-volt battery. Replace proactively every six months on high-use secondary exits. Battery failure causes silent operation with no alarm on push bar activation.

What cylinder ships with the Guard-X 2670?

 A Schlage SC-1 5-pin tumbler cylinder. Re-keyable by any Schlage-authorized locksmith. Can be ordered factory-keyed to a building's master key system.

What warranty does the Guard-X carry?

 10-year limited mechanical warranty, 1-year limited warranty on electrical components.

Von Duprin 7500 Parts Manual: Functions, Components, and Replacement Parts Guide

The Von Duprin 7500 parts manual covers the mortise lock that pairs with the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit device line. The 7500 itself is a field-reversible mortise lock with a non-handed auxiliary bolt for deadlocking, an adjustable-bevel faceplate, and field-selectable TP and K functions. The E7500 is the electrified variant with electric locking or unlocking options. The SS-7500 is the stainless steel build.

That's the short version. If you're pulling parts off a hardware schedule or troubleshooting a service call, the longer version is what determines whether you order the right component the first time. This guide walks through the 7500 mortise lock anatomy, function selection, exit device pairing, electric strike compatibility, and how to source replacement parts without misordering.

What the Von Duprin 7500 Mortise Lock Is

The Von Duprin 7500 is the mortise lock designed to operate as the inside locking mechanism for the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit device. The 88 Series is the panic hardware on the door. The 7500 is the mortise lock body that handles the latch and bolt work behind it. They're sold and specified together as a system on commercial doors that need both panic egress and mortise-lock security.

Three things make the 7500 unusual compared to a generic mortise lock. The lock is field reversible without removing it from the door, which cuts install and service time substantially. The auxiliary bolt is non-handed, which means it works on either swing direction. And the faceplate carries an adjustable bevel, so the lock can adapt to door edge angles without ordering a different SKU. Those three properties together are why the 7500 stays on spec sheets even as newer mortise hardware enters the market.

7500 vs E7500 vs SS-7500: Identifying the Variant You Have

The Von Duprin 7500 ships in three primary variants, and the parts manual breakdown is different for each one.

The standard 7500 is the mechanical mortise lock. No electrification, no monitoring switches. This is the variant on most older Von Duprin 88 Series installs.

The E7500 is the electrified version. It carries the same chassis as the mechanical 7500 but adds electric locking or unlocking through the outside trim. Two SPDT signals monitor trim condition and latchbolt status. Power options include 12V DC, 24V DC, and AC variants with available solenoid kits (SO12, SO24). The E7500 is what's specified on access-controlled commercial openings.

The SS-7500 is the stainless steel build. Same function set as the standard 7500 but with the corrosion-resistant body and faceplate. Common in coastal installs, food processing facilities, and any environment where the mortise lock has to survive humidity and washdown.

Pull the lock face off the existing door and read the model designation before ordering parts. The 7500, E7500, and SS-7500 share many components but not all of them. Cylinder housings, trim spindles, and latch assemblies cross. Solenoid assemblies, electrical kits, and monitoring switches are E7500 specific.

Function Options on the Von Duprin 7500

The 7500 ships with field-selectable functions, which is one of its strongest features for inventory and service. The two primary functions are TP (thumbpiece) and K (keyed). Function selection happens through a set screw in the mortise lock body. Turning the set screw down switches between TP and K function without disassembling the lock.

That field selectability matters when you're servicing a building with mixed openings. One stocked 7500 can be configured for either function at the door, instead of stocking two SKUs. For procurement teams managing replacement parts across a portfolio of buildings, this drops inventory complexity meaningfully.

The E7500 adds electric lock and electric unlock function variants on top of the mechanical function selection. The choice between electric lock (the trim is normally unlocked, locks when energized) and electric unlock (the trim is normally locked, unlocks when energized) is set at order, not field selectable.

Components in the Von Duprin 7500 Parts Manual

The 7500 mortise lock breaks down into these core component groups, listed in the order you'll typically encounter them during service:

Mortise lock case with internal mechanism. The lock body itself. Replaced as a complete unit on most failures.

Faceplate with adjustable bevel. Field replaceable. Bevel adjusts to door edge angle.

Auxiliary bolt (non-handed). Deadlocks the main latch when the door is closed. One of the highest-wear components on heavily cycled doors.

Main latchbolt. The latch that engages the strike. Stainless steel on most production runs.

Trim spindles and connecting hardware. Link the inside and outside trim to the lock body. Worn spindles cause loose trim feel and eventually lever droop.

Cylinder housing. Accepts the keyway cylinder. The 7500 typically takes a Schlage-prep mortise cylinder, which means common Everest 29 or Primus cylinders fit directly.

Set screw for function selection. Located in the lock body. Turns to switch between TP and K functions.

Solenoid assembly (E7500 only). Drives the electric lock or unlock mechanism. Solenoid power draw varies by voltage: roughly 0.38 amps at 12V DC, 0.19 amps at 24V DC.

Monitor switches (E7500 only). Two SPDT signals for trim and latchbolt status. Wired to the access control panel.

Strike pocket insert. Specified for 7500 mortise lock compatibility with Von Duprin 6212WF and similar electric strikes. Furnished with the strike, not the lock.

Compatible Exit Devices and Electric Strikes

The Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock was designed to work with the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit devices. That's the canonical pairing. The 8875-F mortise lock fire exit device pairs directly with the 7500 for UL-listed 3-hour fire door assemblies on single and double 4-foot by 8-foot openings.

For electric strike compatibility, the Von Duprin 6200 Series strikes are the matched pair. Specifically, the 6211, 6211AL, 6211WF, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6221, 6222, 6223, 6224, 6224AL, 6225, and 6226 strikes are factory-listed as 7500 mortise lock compatible. The 6210 strike is the direct replacement for legacy Von Duprin 3146 applications and also pairs with the 7500. The 6212WF includes a strike pocket insert specifically engineered for 7500 mortise lock mounting.

When sourcing an electric strike for a 7500 mortise lock door, confirm the strike compatibility chart on the strike's spec sheet before ordering. The mounting tabs and pocket dimensions differ between Von Duprin's own strike lines and surface-applied alternatives.

How to Identify a Von Duprin 7500 Before Ordering Replacement Parts

Three checks before placing a parts order. Each one prevents a return.

First, confirm it's a 7500 and not a 7400 or other Von Duprin mortise line. The 7500 family stamps the model number on the lock face. Remove the trim, look at the lock face for the model designation, and read it directly.

Second, identify the variant. Mechanical 7500, electrified E7500, or stainless SS-7500. The body finish gives you the SS variant immediately. The presence of wiring leads coming out of the lock body identifies the E7500.

Third, identify the function. TP function (thumbpiece trim) vs K function (keyed trim). Look at the existing outside trim. A thumbpiece-style trim is TP. A keyed lever or knob with no thumbpiece is K. If the function needs to change during service, the set screw inside the lock body switches it without ordering different parts.

Common Service Issues and Which Parts to Replace

Three failure patterns dominate Von Duprin 7500 service calls.

Auxiliary bolt wear. The deadlocking auxiliary bolt sees high cycle counts on heavily used doors and eventually loses spring tension or shows visible wear at the engagement face. Replace as a single component.

Trim spindle wear or loose lever feel. The spindle connecting outside trim to the lock body wears over time, particularly on doors that get pulled rather than pushed. The lever or thumbpiece develops play. Replace the spindle assembly rather than the full lock body.

E7500 solenoid failure. Most often traced to wrong voltage at the lock terminals, transient voltage from solenoid-based hardware on the same circuit, or simple end-of-life on a high-cycle door. Confirm voltage and transient suppression before replacing the solenoid. A motor that fails inside a year is usually an install problem, not a hardware defect.

How to Source Von Duprin 7500 Replacement Parts

For mechanical 7500 components, source by part type: faceplate, auxiliary bolt, latchbolt, trim spindle, cylinder housing. Each is available as an individual replacement. The Von Duprin parts catalog on Security Parts indexes by series.

For E7500 electrical components, confirm voltage (12V DC, 24V DC, or AC) before ordering. Solenoid assemblies are voltage-specific. Order the matching SO12 or SO24 kit for AC operation. Note that 16V DC and 28V DC solenoids are stocked as replacement parts only for existing legacy strikes, not new builds.

For complete 7500 mortise lock replacement, order by full SKU including function (TP or K) and finish. Stainless variants (SS-7500) carry their own ordering line. Cross-reference exit device compatibility with the Von Duprin 88 Series exit devices when replacing the lock as part of a system service.

For electric strike replacement matched to a 7500, the Von Duprin electric strike line carries the 6200 Series strikes that pair with the 7500 mortise lock. Confirm strike model number against the 7500 compatibility chart before ordering.

For configurations not visible online, call 845-935-0301. Two minutes of spec verification on the phone prevents the wrong-configuration return cycle on a service call that probably doesn't have those days to spare.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the Von Duprin 7500 used for?

 The Von Duprin 7500 is a mortise lock designed to pair with the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit devices. It handles the latch and bolt work on commercial doors that need both panic egress hardware and a mortise lock body.

Is the Von Duprin 7500 field reversible?

 Yes. The 7500 mortise lock can be reversed for opposite hand without removing the lock from the door. The auxiliary bolt is non-handed, which means it operates correctly in either swing direction.

What's the difference between Von Duprin 7500 and E7500? 

The 7500 is the mechanical mortise lock. The E7500 is the electrified variant with electric locking or unlocking through the outside trim, plus two SPDT signals for trim and latchbolt monitoring. The E7500 ships in 12V DC, 24V DC, or AC configurations.

How do I switch between TP and K function on a Von Duprin 7500? 

Function selection is field-adjustable through a set screw in the mortise lock body. Turning the set screw down switches between TP (thumbpiece) and K (keyed) function without disassembling the lock.

Which electric strikes work with a Von Duprin 7500? 

The Von Duprin 6200 Series strikes are factory-listed as 7500 compatible. Specifically the 6210, 6211, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6221, 6222, 6223, 6224, 6225, and 6226 strikes. The 6212WF includes a strike pocket insert engineered for 7500 mortise lock mounting.

Is the Von Duprin 7500 fire rated?

 The 7500 mortise lock is used on UL-listed fire door assemblies when paired with the 8875-F mortise lock fire exit device, supporting 3-hour fire ratings on single and double 4-foot by 8-foot openings.

What voltage does the E7500 solenoid require? 

The E7500 ships in 12V DC, 24V DC, and AC variants. Power requirements are approximately 0.38 amps at 12V DC and 0.19 amps at 24V DC. AC operation requires the SO12 or SO24 solenoid kit.

Where can I source Von Duprin 7500 replacement parts? 

Security Parts stocks the Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock and component-level parts including auxiliary bolts, faceplates, trim spindles, cylinder housings, and E7500 solenoid kits. Call 845-935-0301 for configurations not visible online.

Closing

The Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock is one of the longest-running commercial mortise lines still on active service catalogs. It's on hardware schedules across institutional buildings, healthcare facilities, and K-12 schools that were built or renovated in the last twenty years. When a 7500 needs service, the parts manual breakdown above is what determines whether the right component gets ordered or whether the door stays out of service for an extra week.

Source it from a distributor that stocks both the 7500 mortise lock and the matched 88 Series exit devices on the same line. Security Parts has carried Von Duprin commercial hardware since 2001, with same-day shipping on stocked components and spec verification by phone at 845-935-0301 for configurations that need a second set of eyes.

 

Electric Strikes Parts and Diagrams: Von Duprin 6000 Series Component Guide for Commercial Openings

Understanding electric strikes parts and diagrams saves facilities teams from a common and expensive problem: replacing an entire electric strike when only the solenoid has failed. Von Duprin's 6000 Series electric strike line, covering the 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 models, is the most widely installed commercial electric strike in North America. These devices are built to be field-serviceable, with the solenoid as the primary replaceable component. The Von Duprin 050240 solenoid kit fits every model in the 6000 Series at 24VDC (with 12VDC in 050237 and 16VDC in 050239), which means one stocked solenoid kit covers the most common failure across the entire product line. But accurate sourcing requires understanding the full component diagram, knowing the difference between fail-safe and fail-secure operation, and confirming the voltage and finish before ordering any finish-specific parts.

How an Electric Strike Works: The Four-Component System

An electric strike replaces a conventional strike plate in the door frame. Instead of a fixed pocket for the latch bolt, the electric strike uses a spring-loaded keeper (also called the lip or gate) that can either stay engaged to keep the door latched or release to allow the door to open without retracting the latch bolt. This is the essential distinction from an electric lock: the electric strike releases from the frame side, so the latch bolt on the door hardware does not need to move.

The four primary components visible in the Von Duprin 6000 Series diagram are:

Strike Body: The main housing that mounts into the door frame cutout. The strike body contains the solenoid, the keeper mechanism, the latch pocket, and the mounting hardware. Strike body dimensions are specific to the strike model and the frame prep. The 6100 and 6200 Series are designed for new construction applications. Retrofit applications may require frame modification when replacing a competitive or older Von Duprin strike.

Solenoid Assembly: The electromechanical component that drives the keeper release. When energized, the solenoid plunger moves, releasing the keeper so the door can swing open. On fail-safe strikes, the solenoid must be energized (power applied) to hold the keeper in the locked position. On fail-secure strikes, the solenoid must be energized to release the keeper.

The Von Duprin solenoid kits by voltage: 050237 (12VDC), 050239 (16VDC), 050240 (24VDC). All three fit every model in the 6000 Series. Note: 16VDC and 28VDC solenoids are sold only as replacement parts for existing strikes in the field. They are not specified for new installations. For AC power operation, the Von Duprin SO12 (12VAC) or SO24 (24VAC) rectifier kit converts AC to the DC the solenoid requires.

Keeper (Strike Lip or Gate): The pivoting component that the latch bolt rides over when the door closes and that either holds or releases the latch when the solenoid is energized or de-energized. The keeper on the 6000 Series is spring-loaded to return to the locked position when the solenoid de-energizes. This spring is a separate serviceable component in the 6000 Series refurbish kit.

Cover Plate and Mounting Hardware: The visible face plate that conceals the strike housing in the frame. Finish must match the installed hardware. Finish-specific items in the 6000 Series are designated with an "X in Finish column" notation in the parts manual, meaning the finish code must be specified when ordering.

Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure: The Most Operationally Important Distinction in Electric Strike Parts

This distinction affects which solenoid behavior is correct for the installation and has direct code compliance implications for fire door and life safety applications.

Fail-secure operation: The door is normally locked. Power must be applied to unlock (release the keeper). When power is lost (power failure, fire alarm cutoff), the door remains locked. Fail-secure strikes are available for fire-rated openings. The Von Duprin 6100 fail-secure is specified FSE at time of order.

Fail-safe operation: The door is normally unlocked when powered. Power must be removed to lock (engage the keeper). When power is lost, the door unlocks. Fail-safe strikes are commonly used for life safety applications and are non-fire-rated. This is because a fire door must be able to latch under fire conditions, and a fail-safe strike that opens when power is cut would prevent latching during a fire event when building power may be compromised.

When the solenoid fails in a fail-secure installation, the door will typically remain locked regardless of any input signal. When the solenoid fails in a fail-safe installation, the door may fail open or may fail in an intermediate position depending on the spring return and keeper condition.

The entry buzzer (EB) option is available only with fail-secure strikes. It is installed in the frame in parallel with the strike circuit and provides an audible signal to the visitor when the door can be opened.

The Six Series in the Von Duprin Electric Strike Lineup

5100 Series: Standard commercial electric strike for rim exit devices on single doors and pairs. Designed for Von Duprin rim panic hardware applications specifically. Not for use with mortise or cylindrical locks.

6100 Series: Standard commercial electric strike for mortise locks and cylindrical locks. Available in fail-safe and fail-secure. Standard 24VDC. Optional 12VDC and AC operation. Power requirements: 12VDC at 0.38 amp, 24VDC at 0.19 amp. Compatible with a wide range of frame preps.

6200 Series: The high-security electric strike with ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1 certification and 1500-pound holding force rating. UL 294 Listed, UL 1034 Listed for burglary-resistant electric door strikes. Fire rated UL 10C to 3 hours on single doors, 90 minutes on pair doors with inactive leaf. Compatible with Schlage, Von Duprin, and Falcon cylindrical and mortise locksets as well as many other manufacturers' products. Available for new construction and retrofit applications. The 6200 Series can retrofit a number of competitive and older model Von Duprin electric door strikes.

6300 Series: The widest compatibility electric strike in the Von Duprin lineup, designed for applications where the specific lock manufacturer or model cannot be easily specified at time of order. Covers cylindrical, mortise, and panic hardware applications in a single platform.

J2 Series (6111, 6112, 6113): Specifically engineered for wood frame applications. The 6211WF is recommended on wood frames for new installations. For retrofit applications on wood frames replacing Folger Adam competitive strikes, the J2 Series maintains dimensional compatibility with legacy frame preps.

Monitor Strike Option: What It Adds

The monitor strike option adds a switch inside the strike body that monitors both latch bolt position (whether the latch is in the strike pocket) and lock status (whether the keeper is in the locked position). This allows the access control system to confirm that the door is both closed and latched, rather than just confirming that the strike released. Monitor strike configurations are designated "M" in the model number and require wiring for both the solenoid circuit and the monitor switch circuit.

The monitor option is specified in security-sensitive applications including government access control, healthcare, and financial institutions where door status verification is required by the access control specification.

The 6000 Series Refurbish Kit

Von Duprin produces a 6000 Series refurbish kit that contains the spring-loaded keeper, the pivot pin, and the mounting hardware needed to restore a worn or damaged 6000 Series strike body to full function without replacing the full unit. The refurbish kit is the correct maintenance approach when the keeper is worn, the spring return is weak, or the pivot pin is corroded, but the strike body housing and solenoid are otherwise functional.

The refurbish kit does not include the solenoid. If both the keeper mechanism and the solenoid are failed, the solenoid must be ordered separately alongside the refurbish kit.

Sourcing Electric Strike Parts Accurately

Security Parts organizes the complete electric strikes parts and diagrams catalog for Von Duprin 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 Series. Every series page carries component-level organization with interactive diagrams. The Von Duprin Von Duprin brand page covers the full electric strike lineup alongside exit devices and other Von Duprin hardware.

Two ordering notes specific to 6000 Series parts: finish-specific items require the finish code. Items without a finish designation ship in the manufacturer's standard finish, which may not match the installation. Second, 16VDC and 28VDC solenoids are replacement-only parts and cannot be ordered for new applications. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected] for frame prep confirmation and lock compatibility questions before an order is placed.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin 6000 Series electric strike is a four-component system: the strike body, the solenoid, the keeper, and the cover plate. The solenoid kit in the correct voltage (050237 for 12VDC, 050239 for 16VDC, 050240 for 24VDC) fits every model in the series and is the most common single repair in the field. Fail-secure strikes are available for fire-rated openings. Fail-safe strikes are non-fire-rated. The 6200 Series carries a 1500-pound holding force and 3-hour UL 10C fire rating on single doors. The refurbish kit restores keeper and spring function without replacing the full unit. Sourcing correct electric strikes parts and diagrams starts with confirming the series, the voltage, the fail mode, and the finish before the order is placed. Security Parts stocks every 6000 Series component with same-day shipping and pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

What is the Von Duprin 050240 solenoid kit? 

The 24VDC replacement solenoid for all Von Duprin 6000 Series electric strikes. Available in 12VDC (050237) and 16VDC (050239). Note: 16VDC is a replacement-only voltage not available for new installations.

What is the difference between fail-safe and fail-secure electric strikes? 

Fail-secure stays locked without power, unlocks when power is applied. Fire-rated strikes are fail-secure. Fail-safe stays unlocked without power, locks when power is applied. Fail-safe strikes are non-fire-rated and are used for life safety applications.

What is the holding force rating on the Von Duprin 6200 Series? 

1500 pounds, ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1. The 6200 Series carries UL 294, UL 1034 (burglary-resistant), and UL 10C (fire) listings with a 3-hour rating on single doors.

What does the 6000 Series refurbish kit include? 

The spring-loaded keeper, pivot pin, and mounting hardware for restoring a worn 6000 Series strike body. The solenoid is not included and must be ordered separately if the solenoid has also failed.

What is a monitor strike? 

An electric strike with an internal switch that monitors both latch bolt position (closed) and lock status (latched). Required in access control specifications where door status verification rather than just release signal confirmation is needed.

 

Cylindrical Locks Parts and Diagrams: The Complete Schlage ND Series Component Guide

Cylindrical locks parts and diagrams are the starting point for every field technician or facility manager who needs to replace a component without replacing the full lockset. The Schlage ND Series is the standard commercial cylindrical lock in North America, carrying ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2011, Series 4000, Grade 1 certification and UL listing for 3-hour fire doors (single 4'0" x 10'0", pair 8'0" x 10'0"). The ND Series service manual published exploded view diagrams that broke the lock into its ten primary visible components: Adjustment Plate, Outside Lever, Chassis, Latch, Strike, Anti-Rotation Plate, Optional Spacer, Mounting Screws, Inside Lever, Rose, and Inside Spring Cage. Understanding what each of these components does, what fails first in each category, and how the model number determines which parts apply to a specific installation is the knowledge base that makes parts sourcing accurate and fast.

Reading the Schlage ND Series Exploded View Diagram

The exploded view diagram in the ND Series service manual shows all ten components separated along the axis of the door, from the outside lever on the left to the inside lever and spring cage on the right, with the chassis and latch assembly in the center. This layout directly corresponds to the physical installation sequence and is the fastest way to identify a failed component visually.

Here is what each component does:

Outside Lever: The lever handle on the exterior side of the door. Lever styles for the ND Series include ATH (Athens), BRK (Boardwalk), BRW (Broadway), LAT (Latitude), LON (Longitude), OME (Omega), RHO (Rhodes), SPA (Sparta), and TLR (Tubular). Dimensions vary by style: Athens is 4.56 inches wide by 3.31 inches projection, Boardwalk is 4.94 by 3.06, Omega is 5.06 by 3.31. The Rhodes lever includes an optional breakaway feature that allows the handheld portion to separate from the shank under extreme torque, protecting the spring cage and locking mechanism from forced entry.

Chassis: The internal body of the lock that houses the locking mechanism, the cylinder interface, and the latch retractor. The chassis determines the lock function. Schlage produces separate chassis for each ND Series function (ND10, ND12, ND30, ND40, ND50, ND60, ND70, ND80, ND96, and more). Chassis are not interchangeable between functions.

Latch: The spring-loaded bolt that projects from the door edge and engages the strike on the door frame. Standard backset is 2-3/4 inches. Short backset is 2-3/8 inches. For 5-inch backset, a 43-005 extension is available. The latch includes a slide clip that the installer must engage correctly during installation: "Push latch to center of slide" is a critical step in the ND Series installation instructions that is frequently missed and produces misalignment in the latch bolt.

Strike: The frame-mounted receptacle for the latch bolt. The default Schlage ND Series strike is 10-025: ANSI, no box, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch. Finish must be specified. For fire-rated assemblies, a T strike is available. For applications requiring a deeper pocket, a box strike provides additional latch engagement depth.

Anti-Rotation Plate: A thin metal plate that prevents the chassis from rotating inside the door bore under lever torque. On the ND Series, the anti-rotation plate tab must be aligned with the indent on the hub during installation. Misalignment produces a lock that drifts out of position over time.

Optional Spacer: Schlage provides spacers for ND Series locks installed on doors other than the standard 1-3/4 inch thickness. No spacer is required for 1-3/4 inch doors. Spacers are required for 1-3/8 inch doors. For 1-5/8 inch, 2 inch, or 2-1/8 inch doors, the adjustment plate must be repositioned rather than using spacers.

Rose: The circular cover plate that conceals the mounting hardware and the through-bore hole on the door face. Standard ND Series rose diameter is 3.44 inches. The rose is available in multiple finishes and must be finish-matched when ordering a replacement.

Inside Spring Cage: The spring cage assembly on the inside of the lock that provides lever return force and contains the button or thumbturn mechanism for inside lever control functions. When an inside lever is floppy or fails to return to horizontal, the spring cage is typically the failed component.

Mounting Screws: Two screws that draw the inside and outside trim together through the door thickness. Length must match the door thickness. XN12-012 provides standard trim chassis spacers. XN12-307 provides lead-lining spacers for special applications.

Adjustment Plate: The plate that allows the outside lever assembly to be positioned correctly relative to the door face. On ND Series locks manufactured after January 31, 2017, the adjustment plate design changed. Parts for pre-2017 and post-2017 locks are not fully interchangeable.

ND Series Function Designations: What They Mean for Parts

The ND Series function number is part of the model number and determines which chassis applies and whether electrified options are relevant.

ND10: Passage function. Latch retracted from either side at all times. No locking function. No cylinder outside.

ND12: Exit lock. Outside lever fixed (cannot retract latch). Inside lever always free. Key unlocks outside lever from outside. Electrified versions: ND12EL (electrically locked, fail safe) and ND12EU (electrically unlocked, fail secure).

ND30: Privacy lock. Push-button on inside locks outside lever. Emergency coin release from outside.

ND40: Bedroom/bath privacy. Push-button on inside locks outside lever. Emergency pin tool release from outside.

ND50 and ND53: Entrance lock. Outside lever locked/unlocked by key. Push-button on inside controls outside.

ND70: Classroom function. Key outside locks and unlocks outside lever without opening door. Inside lever always free.

ND80: Storeroom function. Outside lever always inoperative. Entry requires key only. Inside lever always free.

ND96: Combination entrance and storeroom. Available with electrified options (ND96EL and ND96EU). RX (request to exit) switch available on ND10, ND12, ND80, ND81, and ND96 functions.

Cylinder Types and Why They Affect Parts Ordering

The cylinder suffix in the ND Series model number determines which cylinder is installed:

Standard cylinder (no suffix): Conventional Schlage mortise cylinder. Uses SC1 5-pin or SC4 6-pin keyway. The standard residential and commercial specification.

FSIC (Full-Size Interchangeable Core): Allows the core to be removed and re-keyed without disassembling the lock body. The core uses a control key to insert and remove the core from the housing.

SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core): Best Primus-compatible small format IC standard. The core is smaller than FSIC. Common in institutional environments where a master key system uses SFIC throughout the building.

For keyed IC outside levers (FSIC only), the ND Series installation instructions include a specific note: "IMPORTANT! DO NOT install IC cylinder! Follow steps in ND-Series Timing Guide!" The timing guide must be consulted before cylinder installation on keyed IC functions. Ignoring this step is the most common cause of a new ND Series installation that does not function correctly after assembly.

The electrified ND Series uses a motor, not a solenoid, to provide quiet operation and energy efficiency. Maximum current draw is 0.24 amp, allowing more locks to run from a single power supply. The low 0.010 amp holding current eliminates the risk of lever heating in long-duration electrically locked applications.

Lock Timing and What It Means for Servicing

Certain ND Series functions require timing, meaning the position and adjustment of internal components must be set before the lock will operate correctly. Functions requiring timing are listed in the ND Series Timing Guide (P517-432), which ships with the lock.

On serviced locks where the chassis has been disassembled, the timing must be reset before the lock is reinstalled. A lock that functions mechanically but does not respond to a key, or one that operates in the wrong direction, almost always has a timing error rather than a failed component.

Sourcing ND Series Parts Accurately

Security Parts organizes the complete cylindrical locks parts and diagrams catalog with model-specific pages for the Schlage ND Series. Every parts page carries an interactive diagram aligned to the exploded view format used in the official ND Series service manual. Navigate to the function designation (ND10, ND12, ND70, etc.), open the diagram, identify the failed component visually, and confirm the part number before ordering.

The Schlage brand catalog extends this organization across every Schlage line beyond the ND Series. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected], particularly for confirming whether a lock is pre-2017 or post-2017 manufacture before ordering an adjustment plate or inside spring cage.

Conclusion

The Schlage ND Series diagram shows ten components. Each one has a specific function and a specific failure mode. The chassis is function-specific and cannot be swapped between ND10, ND70, ND80, or any other designation. The anti-rotation plate tab must align with the hub indent or the lock drifts. The latch slide clip must be engaged at center or the latch misaligns. For keyed IC functions, the timing guide must be consulted before cylinder installation. Sourcing correct cylindrical locks parts and diagrams starts with the function designation, then the cylinder type, then the door thickness, and then the finish code. Security Parts stocks every ND Series component with same-day shipping and pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

What are the ten components in the Schlage ND Series exploded view diagram? 

Adjustment Plate, Outside Lever, Chassis, Latch, Strike, Anti-Rotation Plate, Optional Spacer (for non-standard door thickness), Mounting Screws, Inside Lever, Rose, and Inside Spring Cage.

What door thickness does the Schlage ND Series support?

 1-3/8 inch to 2-1/8 inch. Standard installation is 1-3/4 inch with no spacers required. Spacers are provided for 1-3/8 inch doors. The adjustment plate repositions for 1-5/8, 2, and 2-1/8 inch doors.

Why is the "timing guide" important for some ND Series functions?

 Certain ND Series lock functions require internal components to be set to a specific position before the lock operates correctly. The ND Series Timing Guide (P517-432) must be followed before cylinder installation on these functions, or the lock will not operate after assembly.

What is the default Schlage ND Series backset?

 2-3/4 inches standard. 2-3/8 inch short backset is available. A 43-005 extension provides a 5-inch backset for applications where the standard dimensions do not reach the door edge.

What does the RX option add to a Schlage ND Series lock?

 A micro-switch inside the chassis monitors lever rotation and signals the use of the opening to the access control system. Available on ND10, ND12, ND80, ND81, and ND96 functions.

Exit Alarms Parts and Diagrams: The Von Duprin Guard-X Component Guide

Most facility managers only think about exit alarms parts and diagrams when the alarm fails to sound, the battery dies, or a disarming label gets peeled off. The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is the most widely installed commercial alarmed exit device in North America. It is not a standard exit device with an alarm kit added on. It is a purpose-built alarmed exit lock that integrates a stainless steel deadbolt rated to 1,600 pounds of force resistance, a 100-decibel alarm, an armed indicator light, and a Schlage SC-1 cylinder into a single housing. It complies with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, is UL Listed for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, carries a 10-year limited mechanical warranty and a 1-year limited electrical warranty, and ships non-handed in satin aluminum 628/US28 finish. The 2609 is the double door version.

What the Guard-X Was Built For

The Guard-X 2670 exists for one specific application: secondary exits where unauthorized use needs to be deterred without eliminating code-compliant egress. It identifies the door as an emergency exit and secures the opening against unauthorized entry or exit. Typical applications include back doors at restaurants, retail stores, discount stores, grocery stores, drug stores, clothing stores, and sporting goods stores where employee or customer misuse of a secondary exit is an operational problem.

Two features define the deterrent function:

The stainless steel deadbolt does not retract unless the key disarms the device first. It is tested to withstand 1,600 pounds of force, making it significantly more resistant to defeat than a standard latch bolt. The 100-decibel alarm sounds immediately when the push bar is activated without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light on the device face shows the armed state before any attempt is made to open the door.

The standard device ships with an SC-1 Schlage cylinder included. The 2609 double door variant coordinates alarm functions between two active leaves on a paired opening.

Every Replaceable Component in the Guard-X 2670

Alarm Battery

This is the most frequently replaced component on every Guard-X installation. The device uses a standard 9-volt battery to power the alarm circuit. When the battery fails, the device operates mechanically but produces no alarm sound on push bar activation, which is the worst failure mode for a deterrent device. Proactive replacement every six months on high-use secondary exits prevents silent failure without waiting for the symptom.

Schlage SC-1 Cylinder

The cylinder is what disarms the alarm before an authorized door use. The SC-1 keyway is Schlage's standard 5-pin tumbler residential and light commercial cylinder. It ships included with the Guard-X 2670. Replacement is needed when the cylinder wears from heavy use, when a key is lost, or when the building's key system is being re-keyed. The SC-1 keyway is widely available from Schlage-authorized locksmiths and can be ordered factory-keyed to a master key system.

Retainer Nut

The retainer nut secures the cylinder in the device housing. A loose retainer nut allows the cylinder to rotate in the housing rather than staying fixed, which prevents the alarm from disarming correctly when the key is turned. Retainer nuts are the most commonly overlooked service item on Guard-X devices. A torque check at every service visit takes 30 seconds and prevents the most frustrating "alarm won't disarm" service call.

Disarming Label

The "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY, ALARM WILL SOUND" label is both an NFPA 101 code requirement and a deterrent element. Labels fade, peel, or are deliberately removed. A missing label removes a code compliance element and reduces deterrent effectiveness. Replacement labels are stocked individually.

Alarm Housing Assembly

The housing contains the sounder element and the circuit board that controls alarm timing and the indicator light. When the alarm sounds erratically, fails to sound despite a fresh battery, or the indicator light malfunctions, the housing assembly requires replacement. This is less common than battery or cylinder service but becomes necessary as devices age past their electrical warranty period.

Push Bar Assembly

The push bar completes the alarm circuit when depressed without prior disarming. Push bar wear from physical abuse or forced entry attempts requires assembly replacement. The push bar is replaceable without removing the full device from the door.

Deadbolt Assembly

The stainless steel deadbolt is the mechanical security element. Replacement is required when the bolt is physically damaged from a forced entry attempt significant enough to defeat the 1,600-pound resistance rating. This is not common but does occur in high-risk retail applications.

Sourcing Guard-X Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Guard-X exit alarm parts catalog with model-specific components for the 2670 and 2609. The Von Duprin brand page covers the Guard-X alongside every other Von Duprin exit device series. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected]. Same-day shipping on stocked components.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is a purpose-built alarmed exit device with a 10-year mechanical warranty and a 1-year electrical warranty. Six primary replaceable components: 9-volt alarm battery, Schlage SC-1 cylinder, retainer nut, disarming label, alarm housing assembly, and push bar assembly. The battery is replaced most often. The retainer nut is inspected least often. The 2609 double door version shares all the same component specifications. Sourcing from the exit alarms parts and diagrams catalog at Security Parts starts with confirming single door (2670) or double door (2609), then navigating to the model-specific parts page with same-day shipping on stocked items.

FAQs

What alarm volume does the Von Duprin Guard-X produce? 

100 decibels. It activates immediately when the push bar is pressed without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light shows armed status before any door use attempt.

What force resistance does the Guard-X deadbolt have? 

1,600 pounds, per Von Duprin testing. This significantly exceeds standard latch bolt resistance and prevents the door from being forced open without triggering the alarm first.

What battery does the Guard-X 2670 use? 

A standard 9-volt battery. Replace proactively every six months on high-use secondary exits. Battery failure causes silent operation with no alarm on push bar activation.

What cylinder ships with the Guard-X 2670?

 A Schlage SC-1 5-pin tumbler cylinder. Re-keyable by any Schlage-authorized locksmith. Can be ordered factory-keyed to a building's master key system.

What warranty does the Guard-X carry?

 10-year limited mechanical warranty, 1-year limited warranty on electrical components.

Door Closers Parts: What Every LCN Component Does and How to Source It Without a Wrong-Part Return

Most maintenance teams only think about door closers parts when a closer arm cracks, a cover plate falls off, or the door starts slamming hard enough to loosen the hinges. By that point, the device has usually been failing gradually for weeks. A sweeping door that moves inconsistently, a latch that engages but does not pull cleanly, a door that drifts open when the building pressurizes, these are all early signals from a specific component that is wearing out. LCN, manufacturing commercial door control hardware since 1877, produces the most widely installed institutional closer line in North America. Its parts catalog spans surface-mounted closers (1460, 4040XP), overhead concealed closers (3030/3130, 2010/5010), high-security closers (2210), and the COMPACT operator (6400). Every component in every series is ordered with four specifications: Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) where applicable. Missing any one of them produces a part that ships incorrectly.

How to Find the Model Number Before Opening the Parts Catalog

The model number on LCN mechanical closers is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion shaft, where the arm connects to the closer body. The month and year of manufacture are also stamped there. For concealed closers and automatic operators, the information is on a label on the housing.

One thing that trips up a lot of first-time LCN parts orders: casting and forging numbers stamped or raised on the component surface, such as "71" or "320G" on a cylinder assembly, are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers. They cannot be used to identify or order a replacement. Use the model number from the closer body and the current LCN parts manual for correct identification.

The Seven Component Categories That Cover Most LCN Door Closer Repairs

Arm Assemblies

The arm is the most frequently replaced component on surface-mounted LCN closers. It connects the closer body to the door or frame and translates spring energy into controlled door movement. Arm failure most often presents as a cracked casting at the pivot point or a stripped connection at the shoe.

LCN produces several arm configurations across the surface-mounted lineup:

  • Regular arm (3077): The standard pull-side arm. Connects the closer body to the frame with a fixed pivot. Used in regular arm mounting where the closer is on the pull side of the door.
  • Parallel arm with shoe (3027PA): For push-side door face mounting. The arm runs parallel to the frame when the door is closed, protecting it from direct force and reducing projection.
  • Slide track arm (3077T): Rides in a track mounted to the frame. Allows hold-open at any door position. The track roller is a separate serviceable component.
  • Extra duty arm (EDA): Reinforced construction for abuse-resistant applications.
  • Fusible link arm: For fire-rated hold-open applications where the arm releases and allows the door to close when a heat-sensitive fusible link melts.

For the 4040XP specifically, the standard regular arm is 4040XP-3077 and the parallel arm drop plate combination is 4040XP-18PA. For the 3130 concealed closer, the track arm is 3130-3034, with the track roller as a separate part at 3130-3034-689.

The long rod and shoe combination 4040XP-79LR covers applications where the standard arm cannot reach the required frame mounting point due to door width or frame geometry.

Cover Plates and Body Housing

The cover protects the internal hydraulic and spring mechanism. On the 4040XP, the metal door closer cover is right-hand (RH) and left-hand (LH) specific. The 4040SE series uses a 4040SE-72MC-RH-689 metal cover for right-hand installations.

Cover plates are finish-specific. When ordering a replacement cover, the finish code must match the installed hardware. Standard LCN finishes include 689 (aluminum), 693 (bronze), 690 (dark bronze), and 628 (satin aluminum).

Drop Plates and Mounting Hardware

Drop plates reposition the closer body when the standard mounting geometry cannot be used due to a window transom, a non-standard header dimension, or a frame profile that does not accommodate direct mounting. The 4040XP-18PA is the parallel arm drop plate for top rail-less applications. Drop plates are application-specific and cannot be substituted between different mounting configurations.

Mounting screws are door-material specific. Metal door mounting uses machine screws. Wood door mounting uses wood screws. Using incorrect fasteners creates play in the installation that accelerates wear on every internal component.

Cylinder Assembly and Pinion

The cylinder assembly is the internal hydraulic unit inside the closer body. It contains the piston, the spring, and the hydraulic fluid that controls the closing speed. On standard surface closers, the cylinder is not individually serviceable: when the hydraulic fluid leaks from the body or the internal seals fail, the entire unit requires replacement rather than component repair.

The packing nut sits at the base of the pinion shaft. The pinion is the shaft that connects the arm to the internal spring mechanism. If the arm is secure but the door does not close properly, the pinion connection is a point to inspect before condemning the full unit.

Track Roller

The track roller is the component that rides inside the slide track on track arm closers. It is one of the highest-wear components on track arm installations because it absorbs the rotational force of every door cycle through direct contact with the track surface. Squealing or scuffing sounds during closer operation are the most common indicator of a worn track roller.

LCN track rollers are series-specific:

  • 4010T-3034: For the 4010T surface closer
  • 3130-3034-689: For the 3130 concealed closer
  • 4630-3034-689: For the 4630 Auto Equalizer operator
  • 2030-3034H: For hold-open or non-hold-open track configurations on the 2030 concealed closer

Spring and Green Dial Adjustment (1460 Series)

The LCN 1460 Series includes the patented Green Dial spring power adjustment system. This allows the spring power to be adjusted in the field without disassembling the closer body. The Green Dial eliminates the need to stock multiple spring sizes to cover different door weights and backcheck requirements. When the door is closing with inadequate force or latching inconsistently, adjusting the Green Dial is the correct first step before ordering any replacement component on a 1460 Series closer.

For closers without the Green Dial, the spring power is determined at the time of order and is set internally at the factory. Field adjustment of spring power on these models requires replacement of the entire cylinder assembly.

Sentronic Electronic Hold-Open Arm

The LCN Sentronic series integrates an electronic hold-open function into the door closer arm. When powered, the arm locks in the hold-open position. When power is interrupted (by a fire alarm signal, for example), the arm releases and the closer brings the door to the latched position. The Sentronic arm hold-open track is a replaceable component: 4040SEH-3038 is the 24V hold-open track, non-handed, non-sized.

What Failure Signs Map to Which Component

Symptom

Most likely cause

Component

Door slams after being pulled open forcefully

Failed or missing backcheck

Hydraulic valve adjustment or cylinder

Door drifts to the open position

Spring power inadequate or arm loose

Green Dial (1460) or arm connection

Squealing during operation

Track roller wear

Track roller part number by series

Door does not latch on closing

Latch speed valve off or door weight

Hydraulic valve adjustment

Closer cover fell off or cracked

Physical impact or vibration

Cover plate replacement

Arm cracked at pivot or shoe

Forced opening or door wedge abuse

Arm assembly replacement

 

Sourcing LCN Closer Parts Correctly

Security Parts organizes the complete door closer parts catalog by series with interactive diagrams on every model page. The LCN door closer parts guide covers the full component tree for surface-mounted, concealed, and COMPACT operator models. The four ordering specifications, Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V), are required for every finish-specific, size-specific, handed, or electrified component. Confirming all four before placing the order is what prevents the most common wrong-part returns on LCN products.

Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected].

Conclusion

LCN door closers parts are series-specific, finish-specific, and in many cases hand-specific. The model number is at the packing nut. Casting numbers on components are not part numbers. Track rollers, arm assemblies, cover plates, and Sentronic hold-open tracks are the most common individual replacement components. The Green Dial spring adjustment on the 1460 Series should be the first adjustment attempted before any parts order on a 1460 closer with inconsistent closing behavior. Every parts order requires Finish, Size, Hand, and Voltage specifications. Security Parts stocks every LCN series component with same-day shipping on in-stock items and pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

Where is the LCN door closer model number located? 

Stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion shaft on mechanical closers. The manufacturing date is also stamped there. For concealed closers and automatic operators, the information is on a label on the housing.

Are casting numbers on LCN components the same as part numbers? 

No. Numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on LCN cylinder assemblies are manufacturing reference numbers and cannot be used to order replacement parts. Use the model number from the closer body and the LCN parts manual.

What four specifications are required to order an LCN door closer part? 

Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) where applicable. Missing any one of these produces an incorrectly specified part.

What causes the squealing sound on an LCN track arm door closer? 

Track roller wear from high-cycle use. The track roller is a serviceable replacement component specific to each LCN series. It is not universal across series models.

What is the LCN Green Dial?

 A patented spring power adjustment system on the 1460 Series that allows the spring power to be adjusted in the field without disassembling the closer body, eliminating the need to stock multiple spring-size closers.

Deadbolts Parts: The Complete Guide to Schlage B Series Components and How to Order Right

When deadbolts parts need replacing on a commercial building, the sourcing process has one non-negotiable starting point: knowing the exact Schlage B Series model installed, because the cylinder type, the backset, the strike dimensions, and the tailpiece profile all vary between the B250, B260, B350, and B360 lines. The Schlage B Series has been the commercial and institutional deadbolt standard for decades. It carries ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 and Grade 2 ratings depending on the model, a 1-inch deadbolt throw on Grade 1 configurations, and a parts catalog that has remained largely consistent, which means a component ordered today is compatible with a B Series deadbolt installed in the 1990s. But getting the specific part right still requires reading the model number, confirming the backset, and knowing which cylinder type is installed before anything goes in a cart.

The Schlage B Series Lineup and What Separates Each Model

Understanding which model is installed determines every subsequent parts decision.

B250 and B252: The Grade 1 single-cylinder deadbolt (B250) and double-cylinder (B252). Single cylinder means inside thumbturn, outside key. Double cylinder means key operation on both sides. The 1-inch throw bolt meets Grade 1 bolt extension requirements. The B252 is the specification for glass-panel doors and applications where reaching through a broken pane to operate a thumbturn is a security concern.

B350 and B352: The commercial Grade 2 versions of the same configurations. 5/8-inch throw bolt rather than 1 inch. Specified on lower-security applications where Grade 1 performance is not required.

B360: The vertical deadbolt, where the bolt throws vertically rather than horizontally. Specified on applications where a door is subject to prying force that could defeat a horizontal bolt, common on hollow metal exterior doors with minimal frame engagement.

The backset is the distance from the door edge to the center of the cylinder hole. Schlage B Series ships standard at 2-3/8 inch and 2-3/4 inch backsets. Confirming which backset is installed is the sourcing step that determines the correct latch and strike combination.

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage B Series

The Deadbolt Cylinder

The cylinder is the component that translates the correct key into bolt rotation. It is the most commonly replaced part in the Schlage B Series because it absorbs the wear of every key insertion and rotation across the deadbolt's service life.

Schlage B Series cylinders are available in several configurations:

Standard 5-pin cylinder (SC1 keyway): The residential and light commercial standard. The SC1 "C" keyway is the most widely available and the most easily rekeyed in the field.

6-pin cylinder (SC4 keyway): Provides one additional pin stack for slightly increased pick resistance. Specified where a small security upgrade is required without changing the entire keyway system.

Primus high-security cylinder: Incorporates an additional set of side pins and a sidebar mechanism, requiring a key with a corresponding milled channel. Significantly increases resistance to picking and unauthorized key duplication. The Primus cylinder cannot be picked or bumped by standard methods and the keyway is patented, meaning unauthorized key copying requires a certified dealer.

The cylinder is held in the deadbolt body by a small set screw or retaining pin typically located on the side of the bolt assembly near the cross bore hole. The tailpiece, the flat metal bar extending from the back of the cylinder, must be correctly oriented to engage the bolt rotation mechanism when the replacement cylinder is installed.

The Latch Bolt and Throw Assembly

On Grade 1 B Series models, the deadbolt itself is a 1-inch hardened steel bolt with an anti-saw pin. On Grade 2 models, the throw is 5/8 inch. The bolt housing contains the mechanism that converts rotational motion from the cylinder or thumbturn into the horizontal throwing action of the bolt.

Latch bolt failure is typically caused by physical damage from door slamming against a misaligned strike rather than from internal component wear. A bent or deformed bolt that does not retract cleanly is the most common indicator.

The Strike Plate

The Schlage B Series ships with several standard strike options. The specific strike needed for any replacement order depends on the door frame material, the backset, and whether a security strike upgrade is required.

  • 10-025: ANSI standard strike, no box, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch. The standard specification strike for most commercial applications.
  • 10-026: Full lip strike, 1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch, square corners. Used where a shorter lip is acceptable and the door frame does not accommodate the full ANSI strike.
  • 10-027: Full lip strike, 1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch, 1/4-inch radius corners. Aesthetic version of the 10-026 for applications where corner radius is specified.
  • B520283 Dust Box: The standard deadbolt strike dust box that mounts in the door frame strike cutout, providing a pocket for the bolt to enter and protecting the frame material. Finish must be specified.

The Thumbturn

The thumbturn is the interior component that operates the bolt without a key on single-cylinder models. Thumbturn failure is usually caused by the mechanism wearing out at the pivot point or by physical force applied to the inside of the door. The Schlage B Series thumbturn assembly connects directly to the bolt mechanism and is a field-replaceable component.

Spindle and Rose Plate

The rose plate covers the cylinder hole and mounting hardware on the door face. On the B Series, the exterior rose plate is available in multiple finishes and must be finish-matched when ordering a replacement. The spindle connects the thumbturn to the internal bolt mechanism on single-cylinder models.

Mounting Screws

The B Series ships with mounting screws specific to the door thickness. Standard screws cover 1-3/4 inch doors. The Schlage 61-075 thick door kit provides longer screws and mounting extensions for doors up to 2-1/4 inches thick, used when the standard screws do not provide adequate bite.

Common Failure Signs and What Each Indicates

Cylinder turns but bolt does not move: The tailpiece is not engaging the bolt mechanism correctly. Either the replacement cylinder has the wrong tailpiece orientation or the internal bolt mechanism has worn out.

Bolt extends but does not retract cleanly: Typically indicates a bent bolt, a deformed strike pocket, or door frame movement that misaligns the bolt and strike. The strike should be removed and the alignment checked before replacing any internal components.

Key difficult to turn but still operates: Pin stack wear inside the cylinder, or a bent key that has deformed the driver pins. A cylinder replacement addresses both causes.

Bolt not extending to full throw: Internal spring fatigue inside the bolt mechanism, or physical interference from frame material swelling around the strike box.

Thumbturn loose or clicking: The thumbturn pivot spring has failed. The spring assembly is replaceable without removing the full cylinder.

Why Finish Must Be Specified on Every Schlage B Series Parts Order

Every finish-specific Schlage B Series part, including the rose plate, strike, thumbturn, and exterior trim, requires a finish designation when ordering. Standard Schlage finishes include US26D (satin chrome), US26 (polished chrome), US3 (polished brass), US4 (satin brass), US10B (oil-rubbed bronze), US10 (satin bronze), and US15 (satin nickel). Ordering without a finish designation produces a part that ships in the manufacturer's default and may not match the installed hardware. The model number on the installed deadbolt usually includes the finish code as the last designation in the number.

Sourcing Schlage B Series Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Schlage deadbolt parts catalog by model, with each B Series model on its own page. The Schlage brand catalog covers every active Schlage line with the same model-specific structure. For deadbolts installed in multi-family, healthcare, or government applications where the cylinder is part of a master key system, confirming the keyway before ordering a replacement cylinder is essential. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected].

Conclusion

Schlage B Series deadbolts are the most widely installed commercial deadbolts in North America, and their deadbolts parts catalog has remained consistent enough that components sourced today apply to devices installed years ago. The cylinder keyway, the bolt throw length, the backset, the strike dimensions, and the finish code are the five variables that determine every parts order on these devices. Confirming them from the model number on the installed deadbolt is the step that keeps a straightforward maintenance job from becoming a return cycle. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

What is the bolt throw length on a Schlage Grade 1 B Series deadbolt?

 One inch. The Grade 1 B250 and B252 models project a 1-inch hardened steel deadbolt with an anti-saw pin. Grade 2 models (B350/B352) use a 5/8-inch throw.

What is the difference between a single-cylinder and double-cylinder Schlage deadbolt?

 Single-cylinder (B250, B350) uses a thumbturn inside and key outside. Double-cylinder (B252, B352) requires a key on both sides, specified where inside key override through a broken pane is a security concern.

What Schlage B Series strike is standard for commercial applications? 

The 10-025 ANSI strike, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch, no box, is the standard commercial specification. Finish must be specified when ordering.

Why won't my Schlage cylinder turn after replacement? 

The tailpiece orientation is incorrect. The tailpiece must be aligned to engage the bolt rotation mechanism before the set screw is tightened. Refer to the Schlage B Series installation instructions for the correct tailpiece position for the specific function.

What is the Schlage Primus cylinder?

 A high-security cylinder with side pins and a sidebar mechanism requiring a milled channel on the key. Significantly more resistant to picking and bumping than standard 5-pin cylinders. Available as a factory-specified cylinder on B Series commercial applications.

Mortise Locks Parts: How to Identify Every Component in the Schlage L Series and Order Right

If you're maintaining commercial doors, mortise locks parts are among the most complex components you'll source. The Schlage L Series alone covers more than 67 mechanical functions, 33 lever designs, and 12 finishes, and its parts tree splits into chassis components, cylinder components, trim components, and function-specific parts that are not interchangeable even within the same L Series family. A lever return spring for an L9010 passage function is not the same servicing need as a spindle assembly for an L9080 storeroom function. The mortise cylinder cam that applies to a standard Schlage mortise cylinder does not apply to a modular mortise cylinder. And the escutcheon trim on one function may need to be replaced entirely if the function changes, while the rose (sectional) trim on the same door requires no additional parts. Getting any one of these wrong wastes a service call and delays a repair on a door that may be in a fire stair, a healthcare corridor, or a government facility.

How to Read a Schlage L Series Model Number

The model number decodes every specification needed to source replacement parts correctly. The format follows this structure:

L / LV + function group + deadbolt indicator + cylinder suffix

  • L = standard L Series chassis
  • LV = Vandlgard chassis, designed for applications subject to abuse or vandalism. The Vandlgard prevents damage to internal lock components caused by forced lever manipulation.
  • Function group (e.g., 9080): The specific lock function. L9080 is the storeroom function where the outside lever is always inoperative, entry requires a key, and the inside lever is always free. L9010 is passage. L9050 is entrance/office. L9070 is classroom.
  • Deadbolt indicator: 0 in the function number means no deadbolt. 4 means with deadbolt. L9460 Series adds a deadbolt to the basic functions.
  • Cylinder suffix: P = 6-pin full-face mortise cylinder with Schlage logo. L = less cylinder. C = concealed mortise cylinder. W = less concealed cylinder. R = full-size interchangeable core.

The L9050 universal case is worth a specific note: Schlage designed it to be transformed into nine different functions with just a few additional parts. This means a facility that stocks the L9050 universal case can reconfigure it for multiple function requirements with the appropriate additional components rather than stocking nine separate cases.

The Six Component Categories in Mortise Lock Parts

Lock Chassis and Internal Components

The chassis is the case body that houses all internal mechanism components and mounts inside the door edge mortise pocket. The standard L Series chassis and the Vandlgard LV chassis are dimensionally compatible but use different internal component tolerances designed for different use environments.

Internal components commonly replaced include:

  • Latchbolt with anti-friction tongue: The primary latch that engages the strike. The anti-friction tongue releases easily when the door is pushed closed, then the full latch bolt projects. This protects the strike face from wear on high-cycle openings.
  • Auxiliary guarded latch: Deadlocks the latchbolt when the door is fully closed, preventing credit card or shimmy-type forced entry. Present on most L Series functions.
  • Deadbolt: Present on L9460 and related deadbolt functions. Operated by thumbturn from inside or key from outside.
  • Stopworks functions by turn-piece: A mechanical stop mechanism on specific functions that prevents the thumbturn from being operated from outside.

Lever Return Spring (L283-040)

The L283-040 lever return spring is one of the most commonly replaced individual components in the Schlage L Series. It returns the lever to the horizontal position after being operated. One spring is required for each side of the door where a lever is installed. On a standard L9050 entrance function with levers on both sides, two springs are required.

Spindle and Spring Assembly (L283-060)

The L283-060 spindle and spring assembly is used on standard L Series mortise locks for door thicknesses of 1-3/8 to 1-7/8 inches. The spindle is the shaft that connects the trim lever to the internal lock mechanism. When a lever operates but the latch does not retract, the spindle or its connection to the retractor is usually the fault point.

Cylinder Components and Cams

The mortise cylinder sits in the cylinder hole in the chassis face and operates the lock from outside with a key. The cam on the back of the cylinder is what translates rotation into the lock's retractor movement. The correct cam depends on the cylinder type and the lock function.

  • L583-254: Mortise cylinder cam for standard Schlage L Series cylinders (not modular). Fits on the back of conventional Schlage mortise cylinders.
  • L583-446: Replacement cam for Schlage modular mortise cylinders. Works with cylinder lengths 1-1/8, 1-3/8, and 1-5/8 inches.
  • L583-476: Alternative standard cam for Schlage modular mortise cylinders.
  • K510-730: Standard cam for IC (interchangeable core) housings. Also works with Schlage K Series (discontinued), Falcon non-deadbolt functions, Von Duprin exit devices, and Adams Rite 2331 deadlocks.

The cam type must match the cylinder type installed. Using a standard cam on a modular cylinder or an IC cam on a conventional cylinder produces a lock that either fails to operate or operates in the wrong direction.

Trim Components: Rose vs Escutcheon

Trim covers the lever mounting hardware visible on the door face. Schlage L Series offers two trim types with different parts implications:

Rose (sectional) trim: Individual circular rose plates that mount the lever to the door. When servicing rose trim, the existing rose trim hardware does not need to be replaced for function changes in most cases. The lock chassis underneath can be updated to a new function with the appropriate internal parts.

Escutcheon trim: Full-length plates that cover the lever and cylinder area. When changing functions on escutcheon-trimmed locks, both inside and outside escutcheons may need to be replaced. The L Series installation instructions are specific about which functions require full escutcheon replacement.

Specific trim parts include:

  • 09-509 Thumbturn: The standard Schlage L Series T-turn in satin chrome (626). Replaces a worn or damaged thumbturn that operates the deadbolt or privacy deadlocking function.
  • L285-150 Mounting Plate: Used on institutional functions (L9080, L9082) where the inside lever is installed without a thumbturn. Required when the chassis is in the locked position and the inside lever must be mounted separately.
  • Shear pin: The component designed to break if the lever handle is forced. Protects the trim assembly from destruction. Used across multiple L Series trim configurations.

Strikes

The L Series strike selection depends on the door type (wood vs hollow metal), the frame material, and whether a fire-rated strike is required. Strike types include T-square corner strikes, flat square corner strikes, rabbeted strikes for rabbeted frames, and the L9000 Series-specific deadbolt strikes. Finish must be specified when ordering any strike.

Function-Specific Parts and the Universal Transformation

One of the most useful and most overlooked features of the L Series for facilities teams is the universal transformation capability of the L9050 case. Schlage designed this case so that nine different functions can be achieved from a single case with specific additional parts. This means a facility manager maintaining a building with multiple L Series functions can stock a single case type and adapt it to the function required, rather than keeping nine different cases in inventory.

The transformation instructions specify exactly which additional parts are required for each function conversion and whether the existing trim components transfer or need to be replaced. Some functions require the thumbturn assembly to be removed. Some require the clover leaf cylinder cam to be replaced with a straight cam. The instructions are function-specific and available in the Schlage Universal Transformation Guide.

Why Model-First Sourcing Matters for Mortise Lock Parts

Mortise lock parts from a general catalog listing present the same compatibility risk as exit device parts. A lever return spring listed as "L Series spring" without the specific part number and function context could apply to any of 67 mechanical functions. A cam listed as "mortise cylinder cam" without specifying whether it applies to standard or modular cylinders produces an incompatible part.

Security Parts organizes the complete mortise locks parts catalog with model-specific pages for the Schlage L Series and supporting hardware. The Schlage brand catalog covers every active Schlage lock line with the same model-specific organization. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams page carries interactive diagrams for L Series mortise lock models organized by function group.

Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 or [email protected], particularly useful for identifying the correct cam type, confirming the spindle length for the door thickness, or identifying which trim parts transfer when a function changes.

Conclusion

The Schlage L Series is the most flexible and most parts-intensive mortise lock line in commercial hardware. More than 67 functions, 33 lever designs, and a chassis that can be transformed into nine configurations from a single case. Sourcing any component correctly requires reading the model number (L vs LV, function group, deadbolt indicator, cylinder suffix), identifying whether rose or escutcheon trim is installed, confirming whether the cylinder is standard or modular before selecting a cam, and knowing whether the specific function requires a mounting plate or a shear pin for correct assembly. Starting with the mortise locks parts catalog organized by model and function at Security Parts, using the interactive diagram to confirm each component visually, is what makes the repair accurate without a service callback.

FAQs

What is the difference between the Schlage L Series and LV Series chassis? 

The L is the standard chassis. The LV (Vandlgard) is for abuse-prone environments, engineered to prevent damage to internal components from forced lever manipulation. Dimensionally compatible but with different internal tolerances.

What is the Schlage L9050 universal case?

 The L9050 universal case can be transformed into nine different lock functions with specific additional parts, allowing a single case to serve multiple function requirements without stocking nine separate cases.

How do I identify the correct mortise cylinder cam? 

L583-254 is for standard Schlage L Series conventional mortise cylinders. L583-446 and L583-476 are for modular mortise cylinders. K510-730 is for IC housings. Cam selection depends on which cylinder type is installed.

What is the Schlage L283-040 lever return spring? 

It is the spring that returns the lever to the horizontal position after being operated. One spring is required for each lever installed. Available for individual replacement without disassembling the full chassis.

When does escutcheon trim need to be replaced on a function change?

 On escutcheon-trimmed L Series locks, both inside and outside escutcheons may need replacement when the lock function changes. Rose (sectional) trim typically does not require replacement for function changes.

What is an auxiliary guarded latch on a mortise lock? 

A secondary latch that deadlocks the primary latchbolt when the door is fully closed, preventing credit card or shimmy-type forced entry. Present on most Schlage L Series functions.

 

Door Operators Parts: What Fails, How to Identify It, and How to Source the Right Component

Door operators parts are not the same as door closer parts, even when the operator uses a mechanical closer as part of its assembly. An automatic door operator is an electromechanical or electrohydraulic system that includes a motor or hydraulic drive unit, a controller, an arm assembly, an actuator, and a power supply, all working together to open and hold a door on a signal. When one component in that chain fails, the symptom can look like any one of several issues: the door opens too slowly, it reverses before fully opening, it fails to latch on closing, it makes grinding or squealing sounds, or it simply stops responding to the actuator. Each symptom points to a different component category, and sourcing the replacement correctly requires knowing which category is responsible. LCN, manufacturing commercial door control hardware since 1877, produces the most widely installed commercial automatic door operator line in North America. This guide covers every LCN door operator component category, what failure looks like in each one, and how to source accurately.

Understanding the Four LCN Door Operator Series

Parts compatibility in LCN door operators is series-specific, which means the first diagnostic step is confirming which series is installed. The date of manufacture label is on the operator body. For automatic operators, LCN places it on the label itself rather than stamping it near the packing nut as on mechanical closers.

LCN 4630/4640 Auto Equalizer Series: Designed for primarily manual applications that sometimes require automatic opening, primarily for accessibility. The 4630 mounts top jamb on the pull side with a single lever track arm. The 4640 mounts top jamb on the push side with a double lever regular arm. Both carry ANSI/BHMA 156.19 certification, UL and cUL listing, and ADA/ANSI A117.1 compliance. The "No Destruct" drive system is a specific feature of this series, providing resistance to mechanical damage from forced opening or door being held open against the operator.

LCN 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark Series: The low-to-medium traffic surface-mounted operator line. The 9130 mounts on the pull side with a single lever track arm. The 9140 mounts on the push side with a double lever arm. The 9150 mounts top jamb on the push side for independent or simultaneous pair applications. Features Push 'N Go activation, which takes over when a pedestrian manually opens the door to 5 degrees, then holds the door fully open for 1 to 30 seconds of adjustable time delay. Power Boost provides additional closing force under wind load.

LCN 6400 COMPACT Series: The low-energy operator designed for retrofitting existing LCN 4040XP Series mechanical closers. The motor gearbox assembly connects to the existing 4040XP with just four screws and a mounting plate. This is the most cost-effective way to automate an existing opening without removing and replacing the mechanical closer already installed. The existing 4040XP closer cylinder, including delayed action models, remains in place. Electronic features including opening speed, hold open duration, power boost, motor on/off, fire signal receipt, and actuation signal receipt are all configurable.

LCN Senior Swing Series (9500IQ/2800IQ): The current-generation high-performance operator featuring AdaptivIQ technology, which continuously self-adjusts the operator's opening and closing parameters to account for seasonal temperature changes, door weight variations, and wind load. The 9500IQ is the surface-mounted version. The 2800IQ is the concealed version. Both reduce seasonal service calls because the electronic controller compensates for environmental changes without manual valve adjustment.

The Seven Component Categories in LCN Door Operator Parts

Motor Gearbox Assembly

The motor gearbox is the drive unit that physically opens the door. On the COMPACT Series, the motor gearbox assembly mounts directly onto the 4040XP Series closer body. On the Auto Equalizer and Benchmark Series, it is integrated into the operator housing. The gearbox converts motor rotation into arm movement through a gear reduction system. When the motor runs but the door does not open, the gearbox is the first component to inspect.

Track Arm Assemblies

LCN produces several arm configurations for door operators, each designed for a specific mounting and door type:

  • Standard track arm: rides in a track mounted to the door frame, allowing hold-open at any position
  • Double lever arm: fixed pivot configuration for push-side mounting
  • Single lever track arm: for pull-side and top jamb applications
  • Long arm: for doors requiring extended reach from the closer body to the frame

The 4630 Series track roller part is LCN 4630-3034-689. The standard track is LCN 4630-3038-689. These are finish-specific and must be specified when ordering. Arm compatibility is series-specific: a 9500IQ arm assembly does not cross to the 4630/4640 series.

Controller and Digital Control Box

The controller is the electronic brain of the door operator. It manages opening speed, hold-open duration, power boost threshold, fire alarm interface, and actuator signal input. The 4630/4640 Series digital control box provides fast and accurate adjustments with a physical interface. The Senior Swing's controller runs the AdaptivIQ algorithm, which means it stores learned parameters. When a controller fails, these parameters are lost and must be recalibrated after replacement.

The LCN 9550 Series controller replacement part is 9550-3462-115V for the 115V version. Controllers for the COMPACT 6440 Series are available as part of the COMPACT Low Energy Auto Door Operator Module Parts Kit (LCN 6440).

Actuators: Push Plates and Touchless Sensors

The actuator is what signals the operator to open. Push plate actuators require physical contact. LCN's 8310 Series touchless actuators detect hand motion within sensor range, triggering the opening cycle without physical contact. The 8310-865 is a compact receiver that complies with federal radio frequency regulations and receives signals through barriers.

Two wireless options are available: 900 MHz and 433 MHz, providing wireless actuation without hardwiring the actuator directly to the operator. Both are compatible with LCN's touchless actuation offerings.

Actuator failure typically presents as a door that does not respond to the push plate but operates correctly when tested through a direct controller signal. This isolates the actuator circuit rather than the operator itself.

Power Supply

Door operators require a dedicated power supply. On low-energy operators like the COMPACT and Benchmark Series, the power supply is typically 120V AC or 24V DC depending on the installation. Power supply failure produces a completely non-functional operator even when all other components test correctly. The power supply should be the first component checked when an operator stops responding entirely.

Spring and Hydraulic Components (Mechanical Elements)

For operators that incorporate a mechanical closer as part of the assembly (specifically the COMPACT Series using the 4040XP), the mechanical closer components remain serviceable independently of the motor assembly. The 4040XP cylinder, spring, and hydraulic valves can be adjusted or replaced without disassembling the operator module. Existing 4040XP components including delayed action cylinders are compatible with the COMPACT operator.

Sensors and Accessories

Motion sensors, hold-open sensors, and safety sensors are auxiliary components that affect operator behavior without being part of the drive assembly. A safety sensor detecting an obstruction will prevent the door from fully closing. A malfunctioning hold-open sensor may cause the door to close prematurely. The 8310 Series sensor accessories are designed to integrate with LCN's touchless and automatic operator lineup.

How to Identify a Failed Component Before Ordering

A door that opens too slowly with normal sound usually indicates a spring or valve adjustment, not a parts failure. A door that makes grinding or squealing during operation typically needs the arm and track assembly inspected for wear or misalignment. A door that opens but fails to latch points to the mechanical closer components, particularly the latch speed valve or the latch bolt engagement on the paired lock. A door that fails to respond to the actuator but works on manual override points to the actuator or controller circuit, not the motor. A door that operates once but does not reset for the next cycle is often a power supply issue.

Why Model-Specific Sourcing Prevents the Most Common Errors

LCN operator parts are finish-specific, size-specific, and in many cases voltage-specific. LCN's own guidance on ordering requires specifying Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) for any part where these variables apply. Missing any one of them produces a part that ships but does not fit or does not function in the installation.

The casting or forging numbers stamped on LCN components, such as "71" or "320G" on cylinder assemblies, are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers. They cannot be used to order a replacement. The model number on the operator body and the current LCN parts manual are the correct identification sources.

Security Parts carries the complete door closer and operator parts catalog for LCN products organized by series, with interactive diagrams. The LCN door closer parts guide covers the mechanical closer components that support COMPACT operator installations. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 or [email protected].

Conclusion

Door operators parts sourcing requires knowing the operator series, the component category responsible for the observed failure, and the four ordering specifications that LCN requires for any finish-, size-, hand-, or voltage-specific component. The AdaptivIQ controller on the Senior Swing stores learned operating parameters that are lost when the controller fails and replaced. The COMPACT Series reuses existing 4040XP mechanical closer components, making it the most serviceable retrofit operator on the market. Casting numbers on LCN components are not part numbers. The model label on the operator body and the series-specific parts page are the correct starting points for every door operators parts order. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

Are LCN door operator parts the same as LCN door closer parts? 

No. Operators include motors, controllers, actuators, and power supplies that mechanical closers do not have. The COMPACT Series reuses 4040XP mechanical closer components alongside an operator module, creating the most crossover between the two categories.

How do I find the model number on an LCN automatic door operator? 

The date of manufacture and model information are on a label on the operator body. For mechanical LCN closers, the date is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion. Operators use a label rather than a stamp.

What does AdaptivIQ mean on the LCN Senior Swing?

 It is LCN's self-adjusting controller technology that continuously monitors and adjusts opening speed, hold-open time, and closing force to account for seasonal temperature changes and door condition changes without manual valve adjustment.

Why does the door make squealing sounds during automatic operation? 

Squealing or scuffing during operation typically indicates wear or misalignment in the track roller assembly or the arm connection. LCN provides specific adjustment guidance for this condition, and the track roller is a serviceable replacement component on most operator series.

Can I reuse my existing 4040XP closer if I install the COMPACT operator? 

Yes. The LCN 6400 COMPACT motor gearbox assembly connects directly to an existing 4040XP Series closer body with just four screws. Existing cylinders, including delayed action models, are compatible and remain in place.

 

Exit Devices Parts: What Every Component Does and How to Order the Right One

If you manage commercial doors long enough, you end up sourcing exit devices parts more often than you plan for. A dogging assembly stripped out on a high-traffic corridor door. A center case that stopped latching cleanly on a healthcare egress opening. An end cap bracket cracked after someone propped the door open one too many times. These are not rare events. They are predictable maintenance realities on any building running Von Duprin hardware, which is most commercial buildings in North America. What separates a fast, accurate repair from a week-long wrong-part return cycle is knowing which component category you're dealing with, which part number applies to your specific series and configuration, and why the long version of the hex key matters more than most people think.

Why Exit Device Parts Are Series-Specific, Never Universal

This is the single most important fact to internalize before opening any parts catalog. Von Duprin's exit device lineup covers fourteen active series across push pad, touchbar, crossbar, and mortise configurations. Each series uses components engineered to its own dimensional and mechanical specifications. A dogging assembly from the 22 Series does not fit the 75 Series. A center case for the 98/99 rim configuration is a different part from the center case for the 98/9947 CVR configuration.

The model number stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate is the starting point for every parts order. The first two or four digits identify the series. The function suffix identifies the trim function and configuration. A "-F" suffix means fire-rated, which removes the hex dogging function entirely. Get the model number before the catalog opens.

The Six Component Categories That Cover Most Repairs

Dogging Assemblies

Dogging is the mechanism that holds the push bar in the depressed position, keeping the latch bolt retracted so the door operates freely without latching. Standard on non-fire-rated 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series rim devices. The dogging assembly on devices made after 1997 consists of four parts that are commonly replaced individually:

  • 090040 Dogging Shaft: The piece the 5/32-inch hex key inserts into. The hole depth is only approximately 1/4 inch. The long version of the hex key is mandatory. Short keys round out the hex engagement over repeated use. This is the single most common dogging failure in the field.
  • 090041 Dogging Spring: Activates the dogging hook. Occasionally fails and is sold individually.
  • 090042 Dogging Adapter Spring: Clips the dogging adapter into the mounting bracket.
  • 090043 Dogging Adapter: The housing the shaft and spring fit through.
  • 090044 Dogging Hook: Grabs the push bar mechanism and holds the dogged position on 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series devices made after 1997.

For devices made before 1997, the old-style dogging shaft has a different dimensional profile. Part 050709 is the conversion kit that updates pre-1997 devices to current spec components.

The 88 Series crossbar devices use a 5/32-inch hex key for a different purpose: the wedgetite screw and dog screw in the lever arm assembly. This is not the same dogging operation as the push pad series, and the 88 Series dogging parts do not cross to push pad series.

Center Cases and Mechanism Cases

The center case is the primary mechanical housing of the exit device. It contains the latch mechanism, the dogging engagement, and the connection to the trim function. Center case specs differ by trim function within the same series, which is where most wrong-part orders happen.

The 22 Series rim center case (part 109012) has been in production for approximately 40 years and replaces all non-fire-rated 22 Series rim center cases with hex key dogging on the hinge-side cover plate. The 2227 SVR center case (part 109358) has been consistent for approximately 30 years. The 88 rim center case 050409 applies to EO, DT, and NL trim functions only. Lever, knob, and thumbpiece versions each use a different specification.

Push Bar and Crossbar Components

The push bar on push pad devices and the crossbar on crossbar devices absorb direct operational load on every door use. Push bar end guides (part on 33A and 98/99 devices) reduce noise and friction at the end of the push bar assembly. Crossbar tube attaching wedges (090020) and rings (090021) secure the crossbar to the device body on the 88 and 55 Series.

Push bar retrofit kits are available for 22 Series rim devices in 36-inch and 48-inch configurations, replacing the push bar assembly without requiring a full device swap.

Strikes

Strike selection depends entirely on the device configuration and fire rating status:

  • 299: Standard rim strike for 22, 88, 98, and 99 Series rim devices. Also used as the top strike on 2227, 8827, 9827, and 9927 SVR devices. Measures 1-1/4 inches wide by 2-7/8 inches high, slotted hole spacing 2-1/8 inches.
  • 299F: Fire-rated version for the same devices. Same dimensions. Not interchangeable with the 299 on fire-rated assemblies.
  • 264: Low-profile alternative rim strike for 22, 88, 98, and 99 devices. Measures 2-7/8 inches tall by 1-1/4 inches wide, roller projection 9/16 inches.
  • 304L: Standard floor-mounted SVR bottom strike for 2227, 8827, 9827, and 9927. Square flange outer dimension 1-7/8 by 1-7/8 inches.
  • 248L-4: Bottom surface-mounted strike for the same SVR series. Measures 9/16 inch wide by 2-1/2 inches high, hole spacing 1-7/8 inches.
  • 1609: Used on double door applications without a center post, combining one SVR leaf and one rim leaf. Not rated for fire doors.

Lever Arms and Axle Components (88 Series)

The 88 Series lever arm is replaced more frequently than any other mechanical component on crossbar devices. The cause is nearly always the same: the dogging screw strips out due to the wedgetite screw seating incorrectly. The right-hand lever arm kit is part 050438. The left-hand kit is 050439. Each includes the wedge, wedge ring, wedgetite screw, and dog screw.

Top Latch and SVR Latch Components

For SVR configurations, top latch bracket replacement kits (050091 for 22/98/9927 Series) replace worn top latch assemblies. The 8827 bottom latch case (050461) covers all non-fire-rated 8827 SVR devices. Latch covers 050464 cover the top and bottom latches on the 8827 and the bottom latch only on the 8827-F fire-rated version.

Electrified Upgrade Parts

Three electrified upgrade kits appear most often in parts orders on commercial facilities:

QEL Modular Conversion Kit (114317-00): Adds quiet electric latch retraction to a mechanical 22, 33A, 35A, or 98/99 Series device. Field-installable without opening the device body on current-generation hardware.

ALK Alarm Kit: Converts the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, or 99 Series to an alarmed exit device. Powered by a standard 9-volt battery. Controlled by a mortise cylinder (sold separately).

QEL Baseplate Conversion Kits: The QELA baseplate conversion kits (040063 for 36-inch devices, 040068 for 48-inch devices) are required on some older devices when adding QEL. The HD-QELA versions (040064 and 040068) cover heavy-duty applications.

How to Source Exit Device Parts Without a Wrong-Part Return

Most wrong-part orders on exit device parts come from searching by component name rather than by model. A dogging assembly listed under "Von Duprin dogging assembly" without a series designation could apply to a pre-1997 device, a post-1997 push pad device, or a crossbar device. The correct part depends on the series and generation.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin exit devices catalog by series and model. Every model page carries an interactive parts diagram showing the full assembly. Navigate to the correct series, open the diagram, confirm the component visually against the physical device, and place the order from the model-specific parts list. The 98/99 Series, 22 Series, and 88 Series each have their own dedicated pages with complete parts breakdowns.

Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected].

Conclusion

Exit device parts sourcing is a model-first process, not a category search. The series, the configuration (rim vs SVR vs CVR vs mortise), the manufacturing year (pre-1997 vs post-1997 for dogging assemblies), and the trim function all determine which specific component applies to the device on the door. The dogging shaft 090040 requires the long hex key. The center case specification depends on the trim function, not just the series. The 1609 strike is not rated for fire doors. Starting with the model number before opening the exit devices parts catalog is what makes the first order the right order.

FAQs

Are exit device parts interchangeable between Von Duprin series?

 No. Parts are series-specific and often configuration-specific within the same series. A 22 Series center case does not fit a 75 Series device. Always confirm the model number before ordering.

What hex key size is used for Von Duprin dogging? 

5/32-inch hex key for push pad devices (22, 33A, 35A, 98, 99 Series). The dogging hole is only 1/4 inch deep, so the long version is required. Short keys round out the shaft engagement over time.

What is the difference between the 299 and 299F strike? 

The 299 is the standard rim strike for non-fire-rated devices. The 299F is the fire-rated version. Same dimensions, not interchangeable. The 299F carries the UL fire door listing required on fire-rated assemblies.

What causes an 88 Series lever arm to need replacement? 

The most common cause is the dogging screw stripping out when the wedgetite screw is not seated correctly. The lever arm kit includes the wedge, wedge ring, wedgetite screw, and dog screw.

What is the QEL modular conversion kit?

 Part 114317-00 adds quiet electric latch retraction to an existing mechanical Von Duprin device, allowing electronic outside entry without a full device replacement. Compatible with 22, 33A, 35A, and 98/99 Series.

 

Panic Hardware for Commercial Doors: Types, Code Requirements, and How to Choose the Right Device

Panic hardware for commercial doors is a code-defined life safety system with specific occupancy triggers, installation dimensions, fire rating distinctions, and device type requirements that vary by building use and adopted code. The model codes define it precisely: a door-latching assembly that releases the latch upon the application of a force in the direction of egress travel. The Iroquois Theatre fire on December 30, 1903 in Chicago killed 596 people, many unable to exit through doors requiring deliberate unlocking under pressure. That event directly produced the first panic release device, developed by Carl Prinzler and Henry DuPrin. Building codes adopted panic hardware requirements in the decades following, and today the requirement is embedded in both the International Building Code and NFPA 101. Getting the specification right requires understanding three things: when code mandates it, which device type fits the door, and what separates standard panic hardware from fire exit hardware.

When Is Panic Hardware Required: IBC vs NFPA 101

This distinction causes more specification errors than any other in commercial door hardware. Panic hardware is not required on every commercial door. It is triggered by occupancy type and calculated occupant load.

Under the International Building Code (IBC), panic hardware is required on egress doors equipped with a lock or latch serving:

  • Assembly occupancies (Group A): 50 or more people
  • Educational occupancies (Group E): 50 or more people
  • High-hazard occupancies (Group H): regardless of occupant load

Under NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, the threshold is different:

  • Assembly, educational, and day care occupancies: 100 or more people
  • High-hazard occupancies: more than 5 people

The IBC uses 50 people. NFPA 101 uses 100. The authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) determines which code applies in a given location. Many US jurisdictions follow the IBC. Others adopt NFPA 101. Some adopt both with local amendments. Always confirm which code version is in force before making any panic hardware determination.

The means of egress extends beyond the immediate room exit door. The IBC defines it as a continuous and unobstructed path of vertical and horizontal egress travel from any occupied portion of a building to a public way, consisting of the exit access, the exit, and the exit discharge. All doors in that path that are equipped with a lock or latch and serve the qualifying occupancy and occupant load must carry panic hardware.

Standard Panic Hardware vs Fire Exit Hardware

This is the distinction most commonly misapplied in the field. Not all panic hardware is appropriate for fire-rated doors.

Standard panic hardware is tested and listed for panic exit applications. It can include mechanical dogging, which holds the push bar in the depressed position so the door operates as a push/pull entry without latching. Mechanical dogging is acceptable on non-fire-rated egress doors.

Fire exit hardware is tested and listed for both panic exit and fire door applications. The defining requirement is positive latching: the device must latch automatically every time the door closes. Mechanical dogging is not permitted on fire exit hardware because a dogged-open fire door cannot provide the compartmentalization that the fire door assembly requires. Fire-rated Von Duprin configurations carry the "-F" suffix in the model number (98-F, 22-F, 88-F). These devices have no hex dogging function.

For applications where a fire door needs to be held open operationally, electric latch retraction (QEL or ELR) tied to the fire alarm is the acceptable solution. When the fire alarm activates, the electric dogging releases and the door latches automatically.

The Four Device Types and When Each Applies

Rim devices are the most common panic hardware in commercial construction. The closer body and latch bolt mount on the door face. The entire mechanism is visible, surface-mounted, and directly accessible for maintenance. Fits single doors and paired doors with a center mullion. Available on the Von Duprin 22, 75, 88, 98/99, and 33/35A Series.

Surface vertical rod (SVR) devices add top and bottom engagement points via surface-mounted rods running vertically on the door face. Used on double door openings without a center mullion where rim device single-point engagement is insufficient. The 2227, 8827, and 9827/9927 configurations cover this application across Von Duprin series.

Concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices provide the same three-point engagement as SVR but route the rod hardware inside the door. Specified when surface-mounted rods are architecturally unacceptable: hotels, healthcare interiors, high-end commercial spaces. More installation-intensive and more costly to maintain.

Mortise devices integrate a full mortise lock body into the panic hardware chassis. The latch bolt is housed inside a mortise pocket cut into the door edge, providing maximum security depth alongside panic egress. The Von Duprin 98/9975 and 8875 configurations use the 7500 mortise lock body, which has been in service since approximately 1977 and measures 5-7/8 inches high by 4-1/2 inches deep by 1 inch thick.

Installation Requirements

Regardless of device type, the model codes and OSHA specify:

  • Mounted between 34 and 48 inches above the finished floor or threshold
  • Push bar must span at least half the door width
  • Single-motion operation: one push releases the latch, no secondary action required
  • No secondary locking device (chain, padlock) that would prevent operation

ADA requirements add a maximum 5-pound opening force for interior doors on accessible egress routes and single-motion operability without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting.

Electrified Options for Access Control Integration

The 98/99, 22, 33/35A, and 75 Series all support electrified integration at the device level:

  • QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction): Modular field-installable conversion that retracts the latch on an authorized signal, silently
  • MEL (Motorized Electric Latch Retraction): Motor-driven retraction for applications where solenoid noise is unacceptable
  • Chexit Delayed Egress: Holds the door latched for 15 seconds after push bar activation, with a local alarm during the delay
  • ALK (Alarm Exit Kit): Converts the device to an alarmed exit; powered by a 9-volt battery, controlled by a mortise cylinder
  • RX (Request to Exit): Switch in the push bar signals the access control system when the bar is pressed

 

Selection Decision Framework

Application

Fire-Rated

Traffic

Correct Series

Employee entrance, stairwell

Sometimes

Low to moderate

Von Duprin 22 Series

Standard commercial building

Often

Moderate

Von Duprin 75 Series

Institutional: hospital, school

Often

High

Von Duprin 98/99 Series

Correctional, behavioral health

Yes

High abuse

Von Duprin 88 Series

Aluminum storefront, glass door

Sometimes

Moderate

Von Duprin 33/35A or 78 Series

High-security perimeter door

Yes

Varies

Von Duprin 55 or 98/9975 mortise

Conclusion

Selecting the correct panic hardware for commercial doors requires resolving four decisions in sequence: which code applies in the jurisdiction, what the calculated occupant load of the space is, whether the door is fire-rated (which determines the standard panic hardware vs fire exit hardware distinction), and which device type fits the door configuration. Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin panic hardware catalog by series with model-specific parts pages, interactive diagrams, and same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301 or [email protected] for specification questions before the order is placed.

FAQs

When is panic hardware required under the IBC?

 Assembly (Group A) and educational (Group E) occupancies with a calculated occupant load of 50 or more people, and high-hazard occupancies (Group H) regardless of occupant load, when egress doors are equipped with a lock or latch.

What is the difference between panic hardware and fire exit hardware? 

Standard panic hardware can include mechanical dogging and is listed for panic applications. Fire exit hardware is listed for both panic and fire door applications, must positively latch every time, and has no mechanical dogging. On Von Duprin devices, the "-F" suffix designates fire exit hardware.

Does the IBC or NFPA 101 set the higher occupant load threshold?

 NFPA 101 sets the higher threshold at 100 people. The IBC sets it at 50. The authority having jurisdiction determines which code applies in a specific project location.

Can a fire door be held open if it has panic hardware? 

Not with mechanical dogging. Electric dogging (QEL, ELR) connected to the fire alarm is the accepted method. The door latches automatically when the fire alarm activates.

What is the ADA opening force requirement for panic hardware on accessible routes? 

Maximum 5 pounds for interior non-fire-rated doors. Single-motion operation without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting is required.

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts